HomeMy WebLinkAboutPrava Construction Services Inc; 2015-07-20; PWS15-87FAC - Cole 1CITY OF CARLSBAD
CARLSBAD GEORGINA COLE LIBRARY
New Construction and Renovation
1250 Carlsbad Village Drive
Carlsbad, CA 92008
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
City of Carlsbad Contract 40201
PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS
BID SET
AprU 10,2015
VOLUME I:
DIVISION 1 thru DIVISION 14
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
211 Linden Avenue
South San Francisco, CA
(650) 871-0709
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbad Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Arcliitecture Researcli + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbad Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
DOCUMENT 000110 - TABLE OF CONTENTS
PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS GROUP:
DIVISION 00 PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
BY OWNER
DOCUMENT OOOO 10 PROJECT TITLE PAGE
VOLUME I:
SPECIFICATIONS GROUP:
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SUBGROUP:
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
SECTION 01352 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS, CALGREEN
COMMERCIAL
SECTION 01423 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS
SECTION 01450 QUALITY CONTROL
SECTION 01524 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT
SECTION 01630 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
SECTION 01730 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 01732 CUTTING AND PATCHING
SECTION 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
FACILITY CONSTRUCTION SUBGROUP:
DIVISION 2 - EXISTING CONDITIONS
SECTION 024119 SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
SECTION 031000 CONCRETE FORMS & ACCESSORIES
SECTION 032000 CONCRETE REINFORCING
SECTION 033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
SECTION 033900 CONCRETE CURING
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY - NOT USED
DIVISION 5 - METALS
SECTION 051200 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
SECTION 051210 WELDING
SECTION 055000 METAL FABRICATIONS
SECTION 057300 DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
TABLE OF CONTENTS OOOl 10-1
City of Carlsbad Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbad Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Researcli + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
DIVISION 6 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
SECTION 060121 FINISH CARPENTRY RESTORATION
SECTION 061053 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
SECTION 062000 FINISH CARPENTRY
SECTION 064100 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
SECTION 07015 5 ROOF PATCHING FOR REMODELING
SECTION 071616 CRYSTALLD>JE WATERPROOFING
SECTION 072116 BLANKET INSULATION
SECTION 072726 FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS
SECTION 072729 UNDERLAYMENTS
SECTION 074113 METAL ROOF PANELS
SECTION 074253 PHENOLIC RAINSCREEN PANELS
SECTION 075100 BUILT-UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING
SECTION 076000 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
SECTION 078400 FIRESTOPPING
SECTION 079200 JOINT SEALANTS
SECTION 079513 EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES
DIVISION 8 - OPENINGS
SECTION 081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
SECTION 081116 ALUMD«iUM DOORS AND FRAMES
SECTION 081416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS
SECTION 083113 ACCESS DOORS
SECTION 083214 INTERIOR ALUMINUM SLIDING GLASS DOORS
SECTION 084113 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
SECTION 086223 TUBULAR SKYLIGHTS
SECTION 087100 DOOR HARDWARE
SECTION 088100 GLASS GLAZING
SECTION 089100 WALL LOUVERS
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
SECTION 092216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
SECTION 092400 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING
SECTION 092900 GYPSUM BOARD
SECTION 093000 TILING
SECTION 095123 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS
SECTION 096123 CONCRETE VAPOR EMISSION TREATMENT
SECTION 096500 RESILIENT FLOORING
SECTION 096813 TILE CARPETING
SECTION 099100 PAINTING
SECTION 099300 STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING
SECTION 099600 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS
SECTION 099729 CONCRETE FLOOR SEALING
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALITIES
SECTION 101100 VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES
SECTION 101400 SIGNAGE
SECTION 102113 SOLID COLOR REINFORCED COMPOSITE TOILET
000110-2 TABLE OF CONTENTS
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbad Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Arcliitecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbad Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
COMPARTMENTS
SECTION 102226 OPERABLE PARTITIONS
SECTION 102623 IMPACT-RESISTANT WALL PROTECTION
SECTION 102813 COMMERCIAL TOILET ACCESSORIES
SECTION 104400 FIRE PROTECTION SPECL\LTIES
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
SECTION 115116 BOOK DEPOSITORIES
SECTION 115123 LIBRARY STACK SYSTEMS
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
SECTION 122413 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
SECTION 139300 FIRE DETECTION FM-200 FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT - NOT USED
TABLE OF CONTENTS OOOl 10-3
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbad Georgina Cole Library
City of Carlsbad Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
VOLUME II:
FACILITY SERVICES SUBGROUP:
DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION
SECTION 210500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION
SECTION 211313 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING
SECTION 220500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
SECTION 220523 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
SECTION 220529 HANGERS & SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING & EQUIPMENT
SECTION 220553 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPEVIG & EQUIPMENT
SECTION 220700 PLUMBING INSULATION
SECTION 221100 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION
SECTION 221300 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE
SECTION 221400 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE
SECTION 224000 PLUMBING FIXTURES
DIVISION 23 - HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
SECTION 230501 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 230529 HANGERS & SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING & EQUIPMENT
SECTION 230553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING & EQUIPMENT
SECTION 230593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, BALANCING FOR HVAC
SECTION 230700 HVAC INSULATION
SECTION 233100 HVAC DUCTS AND CASTINGS
SECTION 233300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
SECTION 233600 AIR TERMINAL UNITS
SECTION 233700 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
DIVISION 24 - NOT USED
000110-4 TABLE OF CONTENTS
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbad Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbad Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
DIVISION 25 - INTEGRATED AUTOMATION - NOT USED
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
SECTION 260500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
SECTION 260503 EQUIPMENT WIRING CONNECTIONS
SECTION 260519 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS & CABLES
SECTION 260526 GROUNDING & BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SECTION 260529 HANGERS & SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SECTION 260533 RACEWAYS & BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SECTION 260534 FLOOR BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SECTION 260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SECTION 260923 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
SECTION 262416 PANELBOARDS
SECTION 262716 ELECTRICAL CABINETS & ENCLOSURES
SECTION 262726 WIRING DEVICES
SECTION 262819 ENCLOSED SWITCHES
SECTION 265000 LIGHTING
SECTION 265100 INTERIOR LIGHTING
DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS
SECTION 271343 DATA COMMUNICATION CABLING SYSTEM
DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
SECTION 280529 HANGERS & SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFFETY & SECURITY
SECTION 280533 CONDUITS & BACKBOXES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY &
SECURITY
SECTION 280553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY & SECURITY
SECTION 283111 DIGITAL ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
SITE AND INFRASTRUCTURE SUBGROUP:
DIVISIONS 30 - 31 - NOT USED
DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 321319 SITE CONCRETE WORK
DIVISIONS 33 - 35 - NOT USED
PROCESS EQUIPMENT SUBGROUP:
DIVISIONS 40 - 48 - NOT USED
APPENDIX A
HAZARDOUS BUILDEsiG MATERIALS SURVEY
TABLE OF CONTENTS OOOl 10-5
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbad Georgina Cole Library
City of Carlsbad Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
END OF DOCUMENT OOOl 10
OOOl 10-6 TABLE OF CONTENTS
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbad Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
City of Carlsbad Project No. 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
SECTION 01330 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data,
Samples, and other submittals.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01200 - Price and Payment Procedures: Submitting Applications for Payment and
the Schedule of Values.
B. Section 01310 - Project Management and Coordination: Submitting and distributing
meeting and conference minutes and for submitting Coordination Drawings.
C. Section 01458 - Testing Laboratory Services: Submitting test and inspection reports.
D. Section 01770 - Closeout Procedures: Submitting operation and maintenance manuals,
warranties, and Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data;
demonstration and training requirements.
E. Divisions 2 through 35 Sections for specific requirements for submittals in those Sections.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive
action.
B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's responsive
action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.
1.5 DISTRIBUTION OF SCHEDULES
A. Distribute copies of the Submittal Schedule to the Architect, Owner, subcontractors, and
other parties required to comply with scheduled dates. Post copies in the temporary field
office. When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and post in the same
locations.
B. Updating: Revise Schedule after each meeting or activity, where revisions have been made.
Issue the updated Schedules concurrently with report of each meeting.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
01330 - 1
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
1.6
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. General: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings will not be
provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.
B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of
construction activities.
1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other
submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.
2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts ofthe Work so
processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for
coordination.
a. Architect reserves Architect reserve the right to withhold action on a submittal
requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are
received.
C. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction
Progress Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled
performance of related construction activities.
D. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals,
as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No
extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals
enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.
1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional
time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect Construction
Manager will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed
for coordination.
2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same
manner as initial submittal.
3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal.
1.7 ELECTRONIC SUBMITTALS
A. Transmit each electronic submittal in conformance with requirements of this section.
1. Provide paper submittals only when requested by Architect or City.
B. Submittals for all items requiring color selections will not be accepted as an electronic
submittal.
C. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed Portable Document Format
(PDF) file. File format licensed by Adobe Systems.
D. Transmit electronic submittals as PDF files via Architect's Project Collaboration Site
address or designated email address.
E. Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows:
1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating
submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with
links enabling navigation to each item.
SUBAAITTAL PROCEDURES
01330 - 2
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbad Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbad Project No. 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision
identifier.
a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number
followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., CGCL-
061000.01).
b. Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point
(e.g.,CGCL-061000.01.A).
3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval
markings and action taken by Architect.
F. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use electronic form acceptable to Architect,
containing the following information:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Name and address of Architect.
d. Name of Construction Manager.
e. Name of Contractor.
f Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.
g. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.
h. Category and type of submittal.
i. Submittal purpose and description.
j. Specification Section number and title.
k. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for
each of multiple items.
1. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate,
m. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate,
n. Related physical samples submitted directly,
o. Indication of full or partial submittal,
p. Transmittal number[, numbered consecutively],
q. Submittal and transmittal distribution record,
r. Other necessary identification,
s. Remarks.
2. Metadata: Include the following information as keywords in the electronic submittal
file metadata:
a. Project name.
b. Number and titie of appropriate Specification Section.
c. Manufacturer name.
d. Product name.
G. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect.
H. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the
Contract Documents on submittals.
I. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless
Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial
submittal may serve as final submittal.
1. Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number
f^- of copies to Architect.
SUBAAITTAL PROCEDURES
01330 - 3
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbad Georgina Cole Library
City of Carisbad Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Pianning, Inc.
Bid Set-April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
2. Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will not be marked with action
taken and will be retumed.
J. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.
1. Note date and content of previous submittal.
2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of
revision.
3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked "Reviewed, Make Corrections Noted, No
Resubmittal Required".
K. Distribution: Fumish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,
fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for
performance of constmction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
L. Use for Constmction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating "Reviewed" or
"Reviewed, Make Corrections Noted, No Resubmittal Required" taken by Architect.
1.8 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF ARCHITECT'S CAD FILES
A. General: A limited amount of CAD backgrounds will be provided for reference only.
Contractor is required to verify all conditions in the field. All submittal/shop drawings are
required to be created by the Contractor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification
Sections.
B. Post electronic submittals as PDF electronic files directly to Project Web site specifically
established for Project.
1. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an
electronic Project record document file.
2. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically submitted
certificates and certifications where indicated.
C. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of constmction
and type of product or equipment.
1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data
are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.
2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.
a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts.
b. Manufacturer's product specifications.
c. Standard color charts.
d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards.
e. Testing by recognized testing agency.
f Application of testing agency labels and seals,
g. Notation of coordination requirements.
SUBAAITTAL PROCEDURES
01330 - 4
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbad Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbad Project No. 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
h. Availability and delivery time information.
3. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:
a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.
b. Printed performance curves.
c. Operational range diagrams.
d. Clearances required to other constmction, if not indicated on accompanying
Shop Drawings.
4. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.
5. Submit Product Data in the following format:
6. Retain one of two subparagraphs below unless defauh submittal format
a. PDF electronic file.
D. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not
base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.
1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the
following information, as applicable:
a. Dimensions.
b. Identification of products.
c. Fabrication and installation drawings.
d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams.
e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and
control wiring.
f Shop work manufacturing instmctions.
g. Templates and pattems.
h. Schedules.
i. Design calculations.
j. Compliance with specified standards.
k. Notation of coordination requirements.
1. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
m. Relationship to adjoining constmction clearly indicated.
n. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.
o. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-
installed wiring.
2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, pattems, and similar full-size drawings, submit
Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm) but no larger
than 30 by 40 inches (750 by 1000 mm).
3. Number of Copies: Submit two opaque (bond) copies of each submittal.
Architect, through Constmction Manager, will retum one copy.
4. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format:
a. PDF electronic file.
E. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattem, and texture for a check of
these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics
between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.
1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories
together in one submittal package.
2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the
following:
a. Generic description of Sample.
b. Product name and name of manufacturer.
SUBAAIHAL PROCEDURES
01330 - 5
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbad Georgina Cole Library
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
c. Sample source.
d. Number and titie of appropriate Specification Section.
3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-
control comparisons throughout the course of constmction activity. Sample sets may
be used to determine final acceptance of constmction associated with each set.
a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual
Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at
time of use.
b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's
property, are the property of Contractor.
4. Samples for hiitial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units
or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and pattems available,
a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color,
pattem, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from
manufacturer's product line. Architect, through Constmction Manager, will
retum submittal with options selected.
5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated,
prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner
specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that
show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are
not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated
components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used
materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattem; color range sets; and
components used for independent testing and inspection.
a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain two
Sample sets; remainder will be retumed. Mark up and retain one retumed
Sample set as a Project Record Sample.
1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, installation, fabrication
techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are
to be demonstrated.
2) If variation in color, pattem, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in
material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of
paired units that show approximate limits of variations.
F. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written
summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location.
Include the following information in tabular form:
1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract
Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated.
2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable.
3. Number and name of room or space.
4. Location within room or space.
5. Submit product schedule in the following format:
a. PDF electronic file.
G. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section
"Constmction Schedule."
H. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Price
and Payment Procedures."
SUBAAITTAL PROCEDURES
01330 - 6
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbad Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbad Project No. 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
I. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section " Price and
Payment Procedures."
J. Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply
with requirements specified in Section 01458 "Testing Laboratory Services."
K. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements
specified in Section 01770 "Closeout Procedures."
L. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01770 "Closeout
Procedures."
M. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for
each portion of the Work, including those who are to fumish products or equipment
fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form:
1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying
products.
2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract.
3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.
4. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of subcontractor list, unless otherwise
indicated. Architect will retum two copies.
a. Mark up and retain one retumed copy as a Project Record Document.
N. Sustainabiiity Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section
"Sustainable Design Requirements."
2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification
Sections.
B. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section
"Project Management and Coordination."
A. Contractor's Constmction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1
Section "Constmction Schedule".
B. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and
experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and
addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
C. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel
comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding
Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms.
Include names of firms and personnel certified.
D. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying
that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is
authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.
SUBAAITTAL PROCEDURES
01330 - 7
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
City of Carlsbad Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set-April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
E. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead
certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.
F. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
G. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying
that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
H. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance
with requirements in the Contract Documents.
I. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by
manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on
evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency,
or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
J. Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in
effect for Project. Include the following information:
1. Name of evaluation organization.
2. Date of evaluation.
3. Time period when report is in effect.
4. Product and manufacturers' names.
5. Description of product.
6. Test procedures and results.
7. Limitations of use.
K. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1
Section "Quality Requirements."
L. Preconstmction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on
testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting resuhs of tests performed before
installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract
Documents.
M. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on
testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests
performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and
substrate preparation needed for adhesion.
N. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either
during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for
compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.
SUBAAITTAL PROCEDURES
01330 - 8
r
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Project No. 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
O. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instmctions and procedures for operation
and normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements specified
in Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data."
P. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to,
performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations.
Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of
loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any,
used for calculations. Include page numbers.
Q. Manufacturer's Instmctions: Prepare written or published information that documents
manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a
product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number
of manufacturer. Include the following, as applicable:
1. Preparation of substrates.
2. Required substrate tolerances.
3. Sequence of installation or erection.
4. Required installation tolerances.
5. Required adjustments.
6. Recoinmendations for cleaning and protection.
R. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized
service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable:
1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative
making report.
2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of
product.
3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements.
4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with
requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken.
5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed
performance complies with requirements.
6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.
7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
S. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of
insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits
of coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage.
T. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs): Submit information directiy to Owner; do not
submit to Architect.
1. Architect will not review submittals that include MSDSs and will rehim the entire
submittal for resubmittal.
2.3 DELEGATED DESIGN SERVICES
A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a
design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents,
provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria
indicated.
SUBAAITTAL PROCEDURES
01330 - 9
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Library
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 201 5 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required,
submit a written request for additional information to Architect.
B. Delegated-Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other
required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF electronic file, signed and sealed by the
responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to
Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional.
1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in
the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in
performing these services.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination
with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note
corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.
B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section 01770
"Closeout Procedures."
C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project
name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of
reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been
reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.
3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION
A. General: Archhect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp
and will retum them without action.
B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate
corrections or modifications required, and retum it. Architect will stamp each submittal
with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows:
1. "Reviewed": Submittal has been reviewed only for general conformance with the
design concept of the project and general compliance with the information given in
the Contract Documents. Contractor is responsible for compliance with the
requirements of the plans and specifications. Review of a specific item shall not
include approval of an assembly of which the item is a component. Contractor is
responsible for dimensions to be confirmed and correlated at the job site, information
that pertains solely to the fabrication process or to the means, methods, techniques,
sequences and procedures of constmction, coordination of the work of all trades and
for performing all work in a safe and satisfactory manner. No comments have been
recorded and no resubmittal is required.
2. "Reviewed, Make Corrections Noted, No Resubmittal Required": Submittal has been
reviewed in accordance with the above. When the Contractor has made the
corrections noted in the review comments, the submittal will be considered to have
the same status as if it had been marked "Reviewed". No resubmittal is required and
SUBAAITTAL PROCEDURES
01330 - 10
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research -1- Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbad Project No. 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
no action resubmittal shall be made. However the Contractor, Agency or Architect
may request that a record copy be submitted as an Informational Submittal for any of
the concemed parties.
3. "Revise and Resubmit": The Contractor shall revise the submittal based on the
review comments provided and shall resubmit the entire submittal until a mark of
'Reviewed' or 'Reviewed, Make Corrections Noted, No Resubmittal Required' is
obtained.
4. "Rejected": The submittal does not comply with the Contract Documents. Resubmit
in conformance with the Contract Documents.
5. "Reviewed, Make Corrections Noted, Resubmit Only Specific Items Indicated": This
action will be used in conjunction with either "Make Corrections Noted", as listed
above. The item indicated in the submittal review comments shall be resubmitted or
submitted—if it is missing in the first place—as a separate resubmittal. All items not
specifically indicated to be resubmitted shall be considered as falling under the other
action marked and SHALL NOT be resubmitted with the indicated item. The
complete submittal will consist of the original submittal plus subsequent submittals
ofthe specific items indicated that have been submitted and/or resubmitted until they
have received a 'Reviewed' or 'Reviewed, Make Corrections Noted, No Resubmittal
Required' mark.
6. 'Not Reviewed': Submittal was not required and therefore not reviewed.
C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not retum it, or will
retum it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to
appropriate party.
D. Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be retumed
without review.
E. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be
retumed for resubmittal without review.
F. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be
discarded.
END OF SECTION 01330
SUBAAITTAL PROCEDURES
01330 - 11
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Library
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
SUBAAITTAL PROCEDURES
01330 - 12
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbad Project No. 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
SECTION 01352 - SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS, CALGREEN COMMERCIAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes general requirements and procedures for compliance with Califomia Green
Building Standards Code - CALGreen Section 703.1 Documentation.
B. 2013 Califomia Green Building Standards Code (CALGreen): This project is subject to all
mandatory measures of CALGreen and any additional amendments as may have been adopted
by the local AHJ.
C. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 01524 - Constmction Waste Management: Administrative and procedural
requirements for salvaging, recycling, and disposing of demolition and constmction
waste.
2. Section 01810 - General Commissioning Requirements.
3. Divisions 1 through 35 Sections for CALGreen requirements specific to the Work of each
of those Sections. These requirements may or may not include reference to CALGreen.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. CALGreen: Califomia Green Building Standards Code 2013, Califomia Code of Regulations,
Title 24, Part 11.
B. Chain-of-Custody (COC): A tracking procedure for a product from the point of harvest or
extraction to its end use, including all successive stages of processing, transformation,
manufacturing, and distribution.
C. Chain-of-Custody Certification: Awarded to companies that produce, sell, promote, or trade
forest products after audits verify proper accounting of material flows and proper use of the
Forest Stewardship Council name and logo.
D. Chain-of-Custody Certificates: Certificates signed by manufacturers certifying that wood used
to make products was obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to
comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship."
Certificates shall include evidence that manufacturer is certified for chain of custody by an
FSC-accredited certification body.
E. Recycled Content: The proportion, by mass, of pre-consumer or postconsumer recycled
material in a product (ISO 14021).
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREAAENTS - CALGREEN
01352-1
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
1. Postconsumer Recycled Content: The percentage of material in a product that was
consumer waste. The recycled material was generated by household, commercial,
industrial, or institutional end-users and can no longer be used for its intended purpose.
2. Preconsumer Recycled Content (formerly known as postindustrial content): The
percentage of material in a product that is recycled from manufacturing waste.
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Respond to questions and requests from Architect regarding CALGreen compliance that are the
responsibility of the Contractor, that depend on product selection or product qualities, or that
depend on Contractor's procedures until the AHJ has made its determination on the project's
CALGreen compliance. Document responses as informational submittals.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit additional CALGreen submittals required by other Specification Sections.
B. CALGreen submittals are in addition to other submittals. If submitted item is identical to that
submitted to comply with other requirements, submit duplicate copies as a separate submittal to
verify compliance with indicated CALGreen requirements.
C. CALGreen Division 5, Section A5.106.1: Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP):
1. Submit SWPPP after contract award and before the pre-constmction conference.
a. Plan to include drawings and/or a written plan with specifications that detail the
proposed arrangements and methods for control of mnoff, sedimentation, and
pollutant conveyance in storm and other water resulting from constmction
activities. Show that the Storm water Pollution Prevention Plan conforms to the
State Storm water NPDES Constmction Permit or local ordinance, whichever is
stricter, as is required for projects one acre or more. Indicate parties responsible for
implementation.
b. Submit documentation over the course of the work activities indicating
implementation of the plan, through date-stamped photos, inspection logs or
reports with descriptions of corrective action in response to problems, etc.
D. CALGreen Division 5, Section A5.106.3: Low Impact Development (LID):
1. Submit documentation showing LID strategies to be employed during the course of
constmction to reduce impact of peak mn-off
E. CALGreen Division 5, Section 5.408.1: Constmction Waste Management: See Section 017419.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. CALGreen Compliance Documentation Submittals:
1. CALGreen Division 5, Section 5.106.4.1.1: Short-Term Bicycle Parking: Product Data
for bicycle parking racks.
2. CALGreen Division 5, Section 5.106.8: Light Pollution Reduction: Product Data for
interior and exterior lighting fixtures that stop direct-beam illumination from leaving the
building site.
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREAAENTS - CALGREEN
01352-2
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbad Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Project No. 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set-April 10, 2015
3. CALGreen Division 5, Section A5.106.11.2 Cool Roof Product Data for roofing
materials indicating Energy Star compliance for roof system for reduction of heat island
effect.
4. CALGreen Division 5, Section A5.106.11.2.1: SRI (solar reflectance index) values for
low-sloped and steep-sloped roofs.
5. CALGreen Division 5, Section A5.106.11.2.2: Thermal emittance values (CRRC) for
low-sloped and steep-sloped roofs.
6. CALGreen Division 5, Section 5.303.1 Metering: Product Data for metering of water
usage throughout building.
7. CALGreen Division 5, Section 5.303.2, 5.303.3, and 5.303.6 Indoor Water Use: Product
Data for plumbing fixtures, fittings, and appliances indicating water consumption.
8. CALGreen Division 5, Section 5.304.3 Irrigation Controllers: Product Data for
automatic controllers showing that installed controllers and sensors are weather- or soil
moisture-based, work automatically, and have compliant rain sensors connected to the
controllers.
9. CALGreen Division 5, Section 5.408.1.4 Constmction Waste Reduction, Disposal and
Recycling: Submit constmction and demolition management plan and completed waste
management report showing that a minimum of 50% of nonhazardous constmction and
demolition debris has been recycled and/or salvaged for reuse. See Section 017419.
10. CALGreen Division 5, Section 5.410.4.2 and 5.410.4.3 Testing Systems: Documentation
showing development of a written plan of procedures for testing and adjusting systems,
with procedures listed demonstrating compliance with requirements of AHJ.
11. CALGreen Division 5, Section 5.410.5.5: Building Maintenance and Operation:
a. Provide educational materials, operation and maintenance manuals to ensure
buildings and equipment are properly maintained.
b. Provide information pertaining to landscape design and maintenance, public
transportation options, recycling opportunities, special inspection reports and
energy incentive programs.
12. CALGreen Division 5, Section 5.504.1.3 Temporary Ventilation during Constmction:
Product Data for methods used to control indoor chemical and pollutant sources.
13. CALGreen Division 5, Section 5.504.3 covering of Duct Openings and Protection of
mechanical equipment during constmction:
a. Constmction indoor air quality management plan.
b. Product Data for temporary filtration media.
c. Product Data for filtration media used during constmction.
d. Constmction Documentation: Six photographs at three different occasions during
constmction along with a brief description of the SMACNA approach employed,
documenting implementation of the lAQ management measures, such as protection
of ducts and on-site stored or installed absorptive materials.
14. CALGreen Division 5, Section 5.504.4.1, Adhesives, Sealants and Caulks: Product Data
for adhesives, sealants and caulks used inside the weatherproofing system indicating
VOC content in g/L of each product used.
15. CALGreen Division 5, Section 5.504.4.3, 5.504.4.3.1 Aerosol Paints and Coatings, and
5.504.8.3.2 Verification: Product Data for paints and coatings used inside the
weatherproofing system indicating chemical composition and VOC content in g/L of
each product used.
16. CALGreen Division 5, Section 5.504.4.4 Carpet Systems, 5.504.4.4.1 Carpet Cushion,
5.504.8.4.2 Carpet Adhesive: Product Data for carpet, carpet cushion, carpet adhesives
and resilient flooring products indicating VOC content in g/L of each product used.
KBP' a. Product Data for filtration media used during flush-out and prior to occupancy.
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREAAENTS - CALGREEN
01352-3
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbad Georgina Cole Library
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
17. CALGreen Division 5, Section 5.504.4.5 Composite Wood Products, and 5.504.4.5.2
Documentation: Product Data for composite wood and agrifiber products indicating that
products contain no added urea-formaldehyde resin. For CALGreen, submit at least one
of the following: product certification and specifications, chain of custody certifications,
or other methods acceptable to the enforcing agency.
a. Include statement indicating adhesives and binders used for each product.
18. CALGreen Division 5, Section 5.504.4.6 Resilient Flooring Systems: Product Data for
resilient flooring products showing resilient flooring materials meet pollutant emission
limits.
19. CALGreen Division 5, Section 5.504.5.3 Fihers: Product Data for air filtration media
installed in mechanical distribution system.
20. CALGreen Division 5, Section 5.506.1 Outside Air Delivery and Section 5.506.2 Carbon
Dioxide (C02) Monitoring: Product Data and Shop Drawings for HVAC system
showing compliance with Califomia Energy Code and for carbon dioxide monitoring
system.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Provide products and procedures necessary to meet CALGreen provisions required in this
Section. Although other Sections may specify some requirements that contribute to CALGreen,
the Contractor shall determine additional materials and procedures necessary to meet
CALGreen provisions indicated.
2.2 RECYCLED CONTENT OF MATERIALS
A. CALGreen Division 5, Section 5.408.1: Recycle and salvage for reuse a minimum of 50% of
nonhazardous constmction and demolition waste:
1. Cost of post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content
of an item shall be determined by dividing weight of post-consumer recycled content plus
one-half of pre-consumer recycled content in the item by total weight of the item and
multiplying by cost of the item.
2. Do not include plumbing, mechanical and electrical components, and specialty items
such as elevators and equipment in the calculation.
3. Recycled content of materials shall be defined according to the Intemational
Organizations of Standards document, ISO 14021, Environmental labels and declarations
- Self-declared environmental claims (Type II environmental labeling).
2.3 POLLUTION CONTROL
A. CALGreen, Division 5, Section 5.504.4.1, adhesives, sealants and caulks (Table 5.504.4.1): For
compliance, for field applications that are inside the weatherproofing system, use adhesives and
sealants that comply with the following limits for VOC content in compliance with the local or
regional air pollution control or air quality management district mles where applicable, or
SCAQMD Rule 1168 VOC limits as shown (such products also shall comply with the Rule
1168 prohibition on the use of certain toxic compounds - chloroform, ethylene dichloride,
methylene chloride, perchloroethylene and trichloroethylene - except for aerosol products as
specified in CALGreen Division 5, Section 5.504.8.1.2:
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREAAENTS - CALGREEN
01352-4
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbad Project No. 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
1. Architectural Applications:
a. Indoor Carpet Adhesives: 50 g/L.
b. Carpet Pad Adhesives: 50 g/L.
c. Outdoor Carpet Adhesives: 150 g/L.
d. Wood Flooring Adhesive: 100 g/L.
e. Rubber Floor Adhesives: 60 g/L.
f Subfloor Adhesives: 50 g/L.
g. Ceramic Tile Adhesives: 65 g/L.
h. VCT and Asphah Tile Adhesives: 50 g/L.
i. Gypsum Board and Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L.
j. Cove Base Adhesives: 50 g/L.
k. Multipurpose Constmction Adhesives: 70 g/L.
1. Stmctural Glazing Adhesives: 100 g/L.
m. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Adhesive: 250 g/L.
2. Specialty Applications:
a. PVC Welding Compounds: 510 g/L.
b. CP VC Welding Compounds: 490 g/L.
c. ABS Welding Compounds: 325 g/L.
d. Plastic Cement Welding Compounds: 250 g/L.
e. Adhesive Primer for Plastic: 550 g/L.
f Contact Adhesive: 80 g/L.
g. Special-Purpose Contact Adhesive (contact adhesive that is used to bond
melamine-covered board, metal, unsupported vinyl, mbber, or wood veneer 1/16
inch or less in thickness to any surface): 250 g/L.
h. Stmctural Wood Member Adhesive: 140 g/L.
i. Top and Trim Adhesive: 250 g/L.
3. Substrate-Specific Applications:
a. Metal-to-Metal Adhesives: 30 g/L.
b. Plastic Foam Adhesives: 50 g/L.
c. Adhesives for Porous Materials (Except Wood): 50 g/L.
d. Wood Glues: 30 g/L.
e. Fiberglass Adhesives: 80 g/L.
4. Sealants:
a. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L.
b. Marine Deck Sealant: 760 g/L.
c. Nonmembrane Roof Sealants: 300 g/L.
d. Roadway Sealant: 250 g/L.
e. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Sealants: 450 g/L.
f Other Sealants: 420 g/L.
5. Sealant Primers:
a. Architectural, Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
b. Architectural, Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
c. Modified Bituminous Sealant Primers: 500 g/L.
d. Other Sealant Primers: 750 g/L.
B. CALGreen, Division 5, Section 5.504.4.3, Paints and Coatings (Table 5.504.8.3): Use paint and
coatings that comply with the 2007 Califomia Air Resources Board Suggested Control Measure
unless local limits that are more stringent apply. Aerosol paints and coatings shall meet the
PWMIR limits for ROC in Section 94522(a)(3) and other requirements, including prohibitions
on use of certain toxic compounds and ozone depleting substances, in Sections 94522(c)(2) and
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREAAENTS - CALGREEN
01352-5
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbad Georgina Cole Library
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Reseorch + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
(d)(2) of Califomia Code of Regulations, Titie 17, commencing with Section 94520, and in
areas under the jurisdiction of the Bay Area Air Quality Management District additionally
comply with the percent VOC by weight of product limits of Regulation 8 Rule 49:
1. Flat Paints and Coatings: VOC not more than 50 g/L.
2. Non-Flat Paints and Coatings: VOC not more than 100 g/L.
3. Non-Flat High Gloss Paints and Coatings: VOC not more than 150 g/L.
4. Specialty Coatings:
a. Aluminum Roof Coatings: 400 g/L.
b. Basement Specialty Coatings: 400 g/L.
c. Bituminous Roof Coatings: 50 g/L.
d. Bituminous Roof Primers: 350 g/L.
e. Bond Breakers: 350 g/L.
f. Concrete Curing Compounds: 350 g/L.
g. Concrete/Masonry Sealers: 100 g/L.
h. Driveway Sealers: 50 g/L.
i. Dry Fog Coatings: 150 g/L.
j. Faux Finishing Coatings: 350 g/L.
k. Fire Resistive Coatings: 350 g/L.
I. Floor Coatings: 100 g/L.
m. Form-Release Compounds: 250 g/L.
n. Graphic Arts Coatings (Sign Paints): 500 g/L.
o. High Temperature Coatings: 420 g/L.
p. Industrial Maintenance Coatings: 250 g/L.
q. Low Solids Coatings: 120 g/L. J'WL.
r. Magnesite Cement Coatings: 450 g/L. .
s. Mastic Texture Coatings: 100 g/L.
t. Metallic Pigmented Coatings: 500 g/L.
u. Multi-Color Coatings: 250 g/L.
V. Pre-Treatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L.
w. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 100 g/L.
x. Reactive Penetrating Sealers: 350 g/L.
y. Recycled Coatings: 250 g/L.
z. Roof Coatings: 50 g/L.
aa. Rust Preventative Coatings: 250 g/L.
bb. Shellacs:
1) Clear: 730 g/L.
2) Opaque: 550 g/L.
cc. Specialty Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 100 g/L.
dd. Stains: 250 g/L.
ee. Stone Consolidants: 450 g/L.
ff Swimming Pool Coatings: 340 g/L.
gg. Traffic Marking Coatings: 100 g/L.
hh. Tub and Tile Refinish Coatings: 420 g/L.
ii. Waterproofing Membranes: 250 g/L.
jj. Wood Coatings: 275 g/L.
kk. Wood Preservatives: 350 g/L.
II. Zinc-Rich Primers: 340 g/L.
5. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any ofthe following:
a. Acrolein.
b. Acrylonitrile.
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREAAENTS - CALGREEN
01352-6
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Project No. 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
c. Antimony.
d. Benzene.
e. Butyl benzyl phthalate.
f Cadmium.
g. Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate.
h. Di-n-butyl phthalate.
i. Di-n-octyl phthalate.
j. 1,2-dichlorobenzene.
k. Diethyl phthalate.
1. Dimethyl phthalate.
m. Ethylbenzene.
n. Formaldehyde.
o. Hexavalent chromium.
p. Isophorone.
q. Lead.
r. Mercury.
s. Methyl ethyl ketone.
t. Methyl isobutyl ketone.
u. Methylene chloride.
V. Naphthalene.
w. Toluene (methylbenzene).
x. 1,1,1-trichloroethane.
y. Vinyl chloride.
C. CALGreen, Division 5, Section 5.504.4.4 Carpet Systems: Carpet and carpet cushion must
comply with Carpet and Rug Institute's Green Label Plus Program.
D. CALGreen, Division 5, Section 5.504.4.5 Composite Wood Products: Do not use composite
wood and agrifiber products that contain added urea-formaldehyde resin. Laminating adhesives
used to fabricate on-site and shop-applied composite wood and agrifiber assemblies must not
contain added urea-formaldehyde resin.
E. CALGreen, Division 5, Section 5.504.4.6 Resilient Flooring Systems: No less than 80% of
floor area receiving resilient flooring material must comply with the Resilient Floor Covering
Institute (RFCI) FloorScore program.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT
A. Comply with CALGreen, Division 5, Section 5.408.1 and Section 017419 "Constmction Waste
Management and Disposal."
3.2 CONSTRUCTION INDOOR AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT
A. CALGreen Division 5, Section 5.504.3:
1. Covering of duct openings and protection of mechanical equipment during constmction.
2. During constmction, meet or exceed the recommended control measures of the Sheet
Metal and Air Conditioning National Trade Contractors Association (SMACNA) lAQ
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREAAENTS - CALGREEN
01352-7
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
Guidelines for Occupied Buildings under Constmction, 2"'' Edition 2007,
ANSI/SMACNA 008-2008 (Chapter 13).
3. Protect stored on-site and installed absorptive materials from moisture damage.
4. If permanently installed air handlers are used during constmction, filtration media with a
minimum efficiency reporting value of MERV 8 must be used at each retum air grille, as
determined by ASHRAE Standard 52.2-1999 (with errata but without addenda). Replace
all filtration media immediately prior to occupancy.
B. CALGreen Division 5, Section 5.504.5.3:
1. Filters: in mechanically ventilated buildings, provide regularly occupied areas ofthe
building with air filtration media for outside and retum air prior to occupancy that
provides at least a Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value of MERV 8.
END OF SECTION 01352
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS - CALGREEN
01352-8
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Project No. 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
SECTION 01423 - REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.
B. Acceptable: Contractor is obligated to provide and install one of the named products.
Manufacturers with products having equivalent characteristics may be considered provided
deviations are minor and design concept expressed in the Contract Documents is not
changed, as judged by the Design Professional. A substitution request is necessary for use
of any other manufacturer or products other than what is named.
C. Approve, Approved: Where used in conjunction with the Architect's action on the
Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, is limited to the Archhect's duties and
responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract.
v. D. Accepted Equivalent: Where used in conjunction with the Architect's action on the
Contractor's submittals and substitution requests, is as stated in the Conditions of the
Contract for Architect's responsibilities and duties as the Design Professional.
E. Basis of Design: Where specified these Specifications shall be interpreted to require the
named Basis-of-Design product or acceptable comparable product where additional
manufacturers are listed. If no other manufacturers are listed, the Specification shall be
interpreted to mean 'no known equal'. Substitutions will be handled and processed in
accordance with Section 01630.
F. Directed: Terms such as directed, requested, authorized, selected, approved, required, and
permitted mean directed by the Architect, requested by the Architect, and similar phrases.
G. Experienced: When used with the term Installer, means having a minimum of five
previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project, being familiar with the special
requirements indicated, and having complied with requirements of the authority having
jurisdiction.
H. Fumish: Means supply and deliver to the Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking,
assembly, installation, and similar operations.
I. Indicated: Refers to graphic representations, notes or schedules on the Drawings, or other
Paragraphs or Schedules in the Specifications, and similar requirements in the Contract
. Documents. Where terms such as shown, noted, scheduled, and specified are used, it is to
help the reader locate the reference.
REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS
01423-1
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbad Georgina Cole Library
City of Carisbad Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Plonning, Inc.
Bid Set-April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
J. Install: Describes operations at Project site including the actual unloading, unpacking,
assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing,
protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.
K. Installer: An Installer is the Contractor or an entity engaged by the Contractor, either as an
employee, subcontractor, or contractor of lower tier for performance of a particular
constmction activity, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.
Installers are required to be experienced in the operations they are engaged to perform.
L. Project Site: Is the space available to the Contractor for performing constmction activities,
either exclusively or in conjunction, with others performing other work as part of the
Project. The extent of the Project Site is shown on the Drawings and may or may not be
identical with the description of the land on which the Project is to be built.
M. Provide: Means to fumish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.
N. Regulations: Includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities
having jurisdiction, as well as mles, conventions, and agreements within the constmction
industry that control performance ofthe Work.
O. Testing Laboratories: A testing agency is an independent entity engaged to perform
specific inspections or tests, either at the Project Site or elsewhere, and to report on and, if
required, to interpret results of those inspections or tests.
1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS
A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent
requirements, applicable constmction industry standards have the same force and effect as if
bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such
standards are made a part ofthe Contract Documents by reference.
B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents
unless otherwise indicated.
C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in constmction on Project should be familiar
with industry standards applicable to its constmction activity. Copies of applicable
standards are not bound with the Contract Documents.
1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required constmction activity,
obtain copies directly from publication source.
D. Overlapping and Conflicting Requirements: Where compliance with 2 or more industry
standards or sets of requirements is specified, and overlapping of those different standards
or requirements establishes 2 different or conflicting minimums or levels of quality, the
most stringent requirement (which is generally recognized to be also the most costly is
intended and will be enforced, unless specifically detailed language written into the contract
documents (not by way of reference to an industry standard) clearly indicates that the less
stringent requirement is to be fulfilled.
1. Refer apparently equal-but-different requirements, and uncertainties as to which of 2
levels of quality is the more stringent, to the Owner for a decision before proceeding.
REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS
01423-2
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbad Project No. 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
1. Contractor's Option: Except for overlapping or conflicting requirements, where more
than one set of requirements are specified for a particular unit of work, the option is
intended to be the Contractors' regardless of whether specifically indicated as such in
the text.
1.4 GOVERNING DICTIONARY
A. The definitions of the words used in these Specifications, which are not defined in the
Section, the General Conditions, or in referenced standards, are as given in "Webster's Third
New Intemational Dictionary", The Definitive Merriam-Webster Unabridged Dictionary of
the English Language.
1.5 ABBREVIATIONS AND NAMES
A. Where acronyms or abbreviations are used in the Specifications or other Contract
Documents, they mean the recognized name of the trade association, standards generating
organization, authority having jurisdiction, or other entity applicable to the context of the
text provision. Refer to the "Encyclopedia of Associations," published by Gale Research
Co., available in most libraries.
B. Trades; Names: Except as otherwise indicated, the use of trade titles such as "carpentry" in
specification text, implies neither that the work must be performed by an accredited or
unionized tradesman or the corresponding generic name (such as a carpenter), nor that the
specified requirements apply exclusively to work by tradesmen of that corresponding
generic name.
1.6 SPECIFICATION FORMAT AND LANGUAGE
A. These Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections based on the Constmction
Specifications histittite's 50-Division format and MASTERFORMAT 2012 numbering
system with the exception of Division 1.
B. Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words
that are implied, but not stated shall be interpolated as the sense requires. Singular words
will be interpreted as plural and plural words interpreted as singular where applicable and
the context of the Contract Documents so indicates.
C. Imperative language is used generally. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are
to be performed by the Contractor. The indicative mood is employed on occasion when
such sentence stmcture is necessary to convey the intended meaning in a more accurate or
understandable format. (The imperative and indicative moods of sentence stmcture are
defined in CSI's Manual of Practice.)
D. At certain locations in the Text, subjective language is used for clarity to describe
responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by the Contractor, or by others when so
noted.
E. Streamlining: Employs the colon as a symbol for the words "shall be", "shall have", "shall
conform with", "shall meet the requirements of, or "shall comply with".
REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS
01423-3
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Library
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
F. A colon is also used to set off a paragraph title or heading from the text that follows. This is
the case when a grammatically complete sentence follows a heading and a colon. It is also
used as a punctuation mark in a sentence to direct attention to matter that follows. This is
not streamlining.
1.7 INTERPRETATIONS
A. In order to reduce the length of these Specifications, certain phrases are written without
objects and shall be interpreted as described below.
B. As indicated: Whenever "as indicated" is specified in these Specifications, it shall be
understood to read "as indicated on the Drawings".
C. As required: Whenever "as required" is specified in these Specifications, it shall be
understood to read "as required for a complete and finished installation" or "as required for
a complete and finished, operable installation".
D. As specified: Whenever "as specified" is specified in these Specifications, it shall be
understood to read "as specified herein" or "as specified in these Specifications".
1.8 STANDARD OF QUALITY
A. Where one certain kind, type, brand or manufacturer of material is named in these
Specifications, it shall be regarded as the required minimum standard of quality. Submit
requested substitutions in accordance with Section 01630.
1.9 SUBMITTALS
A. It shall be understood that the various submittals required by the individual specifications
sections are to be submitted to the Architect for review and approval as specified in the
General Conditions.
B. Unless "no substitute" is specified, these Specifications shall be interpreted to include the
words "or approved equal" after every product specified by manufacturer's brand name or
model number. Substitutions will be handled and processed in accordance with Section
01630.
C. Basis of Design: Where specified these Specifications shall be interpreted to require the
named Basis-of-Design product or comparable product where additional manufacturers are
listed. If no other manufacturers are listed, the Specification shall be interpreted to mean
'no known equal'. Substitutions will be handled and processed in accordance with Section
01630.
1.10 PERMITS, LICENSES, AND CERTIFICATES
A. For the Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection
reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments,
and similar documents, correspondence, and records established in conjunction with
compliance with standards and regulations bearing upon performance of the Work.
REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS
01423-4
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
City of Corlsbad Project No. 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
1.11 CODES AND STANDARDS
Latest edition of pertaining ordinances, laws, mles, codes, regulations, standards, and others
of public agencies having jurisdiction of the work are intended wherever reference is made
in either the singular or plural to Code or Building Code except as otherwise specified,
including but not limited to latest edition of those in the following listing.
1. 2013 Califomia Building Standards Administrative Codes (CBSAC) Califomia Code
of Regulations (CCR), Title 24, Part 1
2. 2013 Cahfomia Building Code (CBC) Califomia Code of Regulations (CCR) Titie
24, Part 2
3. 2013 Califomia Electrical Code (CEC) Cahfomia Code of Regulations (CCR) Titie
24, Part 3
4. 2013 Califomia Mechanical Code (CMC) Califomia Code of Regulations (CCR)
Titie 24, Part 4
2013 Cahfomia Plumbing Code (CPC) Califomia Code of Regulations (CCR) Titie
24, Part 5
2013 Cahfomia Energy Code Califomia Code of Regulations (CCR) Titie 24, Part 6
2013 Califomia Fire Code (CFC) Califomia Code of Regulations (CCR) Title 24,
Part 9
1990 State Fire Marshal Regulations Califomia Code of Regulations (CCR) Title 19
(As amended to date)
2013 Califomia Green Building Standards Code(CGBSC) Califomia Code of
Regulations (CCR) Title 24, Part 11
2013 State Referenced Standards Code Califomia Code of Regulations (CCR) Titie
24, Part 12
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and
Facilities (ADAAG)
Green Book- Standard Specifications for Public Works Constmction, latest edition.
5.
6.
7.
10.
11.
12.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED
END OF SECTION 01423
REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS
01423-5
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Library
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS
01423-6
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research -I- Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
City of Carlsbod Project No. 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
SECTION 01450 - QUALITY CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. City of Carlsbad General Conditions. Where conflicts between the General Conditions and
this Section occur, provisions of the General Conditions shall take precedence.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control
services.
B. Testing and Inspection Service: As required to verify compliance with requirements
specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for
compliance with the Contract Document requirements.
1. Specific quality control requirements for individual constmction activities are
specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections
may also cover production of standard products.
2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's quality
control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document
requirements.
3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality control services required by
Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of
this Section.
C. Contractor's quality control.
D. Pre-constmction conferences.
E. Repair and protection of ongoing constmction.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Progress cleaning, protection of installed Work,
correction of the Work.
B. Section 01731 - Cutting and Patching: Requirements for repairs after cutting and patching
operations.
C. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements.
V...
QUALITY CONTROL
01450 - 1
City of Carlsbod Project No. 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Reseorch + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and
during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and ensure that
proposed constmction complies with requirements.
B. Quality Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and
after execution of the Work to evaluate and confirm that completed constmction complies
with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by
Architect.
C. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing
laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.
1.5 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS
A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the
standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality
levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are
different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.
B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified
shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly
with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within
reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are
minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties
to Architect for a decision before proceeding.
1.6 DELEGATED DESIGN
A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a
design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents,
provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria
indicated.
1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required,
submit a written request for additional information to Architect.
1.7 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS
A. Delegated-Design Submittal: In addhion to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other
required submittals, submit a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design
professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed
or certified by a design professional, indicating that the products and systems are in
compliance with performance and design criteria indicated. Include list of codes, loads, and
other factors used in performing these services.
B. Qualification Data: For entities and agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience.
1. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the
testing agency by a recognized authority.
QUALITY CONTROL
01450 - 2
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Reseorch + Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbad Project No. 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
C. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits,
licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices,
receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, LEED Action Plans,
Progress Reports, and Documentation Submittals per Section 01352, and similar
documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on
performance of the Work.
D. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other
Sections. Include the following:
1. Date of issue.
2. Project title and number.
3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections.
6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
7. Identification of product and Specification Section.
8. Complete test or inspection data.
9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.
10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing
and inspecting.
11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies
with the Contract Document requirements.
12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.
E. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information
documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in
other Sections. Include the following:
1. Name, address, and telephone number of technical representative making report.
2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of
product.
3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements.
4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with
requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken.
5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed
performance complies with requirements.
6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.
7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
F. Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information
documenting manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and
inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following:
1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative
making report.
2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements.
3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed
performance complies with requirements.
4. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.
5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
QUALITY CONTROL
01450 - 3
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Library
City of Carlsbod Project No. 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 201 5 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
1.8 INSPECTION AND TESTING AGENCY SUBMITTALS
A. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:
1. Specification Section number and titie.
2. Description of test and inspection.
3. Identification of applicable standards.
4. Identification of test and inspection methods.
5. Number of tests and inspections required.
6. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections.
7. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections.
8. Requirements for obtaining samples.
9. Unique characteristics of each quality control service.
B. Submit a certified written report of each inspection, test or similar service, to the Architect,
in triplicate, unless the Contractor is responsible for the service. If the Contractor is
responsible for the service, submit a certified written report of each inspection, test or
similar service through the Contractor, in duplicate.
1. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to the goveming authority,
when the authority so directs.
C. Report Data: Written reports of each inspection, test or similar service shall include, but not
be limited to:
1. Date of issue.
2. Project title and number.
3. Name, address and telephone number of testing agency.
4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
5. Names of individuals making the inspection or test.
6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
7. Identification of product and Specification Section.
8. Complete inspection or test data.
9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.
10. Ambient conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting.
11. Comments or professional opinion as to whether inspected or tested Work complies
with Contract Document requirements.
12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
13. Recommendations on retesting and re-inspecting.
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those
indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as
sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
B. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or
assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project,
whose work has resulted in constmction with a record of successfial in-service performance.
QUALITY CONTROL
01450 - 4
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research -1- Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Project No. 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
C. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to
practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing
engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those
performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those
indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.
D. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems
similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service
performance.
E. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of
manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of
manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for
this Project.
F. Qualification for Service Agencies: Engage inspection and testing service agencies,
including independent testing laboratories, which are prequalified as complying with
"Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification" by the American
Council of Independent Laboratories, and which specialize in the types of inspections and
tests to be performed.
1. Each independent inspection and testing agency engaged on the Project shall be
authorized by authorities having jurisdiction to operate in the State of Califomia.
G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An agency with the experience and capability to conduct
testing and inspecting indicated, as documented by ASTM E548, and that specializes in
types of tests and inspections to be performed.
H. Provide inspection and testing services as required to verify compliance with requirements
specified or indicated. These services do not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for
compliance, nor are they intended to limit the Contractor's quality control procedures that
facilitate compliance with Contract Documents requirements.
1.10 QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES AND RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Specific quality control requirements for individual constmction activities are specified in
the Sections that specify those activities.
B. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality control services are indicated as Owner's
responsibility. Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.
1. Owner will fumish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of
testing agencies engaged and a description of the types of testing and inspecting they
are engaged to perform.
2. Costs for retesting and re-inspecting constmction that replaces or is necessitated by
work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to
Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order.
C. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a testing agency to conduct special tests
and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner.
1. Testing agency will notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and
deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.
QUALITY CONTROL
01450 - 5
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbad Georgina Cole Library
City of Carlsbod Project No. 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set-April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
2. Testing agency will submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and
similar quality control service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities
having jurisdiction.
3. Testing agency will submit a final report of special tests and inspections at
Substantial Completion, which includes a hst of unresolved deficiencies.
4. Testing agency will interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether
tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
5. Testing agency will retest and re-inspect corrected work.
D. Contractor Responsibilities: Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality control services
specified and required by authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing
agency to perform these quality control services.
2. Contractor shall not employ the same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in
writing by Owner.
3. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires
testing or inspecting will be performed.
4. Where quality control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a
certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality control service.
5. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contiact
Documents are Contractor's responsibility.
6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having
jurisdiction, when they so direct.
E. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and
similar quality control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested.
Notify agency sufficientiy in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel.
Provide the following:
1. Access to the Work.
2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and
inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.
4. Facilities for storage and field-curing of test samples.
5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies.
6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by
testing agency.
7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at
Project site.
F. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service
representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including
service connections. Report results in writing.
G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-
assurance and quality control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of
removing and replacing constmction to accommodate testing and inspecting.
1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.
QUALITY CONTROL
01450 - 6
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbad Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Reseorch + Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Project No. 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
1.11 TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCY SERVICES
A. Provide inspections, tests and similar quality control services, except where they are
specifically indicated to be the Owner's responsibility. Include costs for these services in
the Contract Sum.
B. Where the Owner has engaged a testing agency or other entity for testing and inspection of
a part of the Work, and the Contractor is also required to engage an entity for the same or
related element, the Contractor shall not employ the entity engaged by the Owner, unless
otherwise agreed in writing with the Owner.
C. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance
of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.
1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in
the Work during performance of its services.
2. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected
work complies with or deviates from requirements.
3. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar
quality control service through Contractor.
4. Do not release, revoke, aher, or increase requirements of the Contract Documents or
approve or accept any portion of the Work.
5. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.
D. Retesting/Re-inspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were
Contractor's responsibility, provide quality control services, including retesting and re-
inspecting, for constmction that revised or replaced Work that failed to comply with
requirements established by the Contract Documents.
1. Cost of retesting constmction revised or replaced by the Contractor is the
Contractor's responsibility, where required tests were performed on original
constmction.
1.12 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY CONTROL
A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers. Products, services, site conditions,
and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.
B. Comply fully with manufacturers' instmctions, including each step in sequence.
C. Should manufacturers' instmctions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification
from Architect/Engineer before proceeding.
D. Comply with specified standards as a minimum quality for the Work except when more
stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more
precise workmanship.
E. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality.
F. Secure Products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand
stresses, vibration, physical distortion or disfigurement.
QUALITY CONTROL
01450 - 7
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbad Georgina Cole Library
City of Corlsbad Project No. 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set-April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
1.13 PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCES
A. Convene a pre-constmction conference after execution of the Agreement and prior to
commencement of constmction activities. Review responsibilities and persoimel
assignments.
B. Attendees: The Owner, Architect, the Contractor and his superintendent, subcontractors,
suppliers, manufacturers, and other concemed parties shall be represented by persons
authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
C. Agenda: Discuss significant items that could affect progress, including the tentative
constmction schedule, critical sequencing, use of the premises, procedures for processing
Change Orders and equipment deliveries.
D. Review progress of other activities and preparations for the activity under consideration at
each conference, including time schedules, manufacturers' recommendations, weather
limitations, substrate acceptability, compatibility problems, inspection and testing
requirements, and LEED requirements.
E. Use conferences to assure accurate coordination among trades where appearance of
intersecting materials is critical. Follow agendas laid out in individual Sections.
F. Record significant discussions, agreements and disagreements of each conference, along
with the approved schedule. Distribute the meeting record to everyone concemed,
promptly, including the Owner and Architect.
G. Do not proceed if the conference caimot be successfully concluded. Initiate necessary
actions to resolve impediments and reconvene the conference at the earliest feasible date.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A. Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample-taking and similar services, repair damaged
constmction and restore substrates and finishes to eliminate deficiencies, including
deficiencies in visual qualities of exposed finishes.
1. Comply with Contract Document requirements specified in Section 01 7329 for
cutting and patching.
B. Protect constmction exposed by or for quality control service activities, and protect repaired
constmction.
C. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of
these Specifications. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas in a
manner that eliminates evidence of patching.
QUALITY CONTROL
01450 - 8
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbad Project No. 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
D. Repair and protection is the Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of
responsibility for inspection, testing or similar services.
END OF SECTION 01400
QUALITY CONTROL
01450 - 9
Blank Page
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research -I- Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Project No. 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
SECTION 01524 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Administrative and procedural requirements for the following:
1. Salvaging non-hazardous demolition and constmction waste.
2. Recycling non-hazardous demolition and constmction waste.
3. Disposing of non-hazardous demolition and constmction waste.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01352 - Sustainable Design Requirements: Constmction waste management
Credits.
B. Section 01731 - Cutting and Patching: Protection measures to be instituted during
constmction.
C. Section 02224 - Selective Stmcture Demolition: Disposition of waste resulting from partial
demolition of buildings, stmctures, and site improvements.
1.4 WASTE MANAGEMENT GOALS FOR THE PROJECT
A. The Owner has established that this Project shall minimize the creation of constmction and
demolition waste on the job site. Contributing factors include over-packaging, ordering
error, poor planning, improper storage, breakage, mishandling, and contamination. Recycle
as many of the waste materials as economically feasible. Minimize waste sent to landfills.
B. Diversion Goals: A minimum of 75% of total project waste shall be diverted from landfill.
The following waste categories, at a minimum, shall be diverted from landfill through
recycling or salvage:
1. Clean dimensional wood, pallet wood
2. Plywood, OSB, and particleboard
3. Concrete
4. Cardboard, paper, packaging
5. Metals
6. Gypsum drywall (unpainted)
7. Paint
8. Glass
9. Plastics
10. Carpet and pad
CONSTRUCTION WASTE AAANAGEMENT
01524 - 1
City of Corlsbad Project No. 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
C.
1.5
A.
C.
1.6
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
11. Beverage containers
Salvage may include donations of materials to charitable organizations.
PERFORMANCE GOALS
Use sustainable or renewable materials.
1. Select Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) certified wood products for framing,
flooring, finishes, fumishings and temporary constmction applications such as
bracing, concrete formwork and pedestrian barriers.
2. Select rapidly renewable materials that sustainably replenish themselves in a less
than 10-year cycle (e.g. linoleum: cork and linseed).
3. Select materials that minimize damage to natural habitats.
B. Use resources efficiently.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Reuse existing building materials from demolished buildings where possible.
Select materials that use resources efficiently.
Use constmction practices that achieve the most efficient use of resources and
materials.
Recycle minimum 75% (by weight) of constmction, demolition and land-clearing
debris.
Select recycled content materials (target is 20% of building materials that contain in
aggregate a minimum average the post-consumer recycled content and 50% post
industrial recycled content).
Select materials that can be recycled at the end of their usefiil life (e.g. metal
products, carpet).
Use durable materials.
1. Select materials with the longest usable life.
2. Select materials with the least burdensome maintenance requirements.
SUBMITTALS
Waste Management Plan: Within 1 week of contract award, the Contractor shall submit to
the Owner a Waste Management Plan. The Plan shall contain the following:
1. Designation of the party who will implement the plan
2. Analysis of the estimated job-site waste to be generated, including types and
quantities
3. Proposed Altematives to Landfilhng: a list of each material planned to be salvaged
or recycled during the course of the Project and the proposed destination of each
material
B. Progress Reports: Submit bi-monthly, a Waste Management Progress Report. The report
shall contain the following information:
1. Project title, name of company completing report, and dates of period covered by the
report
2. Amount (in tons or cubic yards) of material landfiUed from the Project and identity
ofthe landfill
3. For each material recycled or salvaged from the Project, provide the following:
a. Amount (in tons or cubic yards)
CONSTRUCTION WASTE AAANAGEMENT
01524 - 2
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Project No. 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
b. Date(s) removed from the job site
c. Receiving party
d. Cost: Bin rental, hauling, and facility fees
e. What was done with the material
4. Include legible copies of on-site logs, manifests, weight tickets, and receipts.
Manifests shall be from recycling and/or disposal site operators who can legally
accept the materials for the purpose of reuse, recycling, or disposal.
C. LEED Submittals: See Section 01352 for additional requirements; provide the following:
1. Documentation for Credit MR 2.1 and Credit MR 2.2 showing implementation of
waste management plan.
D. Project Completion Report:
1. Submit a letter at project close out tabulating the total waste material, quantities
diverted and the means by which diverted, and declaring that the waste management
goal has been met. Calculations may be done by weight or volume, but must be
consistent throughout.
1.7 PROJECT MEETINGS
A. Waste management plans and implementation shall be discussed at the following meetings:
1. Pre-bid meeting
2. Pre-constmction meeting
3. Regular j ob-site meetings
1.8 QUALIFIED CONSTRUCTION WASTE RECYCLING SERVICES
A. Constmction waste shall be delivered to appropriate, qualified recycling services
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN IMPLEMENTATION
A. Coordinate waste materials handling and separation for all trades, and document results of
the Waste Management Plan.
B. Provide separation, handling, transportation, recycling, salvage, and landfilhng for all
demolition and waste materials.
C. Designate a specific area for separation of material for salvage and recycling. Recycling
and waste bin areas are to be kept neat and clean and clearly marked in order to avoid
contamination or mixing materials.
D. Maintain an on-site log, which includes for each load of materials removed from site: type
of material, load volume and/or weight, recycling/hauling service, date accepted by
recycling service or landfill, and facility fee.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE AAANAGEMENT
01524 - 3
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
City of Carlsbod Project No. 40201 Group 4 Architecture Reseorch -I- Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
E. Do not handle, separate, store, salvage, or recycle hazardous materials with other materials.
Follow material-specific instmctions any hazardous materials. Contact Project Manager if
no instmctions are evident.
F. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management
procedures, as appropriate for the Work occurring at Project site.
1. Distribute waste management plan to everyone concemed within three days of
submittal retum.
2. Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site.
Review plan procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and
disposal.
G. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure
minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied
and used facilities.
1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials
that are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold.
2. Comply with Section 01500 for controlling dust and dirt, environmental protection,
and noise control.
3.2 DISPOSAL OF WASTE
A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused,
remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or
incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of
accumulate on-site.
2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent
surfaces and areas.
B. Buming: Do not bum waste materials.
C. Disposal: Transport waste materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
END OF SECTION 01524
CONSTRUCTION WASTE AAANAGEMENT
01524 - 4
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Project No. 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
SECTION 01630 - PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. City of Carlsbad General Conditions: Article 3.13 Trade Names, Substitutions. Where
conflicts between the General Conditions and this Section occur, provisions of the General
Conditions shall take precedence.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01250 - Contract Modification Procedures: Administrative and procedural
requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications.
B. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submitting comparable product
submittals for proposed substitutions.
1.4 PRODUCTS
A. "Products" are items purchased for incorporation in the Work, whether purchased for the
Project or taken from previously purchased stock.
B. "Named Products" are items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or
model designation indicated in the manufacturer's product literature.
C. "Materials" are products that are shaped, cut, worked, mixed, finished, refined or otherwise
fabricated, processed, or installed to form a part of the Work.
D. "Equipment" is a product with operational parts, whether motorized or manually operated,
that requires service connections such as wiring or piping.
1.5 PRODUCT OPTIONS
A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Any product meeting
those standards or description.
B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufaettjrers: Products of manufacturers
named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed.
PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
01630 - 1
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Library
City of Carlsbod Project No. 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for
Substitutions: Submit a request for substitution, during Bidding only, for any manufacturer
not named.
1.6 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Source Limitations: To the fullest extent possible, provide products of the same kind, from
a single source.
B. When the Contractor has the option of selecting between two or more products, the product
selected shall be compatible with products previously selected.
C. Semi-proprietary Specification Requirements: Where two or more products or
manufacturers are named, provide one of the products indicated. No substitutions will be
permitted.
D. Where products are specified by name, accompanied by the term "or approved equal"
comply with provisions herein for substitution submittals to obtain approval for use of an
unnamed product.
E. Descriptive Specification Requirements: Where Specifications describe a product, listing
characteristics required, with or without use of a brand name, provide a product that
provides the characteristics and otherwise complies with requirements.
F. Requests for changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of constmction
required by Contract Documents proposed by the Contractor after award ofthe Contract are
considered requests for "substitutions." The following are not considered substitutions:
1. Substitutions requested during the bidding period, and accepted prior to award of
Contract.
2. Revisions to Contract Documents requested by the Owner or Architect.
3. Specified options of products and constmction methods included in Contract
Documents.
4. Compliance with goveming regulations and orders issued by goveming authorities.
1.7 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST REVIEW
A. Make requests for substitutions within 35 days of Award of the Contract.
B. Requests for substitutions, submitted to the Architect by the Contractor after
commencement of constmction, will be reviewed at the Architect's standard hourly rate,
charged to the Contractor as appropriate to the request.
C. The Contractor's substitution request will be received and considered by the Architect when
one or more of the following conditions are satisfied, as determined by the Architect;
otherwise requests will be retumed without action except to record noncompliance with
these requirements.
1. Extensive revisions to Contract Documents are not required.
2. Proposed changes are in keeping with the general intent of Contract Documents.
3. The request is timely, fully documented and properly submitted.
PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
01630 - 2
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad" Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Project No. 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
4. The request is directly related to an "or equal" clause or similar language in the
Contract Documents.
5. The specified product or method of constmction cannot be provided within the
Contract Time. The request will not be considered if the product or method cannot
be provided as a result of failure to pursue the Work promptly or coordinate activities
properly.
6. The specified product or method of constmction cannot receive necessary approval
by a goveming authority, and the requested substitution can be approved.
7. A substantial advantage is offered the Owner, in terms of cost, time, energy
conservation or other considerations of merit, after deducting offsetting
responsibilities the Owner may be required to bear. Additional responsibilities for
the Owner may include additional compensation to the Architect for redesign and
evaluation services, increased cost of other constmction by the Owner or separate
contractors, and similar considerations.
8. The specified product or method of constmction cannot be provided in a manner that
is compatible with other materials, and where the Contractor certifies that the
substitution will overcome the incompatibility.
9. The specified product or method of constmction cannot be coordinated with other
materials, and where the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution can be
coordinated.
10. The specified product or method of constmction cannot provide a warranty required
by the Contract Documents and where the Contractor certifies that the proposed
substitution provide the required warranty.
D. The Contractor's submittal and Architect's acceptance of Shop Drawings, Product Data or
Samples that relate to constmction activities not complying with the Contract Documents
does not constitute an acceptable or valid request for substitution, nor does it constitute
approval.
1.8 SUBSTITUTION SUBMITTALS
A. Requests for substitutions will be considered if received within 60 days after
commencement of the Work. Requests received more than 60 days after commencement of
the Work may be considered or rejected at the discretion of the Architect.
B. Submit 3 copies of each request for substitution in the form and in accordance with
procedures for Change Order proposals.
C. Identify the product, or installation method to be replaced in each request. Include related
Specification Section and Drawing numbers. Document compliance with requirements for
substitutions, and the following information, as appropriate:
1. Product Data, including Drawings and descriptions of products, fabrication and
installation procedures.
2. Samples, where applicable or requested.
3. A comparison of significant qualities of the proposed substitution with those
specified.
4. A list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to
constmction performed by the Owner and separate Contractors that will be necessary
to accommodate the proposed substitution.
PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
01630 - 3
City of Corlsbad Project No. 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
5. A statement indicating the substitution's effect on the Constmction Schedule
compared to the schedule without approval of the substitution. Indicate the effect of
the proposed substitution on overall Contract Time.
6. Cost information, including a proposal of the net change, if any in the Contract Sum.
7. Certification that the substitution is equal-to or better in every respect to that required
by Contract Documents, and that it will perform adequately in application indicated.
Include Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may be
necessary because of the substitution's failure to perform adequately.
8. A statement indicating the substitution's effect on the project's level of LEED
certification.
D. Architect's Action: Within one week of receipt of the request for substitution, the Architect
will request additional information necessary for evaluation. Within 2 weeks of receipt of
the request, or one week of receipt of additional information, which ever is later, the
Architect will notify the Contractor of acceptance or rejection. If a decision on use of a
substitute cannot be made within the time allocated, use the product specified. Acceptance
will be in the form of a Change Order.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED
END OF SECTION 01630
PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
01630 - 4
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
City of Corlsbad Project No. 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
SECTION 01730 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. City of Carlsbad General Conditions. Where conflicts between the General Conditions and
this Section occur, provisions of the General Conditions shall take precedence.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Verification of property lines and bench mark.
B. Verification of existing utility elevations.
C. Layout of site features.
D. Field engineering.
E. General installation of products.
F. Coordination of Owner-installed products.
G. Progress cleaning.
H. Starting and adjusting.
I. Protection of installed constmction.
J. Correction of the Work.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01731 - Cutting and Patching: Requirements and limitations for cutting and
patching of Work.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For land surveyor and professional engineer.
B. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor certifying that location and
elevation of improvements comply with requirements.
C. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept
hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal.
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
01730 - 1
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Project No. 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to
practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-
surveying services of the kind indicated.
B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to
practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing
engineering services of the kind indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Fumish all materials, labor, transportation and equipment necessary to complete this portion
ofthe Contract.
B. Establish building location with appropriate offsets to allow for grading work.
C. Define locations of paving, walks and other site features including manholes and
underground utility locations.
D. Verify the inverts or flow lines of all existing utility stmctures adjacent to the site or to be
connected to, including but not limited to stubs, drainage channels, laterals, catch basins,
junction boxes, manholes and gutters.
3.2 FIELD ENGINEERING
A. Identification: Owner will identify existing benchmarks, control points, and property
comers.
B. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar
reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks
and control points during constmction operations.
1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written
approval of Architect or Constmction Manager. Report lost or destroyed permanent
benchmarks or control points promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent
benchmarks or control points to Architect and Constmction Manager before
proceeding.
2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base
replacements on the original survey control points.
C. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project
site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities
having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark.
1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record
Documents.
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
01730 - 2
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Project No. 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide
temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work.
3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked
constmction to its original condition.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment
and elevation, as indicated.
1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.
2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for
maintenance and ease of removal for replacement.
3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 8 feet (2.4 m) in spaces without a
suspended ceiling.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instmctions and recommendations for installing
products in applications indicated.
C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results.
Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.
D. Conduct constmction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations
or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.
E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.
F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be
factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that
adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated
requirements.
G. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each
component securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the
Work.
1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at
heights directed by Architect.
2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.
3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Fumish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts,
and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry.
Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not
indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form
hairline joints.
I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not
considered hazardous.
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
01730 - 3
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
City of Carlsbod Project No. 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
3.4 OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS
A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's constmction forces.
B. Coordination: Coordinate constmction and operations of the Work with work performed by
Owner's constmction forces.
1. Constmction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred constmction
schedule for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust constmction schedule based on a
mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due
to differences in actual constmction progress.
2. Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's constmction forces at preinstallation
conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend
preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's constmction forces if portions of
the Work depend on Owner's constmction.
3.5 PROGRESS CLEANING
B.
Preconstmction Conference: Conduct a meeting at the site prior to commencement of all
constmction activities to establish required procedures for maintaining a clean site that
meets the Owner's requirements. Conference shall be attended by Contractor, Owner,
Architect, and Contractor's superintendent.
1. Review intended progress cleaning procedures and schedule.
2. Establish intervals required by Owner for progress cleaning to take place and
meetings to review effectiveness of progress cleaning.
3. Establish the need for identification badges for constmction and cleaning personnel.
4. Discuss security procedures required by Owner.
5. Review reporting procedures for any violations of established and agreed upon
procedures.
General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate
progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce
requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.
1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials
and debris.
2. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the
temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C).
3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste.
Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.
4. Comply with LEED requirements as set forth in credit EQc3.1 and SMACNA
guidelines regarding material stocking and moisture avoidance, and duct protection.
C. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.
D. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for
proper execution ofthe Work.
1. Remove liquid spills promptly.
2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the
entire work area, as appropriate, keeping LEED requirements for duct protection in
mind.
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
01730 - 4
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbad Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbad Project No. 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
E. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written
instmctions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials
specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use
cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage
exposed surfaces.
F. Cutting and Patching: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed.
Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials.
1. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other
finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.
G. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.
H. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to
ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
I. Waste Disposal: Burying or buming waste materials on-site will not be permitted.
Washing waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted.
J. During handling and installation, clean and protect constmction in progress and adjoining
materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection
from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.
K. Clean and provide maintenance on completed constmction as frequently as necessary
through the remainder of the constmction period. Adjust and lubricate operable
components to ensure operability without damaging effects.
L. Limiting Exposures: Supervise constmction operations to assure that no part of the
constmction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or
otherwise deleterious exposure during the constmction period.
1. Protect adjacent existing buildings from deleterious effects of ongoing constmction
operations.
3.6 STARTING AND ADJUSTING
A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove
malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.
B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for
proper operation.
C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and
safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
D. Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory-authorized service representative is required to
inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification
requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements."
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
01730 - 5
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbad Project No. 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
3.7 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without
damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instmctions for temperature and relative humidity.
3.8 CORRECTION OF THE WORK
A. Repair or remove and replace defective constmction. Restore damaged substrates and
finishes. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching."
1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching
up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.
B. Restore permanent facilities used during constmction to their specified condition.
C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be
repaired without visible evidence of repair.
D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating
components that cannot be repaired.
E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.
F. Remove and replace products and installations not in compliance with LEED requirements.
END OF SECTION 01700
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
01730 - 6
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgino Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
City of Carlsbod Project No. 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
SECTION 01732 - CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. City of Carlsbad General Conditions. Where conflicts between the General Conditions and
this Section occur, provisions of the General Conditions shall take precedence.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Requirements and limitations for cutting and patching of Work.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01100 - Summary of Work: Work by Owner or by separate contractors.
B. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Repair and protection of Work having been tested.
C. Individual Product Specification Sections:
1. Cutting and patching incidental to work of the Section.
2. Advance notification to other Sections of openings required in work of those
Sections.
3. Limitations on cutting stmctural and other types of members.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit prior to cutting of any stmcturally or visually significant portion of
the Work which is not specifically shown on the Drawings. Obtain written permission for
exact location and size of openings from the Architect.
1. Before cutting into any portion of the stmcture, obtain written permission from the
Architect for each hole to be cut or enlarged. Submit shop drawings indicating exact
location and size of detail of reinforcement of such openings.
B. Submit written request in advance of cutting or aheration which affects:
1. Stmctural integrity of any element of Project.
2. Integrity of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant element.
3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element.
4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements.
5. Work of Owner or separate contractor.
C. Include in request:
1. Identification of Project.
2. Location and description of affected work.
3. Necessity for cutting or alteration.
4. Description of proposed work, and products to be used.
CUTTING AND PATCHING
01732 - 1
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Carisbad Project No. 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 201 5
5. Altematives to cutting and patching.
6. Effect on work of Owner or separate contractor.
7. Written permission of affected separate contractor.
8. Date and time work will be executed.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standards: For seismic restraints of mechanical systems comply with SMACNA Manual
unless more stringent requirements are indicated in Division 15.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Existing Warranties: Replace, patch, and repair material and surfaces cut or damaged by
methods and with materials in such a manner as not to void any warranties required or
existing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERL\LS
A. Primary Products: Identical to those required for original installation.
1. For exposed surfaces, use materials that virtually match existing adjacent surfaces to
fullest extent possible if identical materials are unavailable or caimot be used.
2. Use materials whose installed performance will equal or surpass that of existing
materials.
B. Product Substitution: For any proposed change in materials, submit request for substitution
under provisions of Section 01630.
C. Dust Barrier: Flame-retardant polyethylene sheet with the following characteristics:
1. Thickness: 6 mil, minimum.
2. Buming Characteristics: ASTM E84:
a. Flame Spread Index: 10.
b. Smoke Developed: 60.
3. Tensile Strength: ASTM D882:
a. MD: 1700 psi.
b. TD: 1200 psi.
4. Elongation: ASTMD882:
a. MD: 225 percent.
b. TD: 350 percent.
5. Dart Impact: ASTM D1709; 260g.
6. Water Vapor Transmission Rate: ASTM D96; 0.13 perms.
D. Tape: Type recommended by polyethylene sheet manufacturer for required application.
CUniNG AND PATCHING
01732 - 2
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbad Project No. 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set-April 10, 2015
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Inspect existing conditions prior to commencing Work, including elements subject to
damage or movement during cutting and patching.
B. After uncovering existing work, inspect conditions affecting performance of work.
C. Report unsatisfactory or questionable conditions to Architect in writing; do not proceed
with work until Architect has provided fiirther instmction.
D. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Provide temporary supports to ensure stmctural integrity of the Work. Provide devices and
methods to protect other portions of Project from damage.
B. Provide protection from elements for areas which may be exposed by uncovering work.
C. Maintain excavations free of water.
D. Avoid cutting existing pipes, conduit, or ductwork serving building but scheduled to be
removed or relocated until provisions have been made to bypass them.
E. Employ skilled workmen to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and
patching at earliest feasible time and complete.
1. Cut existing constmction to provide for installation of other components or
performance of other constmction activities and subsequent fitting and patching
required to restore surfaces to original condition.
3.3 TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES
A. Provide temporary enclosure for protection of constmction from exposure, foul weather,
other constmction operations and similar activities.
B. Constmction for Dust Control: Framing and reinforced polyethylene sheet materials with
closed joints and sealed edges at intersections with existing surfaces; maximum Flame
Spread Rating of 75 in accordance with ASTM E84.
C. Provide temporary parthions as required to separate work areas from Owner occupied areas,
to prevent penetration of dust and moisture into Owner occupied areas, and to prevent
damage to existing materials and equipment.
D. Provide duct protection in accordance with LEED & SMACNA requirements.
E. Temporary Partitions: Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to
limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas from fumes and noise.
CUTTING AND PATCHING
01732 - 3
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbad Project No. 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set-April 10, 2015
1. Constmct dustproof, floor-to-ceiling partitions of not less than nominal 4-inch (100-
mm) studs, 2 layers of 3-mil (0.07-mm) polyethylene sheets, inside and outside
temporary enclosure. Cover floor with 2 layers of 3-mil (0.07-mm) polyethylene
sheets, extending sheets 18 inches (460 mm) up the side walls. Overlap and tape full
length of joints.
2. Cover floor with 3/4-inch (19-mm) fire-retardant plywood.
3.4 PERFORMANCE
A. Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other Work, and which will provide
appropriate surfaces to receive patching and finishing.
B. When warranty may be affected by alterations to original installation of weather exposed
and moisture resistant elements, and sight-exposed surfaces, employ original installer to
perform cutting and patching.
C. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools are not allowed
without prior approval.
D. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.
E. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces.
3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHEVfG
A. General: Execute cutting, fitting, and patching including excavation and fill to complete
work.
1. Fit products together, to integrate with other work.
2. Uncover work to install ill-timed work.
3. Remove and replace defective or non-conforming work.
4. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested.
5. Provide openings in the work for penetration of mechanical and electrical work.
B. Cutting:
1. Perform cutting, associated stmctural reinforcing, and patching in a manner to
prevent damage to other Work, and to provide proper surfaces for the installation of
new materials, equipment and repairs. Adjust and fit products to provide a neat
installation.
2. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools are not allowed
without prior written approval.
C. Gypsum Board: At the Contractor's option, on existing walls and ceilings designated for
cutting and patching work, the Contractor may use any of the following methods, or
combination thereof, to match adjacent wall plane and finish, and as required to meet the
required fire ratings:
1. Patch gypsum board walls or ceilings with new gypsum board the same thickness as
existing surface.
2. Patch gypsum plaster walls or ceilings using gypsum plaster to match and align with
the adjacent surface thickness.
CUniNG AND PATCHING
01732 - 4
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Project No. 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
3. Remove entire gypsum board or gypsum plaster surface plane and replace with new
gypsum board to the comer of the wall or ceiling plane.
D. At partitions and ceilings indicated as "existing to remain", provide modification of finishes
for new Work including, but not necessarily limited to, acoustical treatment, electrical,
plumbing, etc. See Drawings for extent of work.
1. At Contractor's option, where modifications are required, finishes may be cut and
patched, or removed and replaced on one or both sides.
E. Patching:
1. Patch surfaces to match adjacent surfaces. Finish to nearest intersection. For an
assembly, refinish entire unit.
2. Patch to achieve security; strength; weather protection, as applicable; efficiency,
operational life, maintenance, and safety of operational elements; and to preserve
continuity of existing fire ratings.
3. Patch surfaces to successfully duplicate undisturbed adjacent profiles, materials,
textures, finishes and colors. Use materials which match existing constmction.
4. Where there is dispute as to whether duplication is successful or has been achieved to
a reasonable degree, the Architect's decision will be final.
5. Fit work to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces.
3.6 FINISHING
A. Finish or refinish, as applicable, cut and patched surfaces to match adjacent finishes.
Replace materials which are damaged or abused and cannot be neatly repaired as a resuh of
cutting and patching operations.
B. Refinish entire surfaces as necessary to provide even finish to match adjacent finishes:
1. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break.
2. For an assembly, refinish entire unit.
C. Painting: Paint over complete surface planes, unless otherwise indicated or directed. Over
patched wall and ceiling surfaces, paint to nearest cutoff line for entire surface, such as the
intersection with adjacent wall or ceiling, beam, or to nearest opening frame, unless
otherwise indicated or directed. Painted surfaces shall not appear spotty or touched-up.
END OF SECTION 01731
CUniNG AND PATCHING
01732 - 5
Blank Page
C3
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research -I- Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
City of Carlsbod Project No. 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
SECTION 01770 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. City of Carlsbad General Condhions; Article 9, Payments and Completion. Where conflicts
between the General Conditions and this Section occur, provisions of the General
Conditions shall take precedence.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Final inspection procedures and reinspection procedures.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01290 - Applications and Certificates for Payment: Administrative procedures for
submitting request for final payment following completion of closeout procedures.
B. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Administrative procedures for submitting final
documentation for the Work.
C. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Progress cleaning requirements.
1.4 FINAL COMPLETION
A. In the Application for Payment that coincides with the date Final Completion is claimed,
show 100 percent completion for the portion of the Work claimed substantially complete.
B. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance agreements, final
certifications and similar documents.
C. Submit record drawings, maintenance manuals, property survey, and similar record
information.
D. Submit copies of all LEED certification documents and LEED Templates prepared by the
Contractor or Subcontractors.
E. Complete start-up testing of systems, and instmction of the Owner's personnel. Remove
temporary facilities from the site, along with constmction tools, mock-ups, and similar
elements.
F. Complete final clean up. Touch-up, repair, and restore marred exposed finishes.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01770 - 1
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Project No. 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
1.5 INSPECTION PROCEDURES
A. On receipt of a request for inspection, the Architect will proceed or advise the Contractor of
unfilled requirements. The Architect will prepare the Certificate of Final Completion
following inspection, or advise the Contractor of constmction that must be completed or
cortected before the certificate will be issued.
B. The Architect will repeat inspection when requested and assured that the Work has been
substantially completed.
C. Results of the completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final acceptance.
1.6 FINAL ACCEPTANCE
A. Owner will notify Architect 30 days prior to anticipated final completion to schedule
inspection.
B. Before requesting inspection for certification of final acceptance and final payment,
complete the following:
1. Submit final payment request with releases.
2. Submit a final statement, accounting for changes to the Contract Sum.
3. Submit a copy of the final inspection list stating that each item has been completed or
otherwise resolved for acceptance.
4. Submit final meter readings for utilities, a record of stored fiael, and similar data as of
Final Completion.
5. Submit consent of surety to final payment.
6. Submit evidence of continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance
requirements.
1.7 REINSPECTION PROCEDURE
A. The Architect will reinspect the Work upon receipt of notice that the Work has been
completed, except items whose completion has been delayed because of circumstances
acceptable to the Owner.
B. Upon completion of reinspection, the Architect will prepare a certificate of final acceptance,
or advise the Contractor of work that is incomplete or of obligations that have not been
fulfilled but are required for final acceptance.
C. If necessary, reinspection will be repeated.
1.8 RECORD DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS
A. Do not use Record Documents for constmction purposes; protect from loss in a secure
location; provide access to Record Documents for the Architect's reference.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01770 - 2
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbad Project No. 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
B. Record Drawings: Maintain a clean, undamaged set of blue or black line white-prints of
Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. Mark-up these drawings to show the actual
installation. Mark whichever drawing is most capable of showing conditions accurately.
Give particular attention to concealed elements that would be difficult to measure and
record at a later date.
C. Organize record drawing sheets into manageable sets, bind with durable paper cover sheets,
and print suitable titles, dates and other identification on the cover.
D. Record Specifications: Maintain one copy of the Project Manual, including agenda. Mark
to show variations in actual Work performed in comparison with the Specifications and
modifications. Give particular attention to substitutions, selection of options and similar
information on elements that are concealed or cannot be readily discemed later by direct
observation. Note related record drawing information and Product Data.
E. Upon completion of the Work, submit record Specifications to the Architect for the Owner's
records.
F. Delete Architect/Engineer titie block and seal from all documents.
G. Submit documents to Architect^Engineer with claim for final Application for Payment.
Documents will be forwarded to Owner for approval.
1.9 FINAL CLEANING
A. Employ experienced workers for final cleaning. Clean each surface to the condition
expected in a commercial building cleaning and maintenance program.
B. Perform cleaning prior to requesting inspection for certification of Final Completion.
C. Remove labels that are not permanent labels.
D. Clean transparent materials. Remove glazing compound. Replace chipped or broken glass.
E. Clean exposed hard-surfaced finishes to a dust-free condition, free of stains, films and
similar foreign substances. Restore reflective surfaces to their original reflective condition.
Leave concrete floors broom clean. Vacuum carpeted surfaces.
F. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. Remove excess lubrication. Clean
plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition. Clean light fixtures and lamps.
G. Notwithstanding other cleaning requirements, use only nontoxic cleaners for final
constmction cleaning. Coordinate with Architect and LEED consuhant for a list of
appropriate cleaners.
H. Clean the site of mbbish, litter and other foreign substances. Sweep paved areas; remove
stains, spills and other foreign deposits. Rake grounds that are neither paved nor planted, to
a smooth even-textured surface.
I. Removal of Protection: Remove temporary protection and facilities.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01770 - 3
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research -I- Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Project No. 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
J. Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and safety standards for cleaning.
Remove waste materials from the site and dispose of in a lawful manner.
K. Adjust operating Products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED
END OF SECTION 01770
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01770 - 4
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbad Project No. 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set-April 10, 2015
SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Demolition and removal of selected portions of a building or stmcture.
B. Demolition and reuse of selected exterior elements.
C. Repair procedures for selective demolition operations.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01100 - Summary of Work: For use of the premises and phasing requirements.
B. Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: For temporary constmction and
environmental-protection measures for selective demolition operations.
C. Section 01732 - Cutting and Patching: For cutting and patching procedures for selective
demolition operations.
D. Section 01524 - Constmction Waste Management: Recycling, recovery and diversion
requirements for demolished building materials.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Remove: Detach items from existing constmction and legally dispose of them off-site,
unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.
B. Existing to Remain: Existing items of constmction that are not to be removed and that are
not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.
1.5 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A. Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise
indicated to remain City's property, demolished materials shall become Contractor's
property and shall be removed from Project site.
SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
024119-1
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
1.6
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Reseorch -I- Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
D.
1.7
A.
B.
Sustainabiiity Submittals:
1. Documentation for Credit MR 1.2: Maintain existing interior nonstmctural
components (walls, flooring, and ceilings) not indicated to be demolished; do not
demolish such existing constmction beyond indicated limits.
2. Waste Diversion Reports and Data: For waste materials, indicating achievement of
minimum 50 percent waste diversion goal.
Provide detailed information, for review prior to demolition commencement, on methods
and sequencing for accomplishing this Work.
1. Information may be in the form of drawings, print mark-overs or field markings, and
walk-throughs with Architect and City as required to adequately describe the Work to
be done and procedures to be followed.
Proposed Dust-Control and Noise-Control Measures: Submit statement or drawing that
indicates the measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for
their operation. Identify options if proposed measures are later determined to be
inadequate.
Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:
1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and
ending dates for each activity. Ensure City's on-site operations are unintermpted.
Cole vacate/dove vacate for demo
2. Intermption of utility services.
3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.
4. Use of elevator and stairs.
5. Locations of temporary partitions and means of egress, including for other tenants
affected by selective demolition operations.
6. Coordination of City's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of
City's partial occupancy of completed Work.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition
work similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with goveming EPA notification regulations before
beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of
authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Standards: Comply with ANSI A 10.6 and NFPA 241.
D. Diversion Goals: A minimum of 50% of total project waste shall be diverted from landfill.
E. Pre-demolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Review methods and
procedures related to selective demolition including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Inspect and discuss condition of constmction to be selectively demolished.
2. Review stmctural load limitations of existing stmcture.
SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
024119-2
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbad Project No. 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of
materials, demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress
and avoid delays.
4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates
exposed by selective demolition operations.
1.8 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used
facilities.
1. Do not close or obstmct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities
without written permission from authorities having jurisdiction.
B. City assumes no responsibility for condition of areas to be selectively demolished.
1. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by
City as far as practical.
C. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site will not be permitted.
D. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them
against damage during selective demolition operations.
1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.
E. Exercise special care to protect the building finishes and other items to remain.
1. Damage or disturbance to these items shall be promptly restored, repaired, or
replaced to match existing at no cost to the City.
F. If the Contractor has any questions as to the extent of items to remain, he shall notify the
Architect and request a clarification before proceeding.
G. Provide bracing and support as required to maintain integrity and security of portion of
existing stmctures to remain.
H. Provide dirt and dust barriers, debris containers, removal routes and disposal to protect
areas to remain. Provide cleanup services to maintain cleanliness of these spaces from dirt
caused by demolition work.
I. Traffic:
1. Conduct demolition operations and the removal of debris to ensure minimum
interference with streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities.
2. Do not close or obstmct streets, walks, or other occupied or used facilities without
permission from authorities having jurisdiction.
J. Where existing unidentified utilities, stmctures or services are discovered, or other
unsatisfactory conditions are uncovered, submit information to the Architect in writing for
resolution prior to proceeding.
SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
024119-3
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Pianning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
1.9
A.
HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
Hazardous materials are anticipated to be present in building to be selectively demolished.
If encountered proceed as follows:
1. Do not disturb hazardous materials or items suspected of containing hazardous
materials. Contact City for directions on how to proceed with constmction in areas
where such materials are found.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 REPAIR MATERIALS
A. Use repair materials identical to existing materials.
1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used for exposed surfaces, use
materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fiallest extent possible.
2. Use materials whose installed performance equals or surpasses that of existing
materials.
B. Comply with material and installation requirements specified in individual Specification
Sections.
2.2 DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A. Removed items become the property of the Contractor for disposal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas affected by Work of this Section and verify that required protection is in
place.
B. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped.
C. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of
selective demolition required.
D. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be
removed and salvaged.
E. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or stmctural elements that conflict with intended
function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of
conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect for evaluation and directions before
proceeding with constmction.
F. Engage a professional engineer to survey condition of building to determine whether
removing any element might result in stmctural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any
portion of stmcture or adjacent stmctures during selective demolition operations.
SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
024119-4
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research -t- Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbad Project No. 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
1. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective
demolition activities.
G. Where existing conditions conflict with representations of the Contract Documents or
existing materials are confirmed to be asbestos-bearing, notify the City's Representative in
writing and obtain written clarification or direction prior to proceeding.
H. Do not commence demolition Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Provide protection as necessary and in accordance with applicable regulations, and insure
that protection is properly in place prior to Work commencement:
1. For workmen, public, City's employees, and other contractors.
2. For existing finishes, stmctures, equipment, utilities, systems, and improvements to
remain.
3. To prevent damage or injury due to dust or dirt; see Section 01500.
B. Lay out cutting work at jobsite and coordinate with related work for which cutting is
required. Review proposed layout with Architect prior to performing cutting operations.
C. Verify existing utility services to remain in operation during course of Work, cooperate
with City in scheduling Work so there will be a minimum of interference. Prearrange utility
shutdown or temporary intermption with City prior to Work commencement.
D. Notify utility companies having service connections within building such as water,
electricity, gas, sewer and other connections.
E. Contact municipal and regulatory agencies affected by and interested in the Work, including
but not limited to Public Works, Fire, and Building Inspection. Secure necessary
information and permits required, and make detailed arrangements for smooth, safe
prosecution ofthe Work.
F. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal
operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other
adjacent occupied and used facilities.
1. Do not close or obstmct streets, walks, walkways, or other adjacent occupied or used
facilities without permission from City and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide
altemate routes around closed or obstmcted traffic ways if required by goveming
regulations.
2. Erect temporary protection, such as walks, fences, railings, canopies, and covered
passageways, where required by authorities having jurisdiction.
G. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to
prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area
and to and from occupied portions of building.
2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition
of existing constmction on exterior surfaces and new constmction, to prevent water
leakage and damage to stmcture and interior areas.
SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
024119-5
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that
are exposed during selective demolition operations.
4. Cover and protect fumiture, fumishings, and equipment that have not been removed.
H. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of existing building
and constmction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other
constmction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure
for building exterior.
1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, provide
insulated temporary enclosures. Coordinate enclosure with ventilating and material
drying or curing requirements to avoid dangerous conditions and effects.
I. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or
stmctural support to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of
constmction to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of
constmction being demolished.
1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective
demolition.
3.3 UTILITY SERVICES
A. Existing Utilities: Maintain services indicated to remain and protect them against damage
during selective demolition operations.
B. Do not intermpt existing utilities serving occupied or operating facilities unless authorized
in writing by City and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during
intermptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to City and to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Provide at least 72 hours' notice to City if shutdown of service is required during
changeover.
C. Utility Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utilities
serving areas to be selectively demolished.
1. City will arrange to shut off indicated utilities when requested by Contractor.
2. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.
3. If utility services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before
proceeding with selective demolition provide temporary utilities that bypass area of
selective demolition and that maintain continuity of service to other parts of building.
4. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and
seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing.
3.4 POLLUTION CONTROLS
A. Dust Control: Use water mist, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit
spread of dust and dirt. Comply with goveming environmental-protection regulations.
1. Do not use water when it may damage existing constmction or create hazardous or
objectionable conditions, such as ice, flooding, fungal growth and pollution.
2. Wet mop floors to eliminate trackable dirt and wipe down walls and doors of
demolition enclosure. Vacuum carpeted areas.
SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
024119-6
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research -I- Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Project No. 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
B. Disposal: Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent
surfaces and areas.
1. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that
will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.
C. Cleaning: Clean adjacent stmctures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by
selective demolition operations. Retum adjacent areas to condition existing before selective
demolition operations began.
3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
A. General: Demolish and remove existing constmction only to the extent required by new
constmction and as indicated.
B. Remove designated interior stmctures, parts, and finishes at beginning of work to minimize
hazardous working conditions and to provide comparatively clean surfaces for installation
of new work.
C. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of goveming regulations and
as follows:
1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level.
Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing
supporting members on the next lower level.
2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and tme to dimensions required. Use
cutting methods least likely to damage constmction to remain or adjoining
constmction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding,
not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces.
Temporarily cover openings to remain.
3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid
marring existing finished surfaces.
4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At
concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of
hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and
portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.
5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.
6. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials
and promptly dispose of off-site.
7. Remove stmctural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to
avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation.
8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to
impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
9. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.
10. Retum elements of constmction and surfaces that are to remain to condition existing
before selective demolition operations began.
D. Existing Facilities: Comply with City's requirements for using and protecting elevators,
stairs, walkways, loading docks, building entries, and other building facilities during
selective demolition operations.
SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
024119-7
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
3.6
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
REMOVALS
Where required by the Drawings or specified, and when so directed to be salvaged and
reinstalled, remove existing materials and fixtures, equipment, etc. in the most careful
manner possible to avoid damage; and, if damaged, restore such items to conditions
satisfactory to the Architect.
Materials to be removed and not reinstalled shall become the property of the Contractor
who shall be responsible for their timely removal from the Project site and their legal
disposal.
1. Recycle removed materials to greatest extent possible. Provide manifests showing
extent and content of recycled material diverted or recovered from the waste stream,
including total weight of each. See Section 01524.
Removed and Salvaged Items: Comply with the following:
1. Clean salvaged items.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.
3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to City.
4. Transport items to City's storage area designated by City.
5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
Existing Items to Remain: Protect constmction indicated to remain against damage and
soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to
a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled
in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.
Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and
remove.
F. Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to
recommendations in RFCI-Recommended Work Practices for Removal of Resilient Floor
Coverings.
1. Remove residual adhesive and prepare substrate for new floor coverings by one of
the methods recommended by RFCI.
3.7 PATCHING AND REPAIRS
A. General: Promptly repair damage to adjacent constmction caused by selective demolition
operations.
B. Repairs: Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable
for new materials.
1. Completely fill holes and depressions in existing masonry walls that are to remain
with an approved masonry patching material applied according to manufacturer's
written recommendations.
C. Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining
constmction in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching and refinishing.
SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
024119-8
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbad Project No. 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
D. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are demolished extend one finished area
into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even
surface of uniform finish color, texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall
coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and
appearance.
1. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and
comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these
Specifications.
2. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint
coats over patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing
patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.
3. Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate
integrity of installation.
E. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane
surface of uniform appearance.
F. Where repair scope is more than incidental, repairs shall comply with current codes.
3.8 CLEANING
A. Constmction Waste Management: Manage constmction waste in accordance with
provisions of Section 01524 Constmction Waste Management.
B. Provide cleaning during demolition as necessary and to the acceptance of the Architect.
C. Leave all portions of demolition area in a level, safe, and sanitary condition acceptable to
public authorhies and Architect.
3.9 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A. General: Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials to
accumulate on-site.
B. Buming: Do not bum demolished materials.
C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off City's property and legally dispose of them.
END OF SECTION 024119
SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
024119-9
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set-April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
024119-10
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Librory
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
City of Carlsbod Project No. 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Shop fabricated ferrous metal items, galvanized and prime painted.
B. Fabricated steel items including the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Rough hardware.
Elevator pit ladders.
Elevator machine beams (OFCI).
Support angles for elevator door sills.
Miscellaneous framing, supports and trim.
Shelf and ledger angles.
Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete not specified in other Sections.
1.3
Products fumished, but not installed, under this Section include the following:
1. Loose steel lintels.
2. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, and wedge-type inserts indicated to be cast into
concrete or built into unit masonry.
DEFINITIONS
A. Steel Sheet Thicknesses: Thickness dimensions, including those referenced in ANSI
A250.8, are minimums as defined in referenced ASTM standards for both uncoated steel
sheet and the uncoated base metal of metallic-coated steel sheets. Metal thicknesses
indicated below correspond to former gage thicknesses:
1. 20 Gage: 0.032-inch-(0.8-mm-).
18 Gage: 0.042-inch- (1.0-mm-). 2.
3.
4.
5.
16 Gage: 0.053-inch-(1.3-mm-)
14 Gage: 0.067-inch-(1.7-mm-)
12 Gage: 0.093-inch- (2.3-mm-)
1.4 SCHEDULING AND SEQUENCING
A. Ensure timely fabrication of items to be embedded or enclosed by other work.
B. Fumish information and assistance required for locating embedded items and be
responsible for proper locations.
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000-1
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Plonning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Show a large scale constmction of various parts, methods of joining,
thickness of metals, profiles of surfaces, reinforcing, anchorage, and stmctural supports.
Include information regarding concealed and exposed joints, welds, and fastenings. Where
welded connectors and concrete inserts are required to receive work, show size and
locations required.
B. Sustainabiiity Submittals:
1. Product Data for products having recycled content, documentation indicating
percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content.
a. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.
2. Product Data for each material, including its source, cost, and the fraction by weight
that is considered regional and that has been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as
well as manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site.
3. Product Data for field-applied touch up primers, paints, clear coatings, and
galvanizing agents, include printed statement of VOC content and chemical
components.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. ICC-ES Reports: Submit ICC-ES reports for expansion bolts, demonstrating acceptability
of expansion bolts to authorities having jurisdiction over the Work.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS Dl.l, "Stmcttiral Welding Code-Steel."
2. AWS Dl .3, "Stmcttiral Welding Code-Sheet Steel."
B. Design Criteria:
1. Work shall be designed to support normally imposed loads and conform to AISC
requirements.
2. Built-up parts shall not exhibit warp.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLE^G
A. Deliver, store, and handle packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken
and labels intact until time of use.
B. Discharge materials carefully and store on clean concrete surface or raised platform in safe,
dry area.
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000-2
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
City of Carlsbod Project No. 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
2.1 SUSTAINABILITY MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS, GENERAL
A. Recycled Content: Provide products made from steel sheet with average recycled content
such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is
not less than 25 percent.
B. Local/Regional Materials: Give preference to manufacturer's whose facilities are within a
500 mile radius of the project site. Also give preference to materials that are harvested,
extracted, mined, quarried, etc. within a 500 mile radius of the project site.
C. VOC Content: Adhesives, sealants, paints, welding, and coatings applied on-site on the
interior of the building and products used on the interior of the building shall comply with
VOC limits as specified.
1. Use materials that have the lowest possible VOC content in units of g/L when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2.2 MATERLA.LS
A. Steel Materials:
1. Stmctural Steel Shapes: ASTM A36/A36M, conforming to AISC specifications.
2. Architectural and Miscellaneous Steel hems: ASTM A283/A283M.
3. Steel Sheets: ASTM A36/A36M.
4. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade A, Schedule 40.
5. Steel Bars: ASTM A36/A36M.
6. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500/A500, Grade A.
7. Steel Plate: ASTM A36/A36M.
8. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A653/A653M, with minimum G90 (Z275) coating unless
noted otherwise.
2.3 STEEL LADDERS
A. General: Fabricate ladders for the locations shown, with dimensions, spacings, details and
anchorages as indicated. Comply with requirements of ANSI A14.3 and CFR 29 1910.27;
where conflicts occur, comply with the more stringent requirements.
B. Steel Ladders:
1.
2.
4.
5.
Space siderails 18 inches (457 mm) apart, unless otherwise indicated.
Siderails: Continuous, l/2-by-2-1/2-inch (12.7-by-64-mm) steel flat bars, with eased
edges.
Rungs: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) diameter steel bars spaced no greater than 12-inches
(305 mm) oc and uniform throughout the length ofthe ladder.
Fit mngs in centeriine of siderails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces.
Provide non-slip surfaces on top of each mng, either by coating mng with aluminum-
oxide granules set in epoxy-resin adhesive or by using a type of manufactured mng
filled with aluminum-oxide grout.
Individual metal mngs embedded in concrete which serve as access to pits and other
areas under floors, should have a minimum diameter of l-inch (25 mm).
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000-3
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
7. Galvanize pit ladder, including brackets and fasteners.
C. For elevator pit ladders, comply with ASME A17.1.
D. Support each ladder at top and bottom and at intermediate points spaced not more than 5'-
0" (1.5 m) oc by means of welded or bolted brackets made from same metal as ladder,
unless otherwise indicated.
1. Size brackets to support design dead and live loads indicated and to hold centeriine
of ladder mngs clear of the wall surface by not less than 7-inches (178 mm).
2. Extend side rails 42-inches (1.1 m) above top mng, and retum rails to wall or
stmcture unless other secure handholds are provided. If the adjacent stmcture does
not extend above the top mng, gooseneck the extended rails back to the stmcture to
provide secure ladder access.
2.4 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete
constmction, made flat, free from warps or twists, and of required thickness and bearing
area. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting as required.
2.5 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS
A. Fabricate loose stmctural steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for
opening and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated.
B. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated.
C. Size loose lintels for equal bearing of 1-inch per foot of clear span but not less than 8-
inches (203 mm) bearing at each side of openings, unless otherwise indicated.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING, SUPPORTS AND TRIM
A. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports: Provide steel framing and supports for applications
indicated which are not a part of stmctural steel framework, as required to complete work.
1. Fabricate units to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and required to receive
adjacent other constmction retained by framing and supports. Fabricate from
stmctural steel shapes, plates, and steel bars of welded constmction using mitered
joints for field connection. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and
similar items.
2. Equip units with integrally welded anchors for casting into concrete or building into
masonry. Fumish inserts if units must be installed after concrete is placed.
a. Except as otherwise indicated, space anchors 24-inches (61 cm) oc and
provide minimum anchor units in the form of steel straps 1-1/4" wide x 1/4" x
8" long (31.8 mm X 6.4 mm X 203 mm).
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000-4
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Project No. 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
B. Miscellaneous Steel Trim: Provide shapes and sizes indicated for profiles shown. Unless
otherwise indicated, fabricate units from stmctural steel shapes, plates, and steel bars, with
continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Use concealed field splices
wherever possible. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as required for coordination
for assembly and installation with other work.
2.7 SHELF AND LEDGER ANGLES
A. Fabricate shelf and ledger angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to
concrete framing. Provide slotted holes to receive 3/4-inch (19.1 mm) bolts, spaced not
more than 6-inches (152 mm) from ends and not more than 24-inches (0.61 m) oc, unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Fumish wedge-type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, for attachment of shelf
angles to cast-in-place concrete.
2.8 METAL BOLLARDS
A. Fabricate metal bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe, concrete filled.
1. Size: 6-inch diameter by 48-inch above finished grade.
B. Galvanize metal bollards after fabrication.
2.9 SPECIALTY FABRICATED PRODUCTS
^ A. Preparation:
1. Coordinate with other work supporting or adjoining miscellaneous metal and verify
requirements for cutting out, fitting, and attaching.
2. Verify sizes, designs, and locations of items; do so at site whenever constmction
progress permits.
B. General Requirements:
1. Fabricate items from materials noted and make tme to profiles shown. Obtain the
Architect's approval of proposed variations.
2. Miter comers and angles of frames and moldings unless otherwise noted.
3. Perform cutting, shearing, drilling, punching, threading, tapping as required for items
or their adjacent work.
4. Drill or punch holes; do not use cutting torch.
5. Ensure shearing and punching leaves tme lines and surfaces.
6. Items to be Galvanized: Fabricate in accordance with recommended practices of
ASTM A385/A385M and A123/A123M unless specifically noted otherwise.
7. Fabricate exterior items for assembly and installation on site without field welding of
joint.
8. Ensure metal thickness and assembly details provide ample strength and stiffness.
9. Size sleeves for approximately 1/4-inch clearance all around.
C. Fastening:
1. Provide fasteners and anchor assemblies required for complete fabrication, field
assembly, and erection.
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000-5
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Plonning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 201 5 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
2. Conceal fastenings wherever practicable.
3. Size intemally threaded diameters to accommodate galvanized threaded bolts where
galvanizing is required.
4. Permanent connections in Ferrous Metal Items: Employ welding wherever
practicable; avoid bolts and screws.
D. Welding:
1. Use electric shielded-arc process according to AWS Dl.l.
2. Maintain shape and profile of item welded.
3. Prevent heat blisters, mn-throughs, and surface distortions.
4. Welds Normally Exposed to View in Finished Work: Make uniform and grind
smooth.
5. Exposed Welds: Remove burrs, flux, welding oxide, air spots and discoloration;
grind smooth, polish, or otherwise finish to match material welded.
E. Bolted and Screwed Connections:
1. Use bolts for field connections only, and then only as noted. Countersink heads;
finish smooth and flush.
2. Provide washers under heads and nuts bearing on wood.
3. Draw nuts tight and prevent loosening of permanent connections by nicking threads.
4. Use beveled washers where bearing is on sloped surfaces.
5. Where necessary to use screws for permanent connections in ferrous metal, use flat
head type, countersink, fill screw slots, and finish smooth and flush.
6. Evenly space exposed heads.
2.10 PRIMER FINISHES
A. Preparations of Surfaces:
1. Thoroughly clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces of mill scale, mst, dirt,
grease, oil, and other foreign matter from ferrous metal prior to galvanizing, hot
phosphate treatment or painting.
a. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with SSPC
recommendations.
2. Where hand-cleaning methods are not adequate, and unless specified otherwise,
clean in accordance with SSPC-SP 1, SSPC-SP 2, or SSPC-SP 7 as required.
3. Completely eliminate burrs, rough spots and pitting from normally exposed ferrous
metal items.
4. AESS Surface Preparation: Blast-clean ungalvanized steel surfaces as recommended
by coating manufacturer and according to SSPC-SP 6 minimum in preparation for
galvanizing.
B. Galvanizing:
1. Galvanize items after fabrication in largest sections practicable unless otherwise
permitted or recommended by ASTM A384/A384M and A385/A385M.
2. Where galvanizing is removed by welding or other assembly procedures, touch up
abraded areas with molten zinc or zinc-rich paint.
3. Where ferrous metal item is noted to be galvanized, perform galvanizing in
accordance with following standards as applicable to item, using a minimum of 2.0
ounces per square foot:
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000-6
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgino Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research -I- Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbad Project No. 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
a. Hardware Items Including Fasteners: ASTM A153/A153M.
b. Items Both under I/8-inch Thickness and Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed, and
Forged Shapes, Plates, Bars, and Strips: ASTM A123/A123M.
c. Other Fabricated Items: ASTM A123/A123M.
C. Finish Schedule: Unless noted otherwise in Materials or Standard Catalog Products
Articles.
1. Ferrous Metal, Interior Items:
a. Concealed: Clean, chemically etch, and shop-apply one prime-coat.
b. Exposed and AESS: Clean, treat with hot phosphate, chemically etch, and
shop-apply one prime-coat.
2. Ferrous Metal, Exterior Items:
a. Concealed: Clean and hot-dip galvanize in accordance with galvanizing
standards.
b. Exposed and AESS: Clean, then hot-dip galvanize in accordance with
galvanizing standards, chemically etch, and shop- apply one prime-coat.
3. Special Ferrous Metal Items as Noted Below: Clean and hot-dip galvanize in
accordance with galvanizing standards. Do not prime coat.
4. Items Noted as Chrome-Plated: Same as US26D finish.
5. Hardware Including Fasteners (Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Etc.):
a. Finish to match items fastened.
b. Where galvanizing is required, hot-dip galvanize according to ASTM
A153/A153M.
2.11 ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide Type 304 stainless steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated
fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B633, Class Fe/Zn 5, where built into
exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade and class required.
B. Typical Unfinished Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: Low carbon steel standard fasteners,
extemally and intemally threaded, ASTM A307 Grade A; malleable washers.
C. Expansion Bolts: FS FF-S-325, Group II, Type 4.
D. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly with capability to sustain, without
failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four
times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to
ASTM E488/E488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
E. Washers: ANSI B 18.22.1; flat round washers.
F. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F1554, Grade 36.
G. Grout: Non-shrink, non-metallic grout, factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive,
nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C1107/C1107M. Provide grout specifically
recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000-7
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
H. Concrete Fill: Comply with requirements in Section 033000 for normal-weight, air-
entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi,
unless otherwise indicated.
I. Primer: Zinc-chromate type.
J. Zinc for Galvanizing: ASTM B6.
K. Welding Electrodes: E-70XX.
2.12 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test and Inspections: The Owner will engage a testing laboratory to inspect welds per
CBC Chapter 17.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine areas to receive work and verify that setting conditions and dimensions are correct
to receive items.
B. Do not start installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install work plumb, tme, rigid, and neatly trimmed out.
B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing
metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation;
with edges and surfaces level, plumb, tme, and free of rack; and measured from established
lines and levels.
C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld coimections that
are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size
limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip
galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
D. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so
no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of
adjacent surface.
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000-8
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Project No. 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
E. Fastening to In-Place Constmction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal
fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place constmction. Provide threaded fasteners
for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag bolts, wood
screws, and other connectors.
F. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into
concrete, masonry, or similar constmction.
G. Do not tighten fastener through finish alone without spacer washers.
H. Provide concrete inserts or predrilled expansion bolts in fastening items into concrete.
I. Protect dissimilar metals from contact with each other or with other materials causing
corrosion.
J. Fasten work tightly to prevent rattle or vibration except where expansion-contraction
tolerances are required.
K. Use non-shrink grout mixed in accordance with manufacturer's direction for setting frames,
plates, sills, bolts and similar items.
L. Set items shown or required to be installed in sleeves with quick setting anchor cement
unless otherwise noted.
M. Protect metal from damage to surface, profile and shape.
3.3 INSTALLING METAL BOLLARDS
A. Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings. Center and align bollards in holes 3
inches (75 mm) above bottom of excavation. Place concrete and vibrate or tamp for
consolidation. Support and brace bollards in position until concrete has cured.
B. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water.
C. Backfill: The backfill in the annular space around bollards not embedded in poured
footings shall be by the following methods:
1. Clean excess soil from hole. Do not leave loose soil at bottom of hole.
2. Backfill: Concrete with an ultimate strength of 3,000 pounds per square inch
(210.92 kgs/sq cm) at 28 days. The hole shall not be less than 4-inches (101.6 mm)
larger than the diagonal dimension of a round, square or rectangular bollard.
3.4 SETTING LOOSE PLATES
A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of any bond-reducing materials, and roughen
to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of bearing plates.
B. Set loose leveling and bearing plates on wedges, or other adjustable devices. After the
bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten the anchor bolts.
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000-9
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Library
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
1. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protmding, cut off flush with the edge of the
bearing plate before packing with grout. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces
and plates to ensure that no voids remain.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Touch-Up Painting of Steel Items: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted
connections, abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as
used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touch-up of field
painted surfaces.
1. Apply by bmsh or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 3.0 mils (0.076
mm).
3.6 CLEANING
A. For galvanized surfaces clean welds, bolted connections and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing repair paint to comply with ASTM A780/A780M.
B. Remove protective devices only when items will be safe from other constmction operations
or removal is required to permit related work.
C. Clean prime-coated items as required for finish painting.
D. Constmction Waste Management: Manage constmction waste in accordance with
provisions of Section 01524 Constmction Waste Management.
END OF SECTION 055000
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000-10
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
City of Carlsbod Project No. 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
SECTION 057300 - DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SECTION INCLUDES
1.3
Welded stainless steel ornamental handrails and railings.
1. Includes stair handrails and handrail modifications, guardrails between the mezzanine
and the marketplace.
RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 062000 - Finish Carpentry: Wood handrails.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for handrails and railings. Furnish setting drawings,
templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts,
anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or
masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
1. If practical, provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site.
1.5 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule installation so handrails and railings are mounted only on completed walls. Do
not support temporarily by any means that do not satisfy stmctural performance
requirements.
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Manufacturer's product lines of railings assembled from standard components.
2. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include stmctural
analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for
their preparation.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required.
1. Provide for each type of exposed finish required, prepared on 6-inch long section of
railing component fabricated from metal indicated for the Work.
2. Fittings and brackets.
3. Welded connections.
DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
057300-1
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Library
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research -t- Pianning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
D. Sustainabiiity Submittals:
1. Product Data for products having recycled content, documentation indicating
percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content.
a. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.
2. Product Data for each material, including its source, cost, and the fraction by weight
that is considered regional and that has been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as
well as manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site.
3. Product Data for field-applied touch up primers, paints, clear coatings, and
galvanizing agents, include printed statement of VOC content and chemical
components.
E. Stmctural Analysis: Provide calculations demonstrating compliance of pre-engineered
handrail and infill system with ADA and CBC, including stmctural analysis data signed and
sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Test Reports: Indicating handrails and railings comply with ASTM E985, based on
comprehensive testing of current products.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Arrange for installation of omamental metal specified in this
Section by the same firm that fabricated it.
B. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing omamental metal similar to that
indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as
sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
C. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to
practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing
engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those
performed for installations of handrails and railings that are similar to those indicated for
this Project in material, design, and extent.
D. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements
for system's aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are
indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and
assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining constmction.
Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more
methods including stmctural analysis, preconstmction testing, field testing, and in-service
performance.
E. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing through one source from a single
manufacturer.
F. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS Dl.6, "Stmctural Welding Code-Stainless Steel."
DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
057300-2
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbad Project No. 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
G. All connection fittings must be bolted, clamped or screwed. Handrail welds must be
completely seamless and invisible.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver handrails, guardrails, and railing systems and related components in protective
packaging.
B. Store components in a dry, well-ventilated, weathertight place to avoid damage from
moisture, abrasion and other constmction activities.
1.10 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify handrail and railing dimensions by field measurements before
fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule
with constmction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without
delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating railings
without field measurements. Coordinate wall and other contiguous constmction to
ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUSTAINABILITY MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS, GENERAL
A. Recycled Content: Provide products made from steel sheet with average recycled content
such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is
not less than 25 percent.
B. Local/Regional Materials: Give preference to manufacturer's whose facilities are within a
500 mile radius of the project site. Also give preference to materials that are harvested,
extracted, mined, quarried, etc. within a 500 mile radius of the project site.
C. VOC Content: Adhesives, sealants, paints, welding, and coatings applied on-site on the
interior of the building and products used on the interior of the building shall comply with
VOC limits.
1. Use materials that have the lowest possible VOC content in unhs of g/L when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis-of-Design: The design for the rail system includes welded bar/tube stock from
stainless steel. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a
comparable product by one of the following:
1. Basis-of-Design: HDI Railing Systems, Circum System.
2. Architectural Metal Works.
3. Blum, Julius & Co., Inc.
4. Blumcraft of Pittsburgh.
DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
057300-3
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbad Georgina Cole Library
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
2.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: In engineering railings to withstand stmctural loads indicated, determine
allowable design working stresses of railing materials based on the following:
1. Stainless Steel: 60 percent of minimum yield strength.
2. Steel: 72 percent of minimum yield strength.
B. Stmctural Performance: Provide handrails and guards complying with CBC 1607.7 that are
capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads at any point without damage or
permanent set for railing assemblies, wall rails, and attachments, and the following loads
and stresses within limits and under condhions indicated:
1. Handrails:
a. Uniform load of 50 Ibf/ ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction.
b. Concentrated load of 200 Ibf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction.
c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints,
overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.
1. Temperattire Change: 120 degF (67 degC), ambient; 180 degF (100 degC),
material surfaces.
D. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating
metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
2.4 METALS, GENERAL
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks,
roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.
B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Same metal and finish as supported rails, unless otherwise
indicated.
2.5 STAINLESS STEEL
A. Tubing: ASTM A554, Grade MT 304.
B. Pipe: ASTM A312/A312M, Grade TP 304.
C. Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar: ASTM A666, Type 304.
D. Bars and Shapes: ASTM A276, Type 304.
2.6 POSTS AND RAILINGS
A. Railings: Type 304 stainless steel tubing.
1. Diameter: 1-1 /2-inch outside diameter railings.
2. Tube Wah Thickness: 5/64-inch.
3. Finish: Bmshed, No. 4 finish.
DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
057300-4
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research -I- Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Project No. 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
B. Posts: Stainless steel tubes.
1. Diameter: 1-15/16-inches.
2. Finish: Bmshed, No. 4 finish.
C. Wood Handrails: See Section 062000.
D. Fittings: Stainless steel, sized to accommodate glass panel thickness, connected to post-
mounted height-adjustable panel holders with security pin according to manufacturer's
design, finish to match rails.
E. Wall Supports: 1/2-inch diameter supports designed to set handrail at 1-1/2-inches away
from finished wall surface as indicated on Drawings.
1. Fastening Base: 3-1/8-inch diameter rosette, stainless steel with finish to match rails.
2.7 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide the following:
1. Stainless-Steel Components: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners.
B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Constmction: Select fasteners of type, grade,
and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of
constmction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads.
2.8 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions,
member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to
support stmctural loads.
B. Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and
assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations.
Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that
maintain stmctural value of joined pieces.
C. Form work tme to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.
D. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar
items.
E. Mechanical Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and
fittings. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints.
1. Fabricate splice joints for field connection using an epoxy stmctural adhesive if this
is manufacturer's standard splicing method.
F. Form changes in direction as follows:
1. As detailed.
G. Provide retums at ends of handrails, unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of retums,
unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch (6 mm) or less.
DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
057300-5
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
H. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous
fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work, unless otherwise
indicated.
2.9 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipment.
2.10 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES
A. Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish.
B. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish indicated, free of cross scratches.
1. Run grain of directionally textured finishes with long dimension of each piece.
C. Directional Satin Finish: No. 4.
D. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign
matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints.
B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately
in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of
rack.
1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or
finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or
other means without further cutting or fitting.
2. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from
parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in
12 feet (5 mm in 3 m).
C. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints.
D. Fastening to In-Place Constmction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary
for securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place constmction.
DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
057300-6
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbad Project No. 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
3.2 RAILING CONNECTIONS
A. Nonwelded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently connecting
railing components. Use wood blocks and padding to prevent damage to railing members
and fittings. Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using plastic cement filler
colored to match finish of railings.
3.3 ATTACHING HANDRAILS TO WALLS
A. Attach handrails to glass supported railings with brackets. Provide brackets with 1-1/2-inch
(38-mm) clearance from inside face of handrail and finished glass surface.
B. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support stmctural
loads.
C. Secure wood handrails to guard railing as detailed on Drawings.
D. Secure wall brackets to building constmction as detailed on Drawings.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Constmction Waste Management: Manage constmction waste in accordance with
provisions of Section 01524 Constmction Waste Management.
B. Clean stainless steel by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap, rinsing with clean
water, and wiping dry.
C. Clean and polish glass.
D. Clean wood rails by wiping with a damp cloth and then wiping dry.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during constmction period with temporary
protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at
time of Substantial Completion.
B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and constmction period so no evidence
remains of correction work. Retum items that cannot be refinished in field to shop; make
required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units.
END OF SECTION 057300
DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
057300-7
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Library
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
057300-8
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
SECTION 060121 - FINISH CARPENTRY RESTORATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Cleaning and refinishing of existing woodwork, including banding along mezzanine edges and
in the Community Room.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 062000 - Finish Carpentry.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data for the following:
1. Chemical stripper.
2. Epoxy consolidants and filler.
3. Wood fin and putty materials.
4. Waterproof glue.
5. Wood preservative.
1.5 MOCK-UPS
A. Perform sample restoration work of the following general processes on existing materials in an
area directed by the Architect, of sufficient scope to demonstrate the effectiveness of proposed
materials and techniques.
1. Demonstrate each process to remove existing finishes.
2. Demonstrate each process of patching, plugging, and cut-ins.
3. Demonstrate each process of refinishing.
B. Prior to commencement of fabrication of new, replacement wood components and shapes,
prepare and obtain approval of representative samples including, but not limited to the
following:
1. New profiles.
2. Typical trim joinery.
C. Obtain written approval from Architect for all representative visual qualities before proceeding
with work.
1. Make modifications to methods and techniques used as required to achieve intended
results.
FINISH CARPENTRY RESTORATION
060121-1
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Library
City of Carlsbad Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Wood for Repair of Existing Wood Components: See Section 062000.
B. Lumber: Water-repellent preservative treated after machining in accordance with NWWDA,
LS.4.
C. Chemical Stripper: Prosoco, "Enviro Stripper No. 3 or No. 4"; 3M, "Safest Stripper", or
approved equal.
D. Epoxies, Consolidants and Adhesives: As manufactured by Sika Corp.; Abatron, Inc., or
approved equal.
E. Wood Fill: As manufactured by Abatron, Inc., "Woodepox #1", or approved equal.
F. Putty: Linseed oil type, complying with FS TT-P-791, tinted to match surface finish color.
G. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Fabricated from nonmagnetic stainless steel or hot-dip zinc
coated steel compljdng with the requirements of ASTM B633 for SC 3 (severe) service
condition.
H. Fasteners: Comply with NWWDA I.S.2 for fabrication and with manufacturer's
recommendations and standard industry practices for type and size of installation fasteners.
I. Use zinc-coated or nonferrous nails and screws for window fabrication and installation.
2.2 REPAIR OF WOOD COMPONENTS
A. Make repairs to match existing components. Where transparent finishes are scheduled to be
applied, use wood of the same species, grade, cut, color tone and grain pattem.
B. Use the same carpentry methods exhibited in the existing work to make repairs.
C. Use only non-ferrous fasteners and separate dissimilar metals using approved methods.
D. Make wood patches in boat or diamond shape so as to minimize those joint surfaces at ninety
degrees to the members' grain direction.
2.3 FABRICATION OF NEW COMPONENTS
A. Fabricate work to designs, dimensions and details shown on the Drawings and approved shop
drawings. Replicate existing profiles except where specifically indicated.
B. Machine new and replacement woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details to match existing.
C. Use solid stock material that is well matched for color and grain to existing components to
remain.
FINISH CARPENTRY RESTORATION
060121-2
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbad Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
D. Treat millwork exposed to weather or in contact with dissimilar materials with wood
preservative.
2.4 FINISHING
A. Use applications and techniques best suited to match the desired finish.
B. Blotchy, uneven stain application, orange peel, mns, drips and any otherwise defective finish
will be deemed unacceptable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 STRIPPING WOOD
A. Use only environmentally friendly, neutral and solvent based strippers; alkaline based products
are not acceptable.
B. Apply chemical stripper in accordance with manufacturer's instmctions for each wood species
and type of coating.
C. Test surfaces with the process and resuhs recorded to provide the least intmsive and damaging
methods for stripping trellis components.
1. Obtain Architect's written approval for the selected method before proceeding.
D. Completely remove existing finish using muhiple applications of approved stripper. Use hand
scrapers for this purpose without gouging, splintering or otherwise damaging sound wood.
E. Thoroughly remove stripping residuals, including wax.
F. Test stripped surfaces for evidence of acids and alkali. Neutralize surfaces found not to be pH
neutral and retest.
G. Sand surfaces by hand with steel wool and 250 grit sandpaper to remove all signs or raised grain.
Seal exposed surfaces with an approved sanding sealer.
H. Power Sanding:
1. Use of power sanders of any kind during stripping and prep of existing materials is
limited to vibrating finish sanders on flat surfaces.
2. Power sanders of all types, including vibrator, orbital and beh is forbidden on all wood
work with rounded, raised or other decorative profiles easily damaged by power sanders.
I. Prime thoroughly dried wood surfaces, fill in all bolt or nail holes and cracks. After primer has
dried, sand between coats.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. See Section 062000 for installation of new wood trims.
FINISH CARPENTRY RESTORATION
060121-3
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
3.3 WOOD RESTORATION
A. Replace missing components as required.
B. Fill in miscellaneous holes, cracks and gouges in sash with epoxy wood filler.
C. Sand surface to be filled to clean, bare wood.
D. Bmsh apply epoxy consolidant to wood.
E. Mix epoxy filler according to manufacturer's instmctions.
F. Apply epoxy filler when consolidant is tacky but not hard.
G. Fill flush with surface of wood, matching profile of original wood. Sand to smooth surface after
filler is completely hard.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Constmction Waste Management: Manage constmction waste in accordance with provisions of
Section 01524 Constmction Waste Management.
END OF SECTION 060121
3
FINISH CARPENTRY RESTORATION
060121-4
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbad Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
SECTION 061053 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers.
B. Wood furring and grounds.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 060121 - Finish Carpentry Restoration: Cleaning and refinishing of existing
woodwork, including banding along mezzanine edges and in the Community Room.
B. Section 062000 -Finish Carpentry: Nonstmctural carpentry items exposed to view and not
specified in another Section.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2-inches nominal (38 mm actual) or greater but less than 5-
inches nominal (114 mm actual) in least dimension.
B. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the
following:
1. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority.
2. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
3. WWPA: Westem Wood Products Association.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component
materials and dimensions and include constmction and application details.
1. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture
content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to
Project site.
2. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of
treatment.
B. Sustainabiiity Submittals:
1. Product Data for each material, including its source, cost, and the fraction by weight
that is considered regional and that has been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as
well as manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site.
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
061053-1
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
2. Certificates for Chain-of-custody certificates certifying that products specified to be
made from certified wood comply with forest certification requirements. Include
evidence that mill is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification
body.
a. Include statement indicating costs for each certified wood product.
3. Product Data for installation adhesives, including printed statement of VOC content
and chemical composition of each product used.
4. Product Data the following:
a. For each composite-wood product used, documentation indicating that the
bonding agent contains no urea formaldehyde.
b. For each adhesive used, documentation indicating that the adhesive contains
no urea formaldehyde.
C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with building code in
effect for Project:
1. Power-driven fasteners.
2. Powder-actuated fasteners.
3. Expansion anchors.
4. Metal framing anchors.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody
by an FSC-accredited certification body.
B. Forest Certification: Provide components made with not less than 50 percent of wood
products obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply
with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship."
1. Dimension lumber framing.
2. Miscellaneous lumber.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Stack lumber flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for
air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
B. Deliver interior wood materials that are to be exposed to view only after building is
enclosed and weatherproof, wet work other than painting is dry, and HVAC system is
operating and maintaining temperature and humidity at occupancy levels.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUSTAINABILITY MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS, GENERAL
A. Local/Regional Materials: Give preference to manufacturer's whose facilities are within a
500 mile radius of the project site. Also give preference to materials that are harvested,
extracted, mined, quarried, etc. within a 500 mile radius of the project site.
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
061053-2
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbad Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set-April 10, 2015
B. Forest Certification: Provide components made with not less than 50 percent of wood
products obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply
with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship."
C. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by material manufacturer for products and
substrate conditions indicated.
1. Use materials that have the lowest possible VOC content in units of g/L when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
D. Composite Wood and Agrifiber: Use only composite wood and agrifiber products free of
added urea formaldehyde resin binders.
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of
other constmction, including the following:
1. Blocking.
2. Nailers.
3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.
4. Cants.
5. Furring.
B. For hems of dimension lumber size, provide Constmction or No. 2 grade lumber with 19
percent maximum moisture content of any species.
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
2. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for
moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum
dressed sizes for dry lumber.
3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
C. For exposed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any of
the following species and grades:
1. Hem-fir or hem-fir (north), Constmction or No. 2 Common grade; NLGA, WCLIB,
or WWPA.
D. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and the
following species and grades:
1. Westem woods. Standard or No. 3 Common grade; WCLIB or WWPA.
E. For blocking not used for attachment of other constmction Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade
lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects
that will interfere with its attachment and purpose.
F. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other constmction, select and cut lumber to
eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.
G. For fiirring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots
capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
061053-3
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
City of Corlsbad Controct 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research -I- Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
2.3 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS
A. Telecommunications and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: AWPA Standard C27 for
Tj^e A use and Standard DB-90 free from defects, fire-retardant treated and bearing the
Underwriters Laboratories label, or stamp, attesting to the FRS rating, in size indicated or, if
not indicated, not less than 8' by 4' by 3/4-inch nominal.
1. Provide kiln-dried plywood with maximum moisture content of 15 percent or less.
2. Underwriters Laboratories FRS Rating:
a. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E84.
1) Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.
2) Smoke Developed: 25 or less.
3. The fire retardant chemicals used shall be halogen and sulfate free.
4. Provide plywood that meets the surface buming characteristics testing requirements
of NFPA 255.
5. Do not paint backing panels unless approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
2.4 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements
specified in this Article for material and manufacture.
1. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative
treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc
coating complying with ASTM A153/A153M.
B. Nails: ASTMF1667.
C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NESNER-272.
D. Wood Screws: ASME B 18.6.1.
E. Screws for Fastening to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C954, except with wafer
heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being
fastened.
F. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1 (ASME B18.2.3.8M).
G. Bolts: Steel bohs complying with ASTM A307, Grade A (ASTM A153/A153M, Property
Class 4.6); with ASTM A563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.
H. Expansion Anchors: Anchor boh and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with
capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when
installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in
concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E488/E488M conducted by a qualified
independent testing and inspecting agency.
2.5 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS
A. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with
ASTM A653/A653M, G60 (Z180) coating designation.
1. Use for interior locations where stainless steel is not indicated.
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
061053-4
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Plonning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Adhesives for Gluing Furring and Sleepers to Concrete or Masonry: Formulation
complying with ASTM D3498 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer.
1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according
to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, tme to line, cut, and fitted.
Fit carpentry to other constmction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.
Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with
requirements for attaching other constmction.
B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's "Details for Conventional Wood Frame
Constmction," unless otherwise indicated.
C. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing to comply with manufacturer's written
instmctions.
D. Do not splice stmctural members between supports, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials,
fixtures, specialty items, and trim.
1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at comers and intersections
where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels.
Space clips not more than 16-inches (406 mm) oc.
F. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or
with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere
with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints
or optimum joint arrangement.
G. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated
lumber.
1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water.
2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water.
H. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated,
complying with the following:
1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.
2. Table 23-II-B-l, "Nailing Schedule," and Table 23-II-B-2, "Wood Stmctural Panel
Roof Sheathing Nailing Schedule," in CBC.
I. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not
fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
061053-5
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Library
City of Carlsbod Controct 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set-April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting
wood; do not countersink nail heads, unless otherwise indicated.
3.2 WOOD GROUND, SLEEPER, BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION
A. Install where indicated and where required for screeding or attaching other work. Form to
shapes indicated and cut as required for tme line and level of attached work. Coordinate
locations with other work involved.
B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with
surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure-preservative-treated, key-beveled lumber
not less than 1-1/2-inches (38 mm) wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground
to exact thickness of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required.
3.3 WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION
A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as
required for tolerance of finish work.
B. Furring to Receive Plywood or Hardboard Paneling: Install l-by-3-inch nominal- (19-by-
63-mm actual-) size furring horizontally at 24-inches (610 mm) 600 mm oc.
C. Furring to Receive Gypsum Board: Install l-by-2-inch nominal- (19-by-38-mm actual-)
size furring vertically at 16-inches (406 mm) 400 mm oc.
3.4 PLYWOOD BACKBOARD INSTALLATION
A. Keep plywood dry at all times during transit, storage (on site) and installation. If plywood
does become wet, either replace plywood or dry plywood to maximum 15 percent moisture
content prior to installation.
B. Install plywood onto the walls using fasteners appropriate for the wall type (e.g., concrete
anchors for a concrete wall).
C. Install plywood such that the fire rated symbol/marking is clearly visible.
D. Install plywood onto the walls as shown on Drawings. If not noted, then install plywood
from 6 inches to 102 inches, AFF.
E. Install electrical and telecommunication outlets flush to the plywood backboard.
F. Paint plywood with a bright (white) low-gloss paint where permitted by authorities having
jurisdiction. Mask the plywood's fire rated symbol such that the symbol is still visible after
painting.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Constmction Waste Management: Manage constmction waste in accordance with
provisions of Section 01524 Constmction Waste Management.
MISCELUNEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
061053-6
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
END OF SECTION 061053
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
061053-7
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Library
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
061053-8
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
City of Carlsbod Project No. 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
SECTION 062000 - FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Door trims.
B. Window trims.
C. Exterior and interior standing and mnning trim.
D. Interior wood bulkhead paneling.
E. Wood trim at wall caps.
F. Wood handrails at metal guardrail between the mezzanine and the Marketplace.
G. Slatwall system.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 060121 - Finish Carpentry Restoration: Cleaning and refinishing of existing
woodwork, including banding along mezzanine edges and in the Community Room.
B. Section 061053 - Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking, furring, sleepers, cants,
nailers, and plywood backer boards; wood treatments.
C. Section 064100 - Architectural Woodwork: Casework and countertops.
D. Section 064216 - Wood Veneer Paneling: Wood paneling and wood base.
E. Section 064316 - Wood Railings.
F. Section 081416 - Flush Wood Doors: Pre-hung wood doors.
G. Section 102813 - Commercial Toilet Accessories: Janitor closet shelf/mop holder units.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Inspection agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:
1. NHLA - National Hardwood Lumber Association.
2. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority.
3. RIS - Redwood Inspection Service.
FINISH CARPENTRY
062000-1
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Library
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research -I- Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 201 5 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
4. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
5. WWPA - Westem Wood Products Association.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit data and samples for each type of finish required.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit for each item of architectural woodwork. Indicate dimensions,
details of constmction, method of connection to adjacent constmction, finishes, accessories,
and hardware.
C. Samples: Submit the following:
1. For each species and cut of lumber and panel products with non-factory-applied
finish, with 1/2 of exposed surface finished, 50 sq. in. (300 sq. cm) for lumber and 8
by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm) for panels.
2. For each finish system and color of lumber and panel products with factory-applied
finish, 50 sq. in. (300 sq. cm) for lumber and 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm) for
panels.
3. Four samples of each cut and species of wood to be used, minimum size of 6" x 12".
4. Four additional samples of what will be used by painting trade for staining samples.
5. Wood Wall Caps: Provide 12-inch long samples of wall wood demonstrating profile
and grain. Provide each sample of size large enough to demonstrate 1/2 of exposed
surface unfinished and remaining 1/2 finished, for each type of wood and finish
specified.
D. Sustainabiiity Submittals:
1. Product Data for each material, including its source, cost, and the fraction by weight
that is considered regional and that has been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as
well as manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site.
2. Certificates for Chain-of-custody certificates certifying that products specified to be
made from certified wood comply with forest certification requirements. Include
evidence that mill is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification
body.
a. Include statement indicating costs for each certified wood product.
3. Product Data for installation adhesives, including printed statement of VOC content
and chemical composition of each product used.
4. Product Data for the following:
a. For each composite-wood product used, documentation indicating that the
bonding agent contains no urea formaldehyde.
b. For each adhesive used, documentation indicating that the adhesive contains
no urea formaldehyde.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: Wl-certified compliance certificates.
FINISH CARPENTRY
062000-2
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbad Project No. 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate interior
carpentry items similar to that indicated for this Project and whose products have a record
of successfial in-service performance.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody
by an FSC-accredited certification body.
C. Forest Certification: Provide components made with not less than 50 percent of wood
products obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply
with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship."
D. AWS Quality Standard: Comply with the specified grade(s) of interior architectural
woodwork indicated for constmction, finishes, and installation, specified section(s), and
applicable requirements of the current edition of the "Architectural Woodwork Standards"
by AWI and WI.
1. Provide Wl-certified compliance labels and certificates indicating that
woodwork, including installation, complies with requirements of grades specified.
1.8 DELFVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect materials against weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber,
plywood, and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation.
Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings.
B. Deliver interior finish carpentry materials only when environmental conditions meet
requirements specified for installation areas. If interior finish carpentry materials must be
stored in other than installation areas, store only where environmental conditions meet
requirements specified for installation areas.
1.9 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior finish carpentry materials until
building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in space is completed and nominally dry,
and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at
occupancy levels during the remainder of the constmction period.
B. Do not install finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
FINISH CARPENTRY
062000-3
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUSTAINABILITY MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS, GENERAL
A. Local/Regional Materials: Give preference to manufacturer's whose facilities are within a
500 mile radius of the project site. Also give preference to materials that are harvested,
extracted, mined, quarried, etc. within a 500 mile radius of the project site.
B. Forest Certification: Provide components made with not less than 50 percent of wood
products obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply
with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship."
C. Certified Wood: Use wood based products made from wood obtained from forests certified
by an FSC accredited certification body to comply with the Forest Stewardship Councils
"Principles and Criteria."
D. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by material manufacturer for products and
substrate conditions indicated.
1. Use materials that have the minimum VOC content in units of g/L when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
E. Composite Wood and Agrifiber: Use only composite wood and agrifiber products free of
added urea formaldehyde resin binders.
2.2 MATEIOALS
A. Lumber Standards: Comply with PS 20 "American Softwood Lumber Standard" for lumber
and with applicable grading mles of inspection agencies.
B. Hardwood Plywood: ANSLHPMA HP; graded in accordance with WI, veneer core
material; type of glue recommended for application, and containing no urea formaldehyde.
1. Formaldehyde Emission Levels: Comply with formaldehyde emission requirements
of HPMA FE for hardwood plywood.
C. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Pl3rwood): HPVA HP-1, made with adhesive
containing no urea formaldehyde.
D. MDF: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130, made with binder containing no urea-formaldehyde resin.
E. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard and
manufacturer's recommendations for moisture content of finish carpentry.
2.3 EXTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM
A. Lumber Trim for Semitransparent-Stained Applications: Kiln-dried lumber with surfaced
(smooth) face and of one of the following species and grade:
1. Clear redwood; RIS.
2. Clear Heart Grade A westem red cedar; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
3. Grade 1 Common, pressure-preservative-treated hem-fir; NLGA, WCLIB, or
WWPA.
FINISH CARPENTRY
062000-4
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbad Project No. 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set-April 10, 2015
B. Lumber Trim for Painted Applications: Kiln-dried, solid lumber with surfaced (smooth)
face and of the following species and grade:
1. Clear Grade B redwood; RIS.
2. Grade A westem red cedar; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
3. Grade Prime or D finish /I Common 11 Common hem-fir; NLGA, WCLIB, or
WWPA.
2.4 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM
A. Softwood Lumber Trim for Transparent Finish (Stain or Clear Finish): Kiln-dried finished
lumber (S4S) of one of the following species and grades:
1. Grade D Select (Quality) Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, or sugar pine; NLGA or
WWPA.
2. Grade D Select white woods; WWPA.
3. Grade Superior or C & Btr finish, Douglas fir-larch or Douglas fir south; NLGA,
WCLIB, or WWPA.
B. Hardwood Lumber Trim for Transparent Finish (Stain or Clear Finish): Clear /Grade A
finish, kiln-dried, red oak/ white maple /alder /aspen, basswood, cottonwood, sap gum,
white maple, or yellow poplar finished lumber (S4S), selected for compatible grain and
color /and meeting AWS requirements for transparent finish.
C. Lumber Trim for Opaque Finish (Painted): Finished lumber (S4S), either finger-jointed or
solid lumber, of one of the following species and grades:
1. Grade 1 Common (Colonial) Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, or sugar pine;
NLGA or WWPA.
2. Grade 1 Common white woods; WWPA.
3. Grade Superior or C & Btr finish, Douglas fir-larch or Douglas fir south; NLGA,
WCLIB, or WWPA.
4. Grade A Finish alder, aspen, basswood, cottonwood, gum, magnolia, soft maple,
sycamore, tupelo, or yellow poplar; NHLA.
2.5 WOOD WALL CAPS AND HANDRAILS
A. Wood Wall Caps: AWS Custom Grade, clear, kiln-dried White oak plain sawn or cut; of
shape and diameter indicated, solid.
B. Interior Railings: Clear, kiln-dried hard maple of shape and diameter to match existing,
solid, transparent finish.
2.6 SLATWALL DISPLAY SYSTEM
A. Slatwall: Prefinished Slotted Panels: Marlite Displawall; medium density fiberboard with
engineered grooves designed to fit standard merchandising fixtures.
1. Fiberboard: 48 pcf (769 kg/cu m) density; intemal bond strength of 110 psi (758
kPa); formaldehyde emission of 0.3 ppm or less; complying with 24 CFR 3280.
2. Panel Size: 48 by 96 inches (1220 by 2438 mm), plus minus 0.0625 inch (1.6 mm),
with squareness tolerance of 0.125 inch (3 mm) on diagonal.
3. Thickness: 3/4 inch (19 mm) plus/minus 0.008 inch (0.2 mm).
4. Groove Spacing: 4 inches (100 mm) on center, plus/minus 0.015 inch (0.4 mm).
FINISH CARPENTRY
062000-5
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Library
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
5. Surface Finish: Architectural grade natural wood veneer, 0.035 inch (0.9 mm) thick,
cold press bonded with balancing sheet; species selected from manufacturer's
standard selection.
6. Surface Color/Pattem: As selected from manufacturer's standard selection.
7. Groove Finish: Bmshed Aluminum.
2.7 SHOP FINISHING
A. Finish carpentry items at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Defer only final
touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation.
B. Prime woodwork for opaque finish with one coat of wood primer compatible with specified
topcoats.
C. Exterior Transparent Finish: Stain, as selected by Architect.
D. Exterior Opaque Finish: Paint, as selected by Architect.
E. Interior Transparent Finish:
1. Grade: Custom.
2. AWS Finish System 3: Score I24-T, lacquer pre-catalyzed.
3. Staining: Match approved sample for color.
4. Sheen: Satin, 31-45 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D523.
F. Interior Opaque Finish:
1. Grade: Custom.
2. AWS Finish System 9: Score 133-0, UV curable, acrylated epoxy, polyester or
urethane.
3. Color: To be selected.
4. Sheen: Satin, 31-45 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D523.
2.8 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners for Exterior Finish Carpentry: Stainless steel, non-corrosive aluminum or hot-dip
galvanized box or casing nails at exterior locations. Provide pre-finished nails in color to
match where face nailing is unavoidable.
1. Where galvanized finish is indicated, provide fasteners and anchorages with hot-dip
galvanized coating complying with ASTM A153/A153M.
B. Fasteners for Interior Finish Carpentry: Nails, screws, and other anchoring devices of type,
size, material, and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment,
concealed where possible.
1. Where galvanized finish is indicated, provide fasteners and anchorages with hot-dip
galvanized coating complying with ASTM A153/A153M.
C. Anchors, Nails, and Screws: Select the material, type, size and finish required by each
substrate for secure anchorage; provide toothed steel or lead expansion bolt screws for
drilled-in-place anchors.
FINISH CARPENTRY
062000-6
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbad Project No. 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
D. Wood Putty: Standard industry grade for use in plugging fastener holes where required on
Drawings, of color to match wood stain or finish; paintable where applicable.
E. Glue: Aliphatic- or phenolic-resin wood glue recommended by manufacturer for general
carpentry use.
1. VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives and Glues: Use installation adhesives that
comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
a. Wood Glues: 30 g/L.
b. Contact Adhesive: 250 g/L.
F. Wood Filler: Synthetic wood filler, low-VOC and with no added urea formaldehyde, tinted
to match surface finish color, sand to surface, finish, as manufactured by Abatron, Inc.,
Wood Tech, or accepted equivalent.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.
B. Condition finish carpentry to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas
before installation for a minimum of 24 hours.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install interior finish carpentry level, plumb, tme, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use
concealed shims where necessary for alignment.
1. Scribe and cut interior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts
as recommended by manufacturer.
2. Countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand where face fastening is
unavoidable.
3. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2438 mm) for level and plumb.
Install adjoining interior finish carpentry with 1/32-inch (0.8-mm) maximum offset
for flush installation and 1/16-inch (1.5-mm) maximum offset for reveal installation.
4. Coordinate interior finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it.
Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate interior finish
carpentry.
B. Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately
seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements.
1. Do not use manufactured units with defective surfaces, sizes, or pattems.
FINISH CARPENTRY
062000-7
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Library
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 1 0, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
3.4 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION
A. Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum
lengths of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches (610 mm) long, except
where necessary. Stagger joints in adjacent and related standing and mnning trim. Cope at
retums and miter at comers to produce tight-fitting joints with full-surface contact
throughout length of joint. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints. Plane backs of casings to
provide uniform thickness across joints, where necessary for alignment.
1. Match color and grain pattem across joints.
2. Install trim after gypsum board joint finishing operations are completed.
3. Drill pilot holes in hardwood before fastening to prevent splitting. Fasten to prevent
movement or warping. Countersink fastener heads on exposed carpentry work and
fill holes.
4. Fit exterior joints to exclude water.
3.5 WOOD WALL CAP INSTALLATION
A. Grade: Install wall caps to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2
for fabrication of type of woodwork involved.
B. Assemble wall caps and complete fabrication at Project site to comply with requirements
for fabrication in Part 2, to extent that it was not completed in the shop.
C. Install caps level, plumb, tme, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims.
D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged
finish at cuts.
E. Tolerances: Install wall caps with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm)
variation from a straight line.
3.6 SLATWALL EsJSTALLATION
A. Install all materials in strict accordance with the manufacturer's installation instmctions
with hardware straight, plumb, and level.
1. Anchor units rigidly and securely in place.
2. Cut sheets to meet existing supports.
B. Fasten initial bottom panel to the wall with #6 or #7 bugle head drjrwall screws. Install a
minimum of one screw every third slot (or 9" (228mm)) vertically and every stud
horizontally, typically every 16" (40.64cm) on centers horizontally (maximum 24"
(600mm) on centers horizontally). Each 4' x 8' panel shall have minimum of 42 screws
secured to studs or fiarring.
1. Where screws do not hit the studs, fasten with adhesive in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
2. Screws must be installed thm the panel grooves.
3. Slatwall panels without inserts do not require pre-drilling.
4. Slatwall panels with inserts require 5/32" pre-drilling of holes thm the insert and
panel before fastening. 0^
FINISH CARPENTRY
062000-8
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Project No. 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
C. Avoid contamination of the panel faces with adhesives, solvents or cleaners during
installation.
3.7 ADJUSTING
A. Replace finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements. Finish
carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no
evidence of repair or refinishing. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
3.8 CLEANING
A. Clean all installed items of pencil or ink marks.
B. Clean finish carpentry on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up factory-applied
finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.
C. Clear the work area of debris, using containers provided by the General Contractor.
D. Leave area of work broom clean.
E. Constmction Waste Management: Manage constmction waste in accordance with
provisions of Section 01524 Constmction Waste Management.
3.9 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage from weather and other causes during remainder of
the constmction period.
B. Remove and replace finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold
damaged.
1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
END OF SECTION 062000
FINISH CARPENTRY
062000-9
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Library
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Plonning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 201 5 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
FINISH CARPENTRY
062000-10
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgino Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
SECTION 064100 - ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Plastic laminate cabinets.
B. Wood veneer cabinets and casework.
C. Solid-surfacing-material countertops.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 062000 - Finish Carpentry: Finished wood carpentry trims.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Exposed surfaces include all surfaces visible when:
1. Drawers and opaque doors (if any) are closed.
2. Areas behind clear glass doors.
3. Bottoms of cabinets 42-inches or more above finished floor.
4. Top of cabinets below 78-inches above finished floor.
B. Semi-exposed surfaces include the following:
1. Open opaque doors or extended drawers.
2. Bottoms of cabinets that are more than 30-inches and less than 42-inches above
finished floor.
C. Concealed surfaces include the following:
1. Surfaces not visible after installation.
2. Bottoms of cabinets less than 30-inches above finished floor.
3. Tops of cabinets over 78-inches above finish floor and not visible from an upper
level.
4. Stretchers, blocking, and components concealed by drawers.
1.5
A.
COORDINATION
Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other
related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural
woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated.
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
064100-1
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbad Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
1. ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including cabinet hardware and
accessories and finishing materials and processes.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for each item of architectural woodwork. Indicate
dimensions, details of constmction, finishes, and hardware.
1. Show details full size.
2. Show locations and sizes of fiirring, blocking, and hanging strips, including
concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections.
C. Samples for Verification:
1. Veneer-faced panel products with or for transparent finish, 12 by 24 inches (300 by
600 mm), for each species and cut. Include at least one face-veneer seam and edge
condition, finished as specified.
2. Plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), for each type, color, pattem, and
surface finish, with 1 sample applied to core material and specified edge material
applied to 1 edge.
3. Resin composite, 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), for each type, color, pattem, and
surface finish.
4. Composite panel shelving material, 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), for each type,
color, pattem, and surface finish, with edge banding on 1 edge.
5. Thermoset decorative-panels, 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), for each type, color,
pattem, and surface finish, with edge banding on 1 edge.
D. Sustainabiiity Submittals:
1. Product Data for each material, including its source, cost, and the fraction by weight
that is considered regional and that has been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as
well as manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site.
2. Certificates for Chain-of-custody certificates certifying that products specified to be
made from certified wood comply with forest certification requirements. Include
evidence that mill is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification
body.
a. Include statement indicating costs for each certified wood product.
3. Product Data for installation adhesives, including printed statement of VOC content
and chemical composition of each product used.
4. Product Data for each product to be used as proof that each product meets the
requirements of the GREENGUARD Environmental Instittite's GREENGUARD
certification.
a. Include printed statement of VOC content and chemical components.
5. Product Data for the following:
a. For each composite-wood product used, documentation indicating that the
bonding agent contains no urea formaldehyde.
b. For each adhesive used, documentation indicating that the adhesive contains
no urea formaldehyde.
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
064100-2
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research -I- Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of solid surfacing certifying that products
fumished comply with requirements.
B. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with
project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other
information specified.
C. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: Wl-certified compliance
certificates.
1.8 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing architectural solid surfacing
similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service
performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
B. Source Limitations: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided
responsibility for production of interior architectural woodwork with sequence-matched
wood veneers.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of
custody by an FSC-accredited certification body.
D. Forest Certification: Provide components made with not less than 50 percent of wood
products obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply
with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship."
E. AWS Quality Standard: Comply with the specified grade(s) of interior architectural
woodwork indicated for constmction, finishes, and installation, specified section(s), and
applicable requirements of the current edition of the "Architectural Woodwork Standards"
by AWI and WI.
1. Provide Wl-certified compliance labels and certificates indicating that
woodwork, including installation, complies with requirements of grades specified.
2. Provide Seismic certificates indicating that casework is installed with all required
wall blocking and that fastener size, frequency and locations requirements have been
met.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage
woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other
than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with
requirements specified in "Site Conditions" Article.
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
064100-3
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
1.10
A.
B.
SITE CONDITIONS
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed,
wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and
relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder ofthe constmction period.
Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other constmction, verify
dimensions of other constmction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with constmction
progress to avoid delaying the Work.
1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by
field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop
Drawings.
C. Field Measurements: All casework dimensions shall be field verified prior to fabrication.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUSTAINABILITY MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS, GENERAL
A. Local/Regional Materials: Give preference to manufacturer's whose facilities are within a
500 mile radius of the project site. Also give preference to materials that are harvested,
extracted, mined, quarried, etc. within a 500 mile radius of the project site.
B. Forest Certification: Provide components made with not less than 50 percent of wood
products obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply
with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship."
C. Certified Wood: Use wood based products made from wood obtained from forests certified
by an FSC accredited certification body to comply with the Forest Stewardship Councils
"Principles and Criteria."
D. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by material manufacturer for products and
substrate conditions indicated.
1. Use materials that have the minimum VOC content in units of g/L when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
E. Composite Wood and Agrifiber: Use only composite wood and agrifiber products free of
added urea formaldehyde resin binders.
2.2 MATERLA.LS
A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWS's quality standard for
each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Wood Veneer Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: Maple, plain sawn or sliced.
C. Wood Species for Opaque Finish: Any closed-grain hardwood.
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
064100-4
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Controct 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
D. Hardwood and Softwood Lumber: Custom graded in accordance with AWS; average
moisture content of 8 percent.
1. Species: Any closed-grain hardwood. For use at concealed areas only.
E. Hardwood Plywood: ANSI/HPVA HP-1; veneer core material; type of glue recommended
for application.
1. Formaldehyde Emission Levels: No urea formaldehyde.
2. Wood Veneer Species and Cut for Shelving: Douglas fir, plain sawn or sliced.
3. Wood Veneer Species and Cut for Casework: White maple, plain sawn or sliced.
4. Face Grade: Grade A.
5. Thickness: 3/4-inch.
6. Veneer Core: 5-ply.
7. Cut: Sliced-vertical grain.
8. Back Grade: Minimum Grade 2.
F. MDF: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130, made with binder containing no urea-formaldehyde resin.
1. Acceptable Products: SierraPine's "Medex," "Medex NC," and "Medite fl" and
Weyerhaeuser's "Premier Plus".
G. Cabinet Interiors, Shelves, and Counter Substrate: 3/4-inch Medite II, interior grade wood-
based composite panels manufactured from softwood fibers with minimum 90% pre-
consumer recycled wood combined with formaldehyde-free synthetic resin, with clear
sealer.
H. Plastic Laminate:
1. High-pressure decorative laminate complying with NEMA LD 3.
2. Plastic Laminate for Exposed Surfaces: GP-50 for nonpostformed surfaces; PF-42
for postformed surfaces.
3. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited
to, the following:
a. Abet Laminati.
b. Panolam Industries; Nevamar
c. Wilsonart Intemational.
4. Plastic Laminate Materials: Provide only plastic laminate materials that are
GREENGUARD Certified.
a. Individual VOC's: <0.1 TLV.
b. Total VOC's: <0.5 mg/m3
c. Formaldehyde: <0.05 ppm
d. 4-Pheylcyclohexene: <0.0065 mg/m3
e. Total Aldehydes: <0.1 ppm
I. Thermoset Decorative Panels (Melamine): Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard
finished with thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper complying with
LMASAT-1.
1. Provide polyester edge banding complying with LMAEDG-1 on components with
exposed or semiexposed edges.
2. Color: White, unless indicated otherwise on Drawings.
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
064100-5
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Reseorch + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
J. Solid-Surfacing Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with
ISSFA-2.
1. Type: Standard type.
2. Colors and Pattems: Match Architect's sample.
3. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited
to, the following:
a. Corian; DuPont Commercial Surfaces.
b. Surell Solid Surfacing; Formica Corporation.
c. Gibraltar Solid Surface; Wilsonart Intemational.
K. Wall-Hung Countertop Supports: Cold rolled steel supports.
1. Angle Support Brackets:
a. Design: Straight gusset stiffener between support flanges of angle.
2. Floating Countertop Support Brackets:
a. Thickness: 1/2-inch.
b. Style: Flat angle.
L. Adhesive: FS MMM-A-130 contact adhesive; type recommended by laminate
manufacturer to suit application.
1. VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives and Glues: Use installation adhesives that
comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
a. Wood Glues: 30 g/L.
b. Contact Adhesive: 250 g/L.
M. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, Fasteners, and Screws: Of size and type to suit
application.
2.3 CUSTOM CASEWORK FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Custom-grade interior
woodwork complying with referenced quality standard.
B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for
wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in
installation areas.
C. Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before
fabrication.
D. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated.
E. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to
maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as
necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample
allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
064100-6
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
F. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing
fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates
or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of
cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.
1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of vamish.
2.4 WOOD CABINET CONSTRUCTION
A. AWS Requirements:
1. Quality Standard: Comply with AWS Section 10.
2. Grade: Custom.
3. Material: Veneer plywood. White Maple, as specified.
4. Constmction Style: Type A Frameless.
5. Constmction Type: Type II single-length sections to fit across openings.
6. Door and Drawer Front Style: Flush overlay.
a. Grain Direction: Vertically for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed panels.
b. Matching of Veneer Leaves: Slip match.
B. Semiexposed Surfaces: Provide surface materials indicated below:
1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Thermoset decorative panels, color as
specified.
2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Hardwood plywood.
3. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood.
C. Countertop Support: 3/4-inch plywood.
D. Color and Finish: Clear, satin finish.
E. Edge Material: Same as cladding on faces.
F. Cabinet Hardware: ANSI/BHMA A156.9, see schedule at end of this Section.
2.5 PLASTIC LAMINATE CABINET CONSTRUCTION
A. Constmction:
1. Quality Standard: Comply with AWS Section 10.
2. AWS Grade: Custom.
3. Type: Type II single-length sections to fit across openings.
4. Cabinet Style: Style A Frameless.
5. Interface Style: Overlay, Figure 10-057.
6. Door and Drawer Front Style: Flush overlay.
7. Exposed Exterior Surfaces: HPDL as specified.
8. Exposed Interior Surfaces: HPDL matching exposed exterior surfaces.
9. Exposed Interior Surfaces of Door and Drawer Fronts: Covered with the same
material, pattem, color and thickness as the door face.
10. Door and Drawer Edge: Square edge with thin applied band.
a. Edge Banding: HPDL, minimum 0.02-inch thick, color-matched to the
exposed face.
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
064100-7
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
11. Shelf Thickness: As specified in Architectural Woodwork Standards (AWS) for a
uniform load of 50-lb/sq ft.
B. Semiexposed Surfaces: Provide surface materials indicated below:
1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Thermoset decorative panels.
2. Drawer Sides and Backs: MDF.
3. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood.
4. Exposed Edges: Extmded PVC or self-edged plastic laminate
C. Colors, Pattems, and Finishes: Match Architect's sample.
D. Cabinet Hardware: ANSI/BHMA A156.9, see schedule at end of this Section.
2.6 SOLID-SURFACING-MATERLA.L COUNTERTOP CONSTRUCTION
A. Constmction:
1. Quality Standard: Comply with AWS Section 11.
2. AWS Grade: Premium.
3. Solid-Surfacing-Material Thickness: 3/4-inch (19 mm).
4. Single length sections.
5. Intermediate support for spans over 48-inches to prevent deflection in excess of 1/4-
inch under a 50 pound per sq ft load.
6. Edge Treatment: As indicated on Drawings in accordance with AWS.
7. Back Splash: As indicated on Drawings in accordance with AWS.
8. Back Splash Constmction: AWS Assembly 2, deck mount, manufacturer-assembled.
9. Adhesive: As approved by manufacturer, able to maintain its bond with the
opposing contractions of core and laminate.
a. VOC Requirement: Provide adhesive having a VOC content of <70g/L.
10. Joints: Well fit, flush, and watertight.
B. Maximum Unsupported and Unloaded Overhang:
1. Sheet Thickness of 3/4-inch: 12-inches.
C. Colors, Pattems, and Finishes: Match Architect's sample.
2.7 SHOP FINISHING, WOOD CABINETS
A. General: Finish architectural woodwork at fabrication shop as specified in this Section.
Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation.
B. Grade: Provide finishes of same grades as items to be finished.
1. Finish interior of wood cabinets to match exterior.
C. Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling
countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing
architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work.
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
064100-8
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to
concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to back of paneling and to end-
grain surfaces. Concealed surfaces of plastic-laminate-clad woodwork do not require
backpriming when surfaced with plastic laminate, backing paper, or thermoset
decorative panels.
2. Remove handling marks or effects of exposure to moisture from all exposed portions
of woodwork by means of a thorough, final sanding over all surfaces of the exposed
portions, using appropriate grit sandpaper and clean before applying sealer or finish.
D. Transparent Finish:
1. Grade: Custom.
2. AWS Finish System 3: Score 124-T, lacquer post-catalyzed.
3. Staining: Match approved sample for color.
4. Sheen: Satin, 31-45 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per
ASTM D523.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in
installation areas.
B. Verify the adequacy and proper location of any required backing or support framing.
C. Verify that mechanical, electrical, plumbing and other building items affecting solid
surfacing components are in place, complete and to receive the work of this Section.
D. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion
and complete work as required, including removal of packing material and backpriming.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in
Part 2 for fabrication of type of woodwork involved.
B. Assemble woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to comply with requirements
for fabrication in Part 2, to extent that it was not completed in the shop.
C. Install woodwork level, plumb, tme, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims.
Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in
2400 mm).
D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged
finish at cuts.
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
064100-9
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
E. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure
with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete
installation. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk
and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated.
3.3 CABINET INSTALLATION
A. Install woodwork to comply with AWS Section 10 for same grade specified in Part 2 of this
Section for type of woodwork involved.
B. Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately
aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide
unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as
indicated.
1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow,
or other variation from a straight line.
2. Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish.
3. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16
inches (400 mm) oc with No. 10 wafer-head sheet metal screws through metal
backing or metal framing behind wall finish.
C. Countertops: Anchor securely to base units.
1. Align adjacent solid surfacing countertops and form seams handtight to minimize
joints using adhesive in color to match countertop. Carefully dress joints smooth,
remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.
D. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units.
E. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch.
Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose.
F. Secure cabinet bases to floor using appropriate anchorages. Permanently fix countertops to
wall using appropriate angles.
G. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork. Fill nail
holes with matching filler where exposed.
H. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings and fixtures.
I. Upon completion of installation, clean all installed items. Remove pencil and ink marks
from surfaces. Leave area of work broom clean.
J. Protect countertops after installation; do not allow other trades to use countertops as
footstools or ladders to perform their work. Cover completed cabinetwork with 4-mil
polyethylene film protective enclosure, applied in a manner to permit easy removal.
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
064100-10
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbad Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
3.4 COUNTERTOP INSTALLATION
A. Install solid surfacing level, plumb, tme, and straight. Shim as required with concealed
shims. Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8-inch in 96-inches (3
mm in 2400 mm).
B. Scribe and cut solid surfacing to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces and repair
damaged finish at cuts.
C. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through comer blocks of base cabinets or other
supports into underside of countertop.
1. Align adjacent solid-surfacing-material countertops and form seams to comply with
manufacturer's written recommendations using adhesive in color to match
countertop. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean
entire surface.
2. Install countertops with no more than 1/8-inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag,
bow, or other variation from a straight line.
3. Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16-inches (400 mm) oc
and to walls with adhesive.
4. Calk joint between backsplash and wall with clear silicone sealant.
D. Form field joints using manufacturer's recommended adhesive, with joints inconspicuous
in finished work. Exposed joints/seams shall not be allowed.
E. Reinforce field joints with solid surface strips extending a minimum of 1-inch on either
side of the seam with the strip being the same thickness as the top.
F. Cut and finish component edges with clean, sharp retums.
G. Rout radii and contours to template.
H. Mechanical Fasteners: Not allowed at exposed surfaces.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate fiinctional and
visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform
appearance.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.
B. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to
restore damaged or soiled areas.
C. Constmction Waste Management: Manage constmction waste in accordance with
provisions of Section 01524 Constmction Waste Management.
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
064100-11
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Library
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
3.7 CABINET HARDWARE SCHEDULE
A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural
cabinets, except for items specified in Section 08710. Where manufacturer's name or
product number is not indicated provide best quality commercially available cabinet
hardware.
B. Cabinet Shelf Pilaster Standards and Rests: BHMA A156.9, all components steel, B04071;
with shelf rests, B0408I:
1. Acceptable Products, Heavy-Duty Pilaster Standards:
a. KV 255 Series.
b. Sugatsune SPE-1820.
c. Accepted equivalent.
2. Acceptable Products, Shelf Rests:
a. KV 237.
b. Sugatsune SPF-20
c. Accepted equivalent.
C. Adjustable Shelf Clips: BHMA A156.9, B04013:
I. KV 346, use with 3/8-inch drilled holes and #129 mbber cushion.
D. Seismic Shelf Clips: BHMA AI56.9, B04013:
1. Hafele; 282.24.721.
E. Light Weight Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, B05091:
1. Acceptable Products:
a. KV 8300.
b. Accuride 2132.
c. Accepted equivalent.
2. Standard Duty (Grade 1, Grade 2, and Grade 3): Side mounted; zinc-plated steel with
polymer rollers.
3. 3/4 extension slides with stops, 75 pound capacity.
4. Size slides in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for drawer width.
F. Heavy Weight Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, B05091:
1. Acceptable Products:
a. KV 8805.
b. Accuride 3 640A.
c. Accepted equivalent.
2. Heavy Duty (Grade lHD-100 and Grade lHD-200): Side mounted; full-overtravel-
extension type; zinc-plated steel ball-bearing slides.
3. Full extension slides with 1-inch overtravel, side-mount,
a. General Purpose Drawers: 200 lb capacity.
4. Size slides in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for drawer width.
G. Drawer and Door Pulls:
1. Back-Mounted Pulls: BHMA A 156.9, B02011.
2. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 4 inches (100 mm) long, 5/16 inch (8 mm)
in diameter, and: 1-1/4" (32mm) projection.
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
064100-12
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Geo'rgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbad Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
H. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMAA156.9, B01602, 110 degrees of
opening, self-closing.
1. Acceptable Products:
a. Blum BLUMOTION.
b. Hafele.
c. Accepted equivalent.
2. Provide three hinges for doors over 48 inches in height.
I. Cabinet, Sliding Door, and Drawer Locks:
1. Medeco High Security Locks.
2. Door Locks: BHMA A156.il, E07121.
3. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041.
J. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 2-inch (51-mm) OD, black, molded-
plastic grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage.
K. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with
BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated.
1. Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 652 for steel
base.
2. Bright Chromium Plated: BHMA 625 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 651 for steel
base.
3. Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630.
4. Satin Nickel: BHMA 646 or 670.
L. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product
class requirements in BHMA A156.9.
END OF SECTION 064100
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
064100-13
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
064100-14
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbad Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
SECTION 070155 - ROOF PATCHE^JG FOR REMODELING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Installation of flashing at new roof penetrations.
B. Protection of existing roofing system that is not modified.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01100 - Summary of Work: Use of the premises and phasing requirements.
B. Section 01732 - Cutting and Patching: Cutting and patching procedures for re-roofing
preparation.
C. Section 075100 - Built-up Bituminous Roofing: New roofing at elevator tower.
1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A. Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to
remain Owner's property, demolished materials shall become Contractor's property and
shall be removed from Project site.
1.5 DEFINITIONS
A. Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D1079 and glossary in NRCA's "The NRCA
Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" for definition of terms related to roofing work in this
Section.
B. Existing Roofing Systems:
1. Built-up asphalt roofing.
C. Roof Modification: Removal of a portion of existing roofing systems for installation of
new venting penetrations.
D. Remove: Detach items from existing constmction and legally dispose of them off-site
unless indicated to be removed and reinstalled.
E. Existing to Remain: Existing items of constmction that are not indicated to be removed.
ROOF PATCHING FOR REMODEUNG
070155-1
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Reseorch -I- Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Temporary Roofing: Include Product Data and description of temporary roofing system. If
temporary roof will remain in place, submit surface preparation requirements needed to
receive permanent roof, and submit a letter from roofing membrane manufacturer stating
acceptance of the temporary membrane, and that its inclusion will not adversely affect the
roofing system's resistance to fire and wind.
1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer including certificate that Installer is approved by warrantor
of existing roofing system.
1.8 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately below roof system modification area.
Conduct re-roofing so Owner's operations will not be dismpted. Provide Owner with not
less than 72 hours' notice of activities that may affect Owner's operations.
1. Coordinate work activities daily with Owner so Owner can place protective dust or
water leakage covers over sensitive equipment or fumishings, shut down HVAC and
fire-alarm or -detection equipment if needed, and evacuate occupants from below the
work area if desired.
2. Before working over stmcturally impaired areas of deck, notify Owner to evacuate
occupants from below the affected area. Verify that occupants below the work area
have been evacuated prior to proceeding with work over the impaired deck area.
B. Protect adjacent buildings, walkways, site improvements, exterior plantings, and
landscaping from damage or soiling from patching operations.
C. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used
facilities.
D. Owner assumes no responsibility for condition of areas affected by installation of new roof
penetrations and existing roof membrane.
1. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding will be maintained by Owner as
far as practical.
E. Weather Limitations: Proceed with roof system modifications only when existing and
forecasted weather conditions permit Work to proceed without water entering into existing
roofing system or building.
1. Cover building nightly to maintain weathertight conditions.
F. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials such as asbestos-
containing materials will be encountered in the Work.
1. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not
disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be
removed by Owner under a separate contract.
ROOF PATCHING FOR REMODELING
070155-2
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
1.9 WARRANTY
Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or
damaged during roof system modifications, by methods and with materials so as not to void
existing roofing system warranty. Notify warrantor before proceeding.
1. Notify warrantor of existing roofing system on completion of modifications, and
obtain documentation verifying that existing roofing system has been inspected and
warranty remains in effect. Submit documentation at Project closeout.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TEMPORARY ROOFING MATEIOALS
A. Selection of materials and design of temporary roofing is responsibility of Contractor.
2.2 AUXILIARY ROOFING MODIFICATION MATERIALS
A. General: Auxiliary roofing modification preparation materials as recommended by roofing
system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with components of new roofing
systems.
2.3 FLASHING MATERL\LS
A. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, G90 (Z275) coating
designation; stmctural quality, mill phosphatized where indicated for field painting.
1. Do not apply an acrylic passivator coating to galvanized sheet metal schedule to be
painted, or remove this coating mechanically before delivery to the project site.
2. Prime all surfaces of bonderized metal.
3. Finish: Standard (dull) mill finish; painted unless noted otherwise on Drawings.
4. Paint: Paint sheet galvanized sheet metal that is not coil-coated.
B. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following material:
1. Galvanized Steel: 0.0276-inch (0.7 mm) thick.
C. Drawbands: Stainless steel.
D. Flashings Polyurethane Sealant: ASTM C920, polyurethane-based sealant; Type S, Grade
NS, Class 100/50, and Use T, NT, G, and M; single component elastomeric.
1. Acceptable Sealants:
a. Sika Corporation, Inc.; SikaFlex-15LM.
b. Tremco, Inc.; Vulkem 921.
E. Bedding Compound: Rubber-asphalt type.
F. Plastic Cement: Asphaltic base cement.
G. Sealing Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealing
tape with release-paper backing. Provide elastic, non-sag, nontoxic, non-staining tape.
ROOF PATCHING FOR REMODELING
070155-3
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgino Cole Library
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research -I- Planning, Inc.
Bid Set-April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
H. Solder for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM B32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin
and 50 percent lead or Grade Sn60, 60 percent tin and 40 percent lead.
I. Bufyl Sealant: ASTMC1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl mbber sealant;
polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited
movement.
J. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM
D1187/D1187M.
K. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets
and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended
by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item.
1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head.
a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or
factory-applied coating.
2. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Hot-dip galvanized steel
according to ASTM A153/AI53M or ASTM F2329 or Series 300 stainless steel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protect existing roofing systems that are indicated not to be removed and replaced.
1. Limit traffic and material storage to areas of existing roofing membrane that have
been protected.
2. Maintain temporary protection and leave in place until replacement roofing has been
completed.
B. During modification operations, have sufficient and suitable materials on-site to facilitate
rapid installation of temporary protection in the event of unexpected rain.
C. Maintain roof drains in functioning condition to ensure roof drainage at end of each
workday. Prevent debris from entering or blocking roof drains and conductors. Use roof-
drain plugs specifically designed for this purpose. Remove roof-drain plugs at end of each
workday, when no work is taking place, or when rain is forecast.
1. If roof drains will be temporarily blocked or unserviceable due to roofing system
removal or partial installation of new roofing system, provide altemative drainage
method to remove water and eliminate ponding. Do not permit water to enter into or
under existing roofing system components that are to remain.
D. Verify that rooftop utihties and service piping have been shut off as required before
commencing Work.
3.2 DECK PREPARATION AND INSPECTION
A. Decking to Remain: Immediately check existing deck after tear-off of roofing systems for
water or stmctural damage by visually observing decking that will remain.
ROOF PATCHING FOR REMODELING
070155-4
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research -I- Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
I. Coordinate with Owner's inspector to schedule times for tests and inspections
immediately after membrane removal.
B. If deck surface is not suitable for receiving new roofing, or if stmctural integrity of deck is
suspect, immediately notify Architect. Do not proceed with installation until directed by
Architect.
C. Inspect areas around any rooftop penetrations for moisture infiltration, deterioration of the
roof deck and of the penetration material. Replace any deteriorated components and
decking as specified.
1. Include repairs to penetration framing stmcture as required.
D. Prior to installing new underlayment, inspect roof sheathing attachment and drive additional
fasteners as necessary to ensure the deck is sound and smooth, with fasteners flush to the
deck.
1. Where deck fasteners have backed out, install a new fastener adjacent to it and
remove the existing fastener.
3.3 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sheet metal roof flashing and trim to comply with performance
requirements and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual". Provide concealed
fasteners where possible, set units tme to line, and level as indicated. Install work with
claps, joints, and seams that will be watertight.
B. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base
flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing.
Extend counterflashing 4-inches (100 mm) over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints a
minimum of 4-inches (100 mm) and bed with elastomeric sealant.
C. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with
installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof
1. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to pipes penetrating roof Use
stainless steel drawband and tighten.
2. Seal top of membrane flashing with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to pipes
with stainless steel drawband.
3.4 ROOF PATCHING PREPARATION
A. Remove substrate irregularities that inhibit roof patching installation from conforming to
substrate.
1. Clean existing substrate of contaminants such as dirt, debris, oil, and grease that can
affect adhesion of new roofing membrane system installation.
2. Verify that surface is dry by pressing litmus paper to surface areas most likely to
retain moisture, such as shaded areas and low spots. If paper changes color, surface
is too wet to apply roofing.
ROOF PATCHING FOR REMODELING
070155-5
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set-April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
3.5 ROOF MEMBRANE ALTERATIONS AND REPAIRS
A. Perform alterations, maintenance and repairs to roof membrane immediately after
membrane has been cut or damaged, with permanent new work as specified in this
specification. Repair hems damaged in surface preparation and aggregate removal.
B. Match existing roofing materials and constmction. Use bitumen compatible with existing
for roof repair and alteration.
C. Areas to be altered or repaired, remove loose aggregate and aggregate not firmly embedded
where new penetrations occur or repairs are required.
1. Remove aggregate 900 mm (3 feet) beyond areas to be cut.
a. Clean, dry and store aggregate away from roof area until ready to reuse.
b. Remove unsuitable and excess aggregate not used from Project.
D. Cut and remove existing roof membrane for new work to be installed. Clean cut edges and
install a temporary seal to cut surfaces. Use roof cement and one layer of 15 lb (7 Kg) felt
strip cut to extend 6 inches (150 mm) on each side of cut surface. Bed strip in roof cement
and cover with roof cement to completely embed the felt.
E. Bend up cap flashing or temporarily remove at built-up base flashing to be repaired. Bmsh
and scrape away deteriorated and loose bitumen, felts or surface material of built-up base
flashing.
F. Repairs to existing membrane and base flashing:
1. Remove temporary patches prior to starting new work.
2. Blisters and Fish Mouths:
a. Cut blisters open and tum membrane back to fiilly adhered portion. Cut fish
mouths so membrane can be tumed back and subsequently laid flat.
b. Heat membrane to facilitate bending and to dry surface of exposed blister
areas.
c. Mop tumed back membrane in hot bitumen. Roll to insure full adhesion and
embedment in substrate.
d. Cover cut areas with two plies of felt. Extend first ply 100 mm (4-inches)
beyond cut area edge. Extend second 100 mm (4 inches) beyond first ply. Mop
down in hot bitumen as specified for new work. Resurface to match existing.
3. Exposed Felts:
a. Cut away exposed deteriorated edges of sheets.
b. Glaze coat felt edges.
c. Resurface to match existing.
4. Built-up Base Flashing:
a. Restore felts and cap sheet removed, lapping 100 mm (4-inches) over existing.
b. Install new felts and cap sheet as specified for new work.
5. Horizontal Metal Flanges:
a. Remove loose, buckled or tom stripping.
b. Remove loose fasteners and install new fasteners.
c. Restrip flanges as specified for new work.
6. Resurfacing:
a. Over repaired membrane, embed aggregate as specified for new work.
b. Cover all membrane areas. Do not leave any exposed membrane surface.
ROOF PATCHING FOR REMODELING
070155-6
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research -I- Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set-April 10, 2015
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated
beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
3.7 CLEANING
A. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants.
B. Collect and place demolished materials in containers. Promptly dispose of demolished
materials. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.
1. Storage or sale of demolished items or materials on-site will not be permitted.
C. Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
D. Constmction Waste Management: Manage constmction waste in accordance with
provisions of Section 01524 Constmction Waste Management.
END OF SECTION 070155
ROOF PATCHING FOR REMODELING
070155-7
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 201 5 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
ROOF PATCHING FOR REMODEUNG
070155-8
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
SECTION 071616 - CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Cementitious crystalline waterproofing to concrete elevator ph walls and floors.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include material descriptions and installation instmctions for crystalline
waterproofing.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Certificates: For crystalline waterproofing, signed by product manufacturer.
B. Qualification Data: For Installer.
C. Test Reports: Complete test reports from approved independent testing laboratories
certifying that waterproofing system conforms to performance characteristics and testing
requirements specified.
D. Manufacturer's Certification: Provide certificates signed by manufacturer or manufacturer's
representative certifying that the materials to be installed comply in all respects with the
requirements of this specification, and that the applicator is qualified and approved to install
the materials in accordance with manufacturer's product data.
E. Manufacturer's Field Report: Provide copy of report from manufacturer's representative
confirming that the surfaces to which waterproofing material is to be applied are in a
condition suitable to receive same.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Provide products of manufacturer with no less than 10 years experience in
manufacturing the cementitious crystalline waterproofing materials for the required work.
B. Manufacturers that cannot provide the performance test data specified herein will not be
considered for the project.
CRYSTALUNE WATERPROOFING
071616-1
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Library
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
C. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.
D. Pre-Installation Conference: Prior to installation of waterproofing, conduct meeting with
waterproofing applicator, installers of work adjacent to or which penetrates waterproofing,
Architect/Engineer, owner's representative, and waterproofing manufacturer's representative
to verify and review the following:
1. Review and finalize constmction schedule and verify availability of materials.
Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid
delays.
2. Project requirements for waterproofing as set out in Contract Document.
3. Manufacturer's product data including application instmctions.
4. Substrate conditions and procedures for substrate preparation and waterproofing
installation.
5. Review required certifying procedures.
E. Technical Consultation: The waterproofing manufacturer's representative shall provide
technical consultation on waterproofing application.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver packaged waterproofing materials to project site in original undamaged containers,
with manufacturer's labels and seals intact.
B. Protect Portland cement based materials (bag products) from moisture and humidity. Store
under cover off the ground in a dry location.
C. Store at a minimum temperature of 45 degrees F.
1.8 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with application only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit crystalline waterproofing to be performed according to manufacturer's
written instmctions and warranty requirements.
B. Proceed with waterproofing work only after pipe sleeves, vents, curbs, inserts, drains, and
other projections through the substrate to be waterproofed have been completed. Proceed
only after concrete and masonry substrate defects, including honeycombs, voids, and
cracks, have been repaired to provide a sound substrate free of forming materials, including
reveal inserts.
C. Ambient Conditions: Proceed with waterproofing work only if temperature is maintained at
40 deg F (4.4 deg C) or above during work and cure period, and space is well ventilated and
kept free of water.
D. The concrete surface must be a minimum of 20 hours old before application of crystalline
waterproofing treatment.
E. Apply crystalline waterproofing between 24 hours and 72 hours after placement of concrete.
CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING
071616-2
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbad Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
F. Use care and follow manufacturer's written recommendations for handling and placement
of system products.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of crystalline waterproofing that fail in materials, fabrication, or
installation within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Failure to maintain watertight conditions within specified warranty period.
2. Warranty Period: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Warranty: Installer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace
components of crystalline waterproofing that fail in materials, fabrication, or installation
within specified warranty period.
1. The warranty will cover the surfaces treated and will bind the applicator to repair, at
his expense, any and all leaks through the treated surfaces which are not due to
stmctural weaknesses or other causes beyond applicator's control such as fire,
earthquake, tomado and hurticane.
2. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Failure to maintain watertight conditions within specified warranty period.
3. Warranty Period: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Crystalline Waterproofing:
a. American Permaquik Inc.; Super 200.
b. ThoRoc, Div. of ChemRex; Tegraproof
c. Vandex Intemational Ltd.; Vandex Super.
d. Xypex Chemical Corporation; Xypex.
2. Plugging and Patching for Leak Repair:
a. Tamms Industries, Inc.; Hey'Di Powder-X System.
b. ThoRoc, Div. of ChemRex; Tegraproof mortar.
c. Xypex Chemical Corporation; Patch N' Plug.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Cementitious Crystalline Waterproofing: Blend of Portland cement, fine treated silica sand
and active proprietary chemicals. When mixed with water and applied as a cementitious
coating, the active chemicals cause a catalytic reaction which generates a non-soluble
crystalline formation of dendritic fibers within the pores and capillary tracts of concrete
causing the concrete to become permanently sealed against the penetration of liquids from
any direction.
CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING
071616-3
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research -I- Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 201 5 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
B. Testing Requirements: Test crystalline waterproofing system in accordance with the
following standards and conditions, to verify materials meet or exceed the performance
requirements as specified herein.
1. Independent Laboratory: Testing shall be performed by an independent laboratory
meeting the requirements of ASTM E329 and certified by the United States Bureau
of Standards. Testing laboratory shall obtain all concrete samples and waterproofing
product samples.
2. Crystalline Penetration: Crystallizing capability of waterproofing material shall be
evidenced by independent SEM (Scanning Electton Microscope) photographs
documenting penetration of crystal-forming waterproofing material to a depth of 2-
inches (50 mm).
3. Permeability: Perform independent testing according to U.S. Army Corps of
Engineers CRD C48 "Permeability of Concrete".
4. Concrete Sample (treated and untreated) Design Strength: 2000 psi (13.8 MPa) and
thickness of 2-inches (50 mm). No admixtures permitted.
5. Coatings: Maximum thickness of 0.05-inches (1 mm) per coat with up to two coats
permitted.
6. Samples: Pressure tested to 175 psi (405 foot head of water) or 1.2 MPa (123.4 m
head of water).
7. Treated samples, after crystalline growth has occurred, shall exhibit no measurable
leakage.
C. Chemical Resistance: Perform independent testing according to ASTM C267-77 "Chemical
Resistance of Mortars" and ASTM C39/C39M "Compressive Strength of Cylindrical
Concrete Specimens".
1. Concrete Sample (treated and untreated) Design Strength: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa). No
admixtures permitted.
2. Coatings: Maximum thickness of 0.05-inches (1 mm) per coat with up to two coats
permitted.
3. Untreated and treated specimens to be immersed for a minimum of 84 days in
following chemical solutions: hydrochloric acid (3.5pH), brake fluid, transformer oil,
ethylene glycol, toluene, and caustic soda.
4. Treated specimens shall exhibit no detrimental effects after exposure, and shall have
a minimum of 14 percent increase in compressive strength versus untreated control
specimens.
D. Potable Water Approval: Perform independent testing according to NSF Standard 61 and
approval for use of waterproofing material on stmctures holding potable water shall be
evidenced by NSF certification.
2.3 MATERL^^LS
A. Crystalline Waterproofing: A prepackaged, gray-colored proprietary blend of portland
cement, specially treated sand, and active chemicals that, when mixed with water and
applied, penetrates by capillary action into concrete or masonry and reacts chemically with
free lime in the presence of water to develop crystalline growth within concrete or masonry
capillaries to produce an impervious, dense, waterproof concrete or masonry with properties
meeting or exceeding the following criteria:
1. Permeability: 0 for water at 33 feet (10 m) when tested according to CE CRD-C 48.
CRYSTALUNE WATERPROOFING
071616-4
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
2. Compressive Strength: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) when tested according to
ASTM C109/C109M.
B. Patching Compound: Cementitious waterproofing and repair mortar for filling and patching
tie holes, honeycombs, reveals, and other imperfections; with properties meeting or
exceeding the following criteria:
1. Compressive Strength: 7600 psi (52.44 MPa) at 28 days when tested according to
ASTMC109/C109M.
2. Flexural Strength: 710 psi (4.8 MPa) at 28 days when tested according to
ASTM C348.
3. Shrinkage: Minus 0.093 percent at 28 days and plus 0.073 percent at 90 days when
tested according to ASTM C596.
C. Plugging Compound: Cementitious compound with hydrophobic properties; resistant to
water and moisture but vapor permeable for all standard applications (vertical, overhead and
horizontal surfaces not exposed to vehicular traffic); with properties meeting or exceeding
the following criteria:
1. Permeability: 30 feet (9 m) when tested according to CE CRD-C 48.
2. Compressive Strength: 6000 psi (41.4 MPa) at 28 days when tested according to
ASTM C109/C109M.
3. Flexural Sfrength: 1000 psi (6.9 MPa) at 28 days when tested according to
ASTM C348.
4. Bond Strength: 300 psi (2.1 MPa) at 14 days when tested according to ASTM C321.
D. Water: Potable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, with Applicator present, where
waterproofing is to be applied.
1. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
2. Notify Architect in writing of active leaks or stmctural defects that would affect
system performance.
3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Protect other work from damage from cleaning, preparation, and application of crystalline
waterproofing. Provide temporary enclosure to confine spraying operation and to ensure
adequate ambient temperatures and ventilation conditions for application.
B. Stop active water leaks according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instmctions.
C. Repair damaged or unsatisfactory concrete or masonry according to manufacturer's written
instmctions.
CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING
071616-5
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set-April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
D. Surface Preparation: Comply with waterproofing manufacturer's written instmctions to
remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, mortar spatter, grease, oils, curing compounds, and
form-release agents to ensure that waterproofing bonds to concrete or masonry surfaces.
1. Clean concrete surfaces according to ASTM D4258.
a. Prepare smooth-formed and trowel-finished concrete by mechanical abrading
or abrasive-blast cleaning according to ASTM D4259.
2. Concrete Joints: Clean reveals according to waterproofing manufacturer's written
instmctions.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. General: Comply with waterproofing manufacturer's written instmctions for application.
1. Dampen surface for several hours prior to application with water and maintain damp
condition until applying waterproofing.
a. Remove excess surface water before application. If concrete surface dries out
before application, re-wet to level required by manufacturer.
2. Apply waterproofing to positive-side surfaces.
3. Number of Coats: Two for [bmsh]or [spray] application.
4. Dampen surface between coats.
B. Verify horizontal surfaces have a rough wood float or broom finish. Otherwise treat as
specified for vertical surfaces.
C. Dampen surfaces to be etched with muriatic acid with water before application of the acid.
After acid etching flush concrete thoroughly with clean water.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspection: Manufacturer's representative to inspect completed application and to provide a
written report that application complies with manufacturer's written instmctions.
3.5 MIXING
A. Mix waterproofing material with clean, potable water only.
B. Mix clean water into the waterproofing powder with a paddle on a slow speed electric drill
(250 RPM) or with other equipment that ensures adequate mixing.
1. For small jobs, waterproofing may be mixed by gloved hand or by trowel.
C. Do not mix more waterproofing than can be applied within 20 minutes. As the mixture
thickens, stir frequently but do not add water.
3.6 APPLYING WATERPROOFING
A. Apply crystalline cementitious waterproofing with a semi-stiff nylon bristle bmsh, push
broom (for large horizontal surfaces), or specialized spray equipment. Do not apply coating
with a trowel, roller, paintbmsh or paint sprayer.
B. Apply coating uniformly to a thickness of just under 0.0625-inches (1.25 mm). A thicker
coating is not allowed. "j
CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING
071616-6
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set-April 10, 2015
C. Apply a second coat after the first coat has reached an initial set but while it is still "green"
(less than 48 hours). Light pre-watering between coats may be required due to drying.
Refer to manufacturer's recommendations.
D. Slab (Horizontal) Applications: Take care to spread waterproofing evenly, pulling a heavy
broom in long strips over the freshly applied material to eliminate settlement in low spots
on the slab and to remove excess material which may have been applied.
E. In hot weather apply waterproofing either early in the moming or late in the day to prevent
the coating from drying out too quickly.
F. Coverage Rate: As recommended by manufacturer.
3.7 CURING
A. Cure crystalline cementitious waterproofing using a misty fog spray of clean. Begin curing
as soon as waterproofing has set to the point where it will not be damaged by a fine spray of
water.
B. Spray treated surfaces three times per day for two to three days. In hot or arid climates,
spray more frequently, according to manufacturer's recommendations to prevent premature
drying of the coating.
C. During the curing period, protect the coating from rainfall, frost, wind, puddling of water
and temperatures below 36°F (2°C) for a period of not less than 48 hours after application.
If plastic sheeting is used as protection, keep it raised off the waterproofing to allow the
coating to breathe.
D. Where application is subject to poor air circulation (e.g. small, enclosed reservoirs or wet
wells), use fans or blown air to aid the curing of waterproofing.
3.8 BACKFILLING
A. Backfilling no sooner than 36 hours after waterproofing application. If backfilling takes
place within seven days after application, moisten the backfilling material to avoid drawing
moisture from the waterproof coating.
3.9 CLEANING
A. Constmction Waste Management: Manage constmction waste in accordance with
provisions of Section 01524 Constmction Waste Management.
3.10 PROTECTION
A. Protect applied crystalline waterproofing from rapid drying, severe weather exposure, and
water accumulation. Maintain completed Work in moist condition for not less than three
days by procedures recommended in writing by waterproofing manufacturer. Protect
waterproofing from temperatures below 36 deg F (2 deg C).
END OF SECTION 071616
CRYSTALUNE WATERPROOFING
071616-7
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 201 5 Group 4 Project No. 14449-0 I
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
CRYSTALUNE WATERPROOFING
071616-8
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
SECTION 072116 - BLANKET E^iSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
1.3
Insulation in batt form of the following types:
1. Thermal building insulation at exterior walls.
2. Acoustic batt insulation at interior walls
3. Exposed, faced acoustic batt insulation at open ceilings.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of insulation product specified.
B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a
qualified testing agency for insulation products.
C. Sustainabiiity Submittals:
1. Product Data for products having recycled content, documentation indicating
percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content.
a. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.
2. Product Data for each material, including its source, cost, and the fraction by weight
that is considered regional and that has been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as
well as manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site.
3. Product Data Sheets for each product to be used as proof that each product meets the
requirements of the GREENGUARD Environmental Institute's GREENGUARD
certification.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Thermal Conductivity: Where insulation is indicated or specified by "R" value, provide
thickness required to achieve indicated value. Use aged and settled values for thermal
resistance factors (R-values), tested in accordance with ASTM C518 at 75-deg. F. and 50-
percent relative humidity for at least 6-months.
B. Insulation shall be certified by the manufacturer to comply with Califomia standards for
insulating materials.
BLANKET INSULATION
072116-1
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set-April 10,2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
C. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide insulation materials identical to those whose
indicated fire performance characteristics have been determined per the ASTM test method
indicated below, by UL or other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable
testing and inspecting organization.
1. Surface Buming Characteristic: ASTM E84.
2. Fire Resistance Ratings: ASTM El 19.
3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTME136.
D. Single-Source Responsibility for Insulation Products: Obtain each type of building
insulation from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in
appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture,
soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer s
recommendations for handling, storage, and protection during installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUSTAINABILITY MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS, GENERAL
A. Recycled Content: Provide products made from fiberglass batts with average recycled
content such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled
content is not less than 30 percent.
B. Local/Regional Materials: Give preference to manufacturer's whose facilities are within a
500 mile radius of the project site. Also give preference to materials that are harvested,
extracted, mined, quarried, etc. within a 500 mile radius of the project site.
C. Insulation Materials: Provide only insulation materials that are GREENGUARD Certified.
2.2 GLASS FIBER BLANKET INSULATESTG MATERL\LS
A. Preformed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated, selected from manufacturer's standard
thicknesses, widths, and lengths.
1. Sustainabiiity Requirements: Provide glass-fiber blanket insulation as follows:
a. Free of Formaldehyde: Insulation manufactured with 100 percent acrylic
binders and no formaldehyde.
b. Low Emitting: Insulation tested according to ASTM D5116 and shown to
emit less than 0.05-ppm formaldehyde.
B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. Johns Ma.nville.
2. Owens Coming.
BLANKET INSULATION
072116-2
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
3. Thermafiber.
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
C. Insulation at Exterior Walls and Soffits: ASTM C665, Type I; "Thermal Batts"; preformed
glass fiber batts conforming to the following:
1. Thermal Resistance R-value: 19.
2. Batt Width: Maximum width as required for application.
3. Thickness: 6-1/4-inches.
4. Facing: Kraft paper facing on one side with tabs.
5. Flame Spread Rating: Less than 25, as tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
D. Insulation for Sound Attenuation: ASTM C665; "Sound Attenuation Batts"; Type I
preformed glass fiber batts conforming to the following:
1. Batt Width: Maximum width as required for application.
2. Thickness: 3-1/2-inches.
3. Facing: Unfaced.
4. Flame Spread Rating: Less than 10, as tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
5. Smoke Developed: Less than 10, as tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
6. Overall Sound Transmission: STC 50.
7. Minimum density of 6 Ib/cu ft (96 kg/cu m), thermal resistivity of 4.5 deg F x h x sq
ft/Btti X in. at 75 deg F (31.2 K x m/W at 24 deg C).
E. Insulation at Exposed Ceiling Locations: ASTM C991; Type I with the exception of width
tolerance; and ASTM El36.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for the acoustic insulation at exposed ceilings
is based on the manufacturer identified below. Subject to compliance with
requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the
following:
a. Basis-of-Design: Johns Manville. Microlite "L" Formaldehyde-free''''^ fiber
glass insulation.
2. Width: 72-inches.
3. Thickness: 3-1/2-inches max.
4. R-value: R-19.
5. NRC: 0.90.
6. Sound Absorption Average: 0.92.
7. FHC rating of 25/50 in accordance with ASTM E84 and bear UL labels.
8. Facing: Provide with laminated white vinyl facing.
9. NAIMA 202-96® Certified Fiber Glass Metal Building Insulation.
2.3 AUXILL\RY INSULATING MATERLA.LS
A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation
or mechanical anchors securely to substrates indicated without damaging or corroding
insulation, anchors, or substrates.
1. Use adhesive that has a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
B. Adhesively Attached Pin Anchors: Perforated plate, 2-inches square, welded to projecting
pin, with self-locking washer, complying with the following requirements:
BLANKET INSUIATION
072116-3
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-0 !
1. Plate: Zinc-plated steel, 0.106-inch thick, painted white to match exposed insulation
cover.
2. Pin: Copper-coated low carbon steel, fiiUy annealed, 0.106-inches in diameter,
length to suit depth of insulation indicated and, with washer in place, to hold
insulation tightly to substrate behind insulation.
3. Self-Locking Washer: Mild steel, 0.016-inch thick, size as required to hold
insulation securely.
C. Staples: Steel wire; type and size to suit application.
D. Tape: Mesh reinforced, self-adhering type, 2-inch wide.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions with Installer present, for compliance with requirements
of the Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and to determine if other
conditions affecting performance of insulation are satisfactory.
B. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation are dry and ready to receive
insulation.
C. Verify mechanical and electrical services within walls have been installed and tested.
D. Do not proceed with installation of insulation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's instmctions applicable to products and application
indicated. If printed instmctions are not available or do not apply to project conditions,
consult manufacturer's technical representative for specific recommendations before
proceeding with installation of insulation.
B. Extend insulation full thickness as indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and
fit tightly around obstmctions, and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that
interfere with placement.
C. Apply a single layer of insulation of required thickness, unless otherwise shown or required
to make up total thickness. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces.
D. Install in exterior walls and soffit spaces where indicated, without gaps or voids.
E. Install for sound attenuation in interior walls, above toilet room ceilings, and over
suspended ceilings where indicated, without gaps or voids.
BLANKET INSULATION
072116-4
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
F. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's
written instmctions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with
adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of
units.
G. Install blanket insulation in cavities formed by framing members according to the following
requirements:
1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members.
If more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a
snug fit between ends.
2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit
between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.
3. Maintain 3-inch (76-mm) clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures.
4. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches (2438 mm),
support faced blankets by stapling paper flanges to flanges of metal studs.
H. Retain exposed batt insulation in place with spindle fasteners spaced evenly across face of
insulation and no more than at spacing recommended by manufacturer.
1. Tape exposed edges and ends to vertical metal angle as indicated on Drawings with
the manufacturer's white tape.
I. Tape seal butt ends, lapped flanges, and tears or cuts in insulation membrane.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Constmction Waste Management: Manage constmction waste in accordance with
provisions of Section 01524 Constmction Waste Management.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to physical abuse and other causes.
B. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation will be subject to abuse and
cannot be concealed and protected by permanent constmction immediately after
installation.
END OF SECTION 072116
BLANKET INSULATION
072116-5
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
BLANKET INSUIATION
072116-6
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research -I- Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbad Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
SECTION 072726 - FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Fluid-applied membrane air barrier, vapor impermeable installed at new rainscreen
system at elevator tower and new atrium light monitor.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 074253 - Phenolic Rainscreen System.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. ABAA: Air Barrier Association of America.
B. Air Barrier Assembly: The collection of air barrier materials and auxiliary materials
applied to an opaque wall, including joints and junctions to abutting constmction, to control
air movement through the wall.
1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Air barrier shall be capable of performing as a continuous vapor-permeable air
barrier and as a liquid-water drainage plane flashed to discharge to the exterior incidental
condensation or water penetration. Air barrier assemblies shall be capable of
accommodating substrate movement and of sealing substrate expansion and control joints,
constmction material changes, and transitions at perimeter conditions without deterioration
and air leakage exceeding specified limits.
1.6 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING
A. Mockup Testing: Air barrier assemblies shall comply with performance requirements
indicated, as evidenced by reports based on mockup testing by a qualified testing agency.
1. Owner will engage a qualified testing agency.
2. Quantitative Air Leakage Testing: Testing of the mockup for air leakage will be
conducted not to exceed the test pressure differential, positive and negative, indicated
in "Performance Requirements" Article for air barrier assembly air leakage when
tested according to ASTM E2357.
3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times when mockup testing
will take place.
FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS
072726 - 1
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
1.7
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research -I- Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's written instmctions for evaluating, preparing, and
treating substrate; technical data; and tested physical and performance properties of air
barrier.
B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of air barrier. Include details for substrate
joints and cracks, counterflashing strip, penetrations, inside and outside comers,
terminations, and tie-ins with adjoining constmction.
1. Include details of interfaces with other materials that form part of air barrier.
2. Include details of mockups.
1.8 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Certificates: For air barriers, certifying compatibility of air barrier and accessory
materials with Project materials that connect to or that come in contact with the barrier;
signed by product manufacturer.
B. Qualification Data: For Applicator.
C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, for air barriers.
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum of 20 years' experience in the production of air
barrier materials, with minimum of 5 years in the production of fluid-applied membrane air
barriers.
B. Applicator Qualifications: A firm experienced in applying air barrier materials similar in
material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in
applications with a record of successful in-service performance and that is an ABAA-
licensed contractor, employs certified and registered installers, and complies with ABAA's
Quality Assurance Program.
C. Mockups: Before beginning installation of air barrier, build mockups of exterior wall
assembly shown on Drawings, 150 sq. ft. (14 sq. m), incorporating backup wall
constmction, extemal cladding, window, door frame and sill, insulation, and flashing to
demonstrate surface preparation, crack and joint treatment, and sealing of gaps,
terminations, and penetrations of air barrier membrane.
1. Coordinate constmction of mockup to permit inspection by Owner's testing agency of
air barrier before extemal insulation and cladding is installed.
2. Include junction with roofing membrane, building comer condition, and foundation
wall intersection.
3. If Architect determines mockups do not comply with requirements, reconstmct
mockups and apply air barrier until mockups are approved.
4. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time
of Substantial Completion.
FLUID-APPUED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS
072726 - 2
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbad Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Reseorch -I- Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Include installers of other constmction connecting to air barrier, including roofing,
waterproofing, architectural precast concrete, masonry, sealants, windows, glazed
curtain walls, and door frames.
2. Review air barrier requirements including surface preparation, substrate condition
and pretreatment, minimum substrate curing period, forecasted weather conditions,
special details and sheet flashings, mockups, installation procedures, sequence of
installation, testing and inspecting procedures, and protection and repairs.
1.10 DELFVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged packages in a clean, dry, protected
location and within temperature range required by air barrier manufacturer.
B. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life.
C. Store rolls according to manufacturer's written instmctions.
D. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.
1.11 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Apply air barrier within the range of ambient and substtate
temperatures recommended by air barrier manufacturer. Protect substrates from
environmental conditions that affect performance of air barrier. Do not apply air barrier to
a damp or wet substrate or during snow, rain, fog, or mist.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIER
A. Fluid-Applied, Vapor Impermeable Membrane Air Barrier: Two-component, self-curing
synthetic-mbber-based membrane, free of solvents, isocyanates and bitumen, suitable for
spray application to wet film and dry film thickness of 60 mils (1.5 mm).
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the
product listed below or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. Basis-of-Design: Henry Company; Air-Bloc 33MR with BlueskinVP 160 at
transitions and joints.
b. Grace Constmction Products; "Perm-A-Barrier Liquid".
c. Accepted equivalent.
2.2 AUXILIARY MATERL\LS
A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by air barrier manufacturer for intended use
and compatible with air barrier membrane. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply
with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.
FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS
072726 - 3
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 201 5 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
B. Transition Membrane Primer: Liquid waterborne primer recommended for substrate by
manufacturer of air barrier material when applying flashing and transition membranes
directly to substrate.
C. Primer: Liquid primer recommended for substrate by manufacturer of air barrier material.
D. Joint Reinforcing Strip: Sheathing manufacturer's glass-fiber-mesh tape.
E. Substrate Patching Membrane: Manufacturer's standard trowel-grade substrate filler.
F. Adhesive and Tape: Air barrier manufacturer's standard adhesive and pressure-sensitive
adhesive tape.
G. Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, single-component, neuttal-curing silicone; Class 100/50 (low-
modulus), Grade NS, Use NT related to exposure, and, as applicable to joint substrates
indicated. Use O. Comply with Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMESr ATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
1. Verify that substrates are sound and free of oil, grease, dirt, excess mortar, or other
contaminants.
2. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended by
air barrier manufacturer.
3. Verify that concrete is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture
by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D4263.
4. Verify that masonry joints are flush and completely filled with mortar.
5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Clean, prepare, treat, and seal substrate according to manufacturer's written instmctions.
Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for air barrier application.
B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not covered by air barrier to prevent spillage and overspray
affecting other constmction.
C. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other
penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.
D. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets,
holes, and other voids in concrete with substrate patching membrane.
E. Remove excess mortar from masonry ties, shelf angles, and other obstmctions.
F. At changes in substrate plane, apply sealant or termination mastic beads at sharp comers
and edges to form a smooth transition from one plane to another.
FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS
072726 - 4
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgino Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
G. Cover gaps in substrate plane and form a smooth transition from one substrate plane to
another with stainless-steel sheet mechanically fastened to stmctural framing to provide
continuous support for air barrier.
3.3 JOINT TREATMENT
A. Concrete and Masonry: Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrate according
to ASTM C 1193 and air barrier manufacturer's written instmctions. Remove dust and dirt
from joints and cracks complying with ASTM D4258 before coating surfaces.
1. Prime substrate and apply a single thickness of preparation coat strip extending a
minimum of 3 inches (75 mm) along each side of joints and cracks. Apply a double
thickness of air barrier membrane and embed a joint reinforcing strip in preparation
coat.
B. Gypsum Sheathing: Fill joints greater than 1/4 inch (6 mm) with sealant according to
ASTM C1193 and with air barrier manufacturer's written instmctions. Apply first layer of
fluid air barrier membrane at joints. Tape joints whh joint reinforcing strip after first layer
is dry. Apply a second layer of fluid air barrier membrane over joint reinforcing strip.
3.4 TRANSITION MEMBRANE INSTALLATION
A. Install strips, transition membrane, and auxiliary materials according to air barrier
manufacturer's written instmctions to form a seal with adjacent constmction and maintain a
continuous air barrier.
1. Coordinate the installation of air barrier with installation of roofing membrane and
base flashing to ensure continuity of air barrier with roofing membrane.
2. Install transition membrane that is compatible with roofing onto roofing membrane or
base flashing so that a minimum of 3 inches (75 mm) of coverage is achieved over
both substrates.
B. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow to dry. Limit priming to areas that
will be covered by air barrier sheet in same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24
hours.
1. Prime glass-fiber-surfaced gypsum sheathing with number of prime coats needed to
achieve required bond, with adequate drying time between coats.
C. Connect and seal exterior wall air barrier membrane continuously to roofing membrane air
barrier, concrete below-grade stmctures, floor-to floor constmction, exterior glazing and
window systems, glazed curtain-wall systems, storefront systems, exterior louvers, exterior
door framing, and other constmction used in exterior wall openings, using accessory
materials as recommended by air barrier manufacturer.
D. At end of each working day, seal top edge of strips and transhion membranes to substrate
with termination mastic.
E. Apply joint sealants forming part of air barrier assembly within manufacturer's
recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot
be applied within these temperature ranges.
FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS
072726 - 5
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Pianning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
F. Wall Openings: Prime concealed perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls,
storefronts, and doors. Apply transition membrane so that a minimum of 3 inches (75 mm)
of coverage is achieved over both substrates. Maintain 3 inches (75 mm) of full contact
over firm bearing to perimeter frames with not less than I inch (25 mm) of fiill contact.
1. Modified Bituminous Transition Membrane: Roll firmly to enhance adhesion.
G. Fill gaps in perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and doors, and
miscellaneous penetrations of air barrier membrane with foam sealant.
H. Seal top of through-wall flashings to air barrier with an additional 6-inch- (150-mm-) wide,
transition membrane.
I. Seal exposed edges of strips at seams, cuts, penetrations, and terminations not concealed by
metal counterflashings or ending in reglets with termination mastic.
J. Repair punctures, voids, and deficient lapped seams in strips and transition membranes. Slit
and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with transition membranes extending 6 inches
(150 mm) beyond repaired areas in membrane direction.
3.5 AIR BARRIER MEMBRANE INSTALLATION
A. Apply air barrier membrane to form a seal with strips and transition membranes and to
achieve a continuous air barrier according to air barrier manufacturer's written instmctions.
B. Apply air barrier membrane within manufacturer's recommended application temperature
ranges.
C. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow to dry. Limit priming to areas that
will be covered by air barrier sheet in same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24
hours.
1. Prime glass-fiber-surfaced gypsum sheathing with number of prime coats needed to
achieve required bond, with adequate drying time between coats.
D. Apply a continuous unbroken air barrier to substrates according to the following minimum
thickness. Apply membrane in fiill contact around protmsions such as masonry ties.
1. Vapor-Permeable Membrane Air Barrier: 100-mil wet film thickness, 55-mil
minimum dry film thickness.
E. Do not cover air barrier until it has been tested and inspected by Owner's testing agency.
F. Correct deficiencies in or remove air bartier that does not comply with requirements; repair
substrates and reapply air barrier components.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform inspections and
prepare inspection reports.
B. Inspections: Air barrier materials and installation are subject to inspection for compliance
with requirements. Inspections may include the following:
FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS
072726 - 6
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgino Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbad Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
1. Continuity of air barrier system has been achieved throughout the building envelope
with no gaps or holes.
2. Continuous stmctural support of air barrier system has been provided.
3. Masonry and concrete surfaces are smooth, clean and free of cavities, protmsions,
and mortar droppings.
4. Site conditions for application temperature and dryness of substrates have been
maintained.
5. Maximum exposure time of materials to UV deterioration has not been exceeded.
6. Surfaces have been primed, if applicable.
7. Laps in strips and transition membranes have complied with minimum requirements
and have been shingled in the correct direction (or mastic has been applied on
exposed edges), with no fishmouths.
8. Termination mastic has been applied on cut edges.
9. Strips and transition membranes have been firmly adhered to substrate.
10. Compatible materials have been used.
11. Transitions at changes in direction and stmctural support at gaps have been provided.
12. Connections between assemblies (membrane and sealants) have complied with
requirements for cleanliness, preparation and priming of surfaces, stmctural support,
integrity, and continuity of seal.
13. All penetrations have been sealed.
C. Remove and replace deficient air barrier components and reinspect as specified above.
3.7 ADJUSTING
A. Remove masking materials after installation.
3.8 CLEANING
A. Clean spills, stains, and soiling from constmction that would be exposed in the completed
work using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected
constmction.
B. Constmction Waste Management: Manage constmction waste in accordance with
provisions of Section 01524 Constmction Waste Management.
3.9 PROTECTION
A. Protect air barrier system from damage during application and remainder of constmction
period, according to manufacturer's written instmctions.
1. Protect air barrier from exposure to UV light and harmful weather exposure as
required by manufacturer. Remove and replace vapor-permeable air barrier exposed
for more than 180 days.
2. Protect air barrier from contact with creosote, uncured coal-tar products, TPO,
EPDM, flexible PVC membranes, and sealants not approved by air barrier
manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 072726
FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS
072726 - 7
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS
072726 - 8
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
SECTION 072729 - UNDERLAYMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Provide underlayments and flashings for the following applications, with related concealed
metal flashings and accessories as required for complete watertight installation:
1. Portland Cement Plaster Underlayment: Building paper underlayment and flashing
for lath and plaster.
2. Roofing felt underlayment.
3. Flexible Flashings at Underlayment Penetrations: Sheet membrane flexible flashing
at miscellaneous locations including terminations of building paper underlayment,
penetrations through building paper underlayment and curb/cap/threshold horizontal
surfaces.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 092400 - Portland Cement Plastering: Application of self-adhering bituminous
sheet flashing at terminations, openings, and penetrations.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide data indicating material characteristics, performance criteria, and
limitations.
B.
1.5
A.
1.6
A.
B.
Samples for Verification: For the following products, of sizes indicated, to verify color
selected.
1. Building Paper: 12-inches (300 mm) square.
2. Self-Adhering Underlayment: 12-inches (300 mm) square.
3. Flexible Flashing Material: 12-inches (300 mm) square.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Perform Work in accordance with Sealant and Waterproofer's Institute
Caulking Guide Specification requirements for installation.
Sealant and
Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of underlayment material from single
source providing consistent quality in performance and appearance without delaying
progress of the Work.
UNDERLAYMENTS
072729-1
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Library
City of Carlsbad Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 201 5 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project she to comply with requirements
in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review requirements for
waterproofing, including surface preparation specified under other Sections, substrate
condition and pretreatment, minimum curing period, forecasted weather conditions, special
details and sheet flashings, installation procedures, testing and inspection procedures, and
protection and repairs.
1.7 DELFVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect underlayment materials from puncture damage prior to use.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for handling and storage, and
protection during installation.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer
agrees to replace installed underlayment materials that do not comply with requirements or
that fail achieve a watertight seal, or exhibits loss of adhesion or cohesion within specified
warranty period.
1. Wartanty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide continuous underlayments without gaps or holes where indicated on Drawings.
2.2 SHEET MATERIALS
A. Building Paper: FS UU-B-790a, Type 1, Grade D, Style 2 vapor-permeable, 60 minute
building paper.
1. Locations: At plaster walls where shown.
2. Manufacturer: Fortifiber; Super Jumbo Tex.
B. Sheet Membrane Underlayment under Sheet Metal and Flashing: Minimum 40-mil thick,
self-adhering, polymer-modified, bituminous sheet membrane, complying with ASTM
D1970/D1970M, manufacturers and types as follows:
1. Carlisle Coatings and Waterproofing: Dri-Start HR.
2. Grace Constmction Products: Grace Ice and Water Shield HT.
2.3 FLEXIBLE FLASHINGS AT OPENINGS
A. Flexible Flashings: Self-adhered mbberized sheet membrane consisting of self-adhesive
mbberized asphalt bonded to a cross-laminated high-density polyethylene film with primers
and seam sealers as required for complete watertight installation, compliant with local
regulations on VOC's and as follows:
I. Membrane Flashings at Plaster and Building Paper Underlayment Terminations and
Comers: 25-mil membrane, manufacturers and types as follows:
UNDERLAYMENTS
072729-2
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbad Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
a. Grace Constmction Products: Vycor Plus.
2. Membrane Flashings at Openings in Vertical Surfaces and Underlayment
Penetrations: 40-mil membrane, manufacturers and types as follows:
a. Carlisle Coatings and Waterproofing: Window and Door Flashing.
b. Grace Constmction Products: Vycor V40 Self-Adhered Flashing.
B. Tape: Polyethylene pressure senshive, self-adhering type, mesh reinforced, 2-inch (25 mm)
wide, compatible with underlayment.
1. Grace Constmction Products: Prepmfe Tape.
C. Adhesive: Compatible with underlayment and substrate, permanently non-curing; as
recommended by underlayment manufacturer.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Primer for Sheet Membrane: As recommended by manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify required condition of substrate and adjacent constmction with installer present.
Make any corrections before proceeding with underlayment installation.
B. Do not proceed with installation of underlayments until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected. Proceeding with installation indicates acceptance of substrate.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove loose or foreign matter that might impair adhesion.
B. Clean and prime substrate surfaces to receive adhesive in accordance with manufacturers'
instmctions.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install underlayment materials in accordance with manufacturer's instmctions.
1. Refer to manufacturer's literature for recommendations on installation, including but
not limited to, the following:
2. Apply primer at the rate recommended by manufacturer. Recoat areas not
waterproofed if contaminated by dust. Mask and protect adjoining exposed finish
surfaces to protect those surfaces from excessive application of primer.
3. Delay application of membrane until primer is completely dry. Dry time will vary
with weather conditions.
4. Seal daily terminations with troweled bead of mastic.
B. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer
when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.
UNDERLAYMENTS
072729-3
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Library
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
C. Seal penetrations of pipe and conduit with tape to ensure an airtight seal. Seal tears and
punctures with tape immediately before proceeding with covering the underlayment. Use a
second layer of underlayment material where damage to underlayment is extensive and
would require excessive use of tape to repair.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Constmction Waste Management: Manage constmction waste in accordance with
provisions of Section 01524 Constmction Waste Management.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed underlayments from damage by harmful weather exposure, and other
constmction activities.
B. Do not permit adjacent Work to damage Work of this Section.
END OF SECTION 072729
UNDERLAYMENTS
072729-4
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research -I- Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
SECTION 074113 - METAL ROOF PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Factory-formed and field-assembled concealed-fastener, lap-seam metal roof panels.
B. Underlayments installed under roof panels.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 075100 - Built-up Bituminous Roofing: Rigid insulation.
B. Section 076000 - Flashing and Sheet Metal: Gutters and downspouts; flashings and other
sheet metal work not part of metal roof panel assemblies.
C. Section 079200 - Joint Sealants: Field-applied sealants not otherwise specified in this
Section.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design Criteria: Design metal roofing system to withstand loads as required by Califomia
Building Code.
1. Design system to provide movement of components without buckling, failure of joint
seals, undue stress on fasteners or other detrimental effects, when subject to 100-year
seasonal temperature ranges.
2. Design system to accommodate tolerances of stmcture, provided irregularities do not
exceed industry recognized standards and clearances are maintained.
3. Provide for positive drainage of water entering or occurring within preformed metal
roofing system.
4. Cool Roof System: Comply with Califomia Title24 requirements for "Cool Roof
system.
a. Reflectance: Not less than 0.70 Reflectance.
b. Thermal Emittance: Not less than 0.9 Thermal Emittance.
c. Label: System to have Cool Roof Rating Council (CRRC) label.
5. Fire Resistance: Conform to Califomia Building Code requirements for
Underwriters Laboratory (UL) Roof Fire Hazard classification: Class A Roof
system.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include constmction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes for each type of metal roof panel and accessory.
METAL ROOF PANELS
SECTION 074113-1
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research -1- Planning, Inc.
Bid Set-April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
B. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of
size indicated below.
1. Metal Roof Panels: 12- by 12-inches (300 by 300 mm) of profile indicated.
C. Sustainabiiity Submittals: See Section 018113 for additional requirements; provide the
following:
1. Product Test Reports and Data: For roof materials, indicating that roof materials
comply with Solar Reflectance Index (SRI) requirement.
a. Provide drawings of roof highlighting locations of specific roof materials and
green roof systems.
b. Indicate total area of installed SRI compliant roofing materials.
c. Provide a list of installed roofing materials and their SRI values.
2. Product Data: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating
percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content.
a. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver components, sheets, metal roof panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be
damaged or deformed. Package metal roof panels for protection during transportation and
handling.
B. Unload, store, and erect metal roof panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping,
twisting, and surface damage.
C. Stack metal roof panels on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and
ventilated covering. Store metal roof panels to ensure dryness. Do not store metal roof
panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface
damage.
D. Protect strippable protective covering on metal roof panels from exposure to sunlight and
high humidity, except to extent necessary for period of metal roof panel installation.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit assembly of metal roof panels to be performed according to
manufacturers' written instmctions.
B. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the
Work, either establish framing and opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal
roof panels without field measurements, or allow for field-trimming of panels. Coordinate
roof constmction to ensure that actual building dimensions, locations of stmctural members,
and openings correspond to established dimensions.
METAL ROOF PANELS
SECTION 074113-2
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUSTAINABILITY MATERL\L REQUIREMENTS, GENERAL
A. Roof Material: Energy Star compliant and have a non-rounded emissivity value of at least
0. 9 when tested in accordance with ASTM E408.
B. Recycled Content: Use materials and products that contain the maximum amount of
recycled content allowed that retains material integrity.
C. VOC Content: Adhesives, sealants, paints, welding, and coatings applied on-site on the
interior of the building and products used on the interior of the building shall comply with
VOC limits as specified in Section 018113 - Sustainable Design Requirements.
1. Use materials that have the minimum VOC content in units of g/L when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2.2 PANEL MATERIALS
A. Preformed metal roofing system complete with anchoring assembly, and accessory
components.
1. Panel Finish: Smooth.
2. Type: Manufacturer's standard thin profile standing seam 22 gage shop finished zinc
coated steel conforming to ASTM A653 G90 galvanized with approximate 2" high
seams approximately 16" on center, with integral or separate seam cap.
B. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for the metal roof panels is based on the manufacturer
identified below. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a
comparable product by one of the following:
1. Basis-of-Design: Morin, Morzip.
2. Centria SRS3.
3. Centria SDP 200.
C. Coil coat metal; comply with following finishes as designed by NAAMM "METAL
Finishes Manual" and referenced standards.
1. Two coat coil applied, baked-on full-strength (70% resin) fluorocarbon coating
system (polyvinylidene fluoride, PVF2), applied by manufacturer's approved
applicator.
2. Coating system shall provide nominal 1.5 mil min. dry film thickness, consisting of
primer and color coat.
3. Color shall be selected by the Architect from the Manufacturer's standard and
premium metallics color range; Architect's Option: color to meet "cool roof and
"Energy Star" requirements.
4. Unexposed surfaces for coated G90 galvanized shall be baked-on polyester coating
with .20 - .30 dry film thickness (TDF).
D. Integral Flashing and Sheet Metal: Minimum 22 gage galvanized steel, minimum G90
galvanized coating, ASTM A924 and A653, same finish as roof panels.
E. Closures, Sealants, and Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard type suhable for use in
conjunction with installation of metal roofing.
METAL ROOF PANELS
SECTION 074113-3
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
1. Non-Staining; non-corrosive; non-shrinking and non-sagging; ultra-violet and ozone
resistant for exterior applications.
2. Color of exposed sealants and gaskets to match roofing.
F. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard hot dip galvanized fasteners with not less than G90
galvanized coating.
1. Exposed fasteners are not allowed. All fasteners shall be hidden and lapped over.
2. Concealed Anchor Clips: Clips must be 16 gauge, (G-90 galvanized steel or stainless
steel) clip with projecting legs for additional panel alignment and provision for
unlimited thermal movement in each direction along the longitudinal dimension.
Clip must maintain a clearance of a minimum of 3/8" between panel and substrate for
proper ventilation to help prevent condensation on underside of panel and eliminate
the contact of panel fastener head to panel.
3. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws with hex
washer head.
4. Blind Fasteners: High-strength galvanized or stainless-steel rivets.
G. Standing Seam Panels:
1. Width: 16".
2. Panel length: Continuous without joints and shah be fully watertight.
3. Panel ends shall be panned at ridge, headwall, and hip conditions where applicable.
H. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, G90 (Z275) coating
designation; stmctural quality.
I. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil
(0.4-mm) dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type non-corrosive compound free of
asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Roofing Accessories:
1. Fasteners: Concealed fasteners: Corrosion resistant steel screws designed to meet
stmctural loading requirements. The normal minimum screw size shall be Rawl #12
Deck Screw.
2. Closures: Factory pre-cut closed cell foam meeting ASTM D3575, cross-linked
closed cell polyolefin foam, enclosed in metal channel matching panels when used at
hip and ridge.
3. Subgirts shall be fabricated from minimum 16 gage zinc coated steel conforming to
ASTM A653 SQ Grade 37 with G90 coating.
B. Roof Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal roof panel
assembly including trim, ridge closures, clips, flashings, closure strips, and similar items.
Match material and finish of metal roof panels, tmless otherwise indicated.
1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same metal as metal
roof panels.
2. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from
material recommended by manufacturer.
METAL ROOF PANELS
SECTION 074113-4
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbad Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set-April 10, 2015
3. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, mbber or crosslinked, polyolefin-
foam or closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick,
flexible closure strips; cut or pre-molded to match metal roof panel profile. Provide
closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight constmction.
C. Flashing and Trim: Formed from 0.0179-inch- (0.45-mm-) thick, zinc-coated (galvanized)
steel sheet. Provide fiashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide
finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, eaves, rakes, comers, bases,
framed openings, ridges, fasciae, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish
system as adjacent metal roof panels. See Section 076000.
D. Rigid hisulation: See Section 075100.
E. Underlayment Membrane: Cold-applied, self-adhering membrane composed of a high
density, cross laminated polyethylene film with an embossed, slip-resistant surface and
coated on one side with a layer of mbberized asphalt adhesive. Membrane shall conform to
the following physical properties:
1. Color: Gray-Black.
2. Membrane Thickness: ASTM D3767, Method A, 1.02 mm (40 mil).
3. Membrane Tensile Strength: ASTM D412 (Die C Modified), 1720 kN/m^ (250 psi).
4. Membrane Elongation: ASTM D412 (Die C Modified), 250%.
5. Low Temperattire Flexibility: ASTM D1970, unaffected @ -29°C (-20°F).
6. Adhesion to Plywood: ASTM D903, 525 N/m (3.0 lb/in. width).
7. Permeance (Max): ASTM E96, 2.9 ng/m^s Pa (0.05 Perms).
8. Material Weight histalled (Max): ASTM D461, 1.3 kg/m^ (0.3 Ib/ft^).
F. Gutters: See Section 076000. Finish gutters to match metal roof panels.
G. Downspouts: See Section 076000. Finish downspouts to match building.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate and finish metal roof panels and accessories at the factory to greatest
extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill
indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with
indicated profiles and with dimensional and stmctural requirements.
B. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full
length of panel.
C. Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions,
metal, and other characteristics of item indicated.
1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning,
buckling, and tool marks and that are tme to line and levels indicated, with exposed
edges folded back to form hems.
2. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat-lock seams. Tin edges
to be seamed, form seams, and solder.
3. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are
not allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view.
METAL ROOF PANELS
SECTION 074113-5
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Library
City of Corlsbad Controct 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research -I- Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
4. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being
anchored or from compatible, non-corrosive metal recommended by metal roof panel
manufacturer. Supply cleats of size recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural
Sheet Metal Manual" or metal roof panel manufacturer for application but not less
than thickness of metal being secured.
2.5 FINISHES
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying specified finish.
B. High-Performance Organic Finish: Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal
surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instmctions.
1. Fluoropolymer Two-Coat System: Manufacturer's standard two-coat, thermocured
system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color
topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight;
complying with physical properties and coating performance requirements of
AAMA 2605.
a. Color: As selected by the Architect from manufacturer's standard colors
including those with high CRI.
C. Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard white or light-colored
acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum
total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil (0.013 mm).
D. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, metal roof panel supports, and other conditions
affecting performance of work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Install flashings and other sheet metal to comply with requirements specified in Section
076000.
B. Miscellaneous Framing: Install sub-purlins, eave angles, furring, and other miscellaneous
roof panel support members and anchorage according to metal roof panel manufacturer's
written recommendations.
^^^^
METAL ROOF PANELS
SECTION 074113-6
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research -I- Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbad Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
3.3 METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Provide metal roof panels of frill length from eave to ridge, unless otherwise
indicated or restricted by shipping limitations. Anchor metal roof panels and other
components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and stmctural
movement.
1. Install panels perpendicular to purlins.
2. Rigidly fasten eave end of metal roof panels and allow ridge end free movement due
to thermal expansion and contraction. Pre-drill panels.
3. Provide metal closures at peaks and rake edges.
4. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment.
5. Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, stmctural supports. Stagger panel
splices and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition.
6. Lap metal flashing over metal roof panels to allow moisture to mn over and off the
material.
B. Fasteners: Use stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior and galvanized
steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior.
C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,
protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by
other permanent separation as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer.
3.4 FIELD-ASSEMBLED METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION
A. Lap-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with fasteners at each
lapped joint at location and spacing recommended by manufacturer.
1. Arrange and nest side-lap joints so prevailing winds blow over, not into, lapped
joints. Lap ribbed or fluted sheets one full rib cormgation. Apply panels and
associated items for neat and weathertight enclosure. Avoid "panel creep" or
application not tme to line.
2. Provide metal-backed washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather
side of metal roof panels.
3. Locate and space exposed fasteners in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment.
Use proper tools to obtain controlled uniform compression for positive seal without
mpture of washer.
4. Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to
compress washer tightly without damage to washer, screw threads, or panels. Install
screws in predrilled holes.
5. At panel splices, nest panels with minimum 6-inch (150-mm) end lap fastened
together by interlocking clamping plates.
3.5 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting
and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other
components.
1. Install components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including trim,
ridge closures, flashings, closure strips, and similar items.
METAL ROOF PANELS
SECTION 074113-7
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written
installation instmctions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide
concealed fasteners where possible, and set units tme to line and level as indicated. Install
work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.
1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and
tool marks and that is tme to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded
back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to resuh
in waterproof and weather-resistant performance.
C. Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered or lapped and sealed joints. Attach gutters
to eave with gutter hangers spaced not more than 4 feet (1.2 m) oc using manufacturer's
standard fasteners. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Provide for
thermal expansion.
D. Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) telescoping joints. Provide fasteners
designed to hold downspouts securely 1-inch (25 mm) away from walls; locate fasteners at
top and bottom and at approximately 60-inches (1500 mm) oc in between.
1. Tie downspouts to underground drainage or collection system indicated.
3.6 CLEANING
A. On completion of metal roof panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by
metal roof panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during constmction.
B. Constmction Waste Management: Manage constmction waste in accordance with
provisions of Section 01524 Constmction Waste Management.
END OF SECTION 074113
METAL ROOF PANELS
SECTION 074113-8
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research -1- Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
SECTION 074253 - PHENOLIC RAINSCREEN PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Exterior ventilated phenolic rainscreen cladding system at elevator tower.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate phenolic wall panel assemblies with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and
constmction of studs, soffits, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and
noncorrosive installation.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit data and samples for each type of finish required.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of phenolic wall panels; details
of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, comers, anchorages, attachment system, trim,
flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details. Distinguish among factory-, shop-,
and field-assembled work.
1. Drawings shall be complete with specific instmctions for the installation of panels,
sub-frame assemblies and other component parts.
2. Include engineering analysis.
3. Drawings shall indicate sizes of ventilation openings and methods of preventing
unwanted insects or animals from entering cavity behind panels.
4. Include shop drawings for mockup.
5. Accessories: Include details of the following items, at a scale of not less than 1-1/2
inches per 12 inches (1:10):
a. Flashing and trim.
b. Anchorage systems.
c. Comer gasketing and sealants.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type, color, texture, and pattem required.
1. Two samples 12-inch- (300-mm-) long-by-actual-width Sample of each specified
rainscreen color with sealer and end sealer.
2. Exposed Flashing, Exposed Closures, and Gaskets: Two samples of each
component.
3. Trim and Closures: 12 inches (300 mm) long. Include fasteners and other exposed
accessories.
4. Accessories: 12-inch- (300-mm-) long Samples for each type of accessory.
5. Exposed Gaskets: 12 inches (300 mm) long.
PHENOUC RAINSCREEN PANELS
074253-1
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 201 5 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
D. Sustainabiiity Submittals:
1. Product Data for products having recycled content, documentation indicating
percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content.
a. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.
b. Provide total weight of products provided.
2. Product Data for each material, including its source, cost, and the fraction by weight
that is considered regional and that has been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as
well as manufactijred, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site.
3. Product Data for for each product to be used as proof that each product meets the
requirements of the GREENGUARD Environmental Institute's GREENGUARD
certification.
a. Include printed statement of VOC content and chemical components.
4. Product Data for the following:
a. For each composite-wood product used, documentation indicating that the
bonding agent contains no urea formaldehyde.
b. For each adhesive used, documentation indicating that the adhesive contains
no urea formaldehyde.
E. Coordination Drawings: Exterior elevations, drawn to scale, on which the following items
are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items
involved:
1. Wall panels and attachments.
2. Support framing.
3. Wall-mounted items including lighting fixtures.
4. Penetrations of wall by pipes and utilities.
F. Delegated-Design Submittal: For phenolic rainscreen system indicated to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by
the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1. Detail fabrication and assembly of phenolic rainscreen system.
2. Include design calculations.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer and Installer.
1. If rainscreen manufacturer does not install rainscreen, provide certification from
manufacturer indicating Installer is acceptable.
B. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the
following:
1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for
compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.
2. Interpretation of test resuhs and written recommendations for primers and substrate
preparation needed for adhesion.
C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, for each product.
D. Research/Evaluation Reports: For each type of wall panel required.
PHENOUC RAINSCREEN PANELS
074253-2
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research -I- Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
E. Submit documents showing product compliance with the local building code prior to the
bid. Altemate materials must be approved by the Architect prior to the bid date.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For rainscreen materials to include in maintenance manuals.
B. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations for Wall Panel: Obtain each type, color, and pattem of wall panel,
including related accessories, through one source from a single manufacturer.
B. Preconstmction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit samples of materials that will
contact joint sealants to joint-sealant manufacturers for testing indicated in subparagraphs
below:
1. Use manufacturer's standard test methods to determine whether priming and other
specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion
of joint sealants to joint substrates.
2. Submit no fewer than nine pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates,
shims, joint-sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.
3. Schedule enough time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.
4. For materials failing tests, obtain joint-sealant manufacturer's written instmctions for
corrective measures, including use of specially formulated primers.
C. Installer Qualiflcations: Fabricator of phenolic wall panels.
1. Installer's responsibilities include fabricating and installing phenolic wall panel
assemblies and providing professional engineering services needed to assume
engineering responsibility.
2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for phenolic wall panels, including
Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard
units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.
3. Design shall include, but not be limited to attachment to sub-constmction, panel-to-
panel joinery, panel-to-dissimilar-material joinery, and joint seals associated with the
phenolic wall panel system.
D. Mockup: Build mockup to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects.
1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on approved Shop Drawings.
2. Locate mockup where directed by Architect.
3. Do not proceed with constmction of mockup until all submittals for the mockup have
been approved by the Architect.
4. Constmct mockup using identical detailing, erection and finishing procedures as
proposed for the Work.
5. Approved mockup establishes minimum standard of quality, fabrication, and
installation for the Work.
6. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless such deviations are specifically approved by
Architect in writing.
PHENOUC RAINSCREEN PANELS
074253-3
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Carlsbod Controct 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
7. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time
of Final Completion.
1.8 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A. Conduct conference at Project site. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if
applicable, testing and inspecting agency representative, phenolic wall panel Installer,
phenolic wall panel manufacturer's representative, stmctural-support Installer, and installers
whose work interfaces with or affects phenolic wall panel including installers of doors,
windows, and louvers. Review methods and procedures related to phenolic wall panel
assemblies including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Review and finalize constmction schedule and verify availability of materials.
Installer's personnel, equipment, and facihties needed to make progress and avoid
delays.
2. Review mockup procedures, location of mockup and protection procedures after
completion of approved mockup.
3. Review methods and procedures related to phenolic wall panel installation, including
manufacturer's written instmctions.
4. Examine support conditions for compliance with requirements, including alignment
between and attachment to stmctural members.
5. Review flashings, special rainscreen details, wall penetrations, openings, and
condition of other constmction that will affect phenolic wall panel.
6. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance, certificates, and
testing and inspecting if applicable.
7. Review temporary protection requirements for rainscreen assembly during and after
installation.
8. Review rainscreen observation and repair procedures after phenolic wall panel
installation.
9. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and
fumish copy of record to each participant.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Unload, store, and erect rainscreen in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and
surface damage.
B. Storage and Protection: Store materials flat and keep dry in a warehouse/storage facility,
protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions, at temperatures and humidity
conditions recommended by the manufacturer.
1.10 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit assembly of rainscreen to be performed according to manufacturer's
written instmctions and warranty requirements.
1. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's
absolute limits.
PHENOUC RAINSCREEN PANELS
074253-4
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
B. Field Measurements: Verify locations of stmctural members and wall opening dimensions
by field measurements before phenolic wall panel fabrication and indicate measurements on
Shop Drawings.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to
repair or replace components of phenolic wall panel assemblies that fail in materials,
fabrication, or installation within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1. Cracking.
2. Deforming.
3. Delamination between the veneer and core, or otherwise deteriorating beyond normal
weathering.
4. Warranty Period: Ten years from date of Final Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUSTAINABILITY MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS, GENERAL
A. Recycled Content: Provide phenolic panel products made with average recycled content
postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less
than 25 percent.
B. Local/Regional Materials: Give preference to manufacturer's whose facilities are within a
500 mile radius of the project site. Also give preference to materials that are harvested,
extracted, mined, quarried, etc. within a 500 mile radius of the project site.
C. Composite Wood and Agrifiber: Use only composite wood and agrifiber products free of
added urea formaldehyde resin binders.
D. Phenolic Panel Materials: Provide only phenolic panel products that are GREENGUARD
Certified.
2.2 PHENOLIC SCREEN MATERL\L
A. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Trespa Intemational B.V.; P.O. Box 110, 6000 AC Weert
Wetering 20, 6002 SM Weert The Netherlands; www.irespa.com.
2.3 WALL PANELS
A. Solid Phenolic Wall Panels: Trespa Meteon by Trespa Intemational as represented by
Trespa North America, LTD.
1. Material: Solid panel manufactured using a combination of high pressure and
temperature to create a flat panel created from thermosetting resins, homogenously
reinforced with wood-based fibers and an integrated decorative surface or printed
decor.
a. Color: As selected by the Archhect from manufacturer's full Uni-Color series.
Allow for 3 colors.
PHENOUC RAINSCREEN PANELS
074253-5
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Library
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
2. Finish: Satin sheen.
3. Panel Core: ASTM E84; fire retardant (FR) black core.
4. Panel Thickness: 1/2 inch (13 mm).
5. Physical Properties:
a. Modulus of Elasticity: 1,300,000 psi (9000 N/mm2) minimum, ISO 178.
b. Tensile Strength: 10,100 psi (70 N/mm2) minimum, ISO 527-2.
c. Flexural Strength: 14,500psi (120 N/mm2) minimum, ISO 178.
d. Thermal Conductivity: 2.1 BTU/inch/ft2.hr.°F, EN 12524.
e. Stmcttiral Performance (ASTM E330/E330M):
1) Panels shall be designed to withstand the Design Wind Load based upon
the local building code, but in no case less than 15 pounds per square
foot (psf). Wind load testing shall be done in accordance with this
standard to obtain the following results:
2) Normal to the plane of the wall, the maximum panel deflection shall not
exceed L/l75
3) Normal to the plane of the wall between supports, deflection of the
aluminum sub-framing members shall not exceed L/l 75 or 3/4 inch,
whichever is less
a) At 1-1/2 times design pressure, permanent deflection of framing
members shall not exceed L/l00 of span length and components
shall not experience failure or gross permanent distortion.
b) If system tests are not available, mock ups shall be constmcted
and tests performed under the direction of an independent third
party laboratory which show compliance to the minimum
standards listed above.
6. Fire Performance:
a. Flame Spread: Class A, ASTM E84.
b. Smoke Development: Less than 450, ASTM E84.
c. Ignition Temperature: Greater than 650 degree F (350 degree C) above
ambient, ASTM D1929.
d. Burning Classification: CCl or CC2, ASTM D635.
e. When required for compliance with local building codes, the wall cladding
assembly shall show no degradation of the rating of Fire Resistant Assemblies,
ASTM El 19.
f. When required for compliance with local building codes, the wall cladding
assembly shall meet the performance requirements for Multi Story
constmction, NFPA 285.
g. When required for compliance with local building codes, the wall cladding
assembly shall not ignite when exposed to a radiant heat energy source,
NFPA 268.
7. Finish Performance: Electron Beam Cure resin in conformance with the following
general requirements:
a. Color: As selected by the architect/engineer from manufacturer's standard
colors or a custom color to be matched by the panel supplier.
b. Humidity Resistance: No formation of blisters when subjected to condensing
water fog at 100% relative humidity and 100 degree F (38 degree C) for 3000
hours, ASTM D2247.
c. Salt Spray Resistance: Corrosion creepage from scribe line (1/16 inch (1.6
mm) max.) and minimum blister rating of 8 within the test specimen field,
ASTM Bl 17.
PHENOUC RAINSCREEN PANELS
074253-6
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set-April 10, 2015
d. Weather Exposure: Accelerated - 3000 hours in Atlas Type Weatherometer
using cycle of 90 minutes light and 30 minutes diminished light and
demineralized water with a maximum color change of 5 Delta E units from the
original color according to ASTM D2244, with the exception of Uni-Colors
A12.3.7 / Al8.3.5 / A04.1.7, which will not deviate more than 10 Delta E units
from original color according ASTM D2244.
e. Color Stability: The decorative surface comply with, classification, 4-5
measured with the grey scale according to ISO 105 A02-93 according to test
method EN 438-2:29.
f Microbial Characteristics: Will not support micro-organic growth (ISO 846).
B. Panel Comer Profile: Chamfered and mechanically connected.
C. Subframe Assembly: Exposed or concealed fastening, as indicated on Drawings.
D. Aluminum Sub Stmcture: Designed to withstand stmctural loading due to wind load and
the dead load of the panel.
1. Subframe Material: 6063-T6 extmded aluminum channels, painted black, with
minimum thickness of 1/8 inch (3.2 mm).
2. Extmsions, including comer closures, joint closures and vent screens, formed
members, sheet, and plate shall conform with the recommendations of the
manufacturer.
E. Extmded Aluminum Trim: Color as specified in the finish schedule.
F. Fasteners (Concealed/Exposed): #12-11 Stainless Steel, 300 Series and as recommended by
panel manufacturer. Exposed fasteners shall be colored to match panels where required by
the Architect.
2.4 AIR BARRIER
A. Ah Barrier: See Section 072719.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Panels: Solid phenolic impregnated kraft paper wall panels with no voids, air spaces or
foamed insulation in the core material. Accessory hems in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations and approved submittals
1. Panel Weight: 8 mm (2.4 Ib/sq ft), 10 mm (3 Ib/sq ft), 13 mm (3.8 lb/ sq ft).
2. Panel Bow: = 2 mm / m (= 0.079 inch/39.38 inches).
B. Panel Dimensions: Field fabrication shall be allowed where necessary, but shall be kept to
an absolute minimum. All fabrication shall be done under controlled shop conditions when
possible.
C. Appearance: Panel lines, breaks, and angles shall be sharp, tme, and surfaces free from
warp and buckle
PHENOUC RAINSCREEN PANELS
074253-7
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Ubrory
City of Carlsbod Controct 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Pianning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
condhions affecting performance of phenolic wall panels.
B. Inspect surfaces to receive panels to verify substrate is even, smooth, sound, clean, dry and
free from defects defrimental to the Work.
C. Examine rough-in components and systems penetrating wall panels to verify actual
locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of panels prior to installation.
D. Verify primary and secondary wall framing stmctural support members have been installed
with alignment tolerances required by wall panel manufacturer.
E. Confirm exterior sheathing is plumb and level, with no deflection greater than 1/4 inch (6
mm) in 20 feet (6096 mm).
F. Examine alignment of backup stmcture prior to installing sub-frame.
G. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of
unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the
best result for the substrate under the project conditions.
3.3 RAINSCREEN INSTALLATION
A. Install rainscreen plumb, level, and tme and accurately spaced in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations and approved submittals.
1. Predrill all holes in finish boards.
B. Orient rainscreen supports vertically to allow for continuous ventilation behind the
rainscreen.
1. Shim supports as required to provide an even and consistent surface for proper
fastening of the panels.
C. Align fasteners vertically and horizontally within each board and between adjacent boards.
Drill pilot holes before fastening. Fasten to prevent movement or warping. Drive fasteners
flush with phenolic surface.
D. Anchor panels and sub-framing securely per engineering recommendations and in
accordance with approved shop drawings to allow for necessary movement and stmctural
support.
PHENOUC RAINSCREEN PANELS
074253-8
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
1. Fasten rainscreen to supporting substrate with fasteners approved for use with
adjoining constmction.
2. Space fasteners as indicated and following pattem shown on Drawings.
E. Fastening: Pre-drill a clearance hole, 2 mm larger than the size of the screw into the board
to allow for movement. All the holes should be pre-drilled with a dimension 2 mm larger in
diameter than the diameter ofthe fastener, except one. The hole in the geometrical center of
the board should have the same diameter as the diameter of the screw.
1. Pre-drill boards regardless of type of fastener to be used, including self-drilling
screws, to prevent damage to the boards and dulling of the fastener's blade, which
could prevent it from drilling through the board supports.
F. Maintain unintermpted air circulation from top to bottom behind the rainscreen system as
indicated on Drawings.
G. Space rainscreen members with uniform gaps as indicated on the Drawings.
H. Locate joints only over framing, blocking, or spacers. Stagger joints in subsequent courses.
I. Do not cut or trim component parts during erection in a manner which would decrease
strength or result in visual imperfection or a failure in performance. Retum component parts
which require alteration to shop for refabrication, if possible, or for replacement with new
parts.
J. Flashing: Install metal flashing as indicated on Drawings.
K. Accessory Items: Install comer profiles, gaskets, trims and flashings with fasteners
appropriate for use with adjoining constmction as indicated on drawings and as
recommended by manufacturer.
L. Do not install panels or component parts which are observed to be defective or damaged
including, but not limited to: warped, bowed, abraded, scratched, and broken members.
M. Do not paint rainscreen.
3.4 FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written
installation instmctions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide
concealed fasteners where possible, and set units tme to line and level as indicated. Install
work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.
B. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool
marks and that is tme to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form
hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and
weather-resistant performance.
C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and frim. Space
movement joints at a maximum of 10-feet (3 m) with no joints allowed whhin 24-inches
(600 mm) of comer or intersection.
PHENOUC RAINSCREEN PANELS
074253-9
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
D. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be
sufficiently weather resistant and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked
flanges, not less than 1-inch (25 mm) deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within
joints).
3.5 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align rainscreen units within installed tolerance of 1/4-
inch in 20-feet (6 mm in 6 m), non-cumulative, on level, plumb, and location lines as
indicated and within 1/16-inch (1.5-mm) offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of
matching profiles.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and
inspections.
B. Water Penetration: Test areas of installed system indicated on Drawings for compliance
with system performance requirements according to ASTM El 105 at minimum differential
pressure of 20 percent of inward-acting, wind-load design pressure as defined by
SELASCE 7, but not less than 6.24 Ibf/sq. ft. (300 Pa).
C. Water-Spray Test: After completing the installation of 75-foot- (23-m-) by-2-story
minimum area of phenolic wall panel assembly, test assembly for water penetration
according to AAMA 501.2 in a 2-bay area directed by Architect.
D. Rainscreen will be considered defective it does not pass tests and inspections.
E. Additional tests and inspections, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
F. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.7 DAMAGED MATERIAL
A. Repair or replace all damaged material to the satisfaction ofthe Architect.
3.8 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust final panel installation so that all joints are tme and even throughout the installation.
Panels out of plane shall be adjusted with the surrounding panels to minimize any
imperfection.
B. Remove and replace rainscreen sections damaged beyond repair as a direct result of the
installation. After installation, rainscreen repair and replacement shall become the
responsibility of the General Contractor.
C. Remove masking or panel protection as soon as possible after installation. Any masking
intentionally left in place after panel installation on an elevation, shall become the
responsibility of the General Contractor to remove.
PHENOUC RAINSCREEN PANELS
074253-10
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research -I- Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbad Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
D. Replace rainscreen that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair
by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
3.9 CLEANING
A. On completion of phenolic wall panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended
by panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during remainder of constmction
period.
B. After phenolic wall panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of
obstmctions, dirt, and sealant.
C. Do not use abrasive cleaners or cleaning tools. Dry wipe down panel sections as work
progresses.
D. Provide final cleaning ofthe wall system immediately prior to Final Completion.
E. Constmction Waste Management: Manage constmction waste in accordance with
provisions of Section 01524 Constmction Waste Management.
3.10 PROTECTION
A. Any additional protection, after installation, shall be the responsibility of the General
Contractor.
B. Protect installed product and finish surfaces from damage during remainder of constmction
period.
END OF SECTION 074253
PHENOUC RAINSCREEN PANELS
074253-11
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
PHENOUC RAINSCREEN PANELS
074253-12
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
SECTION 075100 - BUILT-UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Membrane roofing, base flashings, pipe and vent flashings, and cant strips.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 061053 - Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry: Wood nailers, cants, curbs, and
blocking.
B. Section 070155 - Roof Patching for Remodeling.
C. Section 076000 - Flashing and Sheet Metal: Counter flashing.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Fumish the following with bid documents:
1. Proposed start date, and number of working days to complete installation.
2. Manufacturer's installation instmctions for items not specified.
3. When required, performance and payment bond from Surety equal to the full amount
of the contract. Add the cost of this bond to the roofing subcontract.
B. Substitutions of materials or variance from specifications must be approved prior to bid
date. Submittals of substitutions must be received by Architect 5 days minimum prior to
bid date.
C. Approved variances will be supplied to all bidders in writing by Architect a minimum of 3
days prior to bid date. Bids for other than specified materials will not be considered
without approval.
D. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other Work.
1. Base flashings, cants, and membrane terminations.
2. Tapered insulation, including slopes.
3. Crickets, saddles, and tapered edge strips, including slopes.
E. Sustainabiiity Submittals:
1. Product Test Reports and Data: For roof materials, indicating that roof materials
comply with Solar Reflectance Index (SRI) requirement.
BUILT-UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING
075100-1
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbad Controct 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
a. Provide drawings of roof highlighting locations of specific roof materials and
green roof systems.
b. Indicate total area of installed SRI compliant roofing materials.
c. Provide a list of installed roofing materials and their SRI values.
2. Product Data: For each material, including its source, cost, and the fraction by
weight that is considered regional and that has been extracted, harvested, or
recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and manufacturer.
B. Installer Certificates: Signed by roofing system manufacturer certifying that Installer is
approved, authorized, or licensed by manufacturer to install roofing system.
C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that system installation meets or exceeds specified
requirements.
1. Also provide an Asphalt Confirmation Number indicated that the asphalt was
registered with an approved asphalt source.
D. Research/Evaluation Reports: Meeting current model code organization for components of
roofing system.
E. Inspection Report: Copy of roofing system manufacturer's inspection report of completed
roofing installation.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals.
B. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with most current edition of the NRCA Roofing and
Waterproofing Manual.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A nationally recognized, qualified manufacturer that is UL
listed for built-up roofing identical to that used for this Project, and having a minimum of 5
years continuous service manufacturing roofing products ofthe type specified.
C. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 3
years documented experience in installing the roofing systems specified, and licensed in the
State of California.
1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. - Building Materials Directory, "Built-up Roof Covering
Materials" and "Roof Deck Constmction", latest edition with current supplements.
BUILT-UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING
075100-2
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research -I- Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
B. Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation - Constmction Bulletin 1-28, and Building
Materials and Constmction Guide "Class I or II Fire and 160 or 190 Windstorm Rated",
latest edition with current revisions.
C. California Building Code - Chapter 15 and Appendix Chapter 15, latest edition.
1.9 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A. Convene a pre-installation conference one week prior to commencing work of this section.
Conduct conference at Project site. Conference shall be attended by Contractor, Owner,
Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting agency representative,
roofing Installer and his foreman, roofing system manufacturer's representative, deck
Installer and his foreman, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing
including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment.
B. Agenda shall include, but not be limited to the following:
1. Review preparation, methods and procedures related to roofing installation,
including manufacturer's written instmctions.
2. Review and finalize constmction schedule and verify availability of materials.
Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid
delays.
3. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements,
including flatness and fastening.
4. Review stmctural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing.
5. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations,
equipment curbs, and condition of other constmction that will affect roofing system.
6. Examine roof and flashing details for conflicts with manufacturer's specifications.
7. Coordinate flashing details at juncture with existing roof edge conditions.
8. Review code conflicts with UL, FMG, or other requirements.
9. Review goveming regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if
applicable.
10. Establish trade-related job schedules, including installation of roof mounted
equipment.
11. Establish schedules and work methods which will prevent roof damage.
12. Coordinate penetrations, curbs and walls on roof to be in place prior to roof
installation.
13. Designation of area on job site to be used as work and storage location.
14. Establish weather and working conditions to which all parties agree.
15. Establish requirements for temporary roofing during installation.
16. Enact provisions for monitoring roof installation after completion and prior to
acceptance of entire project.
17. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.
18. Other business relating to Work.
C. Where changes to any previously agreed-upon conditions are desired, the party requesting
the change shall give written notice regarding the desired change to all involved parties.
Make such requests through the Contractor to the Architect.
BUILT-UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING
075100-3
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Carlsbod Controct 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products in manufacturer's original unopened containers, dry, undamaged, with
seals, labels, and UL listing mark (where applicable) intact. Ensure EVT data is stenciled
on each bitumen container.
B. Obtain accompanying manufacturer's certificate clearly stating the type, quality, and
softening point of bitumen. Maintain material in a manner so as not to alter their
properties.
C. Store products in weather protected environment, clear of ground and moisture, on wood or
other clean rigid pads to prevent adherence of foreign materials.
D. Stack rolls of felt and composition flashing membrane on end atop properly protected wood
pallets, covered with canvas tarpaulin. Maintain at a temperature of 50 degrees F, or
higher, for 24 hours minimum prior to application.
E. Apply only dry materials. Do not leave open or uncovered material on roof ovemight.
Remove wet material from the job site.
F. Do not permit constmction materials or equipment to be used or stored in such a manner as
to damage decking or completed roofing.
1.11 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not apply roofing membrane during unsuitable weather when ambient temperature is
below 40 degrees F.
B. Do not apply roofing membrane to damp or frozen deck surface, when precipitation is
occurring, or fog is present.
C. Do not apply wet materials to deck surface.
D. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can be
weatherproofed the same day.
1.12 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard or customized form, without monetary
limitation, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of built-up
roofing that fail in materials, fabrication, or installation within specified warranty period.
1. Special warranty includes built-up roofing membrane, base flashings, roof insulation,
fasteners, cover boards, substrate board, roofing accessories, and other components
of built-up roofing.
2. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.13 SAFETY
A. Material handling and application, and associated equipment shall conform to and be
operated in accordance with OSHA safety requirements.
BUILT-UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING
075100-4
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbad Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
B. Provide sufficient, filled and operating fire extinguishers, meeting current code standards at
the job site at all times during roofing operations. Maintain extinguishers on the roof
whether hot asphah operations are in progress or not, for prevention of fires due to use of
gasoline in base sheet fastening and other uses.
C. Ensure asphalt kettles are continuously attended by experienced personnel during roofing
operations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUSTAINABILITY MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS, GENERAL
A. Roof Material: With initial Solar Reflectance Index not less than 78 when calculated
according to ASTM El980.
B. Local/Regional Materials: Give preference to manufacturer's whose facilities are within a
500 mile radius of the project site. Also give preference to materials that are harvested,
extracted, mined, quarried, etc. within a 500 mile radius of the project site.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Built-up Roofing System: Four ply asphah membrane system consisting of a base sheet
covered by two plies of asphalt coated glass fiber felt and a mineral cap sheet, applied with
hot asphalt.
1. Roof system must incorporate all aspects of roof waterproofing. When partial
roofing is done, complete area separations must be used.
B. System: Rated Class A by Underwriters' Laboratories, and Class 1, wind uplift rating 190,
by Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation.
C. General: Provide installed roofing membrane and base flashings that remain watertight; do
not permit the passage of water; and resist specified uplift pressures, thermally induced
movement, and exposure to weather without failure.
D. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another
under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roofing
manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
E. Energy Performance: Provide roofing system with initial Solar Reflectance Index not less
than 78 when calculated according to ASTM El980, based on testing identical products by
a qualified testing agency.
F. Energy Performance: Provide roofing system with initial solar reflectance not less than
0.70 and emissivity not less than 0.75 when tested according to CRRC-1.
2.3 SHEET MATERIALS
A. Sheathing Paper: Red-rosin type, minimum 3.0-3.4 (141-166 grams /sq m), sized building
paper conforming to FS UU-B-790, Type 1, Style lb.
BUILT-UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING
075100-5
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
1. Thickness: 9.0 - 11.5 mils.
B. Base Sheet: ASTM D4601/D4601M, Type II, non-perforated, asphalt-impregnated and -
coated, glass-fiber sheet, weighing not less than 25 pounds per 100 sq ft, dusted with fine
mineral surfacing on both sides.
C. Glass Fiber Fehs: ASTM D2178/D2178M, Type FV; asphalt-impregnated, glass-fiber feh.
D. Cap Sheet: ASTM D3909, asphalt-impregnated and -coated, glass-fiber cap sheet, with
white coarse mineral-granule top surfacing and fine mineral surfacing on bottom surface.
2.4 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS
A. Asphalt Bitumen: ASTM D312, Type III; Tmmball Asphalt, San Joaquin Refineries, or
Ridgeline Asphalt.
B. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D41/D41M; material from selected roofing materials manufacturer
product line or approved equal.
C. Plastic Cement: ASTM D2822/D2822M Type I, cutback asphalt type; material from
selected roofing materials manufacturer product line, or compatible, approved equal.
D. Flashing Cement: ASTM D2822/D2822M, Type II; as supplied by the roof membrane
manufacturer if available; if not available provide "Black Jack Heavy Fibrated Flashing
Cement No. 6283", or other heavy flashing cement as approved by Architect.
2.5 D«iSULATION
A. General: As approved by roof membrane manufacturer for compatibility with the
membrane system.
B. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4
inch per 12 inches (1:48), unless otherwise indicated.
1. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes
where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated.
C. Polyisocyanurate Foam Insulation: ASTM CI289, Type I, felt or glass-fiber mat facing on
both major surfaces.
1. Thermal Resistance: R-value: 7.3 minimum.
2. Board Width: Maximum width as required for application.
3. Thickness: 1.5-inch minimum.
4. Facing: Black (non-asphaltic) fiber-reinforced felt face both sides.
5. Flame Spread Rating: 25 or less.
D. Periite Cover Board Insulation: ASTM C728; composed of expanded periite, cellulosic
fibers, binders, and waterproofing agents with top surface seal-coated.
1. Thermal Resistance: R-value: 19 minimum.
2. Board Width: Maximum width as required for application.
3. Thickness: 3/4-inch minimum.
4. Facing: Black (non-asphaltic) fiber-reinforced felt face both sides.
BUILT-UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING
075100-6
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
5. Flame Spread Rating: 25 or less.
E. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates, corrosion-resistant,
designed for fastening roof insulation to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system
manufacturer.
F. Substrate Joint Tape: 6- or 8-inch- (150- or 200-mm-) wide, coated, glass-fiber joint tape.
2.6 FLASHINGS
A. Composition Flashing: ASTM D6164/D6164M, Type I or II, polyester-reinforced, SBS-
modified asphalt sheet; granular surfaced; produced by same manufacturer as built-up
membrane and suitable for application method specified, with white granule color. Apply
with hot-mopped asphalt only.
B. Flashing Tape: "Calpico", 10 mil PVC tape or approved equal.
C. Webbing: Cotton/nylon or fiberglass.
D. Metal Pipe Jack Collars and Vent Flashings: Fabricated according to SMACNA
guidelines, galvanized steel, 24 gage minimum.
2.7 CANTS
A. Fiber Cant and Tapered Edge Strips: Periite or fiberglass, preformed to 45 degree angle; at
roof parapet walls and other vertical edges where indicated on Drawings; 4-inch high (5-
inch face) minimum. Use 3-inch high cants only where clearance will not permit a 4-inch
cant. Miter comers and tightly butt joints.
2.8 ACCESSORIES
A. Base Ply Mechanical Fasteners: SENCO Fastening System or Berryfast Tapefast. Staple
spacing shall comply with manufacturer's requirements to achieve Factory Mutual Class
190 standard for wind uplift.
B. Roofing Nails: Galvanized, hot-dipped or non-ferrous type, squarehead ringshank
stronghold nails, 11 gage; length to penetrate 1/2-inch through decking or perimeter wood
nailers spaced at 6-inches oc; see Drawings for conditions.
C. Caulking: Sikaflex-1 A, or approved equal.
D. Sleepers and Blocks: Califomia Redwood, No. 2 grade; free from warping, sapwood, and
visible decay.
BUILT-UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING
075100-7
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with the
following requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing system:
1. Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work.
2. Verify deck is supported and secure.
3. Verify deck is clean and smooth, flat, free of depressions, waves, or projections,
properly sloped to scuppers, and suitable for installation of roof system.
4. Verify deck surfaces are dry and free of frost, snow, and ice. Confirm dry deck by
electro-capacitance meter measurements with 18 percent moisture maximum
allowed.
5. Verify that there are no areas where ponding may occur.
B. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and set and braced and that roof
drains are securely clamped in place.
C. Verify adjacent plywood sheets do not vary more than I/4-inch in height.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PROTECTION OF IN PLACE CONDITIONS
A. Protect building from damage by roofing operations. Prevent bitumen from running into
and clogging roof drains and rainwater leaders.
B. Remove constmction debris daily and leave entire premises clean.
C. Contractor shall immediately correct damage to building or landscaping by roofing
subcontractor; clean up asphalt drips and spills.
3.3 PREPARATION - GENERAL
A. Sweep deck to remove loose particles and debris. Clean substrate of dust, moisture, and
other substances detrimental to roofing installation according to roofing system
manufacturer's written instmctions. Remove sharp projections.
B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling
or migrating onto surfaces of other constmction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is
taking place or when rain is forecast.
C. Prime concrete and block walls, curbs, and other vertical surfaces to receive composition
flashing membrane using not less than 1 gallon of asphalt primer per 100 sq ft and allow
primer to dry. Follow manufacturer's directions.
BUILT-UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING
075100-8
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbad Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
3.4 PREPARATION - WOOD DECK
A. Verify flatness and tight joints of plywood decking. Cover exposed metal and minor
defects in deck intersections with a piece of reversed cap sheet. Fill knotholes with latex
filler.
B. Fill wood deck elevation changes in excess of 1/8-inch or cover with sheet metal.
Coordinate with work of other trades.
C. Nail cant strips along roof edge wherever the roof meets a vertical surface.
D. Verify that wood cants, blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at
penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation.
E. Nail 1/2-inch tapered board at base of plywood crickets to provide a smooth substrate for
roofing.
F. Report, in writing, defects or conditions which may influence completion or performance
of specified roofing. Absence of such notification will be constmed as acceptance of
substrate and related accessories.
3.5 INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to
precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday.
B. Comply with roofing system manufacturer's written instmctions for installing roof
insulation.
C. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints
staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4-
inch (6 mm) with insulation.
D. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4-inch (6 mm) of projections and penetrations.
E. Install one or more layers of insulation to cover area of roofing to achieve required
thickness. Where overall insulation thickness is 1-1/2-inches (38 mm) or greater, install 2
or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer
a minimum of 6-inches (150 mm) in each direction.
F. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and
does not restrict flow of water.
G. Mechanically Fastened Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure to deck using
mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof
insulation to deck type.
BUILT-UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING
075100-9
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
H. Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end
joints staggered between rows. Stagger joints from joints in insulation below a minimum
of 6-inches (150 mm) in each direction. Loosely butt cover boards together and fasten to
roof deck. Tape joints if required by roofing system manufacturer.
3.6 ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION
A. Prior to application of field plies, apply an extra felt to valleys and crickets. Extend out of
valleys a minimum 12-inches up from centeriine of inclines. Set plies in a uniform
mopping of asphalt at rate recommended by manufacturer.
B. Unroll base ply and permit to relax prior to application. Secure ply to plywood decking
with mechanical fasteners according to manufacturer's instmctions to achieve FM wind
uplift rating specified. Keep ply smooth and taut.
C. Install built-up roofing membrane system according to roofing system manufacturer's
written instmctions and applicable recommendations of ARMA/NRCA's "Quality Control
Guidelines for the Application of Built-up Roofing."
D. Install roofing according to roofing manufacturer's written instmctions and applicable
recommendations of ARMA/NRCA's "Quality Control Guidelines for the Application of
Built-up Roofing" and as follows:
1. Deck Type: I (insulated).
2. Base Sheet: One.
3. Number of Ply Sheets: Two.
4. Surfacing Type: M (mineral-granule-surfaced cap sheet).
5. Mineral-granule-surfaced cap sheet is in addition to number of ply sheets specified.
E. Heat asphalt to fall within the Equiviscous Temperature (EVT) range, plus or minus 25 deg
F, of the type of asphalt being used, at the point of application. Do not raise roofing asphalt
temperature above EVT range more than one hour before time of application. Do not
exceed roofing asphalt manufacturer's recommended temperature limits during roofing
asphalt heating.
F. Do not heat asphalt within 25 deg F ofthe actual COC Flash Point, nor heat and hold above
the Finished Blowing Temperature (FBT) for more than 4 hours. Discard roofing asphalt
maintained at a temperature exceeding FBT for more than 4 hours. Follow safety
procedures specified in this Section.
G. Determine temperature with a separate thermometer. Integral thermometer with kettle(s)
will not be recognized.
H. Substrate-Joint Penetrations: Prevent roofing asphah from penetrating substrate joints,
entering building, or damaging roofing system components or adjacent building
constmction.
I. Install two ply sheets starting at low point of roofing system. Align ply sheets without
stretching. Shingle side laps of ply sheets uniformly to achieve required number of plies
BUILT-UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING
075100-10
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
throughout thickness of roofing membrane. Shingle in direction to shed water. Extend ply
sheets over and terminate beyond cants.
1. Embed each ply sheet in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt applied at rate
required by roofing system manufacturer, to form a uniform membrane without ply
sheets touching.
J. Roll ply felts and broom in; flopping of felts is not permitted. Apply felt in full coat of hot
asphalt without air pockets, sharkfins, wrinkles, fishmouths, or tears. Strictly adhere to
manufacturer's instmctions for staggering side and end laps. Shingle in direction to shed
water.
K. Embed aggregate where bleed-out is beyond 1/2-inch and where other mishaps occur, while
the asphalt is still warm.
L. Extend base sheet and membrane felts up cant strips, a minimum of 8-inches onto above the
top of the finished roof membrane, and a minimum of 4-inches onto the field of the roof
membrane. Mop on two additional plies of felt and one ply of mineral cap sheet as base
flashings over roofing membrane plies. Secure to nailing strips at 4-inches oc.
M. Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation and roofing membrane
sheets are not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday or when
rain is forecast.
1. Provide tie-offs at end of each day's work to cover exposed roofing membrane sheets
and insulation with a course of coated felt set in roofing cement or hot roofing
asphalt with joints and edges sealed.
2. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent
water from entering completed sections of roofing system.
3. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.
N. Cap Sheet:
1. Install lapped granulated cap sheet starting at low point of roofing system.
2. Offset laps from laps of preceding ply sheets and align cap sheet without stretching.
Lap in direction to shed water.
3. Extend cap sheet over and terminate beyond cants.
4. Embed cap sheet in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt applied at rate required by
roofing system manufacturer.
3.7 CURB INSTALLATIONS
A. Equipment Support Curb Detail/Air Handling Station: Install in accordance with NRCA
BUR-13.
1. Minimum curb height is 8-inches above finished roof height. Prime vertical surfaces
at rate recommended by manufacturer and allow to dry.
2. Set cant in bitumen. Run all field plies over cant a minimum of 2-inches.
3. Install base flashing ply covering curb set with 6-inches on to field of the roof.
4. Feather subsequent flashing plies over the base flashing ply, 8-inches minimum onto
the field of the roof Attach top of membrane to top of curb and nail at 8-inches oc.
5. Install sheet metal counterflashing over completed ply installation with gasketed
fasteners, minimum 2 fasteners per side.
BUILT-UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING
075100-11
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
6. Apply continuous bed of sealant around top perimeter of curb.
7. Install pre-fabricated equipment support flashing. Ensure base of unit extends a
minimum of 1/2-inch (13 mm) beyond top of curb. Fasten sides at 24-inches oc with
fasteners and neoprene washers. Fumish all joint cover laps with butyl tape between
metal covers.
8. Set equipment on neoprene pad and fasten as required by equipment manufacturer.
3.8 METAL FLASHINGS
A. Install metal flashings that are an integral part of the roofing simultaneously during
application. Coordinate the work of other trades with the requirements under this Section
to avoid omissions and delays.
B. Prior to installation, prime top and bottom surfaces of metal scheduled to be incorporated
into the roofing system.
C. Install metal and lead flashings on top of completed roof membrane.
1. Prime flanges of flashings with asphalt primer and embed in a uniform layer roofing
cement over the roof membrane and nail 4-inches oc in a staggered pattem, before
installation of cap sheet.
2. Strip in flanges with two additional felts set in asphalt.
3. Set cap sheet over completed assembly.
D. Apply flashing tape where pipe jack collar meets plumbing. Do not use mastic or flashing
band tape.
E. Do not use pitch pans in lieu of proper flashings.
F. Ensure roofing installation, including metal flashings and accessories installed by other
trades, is suitable to receive required warranty.
3.9 FLASHING AND STRIPPING INSTALLATION
A. Install base flashing over cant strips and other sloping and vertical surfaces, at roof edges,
and at penetrations through roof, and secure to substrates according to roofing system
manufacturer's written instmctions and as follows:
1. Prime substrates with asphalt primer if required by roofing system manufacturer.
2. Backer Sheet Application: Install backer sheet and adhere to substrate in a solid
mopping of hot roofing asphalt.
3. Flashing Sheet Application: Adhere flashing sheet to substrate in a solid mopping of
hot roofing asphalt applied at not less than 425 degF (218 deg C). Apply hot
roofing asphalt to back of flashing sheet if recommended by roofing system
manufacturer.
B. Mechanically fasten top of base flashing securely at terminations and perimeter of roofing
as detailed on Drawings.
C. Install stripping, according to roofing system manufacturer's written instmctions, where
metal flanges and edgings are set on built-up roofing.
BUILT-UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING
075100-12
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research -I- Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbad Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
1. Install stripping of not less than 2 roofing membrane ply sheets, setting each ply in a
continuous coating of asphalt roofing cement or in a solid mopping of hot roofing
asphalt, and extend onto roofing membrane 4- or 6-inches respectively.
3.10 COMPOSITION FLASHINGS
A. Prime parapet wall surfaces to receive modified bituminous flashing membrane using not
less than 1 gallon of asphalt primer per 100 sq ft. Follow manufacturer's directions. Allow
to dry.
B. Hot mop single ply modified bitumen membrane to walls. Extend 4-inches minimum onto
roof field. Overlap sidelaps 4-inches minimum.
C. Inspect sidelaps with a trowel. Finish laps where bitumen is absent by passing a burner
along the joint and spreading the melted bitumen evenly with a trowel to ensure a smooth
tight seal.
D. Run modified sheet to within 2-inches of outside face of parapet walls. Secure 8-inches oc
along top. Seal top of parapet with flashing cement and three-course webbing. Do not
leave webbing or vertical parapet junctions exposed.
3.11 ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION
A. Place wood blocks under air conditioning condensate piping, electrical lines, and conduits.
Secure piping to block and set loosely on completed roofing over extra piece of mineral cap
sheet material. Position to facilitate good drainage. Do not set blocks in mastic.
3.12 REPAIR
A. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes in areas where finished surfaces are soiled
by bitumen or other source of soiling caused by Work of this Section.
B. Repair substrates, and repair or reinstall roofing system to a condition free of damage and
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements.
3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Provide free access to Work and cooperate with inspection and testing firm appointed to
audit the application of roofing, and ensure its conformance with the specifications and
special requirements of the project.
B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency
to perform roof tests and inspections and to prepare test reports.
C. Sample Cutout:
I. At Owner's request, a 4 by 36-inch cutout sample will be taken from each 100
squares of applied roofing by an approved inspection and testing laboratory to ensure
compliance with manufacturer's specifications. If materials and application do not
conform to these specifications, the cost of these tests shall be bome by the roofing
subcontractor; if tests do conform, costs will be bome by the Owner.
BUILT-UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING
075100-13
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
2. Take cutout in strict accordance with roofing materials manufacturer's specifications.
Repair sampled area by feathering-in patch consisting of same number of plies as
specified in this Section.
3. Approximate quantities of components within built-up roofing will be determined
according to ASTM D3617.
4. Test specimens will be examined for interply voids according to ASTM D617 and to
comply with criteria established in Appendix 3 of ARMA/NRCA's "Quality Control
Guidelines for the Application of Built-up Roofing."
5. Repair areas where test cuts were made according to roofing manufacturer's written
instmctions.
D. Flood Testing: Flood test completed roof area for leaks, according to recommendations in
ASTM D5957, after completing roofing but before final inspection and before mechanical
units are installed. Install temporary containment assemblies, plug or dam drains, and flood
with potable water.
1. Flood to an average depth of 2-1/2 inches (65 mm) with a minimum depth of I inch
(25 mm) and not exceeding a depth of 4 inches (100 mm). Maintain 2 inches (50
mm) of clearance from top of sheet flashings.
2. Flood each area for 72 hours.
3. After flood testing, repair leaks, repeat flood tests, and make further repairs until
roofing installation is watertight.
E. Repair or remove and replace components of roofing system where test results or
inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.
F. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
3.14 FINAL INSPECTION
A. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to
inspect roofing installation on completion and submit report to Architect.
1. Notify Architect or Owner 48 hours in advance of date and time of inspection.
B. At completion of roofing installation and associated work, meet with Contractor, Architect,
installer, installer of associated work. Owner, roofing system manufacturer's representative,
and other representatives directly concemed with performance of roofing system.
C. Walk roof surface areas of the building, inspect perimeter building edges as well as
flashing of roof penetrations, walls, curbs and other equipment. List all items requiring
cortection or completion and fiimish copy of list to each party in attendance.
D. The roofing system manufacturer reserves the right to request a thermographic scan of the
roof during final inspection to determine if any damp or wet materials have been installed.
The thermographic scan shall be provided by the Roofing Contractor.
E. If core cuts verify the presence of damp or wet materials, the Roofing Contractor shall be
required to replace the damaged areas at his own expense.
BUILT-UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING
075100-14
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
F. Repair or replace deteriorated or defective work found at time above inspection as required
to a produce an installation which is free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial
Completion and according to warranty requirements.
G. Notify the Architect upon completion of corrections.
H. Following the final inspection, provide written notice of acceptance of the installation from
the roofing system manufacturer.
I. Immediately correct roof leakage during constmction. If the Contractor does not respond
within 24 hours, the Owner will exercise rights to correct the Work under the terms of the
Conditions of the Contract.
3.15 ADJUSTING
A. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing system that does not comply with requirements of
this Section.
3.16 CLEANING
A. Remove bituminous markings from finished surfaces. Consult manufacturer of surfaces for
cleaning advice and conform to their instmctions
B. Constmction Waste Management: Manage constmction waste in accordance with
provisions of Section 01524 Constmction Waste Management.
3.17 PROTECTION
A. Ensure that trades that follow the roofing installation protect the completed installation
from damage and wear during remainder of constmction period.
B. When remaining constmction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for
deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to
Architect and Owner.
C. Provide plywood on planks for storage of materials of other trades, and where traffic must
continue over finished roof membrane, to prevent direct contact with roofing.
3.18 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAD«JING
A. At a time and date agreed to by the Owner, instmct the Owner's facility manager, or other
representative designated by the Owner, on the following procedures:
1. Roof troubleshooting procedures.
2. Notification procedures for reporting leaks or other apparent roofing problems.
3. Roofing maintenance.
4. The Owner's obligations for maintaining the roofing warranty in effect and force.
5. The Manufacturer's obligations for maintaining the roofing warranty in effect and
force.
BUILT-UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING
075100-15
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Carlsbod Controct 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
END OF SECTION 075100
.00%
BUILT-UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING
075100-16
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
SECTION 076000 - FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SECTION INCLUDES
B.
Metal flashings of the following types:
1. Metal flashing and counter flashings.
2. Exposed metal trim/fascia units.
3. Reglets.
4. Copings.
5. Roof drainage components including scuppers, downspouts, and splash pans.
6. Through-wall flashings.
7. Preformed flashing sleeves.
8. Equipment support flashings.
Miscellaneous sheet metal accessories.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 075423 - Thermoplastic-Polyolefin Roofing.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Steel Sheet Thicknesses: Thickness dimensions, are minimums as defined in referenced
ASTM standards for metallic-coated (galvanized) steel sheets. Metal thicknesses indicated
below correspond to former gauge thicknesses:
1. 20 Gauge: 0.040-inch (1.02-mm).
2. 22 Gauge: 0.034-inch (0.85-mm).
3. 24 Gauge: 0.028-inch (0.71-mm).
4. 26 Gauge: 0.022-inch (0.55-mm).
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include constmction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each
manufactured product and accessory.
B. Shop Drawings: Describe material profiles, jointing pattem, jointing details, fastening
methods, interface with other work and installation details.
1. Material.
2. Thickness of material.
3. Weight.
FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
076000-1
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
4. Finish.
5. Location of each item and details of expansion joint covers, including the direction
of expansion and contraction.
C. Sustainabiiity Submittals:
1. Product Data for products having recycled content, documentation indicating
percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content,
a. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to profiles and sizes shown on drawings, and comply with "Architectural Sheet
Metal Manual" by SMACNA, for each general category of work required.
B. Applicator: Applicator who has complete sheet metal flashing and trim work similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this project and with a record of successful
in-service performance and with 5 years minimum experience.
C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable. Installer, and installers
whose work interfaces with or affects sheet metal flashing and trim including
installers of roofing materials, roof accessories, unit skylights, and roof-mounted
equipment.
2. Review methods and procedures related to sheet metal flashing and trim.
3. Examine substrate conditions for compliance with requirements, including flatness
and attachment to stmctural members.
4. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and
fumish copy of record to each participant.
D. Mock-ups: Build mock-ups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for
fabrication and installation. Build mock-ups approximately 48-inches long, including
supporting constmction cleats, seams, attachments, underlayment, and accessories. Do not
proceed with the installation until the mock-ups are approved by the Architect in writing.
1. Approved mock-ups may become part of the completed work if undisturbed at the
time of Substantial Completion.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver sheet metal flashing materials and fabrications undamaged. Protect sheet metal
flashing and trim materials and fabrications during transportation and handling.
B. Unload, store, and install sheet metal flashing materials and fabrications in a manner to
prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage.
C. Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with a suitable weathertight and ventilated
covering. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other
materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage
FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
076000-2
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
2.1 SUSTAINABILITY MATERLA.L REQUIREMENTS, GENERAL
A. Recycled Content: Provide products made from steel sheet with average recycled content
such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is
not less than the following:
1. Sheet Metal Flashings: Minimum 30 percent post-consumer recycled content.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, stmctural
movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failing, rattling,
leaking, and fastener disengagement.
B. Fabricate and install flashings and copings capable of resisting forces for the appropriate
wind zone, per Factory Mutual's Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49.
C. Temperature Range: 120 deg F ambient; 180 deg F, material surface.
D. Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that allow for thermal
movements resulting from the maximum range of ambient and surface temperatures
provided above by preventing buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation, overstressing of
components, failure of sealant joints, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.
Provide clips that resist rotation and avoid shear stress as a result of sheet metal and trim
thermal movements. Base engineering calculations on surface temperatures of materials
due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss.
E. Water Infiltration: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that do not allow water infiltration
to the building interior.
1. Watertight and weatherproof performance of flashing and sheet metal work is
required.
2.3 MATERL\LS
A. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, G90 (Z275) coating
designation; stmctural quality, mill phosphatized where indicated for field painting.
1. Do not apply an acrylic passivator coating to galvanized sheet metal schedule to be
painted, or remove this coating mechanically before delivery to the project site.
2. Prime all surfaces of bonderized metal.
3. Finish: Standard (dull) mill finish; painted unless noted otherwise on Drawings.
4. Paint: Paint sheet galvanized sheet metal that is not coil-coated.
B. Bedding Compound: Rubber-asphalt type.
C. Plastic Cement: Asphaltic base cement.
D. Solder:
1. For Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM B32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin
and 50 percent lead or Grade Sn60, 60 percent tin and 40 percent lead.
FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
076000-3
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Carlsbod Controct 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set-April 10,2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
E. Sealing Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealing
tape with release-paper backing. Provide elastic, non-sag, nontoxic, non-staining tape.
F. Sealant: Type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal
flashing and trim and remain watertight; see Section 079200.
G. Flux: FSO-F-506.
H. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound,
recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted
joints.
I. Butyl Sealant: ASTMC1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl mbber sealant;
polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited
movement.
J. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM
D1187/D1187M.
K. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets
and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and
recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item.
1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head.
a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or
factory-applied coating.
b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for
metal being fastened.
c. Spikes and Females: Same material as gutter; with spike with fermle
matching intemal gutter width.
2. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Hot-dip galvanized steel
according to ASTM A153/A153M or ASTM F2329 or Series 300 stainless steel.
2.4 MANUFACTURED SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
A. Reglets: Units of type, material, and profile indicated, formed to provide secure
interlocking of separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, and compatible with flashing
indicated.
1. Surface-Mounted Type: Provide with slotted holes for fastening to substrate, with
neoprene or other suitable weatherproofing washers and with channel for sealant at
top edge.
2. Concrete Type: Provide temporary closure tape to keep reglet free of concrete
materials, special fasteners for attaching reglet to concrete forms, and guides to
ensure alignment of reglet section ends.
3. Stucco Type: Provide with uptumed fastening flange and extension leg of length to
match thickness of applied finish materials.
4. Flexible Flashing Retainer: Provide resilient plastic or mbber accessory to secure
flexible flashing in reglet where clearance does not permit use of standard metal
counterflashing or where Drawings show reglet without metal counterflashing.
FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
076000-4
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
5. Counterflashing Wind-Restraint Clips: Provide clips to be installed before
counterflashing to prevent wind uplift of counterflashing lower edge.
B. Drawbands: Stainless steel.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations
in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal,
and other characteristics of item indicated. Shop-fabricate items where practicable. Obtain
field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.
B. Fabricate sheet metal with flat-lock seams; solder with type solder and flux recommended
by manufacturer, except seal aluminum seams with sealant and, where required for
strength, rivet seams and joints.
C. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness and weight needed to comply with
performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application of metal.
D. Fabricate comers, transitions, and terminations as a single unit; extend a minimum of 4-
inches and a maximum of 8-inches in any direction.
E. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from the same material as the accessory being
anchored or from a compatible, non-corrosive metal. The thickness of these cleats and
attachment devices should be as recommended by SMACNA's 'Architectural Sheet Metal
Manual' and Factory Mutual's Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for the given application,
but not less than the thickness of the metal being secured.
F. Sealed Joints: Form non-expansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate
elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA recommendations.
G. Coat backside of fabricated sheet metal with 15-mil sulfur-free bituminous coating, SSPC-
Paint 12, where required to separate metals from corrosive substrates, including
cementitious materials, wood or other absorbent materials; or provide other permanent
separation.
H. Provide for thermal expansion of mnning sheet metal work by overlaps of expansion joints
in fabricated work. Where required for watertight constmction, provide hooked flanges
filled with polyisobutylene mastic for 1-inch embedment of flanges.
I. Space expansion joints at intervals of not more than 50-feet. Conceal expansion provisions
where possible.
J. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following material:
1. Galvanized Steel: 0.0276-inch (0.7 mm) thick.
FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
076000-5
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
2.6 LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Roof Edge Flashing (Gravel Stop) and Fascia Caps: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2400-
mm-) long, but not exceeding 10-foot- (3-m-) long, sections. Fumish with 6-inch- (150-
mm-) wide joint cover plates.
1. Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch (0.71 mm)
B. Copings: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long, but not exceeding 10-foot-
(3-m-) long, sections. Fabricate 1-inch drive joints at the coping joints of same thickness as
copings. Fumish with continuous cleats to support edge of extemal leg and drill elongated
holes for fasteners on interior leg. Miter comers, seal, and solder or weld watertight.
1. Vertical Face of Copings: Bottom edge formed outward 1/4- tol/2-inch, hemmed to
form a drip.
2. Coping Profile: As indicated on Drawings.
3. Galvanized Steel: 0.040 inch (1.02 mm).
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Equipment Support Flashing: Fabricate from galvanized steel 0.0276-inch (0.7 mm) thick.
2.8 FINISHES
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions under which sheet metal flashing and trim are to be
installed and verify that work may properly commence. Do not proceed with installation
until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Beginning of installation means
acceptance of existing conditions.
B. Ensure that adjacent work by other trades has been completed as required and as shown on
the Drawings.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Allow wet substrates to dry thoroughly.
B. Clean debris from all substrates.
3.3 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A. General: Install underlayment as indicated on Drawings.
FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
076000-6
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbad Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
B. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free.
Apply primer if required by underlayment manufacturer. Comply with temperature
restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer rather than nails for
installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with
end laps of not less than 6 inches (150 mm) staggered 24 inches (600 mm) between
courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches (90 mm). Roll laps with roller.
Cover underlayment within 14 days.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely
in place, with provisions for thermal and stmctural movement. Use fasteners, solder,
welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as
required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.
1. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.
B. Anchor work in place with non-corrosive fasteners, adhesives, setting compounds, tapes
and other materials and devices as recommended by manufacturer of each material or
system.
C. Install self-adhesive flashing prior to or in conjunction with sheet metal items, as shown on
Drawings.
D. Provide for thermal expansion and building movements. Comply with recommendations of
"Architecttiral Sheet Metal Manual" by SMACNA.
E. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and
tool marks.
F. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight
performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating
sheet metal.
G. Install sheet metal flashing and trim tme to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat
seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.
H. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,
protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by
other permanent separation as recommended by fabricator or manufacturers of dissimilar
metals.
I. Composition Stripping: Cover flanges (edges) of work set on bituminous substrate with 5
courses of glass fiber fabric (ASTM D1668/DI668M) set in and covered with asphaltic
roofing cement.
J. Fasteners: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate substrate not less than 1-1/4-inches (32
mm) for nails and not less than 3/4-inch (19 mm) for wood screws.
1. Galvanized or Prepainted, Metallic-Coated Steel: Use stainless-steel fasteners.
FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
076000-7
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
2. Use concealed fasteners wherever possible. Exposed fasteners should have bonded
neoprene washers or should be sealed.
K. Seal moving joints in metal work with butyl joint sealants, complying with requirements
specified in Section 079200 as required for watertight constmction.
1. Where sealant-filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members not less
than 1-inch (25 mm) into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When
ambient temperature at time of installation is moderate, between 40 and 70 deg F (4
and 21 deg C), set joint members for 50 percent movement either way. Adjust
setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install
sealant-type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F (4 deg C).
L. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin
edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2-inches (38 mm) except where pre-tinned
surface would show in finished Work.
1. Do not use open-fiame torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and
flow solder into joints. Fill joints completely. Completely remove flux and spatter
from exposed surfaces.
2. Clean metal surfaces of soldering flux and other substances that could cause
corrosion.
3.5 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sheet metal roof flashing and trim to comply with performance
requirements and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual". Provide concealed
fasteners where possible, set units tme to line, and level as indicated. Install work with
claps, joints, and seams that will be watertight.
B. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base
flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing.
Extend counterflashing 4-inches (100 mm) over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints a
minimum of 4-inches (100 mm) and bed with elastomeric sealant.
C. Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as indicated.
1. Interlock exterior bottom edge of coping with continuous cleat anchored to substrate
at I6-FNfCH (400-nim) centers.
2. Anchor interior leg of coping with washers and screw fasteners through slotted holes
at 24-INCH (600-mm) centers.
D. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with
installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof
1. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to pipes penetrating roof Use
stainless steel drawband and tighten.
2. Install premanufactured membrane flashing a minimum of 8 inches up vent piping
and over base roof membrane, being careful not to block vent piping with flashing.
Seal flashing to base roof membrane where required by roofing manufacturer.
3. Seal top of membrane flashing with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to pipes
with stainless steel drawband.
FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
076000-8
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
3.6 MISCELLANEOUS FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Equipment Support Flashing; Coordinate installation of equipment support flashing with
installation of roofing and equipment. Weld or seal flashing with elastomeric sealant to
equipment support member.
3.7 ADJUSTING
A. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated
beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
3.8 CLEANING
A. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants.
B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and
trim are installed. On completion of installation, clean finished surfaces, including
removing unused fasteners, metal filings, pop rivet stems, and pieces of flashing. Maintain
in a clean condition during constmction.
C. Constmction Waste Management: Manage constmction waste in accordance with
provisions of Section 01524 Constmction Waste Management.
END OF SECTION 076000
FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
076000-9
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Library
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
076000-10
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Bid Set - April 10, 2015
SECTION 078400 - FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. This Section includes through-penetration firestop systems for penetrations through fire-
resistance-rated constmctions, including both empty openings and openings containing
penetrating items for the following, including at entrance and exit of the Project area:
1. Penetrations through fire-resistance-rated floor and roof constmction including both
empty openings and openings containing cables, pipes, ducts, conduits, and other
penetrating items.
2. Penetrations through fire-resistance-rated walls and partitions including both empty
openings and openings containing cables, pipes, ducts, conduits, and other
penetrating items.
3. Penetrations through smoke barriers and constmction enclosing compartmentalized
areas involving both empty openings and openings containing penefrating items.
4. Sealant joints in fire-rated constmction.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 079200
sealants at walls.
Joint Sealants: Electrical and pipe penetration, acoustical and fire
1.4 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Sequence: Perform work of this and other sections in proper sequence to prevent damage to
the Firestop Systems and to ensure that their installation will occur prior to enclosing or
concealing work.
B. Do not cover Firestop Systems until they have been properly inspected and accepted by the
authority having jurisdiction and/or Architect.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Sustainabiiity Submittals:
1. Product Data for certification by firestopping manufacturer that products supplied
comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs)
and are nontoxic to building occupants.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product test reports from a qualified testing and inspecting agency evidencing compliance
of firestopping with requirements based on comprehensive testing of current products.
FIRESTOPPING
078400-1
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 201 5 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
B. Certificates of Compliance:
1. Provide certificates accompanied by classification indicating material or combination
of materials used meets requirements specified for flame spread and fire resistance.
2. Certificates to be by nationally recognized testing authority or by other supporting
evidence is satisfactory to Architect.
C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide firestopping that complies Firestopping tests
performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency, including UL, Wamock Hersey, or
another agency performing testing and follow-up inspection services, that is acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Through-penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per ASTM E814
under conditions where positive fumace pressure differential of at least 0.01-inch of
water is maintained at a distance of 0.78-inch below the fill materials surrounding the
penefrating items in the test assembly.
2. Fire-resistive joint sealant systems are identical to those tested for fire-response
characteristics per ASTM El 19 under conditions where the positive fiimace pressure
differential is at least 0.01-inch of water, as measured 0.78-inch from the face
exposed to fumace fire.
3. Materials being applied in openings between elements of differing fire ratings shall
conform to the most restrictive rating.
4. Ratings of Firestopping: As indicated by reference to designations of UL in their
"Fire Resistance Directory" or by another qualified testing and inspecting agency.
5. Flame Spread: 25 or less per ASTM E84.
6. Smoke Developed: 450 of less per ASTM E84.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single Source Responsibility for Materials: Obtain firestopping materials from one
manufacturer for entire Project.
1. This does not restrict Conttactor from subcontracting installation of firestopping to
multiple subcontracts, but does require installers to use the same manufacturer
throughout the Project and be licensed by that manufacturer for the installation of
firestopping.
B. Firestopping materials and systems shall be listed and labeled in accordance with
requirements of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Building Materials Directory.
C. Firestopping materials shall conform to Califomia Building Code (CBC) for fire resistance
standards and requirements for penetrations in walls, partitions, and floor/ceiling and
floor/roof assemblies.
D. Firestopping materials shall comply with ASTM E814 and UL 1479.
E. Firestopping sealants shall comply with ASTM C719 and ASTM C920.
F. Form materials to remain in place in the completed work and sealant used for firestopping
work shall be UL listed and labeled.
G. Firestopping materials shall be rated as required when tested in accordance with ASTM
E119.
FIRESTOPPING
078400-2
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Controct 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
H. Firestopping materials shall be asbestos free and shall not incorporate nor require the use of
hazardous solvents.
I. Firestopping materials shall not shrink upon drying as evidenced by cracking or pulling
back from contact surface.
J. Installer shall have a minimum of 5-years' experience installing UL listed firestopping
systems in similar type constmction.
1. Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff, and ttaining to install
manufacturer's products per specified requirements.
2. Manufacturer's willingness to sell its penetration firestopping products to Contractor
or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on buyer.
K. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Include Owner, Owner's
Representative, Contractor, and subcontractor responsible for firestopping application.
1. Establish procedures to maintain optimum working conditions and to coordinate this
work with related adjacent work.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLE^JG.
A. Deliver materials in their original unopened packages and store in location providing
protection from damage and exposure to elements.
B. Do not use damaged or expired materials.
1.9 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements: Comply with firestopping material manufacturer's
recommendations for temperature and humidity conditions before, during, and after
installation of firestopping.
1. All materials shall be asbestos free and non-carcinogenic. Materials should meet the
requirements for use in a "Green Building" as defined by the U.S. Green Building
Council and the ADTM Green Building Sub-committee E 50.06.
2. Firestop materials shall contain no flammable or toxic solvents and shall not produce
toxic or flammable out gassing during the drying or curing process.
3. Firestop materials used shall not require solvent based chemicals for clean-up
purposes.
B. Maintain Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) available on the job site for all materials.
Follow Manufacturer's guidelines for use, handling and disposal.
1. Do not use any product whose MSDS contains waming that continued inhalation
may cause silicon's or lung cancer.
C. Maintain current copy of UL "Fire Resistance Directory" on Project she.
D. Ventilation Requirements: Comply with firestopping material manufacturer's
recommendations during and after installation of firestopping by natural or mechanical
means.
FIRESTOPPING
078400-3
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Reseorch + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
2.1 SUSTAINABILITY MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS, GENERAL
A. VOC Content: Firestopping and sealants applied on-site on the interior of the building and
products used on the interior of the building shall comply with VOC limits specified.
I. Use materials that have the lowest possible VOC content in units of g/L when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. Hilti, Inc.
2. Specified Technologies Inc.
3. 3M Fire Protection Products.
2.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide firestopping systems that are produced and installed to resist the spread of fire,
according to requirements indicated, and the passage of smoke and other gases.
B. Provide products that upon curing, do not re-emulsify, dissolve, leach, breakdown or
otherwise deteriorate over time from exposure to atmospheric moisture, sweating pipes,
ponding water or other forms of moisture characteristic during and after constmction.
C. Provide firestop sealants sufficiently flexible to accommodate motion such as pipe
vibration, water hammer, thermal expansion and other normal building movement without
damage to the seal.
D. Pipe insulation shall not be removed, cut away or otherwise intermpted through wall or
floor openings. Provide products appropriately tested for the thickness and type of
insulation utilized.
E. Fire rated pathway devices shall be the preferred product and shall be installed in all
locations where frequent cable moves, add-ons and changes will occur.
F. When mechanical cable pathways are not practical, openings within walls and floors
designed to accommodate voice, data and video cabling shall be provided with re-enterable
products specifically designed for retrofit.
G. Penetrants passing through fire-resistance rated floor-ceiling assemblies contained within
chase wall assemblies shall be protected with products tested by being fully exposed to the
fire outside of the chase wall. Systems within the UL Fire Resistance Directory that meet
this criterion are identified with the words "Chase Wall Optional".
H. Provide fire-resistive joint sealants sufficiently flexible to accommodate movement such as
thermal expansion and other normal building movement without damage to the seal.
FIRESTOPPING
078400-4
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Reseorch -t- Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
I. Provide fire-resistive joint sealants designed to accommodate a specific range of movement
and tested for this purpose in accordance with a cyclic movement test criteria as outlined in
Standards, ASTM E1399/E1399M, ASTM E1966 or ANSI/ UL 2079.
J. Provide penetration firestop systems, fire-resistive joint systems, or perimeter fire barrier
systems subjected to an air leakage test conducted in accordance with Standard, ANSI/
UL1479 for penetrations and ANSI/UL2079 for joint systems with published L-Ratings for
ambient and elevated temperatures as evidence of the ability of firestop system to restrict
the movement of smoke.
K. Provide T-Rating Collar Devices tested in accordance with ASTM E814 or ANSI/UL1479
for metallic pipe penetrations requiring T-Ratings per the applicable building code.
L. Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with the following ratings
determined per ASTM E814:
1. F-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with F-ratings
indicated, but not less than that equaling or exceeding fire-resistance rating of
constmctions penetrated.
2. T-Rated Systems: For the following conditions, provide through-penetration firestop
systems with T-ratings indicated, as well as F-ratings, where systems protect
penetrating items exposed to potential contact with adjacent materials in occupiable
floor areas:
a. Penetrations located outside wall cavities.
b. Penetrations located outside fire-resistance-rated shaft enclosures.
c. Where firestop systems protect penetrating items larger than a 4-inch diameter
nominal pipe or 16 sq inch overall cross-sectional area.
d. Where firestop systems protect penetrations located in constmction containing
doors required to have a temperature-rise rating.
M. Provide joint sealants with fire-resistance ratings indicated, as determined per ASTM El 19,
but not less than that equaling or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the constmction in
which the joint occurs.
N. Fire Rated Constmction Design Requirements: Maintain barrier and stmctural floor fire
resistance ratings including resistance to cold smoke at all penetrations, connections with
other surfaces or types of constmction, at separations required to permit building movement
and sound or vibration absorption, and at other constmction gaps.
O. Smoke Barrier Constmction Design Requirements: Maintain barrier and stmctural floor
resistance to cold smoke at all penetrations, connections with other surfaces and types of
constmction and at all separations required to permit building movement and sound or
vibration absorption, and at other constmction gaps.
P. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical
damage, provide products that, after curing, do not deteriorate when exposed to these
conditions both during and after constmction.
1. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems, provide
moisture-resistant through-penetration firestop systems.
FIRESTOPPING
078400-5
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbad Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research -I- Planning, Inc.
Bid Set-April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
2. For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4-inches (IOO mm) in width and
exposed to possible loading and traffic, provide firestop systems capable of
supporting floor loads involved, either by installing floor plates or by other means.
3. For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through-penetration firestop
systems not requiring removal of insulation.
Q. Assembly designs are specified generally under UL system categories by penetrating item.
Manufacturers' product applications must have specific UL system designations.
R. Duct Damper Penetrations: Completely fill annular space with mineral wool safing and seal
with flexible firestop sealant. Comply with duct damper manufacturer's requirements.
2.4 MATERIALS
A. Through-Penetration Firestop Systems: Comply with the following requirements in
providing system components that are compatible with each other, the substrates forming
openings, and the items, if any, penetrating firestops under conditions of service and
application, based on testing and field experience.
B. Systems or devices listed in the UL Fire Resistance Directory under categories XHCR and
XHEZ may be used, provided that they conform to the constmction type, penetrant type,
annular space requirements, and fire rating involved in each separate instance, and that the
system is symmetrical for wall applications.
1. Provide only asbestos-free systems or devices.
2. Additional requirements: Prevent the passage of cold smoke either as an inherent
property of the product, or by the use of a separate product included as a part of the
UL system or device, and designed to perform this function.
2.5 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPn^^G
A. Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire
according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain
original fire-resistance rating of constmction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems
shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with
penetrating items if any.
B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings
determined per ASTM E814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential
of0.01-inchwg(2.49 Pa).
1. Fire-resistance-rated walls include fire walls, fire-barrier walls, smoke-barrier walls,
and fire partitions.
2. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constmctions penetrated.
C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings
determined per ASTM E814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential
of0.01-inchwg(2.49 Pa).
1. Horizontal assemblies include floors, floor/ceiling assemblies, and, ceiling
membranes of roof/ceiling assemblies.
2. F-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constmctions
penetrated.
FIRESTOPPING
078400-6
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
3. T-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constmctions
penettated except for fioor penetrations within the cavity of a wall.
D. Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined
per UL 1479.
1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/sq. ft. (0.025 cu. m/s per sq. m) of penetration
opening at 0.30-inch wg (74.7 Pa) at both ambient and elevated temperatures.
E. W-Rating: Provide penetration firestopping showing no evidence of water leakage when
tested according to UL 1479.
F. Exposed Penetration Firestopping: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-
developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E84.
G. VOC Content: Provide penetration firestopping that complies with the following limits for
VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L.
2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
H. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed
to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components
specified by penetration firestopping manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and
inspecting agency for firestopping indicated.
1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following:
a. Slag-wool-fiber or rock-wool-fiber insulation.
b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials
to prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state.
c. Fire-rated form board.
d. Fillers for sealants.
2. Temporary forming materials.
3. Substrate primers.
4. Collars.
5. Steel sleeves.
2.6 FILL MATERIALS
A. Endothermic, Latex Compound Sealant: Single-component, endothermic, latex
formulation.
B. Intumescent, Latex Sealant: Single-component, intumescent, latex formulation.
C. Intumescent Putty: Nonhardening, dielecttic, water-resistant putty containing no solvents,
inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds.
D. Pillows/Bags: Reusable heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases
filled with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents, and fire-
retardant additives. Where exposed, cover openings with steel-reinforcing wire mesh to
protect pillows/bags from being easily removed.
FIRESTOPPING
078400-7
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbod Controct 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research -H Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
E. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic
cement, fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to
form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar.
2.7 SEALANTS
A. Silicone Sealant: Moisture-curing, single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing
elastomeric sealant.
B. Sealant Colors: As selected by Archhect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors
for products of type indicated.
C. Single-Component, Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant: Type S; Grade NS; Class 25;
exposure-related Use NT, and joint-substrate-related Uses M, G, A, and (as applicable to
joint substrates indicated) O.
D. Single-Component, Nonsag, Urethane Sealant: Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; and Uses NT,
M, A, and (as applicable to joint substrates indicated) O.
2.8 FIRESTOPPING AT ELECTRICAL BOXES AND UTILITY OUTLETS
A. Sealant for 1-hour Rated Walls: Nondrying, non-hardening, non-skinning, non-staining,
single component fire rated material for through-penetration firestop systems.
1. Specified Technologies Inc., SSP Putty and Putty Pads.
2. 3M Fire Protection Products, Fire Barrier Moldable Putty or Putty Pads.
3. Locations: Steel electrical outlet boxes which exceed 16-square inches.
4. VOC Content: Provide penetration firestopping that complies with the following
limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24):
5. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L.
6. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
7. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
B. Utility penetrations in walls, ceilings, or floors requiring protected openings shall be
firestopped and sealed with an approved material securely installed, capable of maintaining
its integrity when subjected to test temperatures specified in ASTM E814.
C. Steel electrical outlet boxes on opposite sides of walls requiring protected openings shall be
separated by a horizontal distance of 24-inches.
D. Steel electrical outlet boxes which occur in combination with outlet boxes of any size such
that the aggregate area of unprotected outlet boxes exceeds 100-square inches in any 100-
square feet of wall area shall be protected by an approved material or detail to decrease the
aggregate area of unprotected utility boxes to less than 100-square inches in any 100-square
feet of wall.
E. Utility and electrical outlets or boxes shall be securely fastened to the stud or framing of the
wall or ceiling assembly. The opening in the gypsum board shall be cut so that the clearance
between the box and the gypsum board does not exceed I/8-inch.
1. Fill the I/8-inch gap with an approved fire-rated sealant.
FIRESTOPPING
078400-8
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research -I- Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
2.9 ACCESSORIES
A. Accessories: Provide components for each through-penetration firestop system that are
needed to install fill materials and to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements"
Article. Use only components specified by through-penetration firestop system
manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestop systems
indicated. Accessories include, but are not limited to, the following items:
B. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled steel collars lined with intumescent material sized to
fit specific outside diameter of penetrating item.
C. Fire Rated Cable Pathways: STI EZ-PATH^"^ Brand device modules comprised of steel
raceway with intumescent foam pads allowing 0 to 100 percent cable fill.
D. Wrap Strips: Single component intumescent elastomeric sttips faced on both sides with a
plastic film.
E. Firestop Pillows: Re-enterable, non-curing, mineral fiber core encapsulated with an
intumescent coating contained in a flame retardant poly bag.
F. Composite Sheet: Intumescent material sandwiched between a galvanized steel sheet and
steel wire mesh protected with aluminum foil.
G. Cast-In-Place Firestop Device: Single component molded firestop device installed on forms
prior to concrete placement with totally encapsulated, tamper-proof integral firestop system
and smoke sealing gasket.
H. Fire-Rated HVAC Retaining Angles: Steel angle system with integral intumescent firestop
gasket for use on steel HVAC ducts.
I. Firestop Plugs: Re-enterable, foam mbber plug impregnated with intumescent material for
use in blank openings and cable sleeves.
J. Fire-Rated T Rating Collar Device: Louvered steel collar system with synthetic aluminized
polymer coolant wrap installed on metallic pipes where T Ratings are required by
applicable building code requirements.
K. Fire-Rated Cable Grommet: Molded two-piece grommet made from plenum grade polymer
with a foam inner core for sealing individual cable penetrations up to 0.27 in. (7 mm)
diameter.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements
for opening configurations, penefrating items, subsfrates, and other conditions affecting
performance of work.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
FIRESTOPPING
078400-9
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
3.2
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing through-penetration
firestop systems to comply with firestop system manufacturer's written instmctions and with
the foUowing requirements:
1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penettating items foreign
materials that could interfere with adhesion of through-penetration firestop systems.
2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces
capable of developing optimum bond with through-penetration firestop systems.
Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by through-penetration firestop
system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods.
Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed
surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent through-penetration firestop systems from
contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and that
would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning
methods used to remove smears from firestop system materials. Remove tape as soon as
possible without disturbing firestop system's seal with subsfrates.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install through-penetration firestops to comply with the performance requirements of this
Section and the through-penettation firestop manufacturer's installation instmctions and
drawings pertaining to products and applications indicated.
B. General: Install penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written installation
instmctions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.
C. Install firestopping in accordance with fire test reports, fire resistance requirements,
acceptable sample installations, and manufacturer's recommendations.
1. Provide sprinkler piping with NFPA 13 required annular space using insulation and
firestop to allow movement.
2. Coordinate with plumbing, mechanical, electtical and other trades to assure that all
pipe, conduit, cable, and other items which penetrate fire-rated constmction have
been permanently installed prior to installation of firestops.
3. Follow safety procedures recommended in the Material Safety Data Sheets.
D. Install in accordance with Manufacturer's current printed instmctions to provide a Flame (F)
rating of at least one (1) hour, but not less than the fire resistance rating ofthe assembly
being penetrated. Ensure that anchoring devices, back-up materials, clips, sleeves, supports
and other materials used in the actual fire test are installed.
E. Install forming/damming/backing materials and other accessories of types required to
support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-
sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.
FIRESTOPPING
078400-10
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgino Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research -I- Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
I. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible
forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of
firestop systems.
F. Install fill materials for firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following
results:
1. Fill voids and cavhies formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and
penettating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.
2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and
penettating items.
3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce
smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
G. Install fire resistant filler in openings with sufficient pressure to properly fill and seal
openings, ensuring an effective seal. Dam bottom of vertical openings and one side of
horizontal openings with temporary containment forms or, where required to achieve fire
resistance ratings, provide permanent mineral composition board forms.
H. Tool or trowel exposed surfaces. Remove excess firestop or smoke seal material promptly
as work progresses and upon completion of installation.
I. On horizontal penetrations, provide partial face containment forms where required for
material placement. Allow installed fillers to cure, and remove temporary forms; trim
ragged edges with sharp knife; inspect and fill voids with additional filler to form uniform
thickness of filler.
J. Spillage: Do not allow sealants to overflow or spill onto adjoining surfaces, or to migrate
into voids of adjoining surfaces. Clean adjoining surfaces by whatever means may be
necessary to eliminate evidence of spillage.
K. Recess exposed edges of gaskets and exposed joint fillers slightly behind adjoining
surfaces, unless otherwise shown, so that compressed units will not protmde from joints.
L. Tool or trowel exposed surfaces. Remove excess firestop or smoke seal material promptly
as work progresses and upon completion.
M. Apply firestop or smoke seal material at penetrations of insulated piping after the insulation
is installed. Use material that has been tested for compatibility and rating in conjunction
with the use of the insulation material being used.
1. Calcium silicate, or other pipe insulation, may be substituted for fiberglass pipe
insulation through the sleeve, if the insulation is part of an assembly which meets the
requirements specified for firestopping or smoke sealing.
N. Install firestopping or smoke sealing materials for filling voids in floors having openings of
4 inches or greater that support the same load as the floor system, unless the area is
protected by a permanent barrier preventing loading or traffic on the firestopped or smoke
sealed area.
FIRESTOPPING
078400-11
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbod Controct 40201 Group 4 Architecture Reseorch + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify through-penetration firestop systems with pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive,
preprinted vinyl labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces of penetrated constmction on
both sides of each firestop system installation where labels will be visible to anyone seeking
to remove penetrating items or firestop systems. Include the following information on
labels:
1. The words: "Waming: Through-Penetration Firestop System - Do Not Disturb".
2. Contractor's name, address and phone number.
3. Designation of applicable testing and inspection agency.
4. Date of installation.
5. Manufacturer's name for firestop materials.
3.5 FIELD INSPECTION
A. Maintain copy of manufacturer's installation instmctions and recommendations at each
work area.
B. Keep area of work available for inspection by Architect and applicable authorities before
and after application of firestopping.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping is damaged or removed because of
testing, repair or replace penetration firestopping to comply with requirements.
C. Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping with other constmction only after
inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.
3.7 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by methods and
with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by through-penetration firestop system
manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.
B. Repair damage caused by work of this section; clean exposed surfaces soiled by work and
leave work ready to receive subsequent work.
C. Constmction Waste Management: Manage constmction waste in accordance with
provisions of Section 01524 Constmction Waste Management.
3.8 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure
that through-penetration firestop systems are without damage or deterioration at time of
Substantial Completion.
FIRESTOPPING
078400-12
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
1. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove
damaged or deteriorated through-penetration firestop systems immediately and install
new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements.
END OF SECTION 078400
FIRESTOPPING
078400-13
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 201 5 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
FIRESTOPPING
078400-14
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrory
Group 4 Architecture Reseorch -I- Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Exterior Joints in Vertical Surfaces and Horizontal Non-traffic Surfaces:
1. At flashing and sheet metal.
2. Constmction joints in cast-in-place concrete.
3. Perimeter joints around frames of storefronts, doors, windows, and louvers.
B. Interior Joints in Vertical Surfaces and Horizontal Non-traffic Surfaces:
1. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.
2. Perimeter j oints of exterior openings.
3. Tile control and expansion j oints.
4. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of concrete walls and partitions.
5. Interior rated and non-rated sealants.
6. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors,
windows, and elevator entrances.
7. Perimeter joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.
8. Control and expansion joints in ceiling and overhead surfaces.
9. Acoustical joints in wall and ceiling surfaces.
C. Interior Joints in Horizontal Traffic Surfaces:
1. Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
D. Joint sealant primers and accessories.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 076000 - Flashing and Sheet Metal.
B. Section 078400 - Firestopping: Sealing of perimeter joint and through-wall penetrations.
C. Section 088100 - Glass Glazing: Sealants used in glazing.
D. Section 092900 - Gypsum Board: Sealing concealed perimeter joints of gypsum board
parthions to reduce sound transmission.
JOINT SEALANTS
079200-1
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
1.2
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical data for each product required, including
instmctions for joint preparation and sealant application. Include certification by joint
sealant manufacturer that sealants, primers, and cleaners comply with local regulations
controlling the use of volatile organic compounds (VOC). Include tested physical and
performance properties. Include data sheets for substrate cleaners and substrate primers
recommended by sealant manufacturer for specific substrate surface conditions.
B. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of joint sealant required, provide
Samples with joint sealants in 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide joints formed between two 6-inch-
(150-mm-) long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to
joint sealants.
1. Submit 2 copies of manufacturer's standard color chart with physical samples of each
color. Submit information on availability of custom colored sealants.
C. Joint Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:
1. Joint sealant application and typical joint locations to receive sealants.
2. Joint sealant manufacturer and product name.
3. Joint sealant formulation and color.
D. Sustainabiiity Submittals:
1. Product Data for installation sealants applied on-site used on the interior of the
building and products used on the interior of the building including printed statement
of chemical composition and VOC content of each product used.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Certification by joint sealant manufacturer that sealants plus the primers and cleaners
required for sealant installation comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile
organic compounds (VOCs).
B. Submit manufacturer's letter of certification that products comply with specified
requirements and are suitable for the uses intended.
C. Product Test Reports:
1. Certified test results of elastomeric sealants showing compliance with specified
requirements. Include results of aged performances including hardness, stain-
resistance, adhesion and cohesion under cyclic movement, low temperature
flexibility, modulus of elasticity at 100-percent strain, effects of heat and aging, and
effects of accelerated weathering.
2. Preconstmction field test results indicating which products and joint preparation
methods demonstrated acceptable adhesion to joint substrates.
D. Qualification Data: For Installer.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
JOINT SEALANTS
079200-2
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research -I- Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized Installer who is approved or licensed for
installation of elastomeric sealants required for this Project.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single
manufacturer.
C. Product Testing: Obtain test resuhs for "Product Test Reports" Paragraph in "Submittals"
Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing current sealant formulations within
a 36-month period preceding the Work.
1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according
to ASTM C1021 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to
ASTM E548.
2. Test elastomeric joint sealants for compliance with requirements specified by
reference to ASTM C920, and where applicable, to other standard test methods.
D. Sealant manufacturer shall confirm in writing that all materials contacting the sealants,
including joint backings, gaskets, spacers, and joint substrates, are compatible with the
sealant to be installed. Schedule sufficient time to test these materials for compatibility
with the sealant, as necessary. Compatibility tests shall be performed to the sealant
manufacturer's standards.
1. Determine if priming and/or other preparation techniques are required.
2. Determine compatibility of exterior joint sealant with stone material to be used.
Verify that joint sealant oils do not migrate onto stone face causing visual banding
while wet or dry. Manufacturer shall perform staining tests of sealant systems in
accordance with ASTM C510 and ASTM D2203 methods for each joint substtate
condhion in the work.
3. Testing for adhesion is not required if sealant manufacturer has performed previous
testing of proposed sealants for adhesion to and compatibility with required joints
substrates.
E. Sealant manufacturer shall confirm in writing the appropriate joint preparation and priming
techniques required to obtain rapid, acceptable adhesion of the joint sealants to the joint
substrates.
F. Preconstmction Field Testing: Prior to installation of joint sealants, field-test adhesion to all
joint substrates and surface types. Field adhesion testing shall be completed and resuhs
shall be reviewed and approved by sealant manufacturer and installer before commencing
sealant installation.
1. Install joint sealants in 5-foot joint lengths. Allow to cure before testing. Test
adhesion by pulling sealant out of joint according to "Method A, Field-Applied
Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab", in Appendix XI in ASTM C1193. For joints with
dissimilar substtates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend cut along
one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposhe side.
2. Perform field tests for each type of elastomeric sealant and joint substrate.
3. Arrange for tests to take place with joint sealant manufacturer's technical
representative present.
JOINT SEALANTS
079200-3
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set-April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
4. Report whether or not sealant in joint connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere
to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each
type of product and joint substrate.
5. Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications
of noncompliance with requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use
sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrate during testing.
G. Pre-Installation Meeting: Review joint application procedures, compatibility tests, adhesion
tests, and warranty requirements in a meeting involving installer, manufacturer or
manufacturer's representative, building owner or manager, consultant, and conttactor.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels
indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot
life, curing time, and mixing instmctions for multi-component materials intact and legible.
B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations to prevent
their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or
other causes.
1.7 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted
by joint sealant manufacturer.
2. Below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C).
3. When joint substrates are wet or retaining moisture.
B. Joint Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint
widths are less than allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for application indicated.
C. Joint Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until
contaminants capable of interfering with their adhesion are removed from joint substrates.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or
replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other
requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Exterior Sealants: Fumish a written warranty against leaks or other defects of materials,
fabrication, and installation. Defects include but are not limited to changes in the stmctural,
physical or chemical properties of the sealant materials that impair function or require
abnormal maintenance, changes in surface finish, color or texture, failure in adhesion,
weather resistance or durability, failure to prevent entry of water, or failure to comply with
specified requirements.
JOINT SEALANTS
079200-4
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
1. This warranty shall not cover formation of cracks or defects in substrate materials
adjacent to the seal, joint movement in excess of movement rating of sealant, or
physical damage caused by others.
2. Repair or replace defective materials, fabrication, and installation during warranty
period without expense to Owner, including removal and replacement of other items
as required.
3. This warranty shall be in addition to and not a limitation of other rights the Owner
may have against the Conttactor under the Contract Documents.
4. Warranty Period: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion.
C. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which elastomeric
sealant manufacturer agrees to fumish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those
that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within
specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
D. Failure of the materials, fabrication, and installation include leakage, hardening, cracking,
cmmbling, melting, shrinkage or mnning of the sealant or caulking, or the staining of
adjacent materials.
E. Special warranties specified in this Article exclude deterioration or failure of elastomeric
joint sealants from the following:
1. Movement of the stmcture resulting in sttesses on the sealant exceeding sealant
manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression caused
by stmctural settlement or errors attributable to design or constmction.
2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications.
3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.
4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric
contaminants.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUSTAINABILITY MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS, GENERAL
A. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide sealants and sealant primers for use inside the
weatherproofing system that comply with the following limits for VOC content when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Part 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L.
2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part 2
articles.
JOINT SEALANTS
079200-5
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Carlsbod Controct 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set-April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
2.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight
continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water-
resistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
2.4 MATEIOALS
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are
compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's fiill range.
C. Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors for
products of type indicated.
2.5 EXTERIOR JOINT SEALANTS
A. Exterior Poljoirethane Weatherproofing and Control Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S,
Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, M, G, A, and O; single component, chemical curing,
non-staining, non-bleeding, non-sagging type; color as selected; use in exterior vertical
surfaces such as, but not limited to:
1. Expansion and control joints of precast panels and tilt-up concrete panels.
2. Window and door perimeters, reglets, and flashings.
3. Joints between architectural precast concrete units.
4. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry.
5. Butt j oints between metal panels.
6. Joints between different materials listed above.
7. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors, windows,
storefronts, louvers, and similar openings.
8. Control and expansion joints in ceilings and overhead surfaces.
9. Acceptable Sealants:
a. Pecora Corporation; Dynattol I.
b. Sika Corporation, Inc.; Sikaflex la.
c. BASF (Sonnebome); NP 1.
d. Tremco; Dymonic FC.
B. Reglets and Flashings Polyurethane Sealant: ASTM C920, polyurethane-based sealant;
Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, and Use T, NT, G, and M; single component elastomeric.
1. Acceptable Sealants:
a. Sika Corporation, Inc.; SikaFlex-15LM.
b. Tremco, Inc.; Vulkem 921.
^^^^^
JOINT SEALANTS
079200-6
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
2.6 INTERIOR JOINT SEALANTS
A. Interior Weatherproofing and Control Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class
25, Use NT, M, G, A, and O; single component, chemical curing, non-staining, non-
bleeding, non-sagging type; color as selected; use in interior surfaces such as, but not
limited to:
1. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.
2. Perimeter joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior openings.
3. Joints on precast beams and planks.
4. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors,
windows, storefronts, louvers, elevator entrances and similar openings.
5. Other interior joints in vertical surfaces and non-traffic horizontal surfaces subject to
movement for which no other sealant is specified.
6. Acceptable Sealants:
a. Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol I-XL.
b. Sika Corporation, Inc.; Sikaflex la.
c. BASF (Sonnebome); NP 1.
d. Tremco; Dymonic FC.
B. Wood Panel Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, O; single-
component urethane, color to be selected.
1. Acceptable Sealants:
a. Sika Corporation, Inc.; Sikaflex la Constmction Sealant.
b. BASF (Sonneborn); Sonolastic NP-1.
c. Tremco, Inc.; Vulkem 116.
C. Interior Latex Joint Sealant: Provide product complying with ASTM C834, Type S, Use O,
Grade NS; use at interior joints in vertical surfaces and non-traffic horizontal surfaces such
as, but not limited to:
1. Perimeters of interior door and window frames.
2. Interior wall surfaces scheduled to receive latex paints.
3. Perimeters of plumbing fixtures.
4. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.
5. Perimeter joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior openings.
6. Joints on precast beams and planks.
7. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors,
windows, storefronts, louvers, elevator entrances and similar openings.
8. Trim or finish joints subject to movement.
9. Acceptable Sealants:
a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20.
b. BASF (Sonneborn); Sonolac.
c. Tremco; Tremflex 834.
D. Mildew Resistant Sihcone Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25; Use NT, G,
fcA, and O; use on non-porous interior surfaces under high humidity and temperature
extremes. For use in bathrooms, spas, and similar applications where joints need protection
against fungi and bacteria.
1. Acceptable Sealants:
a. Dow Coming Corporation; Dow Coming 786.
b. Pecora, Inc. 898.
JOINT SEALANTS
079200-7
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbod Controct 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
c. Tremco, Inc Tremsil 200.
E. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Non-sag, paintable, nonstaining,
latex sealant, with a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), complying with ASTM C834 that effectively
reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building
constmction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E90;
use for drywall or plaster wall systems, bedding electrical boxes and other wall outlets.
1. Acceptable Sealants: One of the following or approved equal:
a. Pecora Corporation; AIS 919 Acoustical and Insulation Latex Sealant.
b. United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.
c. Tremco, Inc.; Tremflex 834 or Tremco Acoustical Sealant.
2.7 JOINT SEALANT BACKING
A. General: Provide sealant backings and accessory materials, including primers, of material
and type that are non-staining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, and other joint
fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field
experience and laboratory testing.
B. Foam Joint Fillers: Non-gassing, preformed, compressible, resilient, non-staining, non-
waxing, non-extmding strips of flexible plastic foam of one of materials indicated below, as
recommended by manufacturer for compatibility with their sealant; of size, shape, and
density to control sealant depth, prevent three-sided adhesion, provide a surface against
which to tool, and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance:
1. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTMC1330, Tj^e C (closed-cell material with a
surface skin) or Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin), and of size and
density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum
sealant performance and as recommended by sealant manufacturer.
2. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Flexible cellular mbber tubing complying
with ASTMD 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining
resilient at temperatures down to minus 26 deg F (minus 32 deg C). Provide products
with low compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to
control sealant depth, and to otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERL\.LS
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion
of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from pre-constmction joint sealant-
substrate tests and field tests. Certify that primer will not permanently stain adjacent joint
surfaces.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of
sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of
staining or harming in any way joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces, and
formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates.
C. Masking Tape: Non-staining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and
surfaces adjacent to joints, to mask off adjacent joint surfaces where sealant is not
permanently intended to be applied.
JOINT SEALANTS
079200-8
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research -I- Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
D. Bondbreaker Tape: Polyethylene pressure sensitive adhesive tape, to be used in areas
where backer rod cannot fit and where three-sided adhesion is to be avoided.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance
with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other condhions
affecting joint sealant performance.
B. Verify that joint sizes and surfaces are free of defects and acceptable for installation of joint
sealants.
C. Verify joint dimensions and shapes to ensure they are within the sealant manufacturer's
guidelines. Resolve any variances prior to installation. Do not proceed with sealant
installation until the unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Thoroughly clean the areas that the new sealant will contact using a de-greasing solvent not
harmful to the environment using the two-rag wipe technique. IPA (isopropyl alcohol) is
not a degreasing solvent. The new sealant should have a minimum contact area of 1/4".
B. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to
comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instmctions and the following
requirements:
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substtates that could interfere with adhesion
of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings
tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer),
old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and
frost.
2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by bmshing, grinding, blast cleaning,
mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound
substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose
particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out
joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following:
a. Concrete.
b. Masonry.
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain,
harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint
sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:
a. Metal.
b. Glass.
c. Porcelain enamel.
d. Glazed ceramic tile.
JOINT SEALANTS
079200-9
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Library
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set-April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with
adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact
or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after
tooling without disturbing joint seal.
3.3 JOINT PRIMING
A. Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended by joint sealant manufacturer
based on pre-constmction joint sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to
comply with joint sealant manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Confine primers to areas of joint sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto
adjoining surfaces.
C. Allow primer to dry. Do not prime areas that cannot be sealed the same day.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF SEALANT BACKINGS
A. Install joint fillers of type indicated to provide support of sealants during application and at
poshion required to produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants
relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint fillers.
2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear joint fillers.
3. Remove absorbent joint fillers that have become wet prior to sealant application and
replace with dry material.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's printed installation instmctions
applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements
apply.
B. Sealant InstaUation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM CI193 for use of
joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C. Perform acoustical sealant application work in accordance with ASTM C919.
D. Installation of Sealants: Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly
contacting and fiilly wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each
joint configuration, and providing uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to
joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. Install sealants at the same
time sealant backings are installed.
E. Install joint backing to maintain the following joint ratios, but in no case less than 1/4 inch
(6 mm):
1. Joints up to 1/2 inch wide: 1:1 width to depth ratio.
2. Joints Greater than 1/2 inch wide: 2:1 width to depth ratio; maximum 1/2 inch joint
depth.
3. Sub-caulk joints that are deep, or joints without suitable backstop, to proper depth.
4. Protect side walls of joint (to depth of caulking) with bond breaker tape.
JOINT SEALANTS
079200-10
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
5. Install with adhesive on 2 faces in contact with sides of joints.
F. Tooling of Non-sag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time
skinning or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration
indicated, to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides
of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint.
1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.
2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do
not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM Cl 193, unless otherwise
indicated.
4. Provide flush joint configuration where indicated per Figure 5B in ASTM Cl 193.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealants and sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by
methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants
and of products in which joints occur.
B. Leave finished work in a neat, clean condition with no evidence of spillovers onto adjacent
surfaces.
C. Constmction Waste Management: Manage constmction waste in accordance with
provisions of Section 01524 Constmction Waste Management.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating
substances or from damage resulting from constmction operations or other causes so that
they are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion.
B. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or
deteriorated joint sealants immediately so that and installations with repaired areas are
indistinguishable from original work.
END OF SECTION 079200
JOINT SEALANTS
079200-11
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
JOINT SEALANTS
079200-12
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set-April 10, 2015
SECTION 079513 - EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Exterior wall and roof expansion joint cover assemblies between existing building and new
elevator tower.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 076000 - Flashing and Sheet Metal.
B. Section 079200 - Joint Sealants
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include specifications, installation instmctions, details, profiles, and finishes.
Obtain approval before materials are fabricated and delivered to the site. Data to clearly
indicate movement capability of cover assemblies and suitability of material used in
exterior seals for UV exposure.
B. Shop Drawings: Show the full extent of expansion joint cover assemblies; include large-
scale details indicating profiles of each type of expansion joint cover assembly, splice joints
between sections, joinery with other types, special end conditions, anchorages, fasteners,
and relationship of adjoining work and finishes. Include description of materials and
finishes and installation instmctions.
C. Samples: Include the following:
1. Samples for each type of metal finish indicated on metal of same thickness and alloy
to be used in work. Where normal color and texture variations are to be expected,
include two or more units in each set of samples showing limits of such variations.
2. Samples of each type of flexible seal to be used in work with color samples as above.
D. Sustainabiiity Submittals:
1. Product Data for products having recycled content, documentation indicating
percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content.
a. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.
2. Product Data for each material, including its source, cost, and the fraction by weight
that is considered regional and that has been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as
well as manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site.
EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES
079513-1
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Certificates: Material test reports from qualified independent testing laboratory indicating
and interpreting test results relative to compliance of fire-rated expansion joint assemblies
with requirements indicated.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Materials and work shall conform to the latest edition of reference specifications specified
herein and to all applicable codes and requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain expansion joint cover assemblies from one source
from a single manufacturer.
C. Fire Performance Characteristics: Where indicated, provide expansion joint cover
assembles identical to those of assemblies whose fire resistance has been determined per
ANSI/UL 263, NFPA 251, or ASTM El 19 and ASTM E814 including hose stream test at
full-rated period by Underwriter Laboratories, Inc.
D. Supply joint covers assemblies meeting the requirements of the CBC for flexure; label each
to indicate compliance.
E. Fire Rating: Not less than the rating of adjacent constmction.
F. Loading Characteristics: Standard floor covers shall withstand a minimum point load of
500 lbs. without damage or permanent deformation. Heavy-duty covers should withstand a
point load of 2,000 lbs.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Exercise proper care in the handling of all work so as not to injure the finished surface, and
take proper precautions to protect the work from damage after it is in place.
B. Deliver materials to the job site ready for use, and fabricated in as large sections and
assemblies as practical. Assemblies shall be identical to submitted and reviewed shop
drawings, samples and certificates.
C. Store materials under cover in a dry and clean location off the ground. Remove materials
which are damaged or otherwise not suitable for installation from the job site and replace
with acceptable materials at no additional cost.
1.8 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Where necessary, check actual locations of walls and other constmction to which work
must fit, by accurate field measurements before fabrication. Show recorded measurements
on final shop drawings and coordinate fabrication schedule with constmction progress to
avoid delay of work.
EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES
079513-2
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrory
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUSTAINABILITY MATERIA.L REQUIREMENTS, GENERAL
A. Recycled Content: Provide products made from steel sheet with average recycled content
such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is
not less than 25 percent.
B. Local/Regional Materials: Give preference to manufacturer's whose facilities are within a
500 mile radius of the project site. Also give preference to materials that are harvested,
extracted, mined, quarried, etc. within a 500 mile radius of the project site.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. Balco, Inc.
2. Constmction Specialties, Inc.
2.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Joints: Withstand plus or minus 4 inches movement of the joint width without failure.
2.4 MATERIALS
A. Stmcttiral Steel Shapes: ASTM A36/A36M.
B. Steel Plates: ASTM A283/A283M, Grade C.
C. Aluminum: ASTM B221, alloy 6063-T5 for extmsions; ASTM B209, aUoy 6061-T6 for
sheets and plates.
1. Protect aluminum surfaces in contact with cementitious materials with zinc chromate
primer or chromate conversion coating.
D. Extmded Preformed Seals: Single- or multi-layered mbber extmsions as classified under
ASTM D2000, designed with or without continuous, longitudinal, intemal baffles and
formed to fit compatible frames, in color selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard
colors.
E. Exterior Seals: Two single-layered flexible extmsions, one interior PVC and on exterior
thermoplastic mbber, as classified under ASTM D2000, retained in a set of compatible
aluminum frames.
1. Finish: 2-coat fluoropolymer.
2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.
F. Wall and Ceiling Joint Cover Assemblies: Provide expansion joint cover assemblies in
intersecting planes of same appearance.
1. Fixed Metal Cover Plates: Anchor frame on one side permitting free movement on
other side.
EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES
079513-3
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
2. Floating Metal Cover Plates: Cover plate secured to frames permitting free
movement on both sides.
3. Self-Centering Cover Plates: Concealed centering device permitting cover plate free
movement on both sides.
4. Flexible Filler: Secure the approved flexible filler between frames to compress and
expand with movement.
G. Compression Seals: Preformed, elastomeric extmsions having intemal baffle system with
lubricant and adhesive for installation.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Provide expansion joint cover assemblies of design, basic profile, materials, and operation
indicated. Select units comparable to those indicated or required to accommodate joint size,
variations in adjacent surfaces, and stmctural movement.
B. General: Fumish the basic profile and operating units for expansion joint covers as shown
on the Drawings. Select units comparable to those shown or required for the joint size, and
to absorb variations in adjacent surfaces and in stmctural movement.
1. Fumish the longest practicable lengths to minimize the number of end joints.
Provide hairline mitered comers where joint changes direction or abuts other material
systems.
2. Include closure materials and transition pieces, tee-joints, comer, curbs, cross-
connections, and other accessories as required to provide continuous joint cover
assemblies.
2.6 METAL FINISHES
A. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for finish designations and application
recommendations, except as otherwise indicated. Apply finishes in factory after products
are fabricated. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces with protective covering before
shipment.
B. Aluminum Finish: AA-C22A41, clear anodized medium matte etched finish with 0.7 mil
thick minimum anodic coating.
C. Paint Finish: Fluoropolymer Two-Coat System: Manufacturer's standard two-coat,
thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer
color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight;
with a top side dry film thickness of 1.0 mil over 0.2 mil prime coat, to provide a total dry
film thickness of 1.2 mil.
D. Factory Prime Coating: On concealed metal surfaces that will be in contact with concrete
and masonry surfaces when installed and where painting after installation is indicated,
provide pretreatment and white or light-colored, factory-applied, baked-on epoxy primer
coat; with a minimum dry film thickness of 0.2 mil
E. Protection: Cover exposed metal surfaces with factory applied adhesive paper or pol3rvinyl
chloride (PVC) protective strippable coating.
EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES
079513-4
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbad Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research -I- Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
PART 3 - EXECUTION
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify all measurements and dimensions at the job site and cooperate in the coordination
and scheduling of the work of this Section with the work of related trades, with particular
attention given to the installation of items embedded in concrete and masonry so as not to
delay job progress.
B. Make a thorough examination of all surfaces receiving the work of this Section and before
starting the installation, notify the Architect, in writing, of any defect which would affect
the satisfactory completion of the work of this Section.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to expansion control system manufacturer's written
instmctions.
B. Coordinate and fumish anchorages, setting drawings, and instmctions for installing
expansion control systems. Provide fasteners of metal, type, and size to suh type of
constmction indicated and to provide for secure attachment of expansion conttol systems.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instmctions for storing, handling, and installing
expansion control systems and materials unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
B. Metal Frames: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install expansion control
systems.
1. Install in tme alignment and proper relationship to joints and adjoining finished
surfaces measured from established lines and levels.
2. Adjust for differences between actual stmctural gap and nominal design gap due to
ambient temperature at time of installation. Notify Architect where discrepancies
occur that will affect proper expansion control system installation and performance.
3. Cut and fit ends to accommodate thermal expansion and contraction of metal without
buckling of frames.
4. Repair or grout blockout as required for continuous frame support using nonmetallic,
shrinkage-resistant grout.
5. Install frames in continuous contact with adjacent surfaces,
a. Shimming is not permitted.
6. Locate anchors at interval recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 3 inches
(75 mm) from each end and not more than 24 inches (600 mm) oc.
C. Seals in Metal Frames: Install elastomeric seals and membranes in frames to comply with
manufacturer's written instmctions. Install with minimum number of end joints.
1. Provide in continuous lengths for straight sections.
2. Seal ttansitions according to manufacturer's written instmctions. Vulcanize or heat-
weld field-spliced joints as recommended by manufacturer.
3. Installation: Mechanically lock seals into frames or adhere to frames with adhesive
or pressure-sensitive tape as recommended by manufacturer.
EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES
079513-5
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbad Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set-April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
D. Terminate exposed ends of expansion control systems with field- or factory-fabricated
termination devices.
E. Moisture Barrier: Provide at all exterior joints and where indicated on Drawings. Provide
drainage fittings at a maximum of 50 feet (15.2 m) or where indicated on Drawings.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF EXTRUDED PREFORMED SEALS
A. Install seals to comply with manufacturer's instmction and with minimum number of end
joints.
B. For straight sections provide preformed seals in continuous lengths.
C. Vulcanize or heat-seal all field splice joints in preformed seal material to provide watertight
joints using manufacturer's recommended procedure.
D. Apply manufacturer's approved adhesive, epoxy, or lubricant-adhesive to both frame
interfaces prior to installing preformed seal.
E. Seal transitions in accordance with manufacturer's instmction.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF SEISMIC SEALS
A. Install secondary seals in continuous lengths; vulcanize all field splice joints in secondary
seal material to provide watertight joints using manufacturer's recommended procedures.
B. Install primary flexible seals in standard lengths.
C. Seal transitions and butt joints in accordance with manufacturer's instmctions.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Do not remove strippable protective material until finish work in adjacent area is complete.
When protective material is removed, clean exposed metal surfaces to comply with
manufacturer's instmctions.
B. Constmction Waste Management: Manage constmction waste in accordance with
provisions of Section 01524 Constmction Waste Management.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect the installation from damage by work of other Sections. Where necessary due to
heavy constmction traffic, remove and properly store cover plates or seals and install
temporary protection over expansion control systems. Reinstall cover plates or seals prior
to Substantial Completion of the Work.
END OF SECTION 079513
EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBUES
079513-6
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Standard steel doors and frames indicated and scheduled on Drawings.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 087100 - Door Hardware.
B. Section 099100 - Painting: Finish painting of steel items.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Steel Sheet Thicknesses: Thickness dimensions, including those referenced in ANSI
A250.8, are minimums as defined in referenced ASTM standards for both uncoated steel
sheet and the uncoated base metal of metallic-coated steel sheets. Metal thicknesses
indicated below cortespond to former gage thicknesses:
1. 20 Gage: 0.032-inch (0.8-mm).
2. 18 Gage: 0.042-inch (1.0-mm).
3. 16 Gage: 0.053-inch (1.3-mm).
4. 14 Gage: 0.067-inch (1.7-mm).
5. 12 Gage: 0.093-inch (2.3-mm).
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data substantiating that products
comply with requirements.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit for fabrication and installation of steel doors and frames. Include
details of each frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions at openings, details of
constmction, location and installation requirements of finish hardware and reinforcements,
and details of joints and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.
C. Sustainabiiity Submittals:
1. Product Data for products having recycled content, documentation indicating
percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content.
a. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.
b. Provide total weight of products provided.
2. Product Data for each material, including its source, cost, and the fraction by weight
that is considered regional and that has been exttacted, harvested, or recovered, as
well as manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081113-1
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Library
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
3. Product Data for field-applied touch up primers, paints, clear coatings, and
galvanizing agents, include printed statement of VOC content and chemical
components.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Provide schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and
openings as those on contract drawings.
B. Indicate coordination of glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements.
C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, for each type of hollow metal door and frame assembly.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide doors and frames complying with Steel Door Institute "Recommended
Specifications: Standard Steel Doors and Frames", ANSI A250, and as specified herein.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver hollow metal work cartoned or crated to provide protection during transit and job
storage. Provide additional sealed plastic wrapping for factory finished doors.
B. Inspect hollow metal work upon delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired
provided refinished items are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to Architect; '^•mtf^
otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as directed.
C. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4" high wood
blocking. Avoid use of non-vented plastic or canvas shelters which could create humidity
chamber. If cardboard wrapper on door becomes wet, remove carton immediately. Provide
1/4" spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUSTAINABILITY MATERL\L REQUIREMENTS, GENERAL
A. Recycled Content: Provide products made from steel sheet with average recycled content
such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is
not less than the following:
1. Steel: Average recycled content of steel to be a minimum 60 percent recycled
content.
B. Local/Regional Materials: Give preference to manufacturer's whose facilities are within a
500 mile radius of the project site. Also give preference to materials that are harvested,
extracted, mined, quarried, etc. within a 500 mile radius ofthe project site.
C. VOC Content: Welding and coatings applied on-site on the interior of the building and
products used on the interior of the building shall comply with VOC limits as specified. ^'^j
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081113-2
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research -I- Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
1. Use materials that have the lowest possible VOC content in units of g/L when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following, or approved equal:
1. Amweld Building Products.
2. Ceco Corporation.
3. Curries Company.
2.3 STANDARD STEEL DOORS
A. General: Provide doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; fabricated
with smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces, unless otherwise
indicated. Comply with ANSI A250.8.
1. Design: Flush panel.
2. Non-Rated Core Constmction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb,
polystyrene, polyurethane, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core that
produces doors complying with ANSI A250.8.
3. Fire Door Core Constmction: As required to provide fire-protection ratings
indicated.
4. Vertical Edges, for Single- and Double-Acting Doors: Square edge.
5. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.042-inch- (1.0-mm-) thick
end closures or channels of same material as face sheets.
6. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel
Doors and Frames."
B. Exterior Doors: Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by
referencing ANSI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI A250.4 for physical-endurance
level:
1. Fabricate from galvanized steel sheet.
2. Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush)
or Model 2 (Seamless) composite constmction where indicated on Drawings.
C. Interior Doors: Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing
ANSI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI A250.4 for physical-endurance level:
1. Fabricate from cold-rolled steel sheet.
2. Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush) or
Model 2 (Seamless) composite constmction where indicated on Drawings.
2.4 STANDARD STEEL FRAMES
A. General: Comply with ANSI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile.
B. Exterior Frames: Fabricated from galvanized steel sheet.
1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped and welded face comers and seamless face
joints.
2. Frames for Level 3 Steel Doors: 0.067-inch- (1.7-mm-) thick steel sheet.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081113-3
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Library
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
C. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet, unless otherwise indicated to
comply with exterior frame requirements.
1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped and welded face comers and seamless face
joints.
2. Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick steel sheet.
3. Frames for Wood Doors: 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick steel sheet.
4. Frames for Borrowed Lights: 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick steel sheet.
D. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate reinforcement plates from same material as frames to
comply with the following minimum sizes:
1. Hinges: Minimum 0.123 inch (3.0 mm) thick by 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide by 6
inches (152 mm) longer than hinge, secured by not less than 6 spot welds.
2. Pivots: Minimum 0.167 inch (4.2 mm) thick by 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide by 6
inches (152 mm) longer than hinge, secured by not less than 6 spot welds.
3. Lock Face, Flush Bolts, Closers, and Concealed Holders: Minimum 0.067 inch (1.7
mm) thick.
4. All Other Surface-Mounted Hardware: Minimum 0.067 inch (1.7 mm) thick.
E. Supports and Anchors: Fabricated from electrolytic zinc-coated or metallic-coated steel
sheet.
F. Jamb Anchors:
1. Metal Stud Anchor: Z-type anchor, welded to frame, 0.053-inch thick steel, UL
listed as required for fire rating.
2. Existing Wall Anchor: 0.053-inch thick pipe spacer with 2-inch x 0.053-inch thick
steel plate sized to accommodate a 3/8-inch diameter countersunk flathead expansion
anchor, UL listed as required for fire rating..
G. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm)
thick, and as follows:
1. Used at all frames installed prior to walls. Where frames are installed after walls,
install an additional jamb anchor within the lowest 6-inches of the door jamb, one
each side.
2. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.
3. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips,
allowing not less than 2-inch (50-mm) height adjustment. Terminate bottom of
frames at finish floor surface.
H. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled
steel sheet.
2.5 MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTMA1008/A1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), TypeB;
suitable for exposed applications.
B. Galvanized Steel Sheets: Zinc-coated carbon steel sheets of commercial quality, complying
with ASTM A653/A653M, with ASTM A924/A924M, G60 zinc coating, mill
phosphatized.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081113-4
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
C. Door Louvers: SDI 11 IC, sight proof, inverted V or Y blades, with insect screen at exterior
doors, size as indicated on Drawings.
D. Supports and Anchors: After fabricating, galvanize units to be built into exterior walls
according to ASTM A153/A153M, Class B.
E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Provide items to be built into exterior walls, hot-dip
galvanized according to ASTM A153/A153M.
F. Powder-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application
indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory
devices for attaching standard steel door frames of type indicated.
G. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil
(0.4-mm) dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of
asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.
H. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 088100.
2.6 STOPS AND MOLDINGS
A. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors: Minimum 0.032 inch (0.8 mm) thick, fabricated from
same material as door face sheet in which they are installed.
B. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with standard steel frames, minimum 5/8 inch (16
mm) high, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 0.032 inch (0.8 mm) thick, fabricated
from same material as frames in which they are installed.
2.7 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects,
warp or buckle. Wherever practicable, fit and assemble unhs in manufacturer's plant.
B. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment, to
assure proper assembly at project site.
C. Hollow Metal Doors:
1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit
moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration.
2. Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors.
3. Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and rails of non-flush
units, from only cold-rolled steel. Install insulation in doors where scheduled on
Drawings.
4. Fabricate exterior doors, panels, and frames from galvanized sheet steel. Close top
and bottom edges of exterior doors as integral part of door constmction or by
addition of minimum 16-gage inverted steel channels. Seal joints watertight.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081113-5
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Library
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
D. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling
limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness
metal as frames.
1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make
smooth, flush, and invisible.
2. Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or
joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings
and to jambs by butt welding.
3. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed
fasteners unless otherwise indicated.
4. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be
grouted.
5. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot
welds per anchor.
6. Fabricate frames, concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers and
moldings from cold-rolled or hot- rolled steel (at fabricator's option).
7. Provide 3/8-inch back bend retum on frames where gypsum board wall material
occurs whether on one or both sides.
8. Fabricate frames having multiple openings with muUion members having no visible
seams or joints. Continuously weld face, rabbet, and soffit joints between abutted
members and finish smooth when exposed to exterior.
E. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated.
Form comers of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints.
1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of
hollow metal work.
2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each
glazed lite is capable of being removed independently.
3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior
doors and frames.
4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow metal work.
5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing and
type of installation indicated.
6. Factory-install glass in prepared openings.
F. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat Phillips heads for
exposed screws and bolts. Paint heads to match adjacent surfaces.
G. Finish Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed
finish hardware in accordance with final Finish Hardware Schedule and templates provided
by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI A115 series
specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware.
1. Locate finish hardware as indicated on final shop drawings or, if not indicated, in
accordance with "Recommended Locations for Builder's Hardware", published by
Door and Hardware Institute.
2. Prepare frames for silencers except for frames which receive weatherstripping.
3. Provide dust cover boxes or mortar guards of 0.016-inch thick steel at all hardware
mortises on frames.
4. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and
tapping for surface-applied finish hardware may be done at project site.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081113-6
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
H. Factory-install louvers in prepared openings.
2.8 STEEL FINISHES
A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
1. Finish standard steel door and frames after assembly.
B. Metallic-Coated Steel Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces with nonpetroleum solvent so
surfaces are free of oil and other contaminants. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating
suited to the organic coating to be applied over it. Clean welds, mechanical connections,
and abraded areas, and apply galvanizing repair paint specified below to comply with
ASTM A780/A780M.
1. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in
steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20.
C. Steel Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning";
remove dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill
scale and mst, if present, from uncoated steel; comply with SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool
Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
D. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Apply shop primer specified below immediately
after surface preparation and pretreatment. Apply a smooth coat of even consistency to
provide a uniform dry film thickness of not less than 0.7 mils (0.018 mm).
1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer
complying with ANSI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer
manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substtate and field-applied finish paint
system indicated; and providing a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite
prolonged exposure.
2.9 ACCESSORIES
A. Supports and Anchors: Fabricated from not less than 0.042-inch- (1.0-mm-) thick,
electrolytic zinc-coated or metallic-coated steel sheet.
1. Wall Anchors in Masonry Constmction: 0.177-inch- (4.5-mm-) diameter, steel wire
complying with ASTM A510/A510M may be used in place of steel sheet.
B. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Where zinc-coated items are
to be buih into exterior walls, comply with ASTM A153/A153M, Class C or D as
applicable.
C. Shop Applied Primer: Rust-inhibitive enamel or paint, air-drying or baking type, suitable as
a base for specified finish paints.
D. Plaster Guards: Provide 0.016-inch- (0.4-mm-) thick, steel sheet plaster guards or mortar
boxes to close off interior of openings; place at back of hardware cutouts where mortar or
other materials might obstmct hardware operation.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081113-7
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Library
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
E. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, fabricate stops to receive three
silencers on strike jambs of single-door frames and two silencers on heads of double-door
frames.
F. Finish: Paint in accordance with Section 099100.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Provide doors and frames of sizes, thicknesses, and designs indicated. Install
standard steel doors and frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in
place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instmctions.
B. Install standard steel doors, frames, and accessories in accordance with final shop drawings,
manufacturer's data, and as herein specified.
C. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions of ANSI A250.il "Recommended Erection
Instmctions for Steel Frames", unless otherwise indicated.
D. Except for frames located at in-place concrete and at drywall installations, place frames
prior to constmction of enclosing walls. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed,
aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall constmction is
completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders leaving surfaces smooth and
undamaged.
E. In metal stud partitions, install at least 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and sttike levels. In
open steel stud partitions, place studs in wall anchor notches and wire tie. In closed steel
stud partitions, attach wall anchors to studs with tapping screws.
F. Standard Steel Frames: Install standard steel frames for doors, sidelights, borrowed lights
and other openings, of size and profile indicated. Comply with ANSI A250.11.
1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until
permanent anchors are set. After wall constmction is complete, remove temporary
braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.
a. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening.
b. Install door silencers in frames before grouting.
c. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have
been properly set and secured.
d. Check plumb, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constmcted. Shim
as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.
e. Apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with mortar, grout,
and plaster containing antifreezing agents.
2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor
and secure with post-installed expansion anchors.
a. Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of post-
installed expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.
3. Metal-Stud Parthions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081113-8
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbad Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Reseorch + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbad Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
4. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with grout. Install
grout in lifts and take precautions, including bracing frames, to ensure that frames are
not deformed or damaged by grout forces.
5. In-Place Gypsum Board Partitions: Secure frames in place with postinstalled
expansion anchors through floor anchors at each jamb. Countersink anchors, and fill
and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
6. Installation Tolerances: Adjust standard steel door frames for squareness, alignment,
twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:
a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a
line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a
horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.
c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face comers of
jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor.
G. Standard Steel Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, whhin clearances
specified below. Shim as necessary.
1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors:
a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch (3 mm) plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).
b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch (3 mm) plus or minus 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm).
c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch (9.5 mm).
d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum
3/4 inch (19 mm).
H. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing" and with
standard steel door and frame manufacturer's written instmctions.
1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly
not more than 9 inches (230 mm) oc, and not more than 2 inches (50 mm) oc from
each comer.
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final
inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace
defective work, including standard steel doors or frames that are warped, bowed, or
otherwise unacceptable.
B. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth msted or damaged areas of
prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying primer.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Clean grout and other bonding material off standard steel doors and frames immediately
after installation.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint
according to manufacturer's written instmctions.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081113-9
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Librory
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research -I- Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 201 5 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
C. Constmction Waste Management: Manage constmction waste in accordance with
provisions of Section 01524 Constmction Waste Management.
END OF SECTION 081113
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081113-10
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
City of Corlsbod Controct 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
SECTION 081116 - ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Standard commercial interior aluminum door and sidelight frames indicated and scheduled
on Drawings.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 081113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Steel doors and door frames.
B. Section 081416-Flush Wood Doors.
C. Section 087100 - Door Hardware.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data substantiating that products
comply with requirements.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit for fabrication and installation of aluminum frames. Include
details of each frame type, elevations of door design types, condhions at openings, details of
constmction, location and installation requirements of finish hardware and reinforcements,
and details of joints and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.
C. Sustainabiiity Submittals:
1. Product Data for products having recycled content, documentation indicating
percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content.
a. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.
2. Product Data for each material, including its source, cost, and the fraction by weight
that is considered regional and that has been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as
well as manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site.
3. Product Data for adhesives and sealants used inside of the window framing system,
including printed statement of VOC content.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Provide schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and
openings as those on contract drawings.
B. Indicate coordinate of glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements.
ALUMINUM DOOR AND WINDOW FRAMES
081116-1
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Library
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 201 5 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed installations of
aluminum framing of similar design and extent to those required for the project and
authorized by manufacturer to install products specified in this Section.
B. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain aluminum frames from one source and from a single
manufacturer.
C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of interior
aluminum frames and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1
Section "Product Requirements."
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver frames cartoned or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage.
Provide additional sealed plastic wrapping for factory finished doors.
B. Inspect frames upon delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided
refinished items are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to Architect;
otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as directed.
C. Store frames at building she under cover. Place units on minimum 4" high wood blocking.
Avoid use of non-vented plastic or canvas shelters that could create humidity chamber. If
cardboard wrappers become wet, remove carton immediately.
D. Follow special storage and handling requirements of manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUSTAINABILITY MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS, GENERAL
A. Recycled Content: Provide products made from steel sheet with average recycled content
such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is
not less than 25 percent except for the following:
1. Rated Window Frames: 5% postconsumer and 9% postindustrial.
B. Local/Regional Materials: Give preference to manufacturer's whose facilities are within a
500 mile radius of the project site. Also give preference to materials that are harvested,
extracted, mined, quarried, etc. within a 500 mile radius ofthe project site.
C. VOC Content: Adhesives and sealants applied on-site on the interior of the building and
products used on the interior of the building shall comply with VOC limits as specified.
1. Use materials that have the minimum VOC content in units of g/L when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
ALUMINUM DOOR AND WINDOW FRAMES
081116-2
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research -I- Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish
indicated.
1. Sheet and Plate: ASTMB209.
2. Extmded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B221.
3. Extmded Stmcttiral Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B429/B429M.
4. Stmctural Profiles: ASTM B308/B308M.
B. Carbon Steel Reinforcement: ASTM A36/A36M for stmctural shapes, plates and bars;
ASTM AI008/A1008M for cold rolled sheet and strip, or ASTM A570 for hot rolled sheet
and strip.
C. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: ASTM A123/A123M, aluminum, non-magnetic stainless
steel or hot-dip, zinc-coated steel.
D. Exposed Fasteners: Use exposed fasteners (Phillips flat-head screws) only to apply
hardware. Match the finish of the member or hardware being fastened.
2.3 COMPONENTS
A. Door Frames: Reinforced for hinges and strikes.
B. Glazing Frames: For glazing thickness indicated.
C. Ceiling Tracks: Extmded aluminum.
D. Trim: Extmded aluminum, not less than 0.062 inch (1.6 mm) thick, with removable snap-in
casing trim, glazing stops, and door stops without exposed fasteners.
2.4 INTERIOR ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONT SYSTEM
A. Manufacturer: Kawneer, Tri-Fab 451, 1-3/4- x 4-inch framing system.
B. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extmded-aluminum framing members of
thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.
C. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with
nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.
D. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining,
nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.
E. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard recommended by
manufacturer for joint type.
2.5 INTERIOR ALUMINUM STOREFRONT DOORS
A. Stile-and-Rail Type Interior Doors: Provide tubular frame members, fabricated with
mechanical joints using heavy inserted reinforcing plates and concealed tie-rods or j-bolts.
ALUMINUM DOOR AND WINDOW FRAMES
081116-3
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
B. Design: Provide 1-3/4-inch-thick doors of design as follows.
1. Stile Design: Medium stile; 3-1/2-inch (88.9-mm) nominal width.
C. Hardware:
1. Pivot Hinges: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1.
2. Locking Devices, General: Do not require use of key, tool, or special knowledge for
operation.
3. Mortise Auxiliary Locks: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1.
4. Automatic and Self-Latching Flush Bohs: BHMA Al56.3, Grade 1.
5. Panic Exit Devices: Listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing according to
UL 305.
a. Standard: BHMA Al56.3, Grade 1.
6. Cylinders: As specified in Section 08710; BHMA A156.5, Grade I.
7. Strikes: Provide strike with black-plastic dust box for each latch or lock bolt;
fabricated for aluminum framing.
8. Operating Trim: BHMAA156.6.
9. Removable Mullions:
a. Standard: BHMAA156.3.
b. When used with panic exit devices, provide removable mullions listed and
labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305. Use
only mullions that have been tested with exit devices to be used.
10. Closers: With accessories required for a complete installation, sized as required by
door size, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use, and adjustable to
meet field conditions and requirements for opening force.
a. Standard: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1.
11. Concealed Overhead Holders: BHMA Al56.8, Grade 1.
12. Door Stops: BHMAA156.16, Grade 1, floor or wall mounted, as appropriate for
door location indicated, with integral mbber bumper.
13. Door Seals: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components.
a. Compression Type for Rated Conditions: Made of ASTM D2000, molded
neoprene, or ASTM D2287, molded PVC.
b. Sliding Type for Non-rated Conditions: AAMA 701, made of wool,
polypropylene, or nylon woven pile with nylon-fabric or aluminum-strip
backing.
D. See Section 083214 for interior aluminum sliding glass doors.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects, warp or buckle,
to shapes as required for each application, for knock down field assembly.
B. Clearly identify work before shipment to assure proper assembly at project site.
C. Provide metal frames for doors and other openings, of types and styles as shown on
Drawings and schedules. Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Provide wool pile or gasketing in door frames to prevent metal-to-metal contact.
ALUMINUM DOOR AND WINDOW FRAMES
081116-4
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research -I- Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
D. Fasteners and Hardware: Aluminum, stainless steel, or other non-corrosive materials
compatible with aluminum and acceptable to frame manufacturer, countersunk style.
Exposed fasteners not permitted.
E. Finish Hardware Preparation: Prepare frames to receive finish hardware in accordance with
final Finish Hardware Schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with
applicable requirements of ANSI A115 series specifications for door and frame preparation
for hardware.
F. Fabricate frame members mortised, drilled and tapped for hinge and sttike locations.
G. Locate finish hardware as indicated on final shop drawings or, if not indicated, in
accordance whh "Recommended Locations for Builder's Hardware", published by Door and
Hardware Institute.
H. Reinforcing: Install reinforcing as required for hardware and as necessary for sag resistance
and rigidity.
I. Door Seals: Provide continuous, nylon backed wool pile sound and light seal around
perimeter of doorstop.
2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum
Association for designating aluminum finishes.
C. Baked-Enamel Finish: AA-C12C42Rlx (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited
chemicals; Chemical Finish: acid-chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating;
Organic Coating: as specified below). Apply baked enamel complying with paint
manufacturer's written instmctions for cleaning, conversion coating, and painting.
1. Organic Coating: Thermosetting, modified-acrylic enamel primer/topcoat system
complying with AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils
(0.04 mm), medium gloss.
2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INTERIOR ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONT INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Comply with manufacturer's written instmctions.
2. Do not install damaged components.
3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.
5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and
electrolytic deterioration.
ALUMINUM DOOR AND WINDOW FRAMES
081116-5
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research -I- Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 201 5 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
B. Install frames and accessories in accordance with final shop drawings, manufacturer's
instmctions, and as herein specified.
C. Coordinate with wall constmction for anchor placement.
D. Field cut jamb legs if required to fit actual finished opening dimension.
E. Set units plumb, level, and tme to line, without warp or rack of framing members, doors, or
glass panels.
1. Install components in proper alignment and relation to established lines and grades
indicated. Provide proper support and anchor securely in place.
F. Metal Protection:
1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by
painting contact surfaces with primer or applying sealant or tape, or by installing
nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.
2. Where aluminum will contact mortar, concrete, or masonry, protect against corrosion
by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
3. Paint dissimilar metals where drainage from them passes over aluminum.
G. Install frames and accessories in accordance with final shop drawings, manufacturer's
instmctions, and as herein specified.
H. Coordinate with wall constmction for anchor placement.
I. Set frames accurately in poshion, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent
anchors are set. After wall constmction is completed, remove temporary braces and
spreaders leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.
J. In metal stud partitions, install at least 3 wall anchors per door jamb at hinge and strike
levels. In open steel stud partitions, place studs in wall anchor notches and wire tie. In
closed steel stud partitions, attach wall anchors to studs with tapping screws.
K. Field cut jamb legs if required to fit actual finished opening dimension.
L. Refer to Section 088100 for installation of glass and other panels indicated to be glazed into
framing and doors that are not pre-glazed by manufacturer.
1. Prepare surfaces that will contact stmctural sealant according to sealant
manufacturer's written instmctions to ensure compatibility and adhesion. Preparation
includes, but is not limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces.
2. Install stmctural silicone sealant according to sealant manufacturer's written
instmctions.
3. Mechanically fasten glazing in place until stmctural sealant is cured.
4. Remove excess sealant from component surfaces before sealant has cured.
M. Install perimeter sealant to comply with requirements of Section 079200 unless otherwise
indicated.
ALUMINUM DOOR AND WINDOW FRAMES
081116-6
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
N. Sidelight Installation:
1. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing to comply with Section 088100 for
glazed lights.
2. Install reinforcement channels between two abutting frames. Anchor to stmcture and
floor.
3. Accurately join, fit and reinforce comers to flush hairline joints.
3.2 INTERIOR ALUMINUM STOREFRONT DOOR INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate with the installation of aluminum entrance doors and frames.
B. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points.
1. Install entrances plumb and tme in alignment with established lines and levels
without warp or rack.
2. Field-Installed Enttance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door
hardware according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instmctions
using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.
a. Install hardware using templates provided. Refer to Section 087100 for
installation requirements.
b. Lubricate operating hardware and other moving parts according to hardware
manufacturers' written instmctions.
3. Install surface-mounted hardware according to manufacturer's written instmctions
using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.
C. Use anchorage devices to securely attach frame assembly to surrounding constmction.
D. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional
tolerances aligning with adjacent work.
3.3 WOOD DOOR INSTALLATION
A. Fit wood doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in AWS Architectural
Woodwork Standards, Section 9.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating finish hardware items, leaving doors and
frames undamaged and in complete and proper operating conditions.
B. Adjust operating hardware.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean completed systems promptly after erection taking care to avoid damage to finishes.
B. Constmction Waste Management: Manage constmction waste in accordance with
provisions of Section 01524 Constmction Waste Management.
END OF SECTION 081116
ALUMINUM DOOR AND WINDOW FRAMES
081116-7
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Library
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set-April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
ALUMINUM DOOR AND WINDOW FRAMES
081116-8
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Solid core wood doors, rated and non-rated.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 087100 -Door Hardware: Installation of hardware in wood doors.
B. Section 099100 - Painting: Field finishing of wood doors.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge constmction,
louvers, and trim for openings.
1. Include adhesive and composite wood materials manufacturers' product data
indicating urea-formaldehyde content.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of
door; constmction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware
blocking; and other pertinent data.
1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.
2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts.
3. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.
4. Indicate fire ratings for fire doors.
C. Samples for Verification: Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials,
approximately 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), for each material and finish. For each
wood species and transparent finish, provide set of three samples showing typical range of
color and grain to be expected in the finished work.
D. Sustainabiiity Submittals:
1.
2.
Product Data for each material, including its source, cost, and the fraction by weight
that is considered regional and that has been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as
well as manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site.
Certificates for chain-of-custody certificates certifying that flush wood doors are to
be made from certified wood comply with forest certification requirements. Include
evidence that mill is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification
body.
a. Include statement indicating costs for each certified wood product.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
081416-1
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
3. Product Data for installation adhesives, including printed statement of VOC content
and chemical composition of each product used.
4. Product Data for the following:
a. For each composite-wood product used, documentation indicating that the
bonding agent contains no urea formaldehyde.
b. For each adhesive used, documentation indicating that the adhesive contains
no urea formaldehyde.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1.6 QUALITY STANDARDS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. Comply with AWS "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for requirements in the door
grades indicated.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody
by an FSC-accredited certification body.
D. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings
indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. Door label shall include hourly rating
followed by the letter "S" indicating conformance with air leakage resistance testing, serial
number, and the listing agency's certification mark.
E. Temperature-Rise Rating: At exit enclosures and exitways, provide doors that have a
temperature-rise rating of 450 deg F maximum in 30 minutes of fire exposure. In addition to
the requirements specified for positive pressure test requirements specified above, the door
label shall include temperature rise rating.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instmctions.
B. Package doors individually in cardboard cartons and wrap bundles of doors in plastic
sheeting.
C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.
1.8 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and
weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and
maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the
remainder of the constmction period.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
081416-2
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace doors that fail in materials, fabrication, or installation within specified warranty
period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) in a 42-by-84-inch
(1067-by-2134-mm) section.
b. Telegraphing of core constmction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-
inch (0.25 mm in a 76.2-mm) span.
2. Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of the original installation,
including costs of re-hanging.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUSTAINABILITY MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS, GENERAL
A. Local/Regional Materials: Give preference to manufacturer's whose facihties are whhin a
500 mile radius of the project site. Also give preference to materials that are harvested,
extracted, mined, quarried, etc. within a 500 mile radius of the project site.
B. Certified Wood: Use wood based products made from wood obtained from forests certified
by an FSC accredited certification body to comply with the Forest Stewardship Councils
"Principles and Criteria."
C. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by material manufacturer for products and
substrate conditions indicated.
1. Use materials that have the lowest possible VOC content in units of g/L when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
D. Composite Wood and Agrifiber: Use only composite wood and agrifiber products free of
added urea formaldehyde resin binders.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. Algoma Hardwoods.
2. Eggers Industries.
3. Marshfield Door Systems.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. General Wood Door Product Requirements: Provide doors with same exposed surface
material on both faces of each door; meeting requirements of AWS Section 9; unless
otherwise indicated.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
081416-3
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set-April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
B. Low-Emitting Materials: Provide doors made with adhesives and composite wood products
that do not contain urea formaldehyde.
C. Adhesives: NWWDA IS-1.6, Type II adhesive bond or better for cores. Type I adhesive
bond for faces and cross bands. Do not use adhesives containing urea formaldehyde.
2.4 INTERIOR DOOR CONSTRUCTION
A. General Wood Door Product Requirements: Provide doors with same exposed surface
material on both faces of each door; meeting requirements of AWS Section 9 unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Interior, Solid-Core, Veneer-Faced Doors for Transparent Finish:
1. Constmction: Five plies with stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive
planed before veneering.
2. Adhesive: Type I or T5^e II
3. Grade: Custom Premium (Grade A faces).
4. Species and Cut: White maple, plain sliced.
a. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match.
b. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Running match.
c. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening or separated only
by mullions.
d. Room Match: Provide door faces of compatible color and grain within each
separate room or area of building.
e. Corridor Match: Corridor door faces do not need to match where they are
separated by 20 feet (6 m) or more.
5. Stiles: Same species as faces.
6. WDMA IS. 1 -A Performance Grade:
a. Heavy Duty: At office, stairwell, mechanical service, hallway, storage doors.
b. Extra Heavy Duty: At public bathrooms, assembly areas, and breakrooms.
C. Particleboard Cores:
1. Core (Solid, Non-Rated): AWS Section 9, HPVA Grade A, particleboard core.
2. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-1.
a. Use particleboard made with binder containing no urea-formaldehyde resin.
3. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as follows:
a. 5-inch (125-mm) top-rail blocking, in doors indicated to have closers.
b. 5-inch (125-mm) bottom-rail blocking, in exterior doors and doors indicated to
have kick, mop, or armor plates.
c. 5-inch (125-mm) midrail blocking, in doors indicated to have exit devices.
4. Provide doors with glued-block cores instead of particleboard cores at locations
where exit devices are indicated.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Factory-pre-fit and pre-machine doors to fit frame opening sizes indicated and complying
with AWS pre-fitting tolerances.
B. Fabricate fire rated doors in accordance with AWS Architectural Woodwork Standards and
to UL requirements. Attach fire rating label to door.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
081416-4
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
C. Provide lock blocks at lock edge and top of door for closer as required for hardware
reinforcement.
D. Vertical Exposed Edge of Stiles: Hardwood of species compatible in color with veneer
facing for transparent finish; hardwood for paint finish.
E. Factory machine doors for finish hardware in accordance with hardware requirements and
dimensions. Do not machine for surface hardware. Provide solid blocking for through
bolted hardware.
2.6 FACTORY FINISHING
A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete
fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not
surface applied, before finishing.
I. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be
omitted on top and bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.
B. Finish doors at factory.
C. Transparent Finish:
1. Grade: Custom.
2. AWS Finish System 2: Score 99-T, lacquer pre-catalyzed.
3. Staining: Match approved sample for color.
4. Sheen: Satin, 31-45 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D523.
5. Color: Match Architect's sample.
2.7 ACCESSORIES
A. Glazing Stops:
1. Non-rated Areas: Wood, of same species as door facing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Inspect openings before installation. Verify that rough openings are correct before
proceeding.
B. Examine doors and substrates, with Installer present, for suitable conditions where wood
doors and fire-rated wood door frames will be installed.
1. Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size,
location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with plumb jambs and
level heads.
2. Reject doors with defects.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
081416-5
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Library
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer's instmctions, in accordance with AWS
Section 9 requirements.
B. Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels. Machine doors for
hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining.
C. Do not impair utility or stmctural strength of doors in fitting to the opening, in applying
hardware, preparing lights, louvers, or plant-ons or other detailing.
D. Install pre-fit and pre-machined doors in accordance with manufacturer's data. Install with
a maximum clearance of 1/8 inch on the lock side, 1/8 inch between meeting edges of
paired doors and 1/8 inch between top of door and frame header.
E. If not pre-machined, use a minimum of 1 hinge for each 30 inches of door height. Equally
space hinges when using 3 or more.
F. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as
indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or
permitted with fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting
and machining.
1. Fitting Clearances:
a. Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors.
b. Provide 1/4 - 3/8-inch (6 - 9.5 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative
floor finish or covering.
c. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) from
bottom of door to top of threshold.
d. Fire-rated Doors: As specified in CBC Section 715 and NFPA 80.
G. Doors may not extend beyond 1/16 inch from the face of the jamb nor more than 1/8 inch
behind jamb face.
H. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
I. Cutouts, Recesses, and Exposed Rail Edges: Unless factory provided, paint with two coats
of clear sealer, each coat well dried, before hardware is set in place.
J. Meeting stiles of pairs of doors shall be in alignment along the entire height, and offset
between adjacent leaves shall not exceed I/8-inch
3.3 ADJUSTMENT
A. Adjust doors for smooth and balanced movement.
B. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.
C. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements.
Doors may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no
evidence of repair or refinishing.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
081416-6
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbad Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean glass and hardware units promptly after installation in accordance with
manufacturer's printed instmctions.
B. Constmction Waste Management: Manage constmction waste in accordance with
provisions of Section 01524 Constmction Waste Management.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed units to ensure that they are without damage or deterioration at the time of
Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 081416
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
081416-7
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
081416-8
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
SECTION 083113 - ACCESS DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Access panels and doors in walls.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 099100 - Painting: Finish painting for metal surfaces.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Indicate type(s) of doors to be installed for wall and ceiling conditions,
special installation requirements, finishes, closing mechanisms, and hardware.
B. Location Drawing: Required access doors may not be indicated on the Drawings. Show
proposed location of every required access door with dimensions in plan and elevation.
1. Verify locations with the Architect. Access doors shall be located within walls and
ceilings for access including but not limited to the following: automatic valves,
automatic dampers, air terminal units, and fire/smoke dampers.
2. Show location of adjacent materials, trim pieces, and hardware required to complete
the work. Do not begin installation until location is approved.
3. Submit access door locations superimposed on piping layout and duct layout shop
drawings.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of access door and frame from single source from
single manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. J.L. Industries.
2. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
3. Milcor, Inc.
ACCESS DOORS
083113-1
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
2.2
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrory
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
MATERIALS
A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M.
B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A36/A36M, Commercial Steel (CS), or ASTM
A620/A620M, Drawing Steel (DS), Type B; stretcher-leveled standard of flatness; with
minimum thickness indicated representing specified nominal thickness according to ASTM
A568/A568M. Electrolytic zinc-coated steel sheet, complying with ASTM A591/A591M,
Class C coating, may be substituted at fabricator's option.
C. Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bars: ASTM A 666, Type 304. Remove tool and
die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.
2.3 ACCESS DOORS
A. Fumish access doors of proper size for access to concealed equipment. Unless otherwise
indicated, minimum size shall be 12-inch x 12-inch for hand access, minimum 18-inch x
18-inch for valve and actuator access, and 24-inch x 24-inch for equipment access.
B. Flush, Non-Rated Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Flanges:
Fabricated from the following material per location:
a. Painted Steel Sheet: Non-restroom areas
b. Stainless Steel: Wall and ceiling surfaces in Toilet Rooms, Custodial Rooms,
and other wet areas.
Door: Minimum 0.060-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick sheet metal, set flush with exposed
face flange of frame.
Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick sheet metal with 1-inch (25-mm
wide, surface-mounted trim.
Hinges: Continuous piano hinge.
Hardware: Screwdriver-operated cam latch.
1.
2.
4.
5.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. General: Provide access door assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for
installation.
B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide
materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed
pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.
C. Steel Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces.
Fumish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to types
of supports indicated.
1. Exposed Flanges: Nominal 1 inch (25 mm) wide around perimeter of frame.
2. Provide mounting holes in frames to attach frames to metal or wood framing in
plaster and drywall constmction and to attach masonry anchors in masonry
constmction.
D. Latching Mechanisms: Fumish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when
closed.
ACCESS DOORS
083113-2
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrory
Group 4 Architecture Research -I- Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
1. For keyed latches, fiimish two keys per latch and key all latches alike.
2.5 STEEL FINISHES
A. Surface Preparation: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum
requirements indicated below for SSPC surface-preparation specifications and
environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications:
1. hiteriors (SSPC Zone 1 A): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
B. Steel Finishes:
1. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications.
2. Factory Prime: Apply manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free,
universal primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment.
C. Stainless-Steel Finishes:
1. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into
finish.
2. Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross
scratches.
a. Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece.
b. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded
foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.
c. Directional Satin Finish: No. 4.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Advise installers of other work about specific requirements relating to access door
installation, including sizes of openings to receive access door and frame, as well as
locations of supports, inserts, and anchoring devices.
B. Fumish inserts and anchoring devices for access doors that must be built into other
constmction.
C. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's instmctions for installing access doors.
B. Set frames accurately in position and securely attach to supports with face panels plumb and
level in relation to adjacent finish.
C. Coordinate location of access doors in hung ceilings, furred spaces and walls to provide
access to concealed work items requiring maintenance and/or adjustment. Obtain approval
of the Architect for the locations of such access doors.
D. Locate and group equipment requiring access doors. Coordinate location of equipment with
other trades to minimize number of access doors in one area.
ACCESS DOORS
083113-3
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set-April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
E. Frames, doors and trim pieces shall not vary from straightness or snug contact fit by more
than 1/16-inch.
F. Provide access doors for maintenance or adjustment purposes for mechanical system
components, including but not limited to the following:
1. Valves.
2. Dampers.
3. Concealed equipment.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust and clean hardware and panels after installation for proper operation.
B. Remove and replace panels or frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean and prepare doors for painting in accordance with Section 099100.
B. Constmction Waste Management: Manage constmction waste in accordance with
provisions of Section 01524 Constmction Waste Management.
END OF SECTION 083113
ACCESS DOORS
083113-4
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
SECTION 083214 - EXTERIOR ALUMINUM-FRAMED SLIDESfG GLASS DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Fumish and install aluminum architectural Sliding Glass Doors complete with hardware and
other related components as shown on the project drawings and as specified within this or
other related specification sections.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of door required, including constmction details and fabrication
methods; profiles and dimensions of individual components; data on hardware, accessories,
and finishes. Include recommendations for maintaining and cleaning exterior surfaces.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include stmctural
analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for
their preparation.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of door indicated.
1. Hardware and accessories. Samples to verify color selected.
2. Color: To match window wall system.
3. Glass type.
D. Sustainabiiity Submittals:
1. Product Data for products having recycled content, documentation indicating
percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content.
a. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.
2. Product Data for each material, including its source, cost, and the fraction by weight
that is considered regional and that has been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as
well as manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site.
3. Product Data for adhesives and sealants used inside of the window framing system,
including printed statement of VOC content.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that aluminum-framed glass
doors comply with requirements.
B. Substitutions:
1. Other manufacturers requesting approval to bid products as an equal to the specified
product, must do so within 10 days prior to bid.
INTERIOR ALUMINUM-FRAMED SUDING GLASS DOORS
083214-1
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgino Cole Library
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
2. All requests for approval must include sufficient information to show that the
proposed product meets or exceeds the criteria contained within this and other related
sections.
3. Other manufacturers requesting approval shall have been regularly engaged in the
fabrication of Sliding Glass Doors, of the types, required for a period of not less than
ten (10) years.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Safety Glass: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201.
1.7 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of sliding aluminum-framed glass door
openings by field measurements before fabrication.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of sliding aluminum-framed glass doors that fail in materials,
fabrication, or installation within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware.
b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
exposure.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUSTAINABILITY MATERL\L REQUIREMENTS, GENERAL
A. Recycled Content: Provide products made from steel sheet with average recycled content
such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is
not less than 25 percent except for the following:
1. Rated Window Frames: 5% postconsumer and 9% postindustrial.
B. Local/Regional Materials: Give preference to manufacturer's whose facilities are within a
500 mile radius of the project site. Also give preference to materials that are harvested,
extracted, mined, quarried, etc. within a 500 mile radius of the project site.
C. VOC Content: Adhesives and sealants applied on-site on the interior of the building and
products used on the interior ofthe building shall comply with VOC limits as specified.
1. Use materials that have the minimum VOC content in units of g/L when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
INTERIOR ALUMINUM-FRAMED SUDING GLASS DOORS
083214-2
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research -I- Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set-April 10, 2015
2.2 SLIDING GLASS DOORS
A. Aluminum Sliding Glass Doors:
1. Basis-of-Design: NORWOOD Series 3050, as manufacttired by FLEETWOOD
Aluminum Products, hic, Corona, Cahfomia (951) 279-1070(951) 279-1070 or
accepted equivalent.
2.3 HARDWARE
A. Rollers: Adjustable, stainless steel, ball bearing, tandem carriage.
B. Roller Track: 24 gauge stainless steel, specially designed to seat securely in the sill;
recessed into concrete floor slab.
C. Locking Mechanisms: The operating sash lock is to be located within the lock stile and is to
consist of a heavy duty stainless steel hookbolt. When locked, the hookbolt is to engage a
steel reinforced lock slot in the lock jamb.
1. Provide one lock style and sash lock at each end of track for sliding glass door as
indicated on the Drawings.
D. Weather-stripping: Pile weather-stripping is to be a minimum of .170" tall with a center
polypropylene fin.
2.4 GLASS AND GLAZING
A. Glazing: See Section 088100.
B. Fumish only sliding glass doors that have a rabbet specifically designed to accommodate
3/16" single glaze products.
C. All glass and glazing materials are to be factory glazed with manufacturer's standard
glazing vinyl, in strict accordance with the manufacturers published glazing instmctions.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. General:
1. Sash Panel extmsions shall have a nominal minimum wall thickness of 0.094".
Master Frame extmsions shall have a nominal minimum wall thickness of 0.075"
2. Overall depth of frame varies by configuration.
3. Stile Design: Medium stile; 3-1/2-inch (88.9-mm) nominal width.
B. Frame and Sash: Frame and operating Sash components shall be accurately coped and
mechanically fastened. All joints shall be hairline.
2.6 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Extmsions: 6063-T5 as recommended by manufacturer for strength, corrosion
resistance, and application of required finish, but not less than 22,000-psi ultimate tensile
strength and not less than 0.062 inch thick at any location for main frame and sash
members.
INTERIOR ALUMINUM-FRAMED SUDING GLASS DOORS
083214-3
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set-April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
B. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, epoxy adhesive, or other materials
warranted to be noncorrosive and compatible with window members, trim, hardware,
anchors, and other components.
C. Where fasteners screw anchor into aluminum less than 0.125 inch thick, reinforce interior
with aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless steel to receive screw threads or provide standard,
noncorrosive, pressed-in, splined grommet nuts.
D. Except for application of hardware, do not use exposed fasteners. For application of
hardware, use fasteners that match finish of member or hardware being fastened, as
appropriate.
2.7 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the
range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum
Association for designating aluminum finishes.
C. Baked-Enamel Finish: AA-C12C42Rlx (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited
chemicals; Chemical Finish: acid-chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating;
Organic Coating: as specified below). Apply baked enamel complying with paint
manufacturer's written instmctions for cleaning, conversion coating, and painting.
1. Organic Coating: Thermosetting, modified-acrylic enamel primer/topcoat system
complying with AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils
(0.04 mm), medium gloss.
2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's fiiU range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Inspect openings before installation. Verify that rough opening size is correct, plumb and
level.
INTERIOR ALUMINUM-FRAMED SUDING GLASS DOORS
083214-4
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Use only skilled ttadesmen for the installation of the aluminum sliding glass doors and
components specified.
B. Bring all discrepancies between the project plans and field conditions to the attention of the
General Contractor prior to commencement of any work in the area in question.
C. Erect the aluminum sliding glass doors and components square and tme, in strict
accordance with the manufacturer's published installation instmctions. The installer is to
fumish adequate anchoring to maintain position and integrity of the sliding glass doors
when subjected to normal building movement and seismic requirements.
D. Fumish and apply sealants in accordance with the manufacturers published installation and
glazing instmctions and Section 079200, to provide a weather tight installation. Remove all
excess sealants to leave all exposed surfaces and joints clean and smooth.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust the aluminum sliding glass doors for proper operation, after installation and cleaning
has been completed.
B. Adjust hardware for proper operation. Doors shall open with maximum resistance of 8.5
pounds force.
C. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged
during the Constmction Period.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Upon completion of the entire scope of the work specified within this Section, the
aluminum sliding glass doors and components are to be cleaned of dirt and manufacturer's
identification marks.
B. Clean glass of factory-glazed doors immediately after installing sliding aluminum-framed
glass doors. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for final cleaning and
maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels from glass surfaces.
C. Constmction Waste Management: Manage constmction waste in accordance with
provisions of Section 01524 Constmction Waste Management.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect aluminum-framed glass doors from damage or deterioration until time of Substantial
Completion.
END OF SECTION 083214
INTERIOR ALUMINUM-FRAMED SUDING GLASS DOORS
083214-5
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Library
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Plonning, Inc.
Bid Set-April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
INTERIOR ALUMINUM-FRAMED SUDING GLASS DOORS
083214-6
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
SECTION 084113 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Storefront framing system for the following:
1. Storefront framing for window walls.
2. Storefront framing for ribbon walls.
3. Storefront framing for punched openings.
B. Exterior manual-swing entrance doors.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 079200 - Joint Sealants: Perimeter sealants around installed storefront system.
B. Section 081116 - Aluminum Door and Window Frames: Interior storefront system.
C. Section 087100 - Door Hardware: Installation of lock cylinders.
D. Section 088100 - Glass Glazing.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each aluminum entrance and storefront system required, including:
1. Manufacturer's standard details and fabrication methods.
2. Data on finishing, hardware and accessories.
3. Recommendations for maintenance and cleaning of exterior surfaces.
B. Shop Drawings: For each aluminum entrance and storefront system required, including
layout and installation details, relationship to adjacent work, elevations at 1/4-inch scale,
detail sections of typical composite members, anchors and reinforcement, hardware
mounting heights, and glazing details.
1. Include details of provisions for system expansion and contraction and for drainage
of moisture in the system to the exterior.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's
standard sizes.
D. Sustainabiiity Submittals:
1. Product Data for products having recycled content, documentation indicating
percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
084113-1
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrory
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 1 0, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
a. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.
2. Product Data for each material, including its source, cost, and the fraction by weight
that is considered regional and that has been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as
well as manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site.
3. Product Data for installation adhesives, including printed statement of VOC content
and chemical composition of each product used.
E. Fabrication Sample: Of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of aluminum-framed
systems, made from 12-inch (300-mm) lengths of full-size components and showing details
of the following:
1. Joinery, including concealed welds.
2. Anchorage.
3. Expansion provisions.
4. Glazing.
5. Flashing and drainage.
F. Delegated-Design Submittal: For aluminum-framed systems indicated to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by
the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1. Detail fabrication and assembly of aluminum-framed systems.
2. Include design calculations.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTAL
A. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier,
detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and
diagrams. Coordinate final entrance door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and
related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of entrance door
hardware.
B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a
qualified testing agency, for aluminum-framed systems, indicating compliance with
performance requirements.
C. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For aluminum-framed systems, accessories, and
components, from manufacturer.
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual
test of assembled components or on calculation.
D. Source quality-control reports.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed systems to include in maintenance manuals.
B. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
084113-2
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Provide aluminum entrances and storefront systems
produced by a firm experienced in manufacturing systems that are similar to those indicated
for this project and that have a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to assume engineering
responsibility and perform work of this Section who has specialized in installing entrance
and storefront systems similar to those required for this Project and who is acceptable to
manufacturer.
C. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to
practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing
engineering services of kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those
performed for installations of aluminum entrances and storefront systems that are similar to
those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.
D. Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for entrance and storefront systems, including
Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units
in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.
E. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain aluminum entrance and storefront systems from one
source and from a single manufacturer.
F. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements
for systems' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are
indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and
assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining constmction.
Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more
methods including preconstmction testing, field testing, and in-service performance.
1. Do not revise intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, without
Architect's approval. If revisions are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory
data comparing proposed substitution to named system, with substitution request to
Architect for review.
G. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings.
2. Field testing shall be performed on mockups according to requirements in "Field
Quality Control" Article.
3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such
deviations in writing.
4. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time
of Substantial Completion.
H. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
084113-3
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLESfG
A. Deliver aluminum entrance and storefront components in the manufacturer's original
protective packaging.
B. Store aluminum components in a clean dry location away from uncured masonry or
concrete. Cover components with waterproof paper, tarpaulin or polyethylene sheeting in a
manner to permit circulation of air.
C. Stack framing components in a manner that will prevent bending and avoid significant or
permanent damage.
1.9 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify storefront openings by field measurements before fabrication
and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without
delaying the Work, establish opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating
storefront components without field measurements. Coordinate wall constmction to
ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of aluminum-framed systems that do not comply with requirements or
that fail in materials, fabrication, or installation within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following;
a. Stmctural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.
b. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements.
c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering.
d. Adhesive or cohesive sealant failures.
e. Water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas.
f. Failure of operating components.
2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to
repair or replace components on which finishes do not comply with requirements or that
fail in materials, fabrication, or installation within specified warranty period. Warranty
does not include normal weathering.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
084113-4
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
2.1 SUSTAINABILITY MATERL\L REQUIREMENTS, GENERAL
A. Recycled Content; Provide products made from the following metals with average recycled
content such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled
content is not less than that indicated below;
1. Steel; Average recycled content of steel to be a minimum 60 percent.
2. Aluminum: Average recycled content of aluminum to be a minimum of 70 percent.
B. Local/Regional Materials: Give preference to manufacturer's whose facilities are within a
500 mile radius of the project site. Also give preference to materials that are harvested,
extracted, mined, quarried, etc. within a 500 mile radius of the project site.
C. VOC Content: Adhesives and sealants applied on-site on the interior of the building and
products used on the interior of the building shall comply with VOC limits.
1. Use materials that have the minimum VOC content in units of g/L when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
2.3
Basis-of-Design Product: The design for the storefront system is based on the
manufacturer identified below. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the
named product or a comparable product by one of the following;
1. Basis-of-Design: Kawneer Company, Inc.; Trifab 45IT.
2. Intemational Aluminum Corporation; U.S. Aluminum.
3. Accepted equivalent.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
General: Provide glazed storefront systems, including anchorage, capable of withstanding,
without failure, the effects of the following;
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Stmctural loads.
Thermal movements.
Movements of supporting stmcture indicated on Drawings including, but not limited
to, story drift, twist, column shortening, long-term creep, and deflection from
uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.
Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent constmction.
Failure includes the following:
a. Deflection exceeding specified limits.
b. Thermal stresses transferred to building stmcture.
c. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and
stmctural movements, to glazing.
d. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and stmctural movements.
e. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components,
f Sealant failure.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
084113-5
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Library
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
B. Performance Requirements: At a minimum provide the following:
1. Strength: Design system to withstand loads as required by Califomia Building Code
but not less than following minimum loading.
a. Wind; Uniform inward and outward wind pressures based on 70 mph wind
speed. Exposure 'C; pressures as calculated per current code requirements.
b. Seismic; Conform with applicable codes. Size, fabricate, assemble and erect
work to accommodate interstory drift (horizontal displacement) during a major
seismic event. Interstory drift values for this building are calculated as
follows:
1) Maximum Ds (delta S) displacement values vary, but do not exceed %"
on any floor.
2) Dm (delta M) values are as calculated per current code requirements.
c. Building Deflections: Size primary members to accommodate building
deflections. Fabricate, assemble and erect work to accommodate following
limitations:
1) Post-tensioned concrete slabs: Allow for vertical deflection. Calculated
vertical deflection is 3/8-inches up or down beginning immediately
following slab constmction.
2) Metal Framed Openings; Allow for live load deflection. Calculated
vertical floor displacement under live loading is L/700 at joists and non-
bearing locations.
2. Window System Deflections and Thermal Movements; Size primary members for
temperature variations as follows; fabricate, assemble and erect work to maintain
limitations.
a. Design for normal-to-wall deflection of L/l75 of span; except L/250 of span
for glass supporting members.
b. Parallel-to-wall deflection of less than 75% of glass edge clearances.
c. Thermal expansion and contraction movements resulting from not less than
ambient temperature range of 100 degrees F, which may cause a material
temperature range of 160 degrees F.
3. Water and Air Leakage: Installed system shall be free of leakage of both water and
air.
a. Water leakage is defined as uncontrolled penetration of water (not including
condensation) to interior of building.
b. Air leakage is defined as infiltration of air at any area of window wall, at a
rate in excess of 0.06 cfm/sf of area, based on measurement of single complete
module of system.
4. Condensation; Provide minimum tested Condensation Resistance Factor (CRP) of
45.
5. Energy Performance: Provide minimum U-Factor value of 0.57 for glazed window
wall system, including frame, glazing and operable windows and doors.
2.4 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish
indicated.
1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B209.
2. Extmded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes; ASTM B221.
3. Extmded Stmcttiral Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B429/B429M.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
084113-6
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research -I- Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
4. Stmcttiral Profiles: ASTM B308/B308M.
5. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes; AWS A5.10/A5.lOM.
B. Steel Reinforcement; Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer,
complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation
and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in
SSPC-SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard.
1. Stmcttiral Shapes, Plates and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M.
2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A1008/A1008M.
3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM AlOl 1/AlOl IM.
2.5 FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extmded-aluminum framing members of
thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.
1. Constmction: Thermally broken.
2. Glazing System; Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides.
3. Glazing Plane; As indicated.
4. Framing; Shear-block system.
B. Brackets and Reinforcements; Provide high-strength aluminum brackets and
reinforcements; where use of aluminum is not feasible provide nonmagnetic stainless steel
or hot-dip galvanized steel complying with ASTM AI23/A123M.
1. Where fasteners screw-anchor into aluminum members less than 0.125 inches thick,
reinforce the interior with aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless steel to receive screw
threads, or provide standard non-corrosive pressed-in splined grommet nuts.
C. Fasteners: Provide corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners of aluminum,
nonmagnetic stainless steel, zinc plated steel, or other material warranted by the
manufacturer to be non-corrosive and compatible with aluminum components, hardware,
anchors and other components and adjacent materials.
1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or tuming out from
thermal and stmctural movements, wind loads, or vibration.
2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.
3. Where exposed fasteners are unavoidable, use countersunk Phillips screw
heads, finished to match framing system.
4. Exposed fasteners must have bonded neoprene washers or be sealed.
D. Concealed Flashing; 0.0179-inch (26 gage) minimum dead-soft stainless steel, or 0.026-
inch-thick minimum extmded aluminum of alloy and type selected by manufacturer for
compatibility with other components and adjacent materials.
E. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard, recommended by
manufacturer for joint type.
1. Provide sealants for use inside of the weatherproofing system that have a VOC
content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24).
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
084113-7
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrory
Group 4 Architecture Reseorch + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
2.6 GLAZING SYSTEMS
A. Glazing: As specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing."
B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, molded or
extmded, of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal. Provide gasket
assemblies that have comers sealed with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
C. Spacers and Setting Blocks; Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type in hardness
recommended by system and gasket manufacturer to comply with system performance
requirements.
1. Color; Black.
D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Manufacturer's standard TFE-fluorocarbon or polyethylene material
to which sealants will not develop adhesion.
E. Glazing Sealants; For stmctural-sealant-glazed systems, as recommended by manufacturer
for joint type, and as follows:
1. Stmctural Sealant: ASTM C1184, single-component neutral-curing silicone
formulation that is compatible with system components with which it comes in
contact, specifically formulated and tested for use as stmctural sealant and approved
by a stmctural-sealant manufacturer for use in aluminum-framed systems indicated.
a. Provide sealants for use inside of the weatherproofing system that have a VOC
content of IOO g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D
(EPA Method 24).
b. Glass to Mullion Sealant Color; Black.
c. Butt-joint Glass Sealant Color; Clear.
2. Weatherseal Sealant: ASTM C920 for Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, G, A,
and O; single-component neutral-curing formulation that is compatible with
stmctural sealant and other system components with which it comes in contact;
recommended by stmctural-sealant, weatherseal-sealant, and aluminum-framed-
system manufacturers for this use.
a. Provide sealants for use inside of the weatherproofing system that have a VOC
content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D
(EPA Method 24).
b. Color: Matching stmctural sealant.
F. Secondary Sealants and Joint Fillers; For use as weatherseal at perimeter of entrance and
storefront systems, compatible with stmctural sealant and other system components with
which it comes in contact, as listed in Section 079200.
1. Color; As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
2.7 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS
A. Stile-and-Rail Type Entrance Doors; Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for
manual-swing operation.
1. Door Constmction; 1-3/4-inch (44.5-mm) overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-
inch- (3.2-mm-) thick, extmded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
084113-8
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrory
Group 4 Architecture Research + Plonning, Inc. City of Corlsbad Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
Mechanically fasten comers with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and
fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods or j-bolts.
2. Design; As follows:
a. Stile Design; Medium stile; 3-1/2-inch (88.9-mm) nominal width.
3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets; Square, snap-on, extmded-aluminum stops and
preformed gaskets.
4. Bottom Rails: 10-inches.
5. Equip each door leaf with an adjusting mechanism located in the top rail near the
lock stile, which provides for minor clearance adjustments after installation.
2.8 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE
A. General: Provide entrance door hardware for each entrance door to comply with
requirements in this Section.
1. For installation of hardware components indicated to be provided by other than the
aluminum entrance manufacturer refer to Section 087100
2. Entrance Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated,
and products complying with BHMA standard referenced.
3. Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of
operation, and interface with other building control systems indicated.
4. Opening-Force Requirements:
a. Egress Doors: Not more than 5 Ibf (22.2 N) to fully open door.
B. Provide heavy-duty hardware units as indicated, scheduled, or required for operation of
each door, including the following items of sizes, number, and type recommended by
manufacturer for service required; finish to match door.
C. Designations; Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive
qualities of each type of entrance door hardware are indicated in "Entrance Door Hardware
Sets" Article. Products are identified by using entrance door hardware designations as
follows:
D. Pivot Hinges: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1.
1. Offset-Pivot Hinges: Provide top, bottom, and intermediate offset pivots at each
door leaf
a. Doors Over 7'-6": Provide one intermediate pivot.
b. Doors 9'-0" and Over; Provide 2 intermediate pivots.
E. Mortise Auxiliary Locks: BHMA A 156.5, Grade 1.
F. Automatic and Self-Latching Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1.
G. Cylinders: As specified in Section 087100. BHMA A156.5, Grade 1.
1. Keying; Master key system. Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key
control number and include notation "DO NOT DUPLICATE".
H. Strikes: Provide strike with black-plastic dust box for each latch or lock bolt; fabricated for
aluminum framing.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
084113-9
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
I Dustproof Strikes: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1; as recommended by door manufacturer.
J. Operating Trim: BHMAAI56.6.
K. Closers; BHMA Al56.4, Grade 1, with accessories required for a complete installation,
sized as required by door size, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use;
adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force.
L. Concealed Overhead Holders: BHMA A156.8, Grade 1.
M. Surface-Mounted Holders: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1.
N. Door Stops; BHMA Al 56.16, Grade 1, floor or wall mounted, as appropriate for door
location indicated, with integral mbber bumper.
O. Weatherstripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components.
1. Compression Type: Made of ASTM E2203, molded neoprene, or ASTMD2287,
molded PVC.
2. Sliding Type; AAMA 701, made of wool, polypropylene, or nylon woven pile with
nylon-fabric or aluminum-strip backing.
P. Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer's standard exterior-door bottom sweep with concealed
fasteners on mounting strip.
Q. Silencers; BHMA A156.16, Grade 1.
R. Thresholds: BHMA Al 56.21, raised thresholds beveled with a slope of not more than 1:2,
with maximum height of 1/2 inch (13 mm).
1. Provide one piece per door opening, ribbed, non-slip surface, of type to
accommodate pivots; conforming to latest State of Califomia accessibility
regulations.
S. Pulls: Back-to-back mounted where no panic device is scheduled to be installed. Single
pull on exterior side of door where panic device is indicated on schedule.
T. Door Stop: Floor- or wall-mounted door stop, as appropriate, with integral mbber bumper;
comply with ANSI A156.16, Grade 1.
2.9 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate aluminum entrance and storefront components to designs, sizes and thicknesses
indicated and to comply with indicated standards.
1. Forming; Form shapes with sharp profiles, straight and free of defects or
deformations, before finishing.
2. Provide sub-frames and reinforcing of types indicated or, if not indicated, as required
for a complete system.
3. Sizes and profile requirements are indicated on the Drawings. Variable dimensions
are indicated, with maximum and minimum dimensions required, to achieve design
requirements and coordination with other work.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
084113-10
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Reseorch + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
B. Welding; Comply with AWS recommendations.
1. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or
discoloration of finished surfaces.
2. Grind exposed welds smooth to remove weld spatter and welding oxides from
exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding. Restore mechanical finish.
C. Prefabrication; Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other
work to the greatest extent possible before shipment to the Project site. Disassemble
components only as necessary for shipment and installation.
D. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the
following characteristics:
1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.
2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.
3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members, and
moisture migrating within the system to exterior.
4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.
5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to
maintain required glazing edge clearances.
6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior.
7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest
extent possible.
8. Continuity: Maintain accurate relation of planes and angles with hairline fit of
contacting members.
E. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members; Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting
stops.
F. Stmctural-Sealant-Glazed Framing Members; Include accommodations for using
temporary support device to retain glazing in place while stmctural sealant cures.
G. Storefront Framing: Fabricate components for assembly using shear-block system. Stick
framing is not permitted.
H. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation
and for installing entrance door hardware.
1. Install reinforcing as required for hardware and as necessary for performance
requirements, sag resistance and rigidity.
2. Perform fabrication operations, including cutting, fitting, forming, drilling and
grinding of metal work to prevent damage to exposed finish surfaces. Complete
these operations for hardware prior to application of finishes.
3. At exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops.
4. Provide for wiring within framing system to accommodate power-operated hardware.
Include cutouts, raceways, conduits, and other such provisions to permit a complete
operating hardware system.
I. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware.
1. At pairs of exterior doors, provide sliding-type weather stripping retained in
adjustable strip and mortised into door edge.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
084113-11
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research -l- Planning, Inc.
Bid Set-April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
2. For exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping against fixed stops.
3. At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms.
4. Pre-glaze door units to greatest extent possible.
J. Entrance Door Hardware Installation; Factory install entrance door hardware to the
greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware
before applying finishes.
I. Do not drill and tap for surface-mounted hardware items until time of installation at
Project Site.
K. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according
to Shop Drawings.
L. Dissimilar Metals: Separate dissimilar metals with bituminous paint, or a suitable sealant,
or a non-absorptive plastic or elastomeric tape, or a gasket between the surfaces. Do not
use coatings containing lead.
2.10 FINISHES
A. General: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations relative to application and designations of finishes.
B. High-Performance Organic Finish: 3-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with
AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color
coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to
comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instmctions.
1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.11 ACCESSORIES
A. Joint Sealants; For installation at perimeter of aluminum-framed systems, as specified in
Section 079200.
1. Provide sealants for use inside of the weatherproofing system that have a VOC
content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24).
B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12
requirements, except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil (0.762-mm) thickness
per coat.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and supports, with the Installer present, for compliance with
requirements indicated, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance
ofthe Work.
B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
084113-12
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research -I- Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General:
B.
C.
D.
1. Comply with manufacturer's written instmctions.
2. Do not install damaged components.
3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.
5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and
electrolytic deterioration.
6. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.
Set units plumb, level, and tme to line, without warp or rack of framing members, doors, or
panels.
1. Install components in proper alignment and relation to established lines and grades
indicated. Provide proper support and anchor securely in place.
Metal Protection;
1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by
painting contact surfaces with primer or applying sealant or tape, or by installing
nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.
2. Where aluminum will contact mortar, concrete, or masonry, protect against corrosion
by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
3. Paint dissimilar metals where drainage from them passes over aluminum.
Install components to drain water passing joints and condensation and moisture occurring
or migrating within the system to the exterior.
Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Division 07
Section "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation.
Install glazing as specified in Section 088100.
1. Stmctural-Sealant Glazing;
a. Prepare surfaces that will contact stmctural sealant according to sealant
manufacturer's written instmctions to ensure compatibility and adhesion.
Preparation includes, but is not limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces.
b. Install weatherseal sealant according to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants"
and according to sealant manufacturer's written instmctions to produce
weatherproof joints. Install joint filler behind sealant as recommended by
sealant manufacturer.
G. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points.
1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather
stripping.
2. Install entrances plumb and tme in alignment with established lines and grades
without warp or rack.
3. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door
hardware according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instmctions
using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
084113-13
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
a. Lubricate operating hardware and other moving parts according to hardware
manufacturers' written instmctions.
4. Install surface-mounted hardware according to manufacturer's written instmctions
using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.
H. Install perimeter joint sealants as specified in Section 079200 to produce weathertight
installation.
I. Erection Tolerances: Install aluminum entrance and storefront to comply with the
following maximum tolerances:
1. Location and Plane: Limit variation from tme location and plane to 1/8 inch in 12
feet (3 mm in 3.7 m); 1/4 inch (6 mm) over total length.
2. Alignment:
a. Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from tme alignment to 1/16 inch (1.5
mm).
b. Where surfaces meet at comers, limit offset from tme alignment to 1/32 inch
(0.8 mm).
3. Diagonal Measurements; Limit difference between diagonal measurements to 1/8
inch (3 mm).
J. Refer to Section 088100 for installation of glass and other panels indicated to be glazed
into framing and doors that are not pre-glazed by manufacturer.
1. Prepare surfaces that will contact stmctural sealant according to sealant
manufacturer's written instmctions to ensure compatibility and adhesion.
Preparation includes, but is not limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces.
2. Install stmctural silicone sealant according to sealant manufacturer's written
instmctions.
3. Mechanically fasten glazing in place until stmctural sealant is cured.
4. Remove excess sealant from component surfaces before sealant has cured.
K. Install secondary-sealant weatherseal according to sealant manufacturer's written
instmctions to provide weatherproof joints. Install joint fillers behind sealant as
recommended by sealant manufacturer.
L. Install perimeter sealant to comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint
Sealants," unless otherwise indicated.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency; Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency
to perform field tests and inspections.
B. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of representative areas to determine compliance
of installed systems with specified requirements shall take place as follows and in
successive phases as indicated on Drawings. Do not proceed with installation of the next
area until test results for previously completed areas show compliance with requirements.
1. Stmctural-Sealant Compatibility and Adhesion: Stmctural sealant shall be tested
according to recommendations in ASTM C1401.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
084113-14
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research -I- Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
a. Destmctive Test Method A, "Hand Pull Tab (Destmctive)," in ASTM C1401,
Appendix X2, shall be used.
1) A minimum of six areas on each building face shall be tested.
2) Repair installation areas damaged by testing.
2. Stmctural-Sealant Glazing Inspection: After installation of aluminum-framed
systems is complete, stmctural-sealant glazing shall be inspected and evaluated
according to recoinmendations in ASTM C1401.
3. Water Penetration; Areas shall be tested according to ASTM El 105 at a minimum
uniform and cyclic static-air-pressure difference of 0.67 times the static-air-pressure
difference specified for laboratory testing under "Performance Requirements"
Article, but not less than 4.18 Ibf/sq. ft. (200 Pa), and shall not evidence water
penetration.
4. Water Spray Test; Before installation of interior finishes has begun, a minimum area
of 75 feet (23 m) by 1 story of aluminum-framed systems designated by Architect
shall be tested according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not evidence water penetration.
C. Repair or remove work if test results and inspections indicate that it does not comply with
specified requirements.
D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
E. Aluminum-framed assemblies will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and
inspections.
F. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operating hardware to function properly, for smooth operation without binding, and
for weathertight closure.
1. For entrance doors accessible to people with disabilities, adjust closers to provide a
3-second closer sweep period for doors to move from a 70-degree open position to 3
inches (75 mm) from the latch, measured to the leading door edge.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean the completed system, inside and out, promptly after installation, exercising care to
avoid damage to coatings. Remove excess sealant and glazing compounds, and dirt from
surfaces.
B. Clean glass surfaces after installation, complying with requirements contained in Section
088100 for cleaning and maintenance. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt
and other substances from aluminum surfaces.
C. Constmction Waste Management; Manage constmction waste in accordance with
provisions of Section 01524 Constmction Waste Management.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
084113-15
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
3.6
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgino Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
DEMONSTRATION
A. Water Penetration Test: After completion of the installation and nominal curing of
sealants, test entrances and storefronts for water leaks in accordance with ASTM El 105 at
a minimum uniform static-air-pressure difference of 0.67 times the static-air-pressure
difference specified for laboratory testing under "Performance Requirements" Article, but
not less than 4.18 Ibf/sq. ft. (200 Pa), and shall not evidence water penetration.
B. Water Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, a minimum area of 75
feet (23 m) by 1 story of aluminum-framed systems designated by Architect shall be tested
according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not evidence water penetration.
Conduct tests in presence of Architect and Owner,
result of this test.
Correct deficiencies observed as a
D. Aluminum-framed assemblies will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and
inspections.
E. Repair or remove work if test results and inspections indicate that it does not comply with
specified requirements.
F. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
G. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Institute protective measures required throughout the remainder of the constmction period
to ensure that aluminum entrances and storefronts will be without damage or deterioration
at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 084113
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
084113-16
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
SECTION 086223 - TUBULAR SKYLIGHTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Factory-assembled solatube skylights consisting of skylight dome, reflective tube, and
diffuser assembly.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 061053 - Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry; Wood framing and blocking at tubular
skylights.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For skylights. Include constmction details, material descriptions,
dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings; For skylights. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments
to other Work.
C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required, in a representative section of each unit
in manufacturer's standard size.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Test Reports: Independent testing agency or evaluation service reports verifying
compliance with specified performance requirements.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Test Response Characteristics of Plastic Glazing; Provide plastic glazing sheets
identical to those tested for fire-exposure behavior per test method indicated below by a
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify
materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
TUBULAR SKYLIGHTS
086223-1
City of Corlsbod Controct 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Reseorch + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for the tubular skylights is based on the manufacturer
identified below. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a
comparable product by one of the following;
1. Basis-of-Design: Solatube Intemational, Inc.; www.solaltube.com.
2. Velux.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Test Performance Criteria: Provide tubular skylights capable of complying with
performance requirements indicated, based on testing manufacturer's tubular skylights that
are representative of those specified.
1. Air Infiltration Test: ASTM E283; maximum 0.10 cfm per foot of crack length at
6.24 psf pressure differential.
2. Water Resistance Test: ASTM E331; no uncontrolled water leakage at 6.00 psf
pressure differential with water rate of 5 gal/hr/sf
3. Uniform Load Test; ASTM E330/E330M; no breakage, permanent damage to
fasteners, hardware parts, or damage to make tubular skylight iinoperable, or cause
permanent deflection of any section in excess of 1 percent of its span at either a
maximum Positive or Negative Load of 100 psf (4.7881 kPa) for 10-inch (254 mm)
and 14-inch (356 mm) units, and 35 psf (1.6758 kPa) for 21-inch units.
a. Test units with a safety factor of 3 for positive pressure and 2 for negative
pressure, acting normal to plane of roof.
B. Fire Testing:
1. Self-Ignition Temperature: 650 deg F (343 deg C) or greater for plastic sheets in
thickness indicated when tested per ASTM D1929.
2. Smoke Production Characteristics: Comply with either requirement below;
a. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less when tested per ASTM E84 on plastic
sheets in manner indicated for use.
b. Smoke Density; 75 or less when tested per ASTM D2843 on plastic sheets in
thickness indicated for use.
3. Relative-Buming Characteristics; Tested per ASTM D635.
4. Acrylic Glazing: Class CC2, burning rate of 2.5 inches (64 mm) per minute or less
for nominal thickness of 0.060 inch (1.5 mm) or thickness indicated for use.
5. Polycarbonate Glazing: Class CCl, buming extent of 1 inch (25 mm) or less for
nominal thickness of 0.060 inch (1.5 mm) or thickness indicated for use.
6. Class 'B' Buming Brand: Self-extinguishing without transferring the fire to the dome
in accordance with CBC Standard 15-2 Class 'B' Buming Brand Test. See ASTM
E108andUL790.
2.3 TUBULAR SKYLIGHTS
General: Transparent roof-mounted skylight dome and self-flashing curb, reflective tube,
and ceiling level diffuser assembly, transferring sunlight to interior spaces; complying with
ICC-ES ESR-2253.
1. Provide all components fabricated by one manufacturer.
TUBULAR SKYLIGHTS
086223-2
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrory
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
B. Skylight: Solatube Brighten Up Series 10-Inch Tubes: Transparent, UV and impact
resistant dome with flashing base supporting dome and top of tube.
C. Roof Dome Assembly:
1. Glazing: 0.120-inch (3.05 mm) minimum thickness injection-molded actylic
classified as CC2 material and meeting characteristics of Duradome DR-101 blend.
a. Visible Light Transmittance (VLT): 92 percent, minimum.
2. Glazing: 0.080-inch (2.03 mm) minimum thickness polycarbonate glazing classified
as CC 1 material.
D. Flashing Base: One piece, seamless, leak-proof flashing functioning as base support for
dome and top of tube.
1. Base Material: ASTM A653/A653M or ASTM A463/A463M, 0.028-inch thick steel
sheet, corrosion resistant, 6-inches high.
2. Base Pitch (Slope); Pitch to match existing roof slope conditions.
E. Dome Ring; Attached to top of base section; 0.090-inch nominal thickness injection-
molded high-impact ABS; to prevent thermal bridging between base flashing and tubing,
and channel condensed moisture out of tubing; weather sealed.
F. Reflective Extension Tube; Aluminum sheet, 0.015-inch thick.
1. Interior Finish; 'Spectralight Infinity' high reflectance specular finish on exposed
reflective surface; specular reflectance 99 percent for visible spectmm, less than 93
percent for total solar spectmm at field angle of 1.5 deg.
2. Color: a* and b* (defined by CIE L *a*b color model); ASTM E308; shah not
exceed plus 2 or be less than minus 2.
3. Tube Diameter: As indicated on Drawings.
G. Ceiling Ring: Injection-molded high-impact ABS; nominal thickness of 0.085-inch.
H. Dress Ring: Injection-molded high-impact ABS; nominal thickness of 0.100-inch; design
to prevent air inflitration and condensation from attic spaces.
I. Dual-Glazed Diffuser Assembly;
1. Outer Glazing: Acrylic plastic, CC2 material; no less than 0.030-inch thick.
2. Inner Glazing: Molded polycarbonate plastic, CCl material; no less than 0.024-inch
thick. Provide 'OptiView' Fresnel lens designed to maximize light output and
diffusion.
3. Lower Glazing (Prismatic or Frosted): Acrylic plastic, CC2 material; no less than
0.030-inch thick.
J. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard.
2.4 ALUMINUM COMPONENTS:
A. Sheets; ASTM B209, alloy and temper to suit forming operations and finish requirements
but with not less than the strength and durability of alclad alloy 3005-H25.
B. Extmded Shapes: ASTM B221, alloy and temper to suh stmctural and finish requirements
but with not less than the strength and durability of alloy 6063-T52.
TUBULAR SKYLIGHTS
086223-3
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Library
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 1 0, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
C. Anodic Coating: Class I, clear anodic coating complying with AAMA 611.
D. Fasteners; Same metal as metal being fastened, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or other
noncorrosive metal as recommended by manufacturer. Finish exposed fasteners to match
material being fastened.
1. Where removal of exterior exposed fasteners might allow access to building, provide
nonremovable fastener heads.
E. Condensation Conttol: Fabricate tubular skylights with integral intemal gutters and
nonclogging weeps to collect and drain condensation to the exterior.
F. Thermal Break: Fabricate tubular skylights with thermal barrier separating interior metal
framing from materials exposed to outside temperature.
2.5 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Bituminous Coating; SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type, bituminous mastic, nominally free of
sulfur and containing no asbestos fibers, formulated for 15-mil (0.4-mm) dry film thickness
per coating.
B. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, nondrying, nonmigrating
sealant.
C. Elastomeric Sealant; ASTM C920; Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; and Uses NT, G, A, and
(as applicable to joint substrates indicated) O; recommended by unit skylight manufacturer
and compatible with joint surfaces.
1. Type; Polyurethane or copolymer-based elastomeric sealant as provided or
recommended by manufacturer.
D. Roofing Cement: ASTM D4586/D4586M, asbestos free, designed for trowel application or
other adhesive compatible with roofing system.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine openings, substtates, stmctural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer
present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with tubular skylight installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation using methods recommended by
manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrates involved under the project
conditions.
TUBULAR SKYUGHTS
086223-4
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install tubular skylights in accordance with manufacturer's written instmctions.
B. Coordinate tubular skylight installation with installation of substrates, roof insulation,
roofing, and flashing as required to ensure that each element of the Work performs properly
and that combined elements are waterproof and weathertight.
C. Unless otherwise indicated, install tubular skylights according to constmction details of
NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual."
D. Where metal surfaces of units will contact incompatible metal or corrosive substrates,
including wood, apply bituminous coating on concealed metal surfaces, or provide other
permanent separation recommended in writing by unit skylight manufacturer.
E. Anchor tubular skylights securely to supporting substrates.
F. Set tubular skylight flanges in thick bed of roofing cement to form a seal, unless otherwise
indicated.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. After completion of installation and nominal curing of sealant and glazing compounds but
before installation of interior finishes, test for water leaks according to AAMA 501.2.
B. After installation of first unh, field test to determine adequacy of installation. Conduct
water test in presence of Owner, Architect, or their designated representative. Correct
installation if needed before proceeding with installation of subsequent units.
C. Work will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D. Additional testing and inspections, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Remove and replace glazing that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged
during constmction period.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instmctions. Touch up
damaged metal coatings and finishes.
B. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances.
C. Constmction Waste Management: Manage constmction waste in accordance with
provisions of Section 01524 Constmction Waste Management.
TUBULAR SKYUGHTS
086223-5
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect tubular skylight surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from
constmction operations.
END OF SECTION 086223
TUBULAR SKYLIGHTS
086223-6
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgino Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbod Project No. 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set-April 10, 2015
SECTION 08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
of Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes items l<nown commercially as finish or door hardware that are required for
swing, sliding, and folding doors, except special types of unique hardware specified in the same
sections as the doors and door frames on which they are installed.
B. This Section includes the following, but is not necessarily limited to:
1. Door Hardware, including electric hardware.
2. Storefront and Entrance door hardware.
3. Gate Hardware.
4. Hold-open closers with smoke detectors.
5. Wall or floor-mounted electromagnetic hold-open devices.
6. Power supplies for electric hardware.
7. Low-energy door operators plus sensors and actuators.
8. Thresholds, gasketing and weather-stripping.
9. Door silencers or mutes.
C. Related Sections: The following sections are noted as containing requirements that relate to
this Section, but may not be limited to this listing.
1. Division 8: Section - Steel Doors and Frames.
2. Division 8: Section - Wood Doors.
3. Division 8: Section - Aluminum Storefront
4. Division 28: Section - Fire/Life-Safety Systems & Security Access Systems.
1.3 REFERENCES (USE DATE OF STANDARD IN EFFECT AS OF BID DATE.)
A. 2013 California Building Code, CCR, Title 24.
B. BHMA - Builders' Hardware Manufacturers Association
C. CCR - California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 2, California State Accessibility Standards.
D. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute
E. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association.
1. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives
2. NFPA 105 - Smoke and Draft Control Door Assemblies
F. UL - Underwriters Laboratories.
1. UL 10C - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies
DOOR HARDWARE
087100-1
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
2. UL 305 - Panic Hardware
G. WHl - Warnock Hersey Incorporated
H. SDI - Steel Door Institute
1.4 SUBMITTALS & SUBSTITUTIONS
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research -I- Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
A. General: Submit in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification
sections.
B. Submit product data (catalog cuts) including manufacturers' technical product information for
each item of door hardware, installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish,
and other information necessary to show compliance with requirements.
C. Submit six (6) copies of schedule organized vertically into "Hardware Sets" with index of doors
and headings, indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or
opening. Include following information:
1. Include a Cover Sheet with;
a. Job Name, location, telephone number.
b. Architects name, location and telephone number.
c. Contractors name, location, telephone number and job number.
d. Suppliers name, location, telephone number and job number.
e. Hardware consultant's name, location and telephone number.
2. Job Index information included;
f. Numerical door number index including; door number, hardware heading number
and page number.
g. Complete keying information (referred to DHI hand-book "Keying Systems and
Nomenclature"). Provision should be made in the schedule to provide keying
information when available; if it is not available at the time the preliminary
schedule is submitted.
h. Manufacturers' names and abbreviations for all materials.
i. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes used in the schedule,
j. Mounting locations for hardware.
k. Clarification statements or questions.
I. Catalog cuts and manufacturer's technical data and instructions.
3. Vertical schedule format sample:
Heading Number 1 (Hardware group or set number - HW -1)
(a) 1 Single Door#1 - Exterior from Corridor 101 (b) 90° (c) RH
(d) 3' 0"x7' 0" x 1-3/4" x (e) 20 Minute (f) WD x HM
(g) 1 (h) (i) ea
2 6AA 1 ea
0) Hinges - (k) 5BB1HW 4.5 x 4.5 NRP (1) TMS
Lockset - ND50PD x RHO x RH x 10-025 x JTMS
(m) 626 (n) IVE
626 SCH
(a) - Single or pair with opening number and location, (b) - Degree of opening (c) - Hand
of door(s) (d) - Door and frame dimensions and door thickness, (e) - Label requirements
DOOR HARDWARE
087100-2
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbod Project No. 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
if any. (f) - Door by frame material, (g) - (Optional) Hardware item line #. (h) - Keyset
Symbol, (i) - Quantity, (j) - Product description, (k) - Product Number. (I) - Fastenings
and other pertinent information, (m) - Hardware finish codes per ANSI A156.18. (n) -
Manufacture abbreviation.
D. Make substitution requests in accordance with Division 1. Substitution requests must be made
prior to bid date. Include product data and indicate benefit to the project. Furnish samples of
any proposed substitution.
E. Wiring Diagrams: Provide product data and wiring and riser diagrams for all electrical products
listed in the Hardware Schedule portion of this section.
F. Keying Schedule: Submit separate detailed schedule indicating clearly how the Owner's final
instructions on keying of locks has been fulfilled.
G. Templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for the installation
of door hardware. Check shop drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are
made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.
H. Furnish as-built/as-installed schedule with close-out documents, including keying schedule and
transcript, wiring/riser diagrams, manufacturers' installation and adjustment and maintenance
information.
I. Fire Door Assembly Testing: Submit a written record of each fire door assembly to the Owner
to be made available to the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) for future building inspections.
J. LEED Certification Points: Submit information and certifications necessary to achieve
maximum points for LEED certification; coordinate and cooperate with Owner and Architect in
providing information necessary for required LEED rating.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Obtain each type of hardware (latch and lock sets, hinges, closers, exit devices, etc.) from a
single manufacturer.
B. Supplier Qualifications: A recognized architectural door hardware supplier, with warehousing
facilities in the project's vicinity, that has a record of successful in-service performance for
supplying door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this project
and that employs an experienced architectural hardware consultant (AHC) who is available to
Owner, Architect, and Contractor, at reasonable times during the course of the Work, for
consultation.
5. Responsible for detailing, scheduling and ordering of finish hardware.
6. Meet with Owner to finalize keying requirements and to obtain final instructions in writing.
Stock parts for products supplied and are capable of repairing and replacing hardware
items found defective within warranty periods.
C. Hardware Installer: Company specializing in the installation of commercial door hardware with
five years documented experience.
D. Fire-Rated Openings: Provide door hardware for fire-rated openings that complies with NFPA
Standard No. 80 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only items of door
hardware that are listed and tested by UL or Warnock Hersey for given type/size opening and
DOOR HARDWARE
087100-3
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set-April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
degree of label. Provide proper latching hardware, door closers, approved-bearing hinges and
seals whether listed in the Hardware Schedule or not.
1. Where emergency exit devices are required on fire-rated doors, (with supplementary
marking on doors' UL labels indicating "Fire Door to be Equipped with Fire Exit
Hardware") provide UL label on exit devices indicating "Fire Exit Hardware".
E. Exit Doors: Operable from inside with single motion without the use of a key or special
knowledge or effort.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Coordinate delivery of packaged hardware items to the appropriate locations (shop or field) for
installation.
B. Hardware items shall be individually packaged in manufacturers' original containers, complete
with proper fasteners. Clearly mark packages on outside to indicate contents and locations in
hardware schedule and in work.
C. Provide locked storage area for hardware, protect from moisture, sunlight, paint, chemicals, etc.
D. Inventory door hardware jointly with representatives of hardware supplier and hardware installer
until each is satisfied that count is correct.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Provide warranties of respective manufacturers' regular terms of sale from day of final
acceptance as follows:
1. Locksets; "ND" Ten (10) years.
2. Electronic: One (1) year.
3. Closers: Thirty (30) years -except electronic closers shall be two (2) years.
4. Exit devices: Three (3) years.
5. All other hardware; Two (2) years.
1.8 MAINTENANCE
A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and
maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and
removal and replacement of door hardware.
1.9 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A. Convene a pre-installation conference at least one week prior to beginning work of this section.
B. Attendance: Architect, Construction Manager, Contractor, Security Contractor, Hardware
Supplier, Installer, Key District Personnel, and Project Inspector.
C. Agenda: Review hardware schedule, products, installation procedures and coordination
required with related work. Review District's keying standards.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
DOOR HARDWARE
087100-4
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
2.1
2.2
B.
C.
MANUFACTURERS
Item
Hinges
Locks, Latches
Manufacturer
Ives
City of Corlsbod Project No. 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
Acceptable Substitutes
Hager, Stanley, McKinney
& Cylinders Schlage Or Approved Equal
Exit Devices Von Duprln Or Approved Equal
Closers LCN Or Approved Equal
Push, Pulls
& Protection Plates Ives Trimco, BBW, DCI
Flush Bolts Ives Trimco, BBW, DCI
Dust Proof Strikes Ives Trimco, BBW, DCI
Coordinators Ives Trimco, BBW, DCI
Stops Ives Trimco, BBW, DCI
Overhead Stops Glynn-Johnson Or Approved Equal
Thresholds National Guard Pemko, Zero
Seals & Bottoms National Guard Pemko, Zero
MATERIALS
Hinges: Exterior out-swinging door butts shall be non-ferrous material and shall have stainless
steel hinge pins. All doors to have non-rising pins.
1. Hinges shall be sized in accordance with the following:
a. Height:
1) Doors up to 42" wide: 4-1/2" inches.
2) Doors 43" to 48" wide: 5 inches.
b. Width; Sufficient to clear frame and trim when door swings 180 degrees.
c. Number of Hinges: Furnish 3 hinges per leaf to 7'-5" in height. Add one for each
additional 2 feet in height.
2. Furnish non-removable pins (NRP) at all exterior out-swing doors and interior key lock
doors with reverse bevels.
Floor Closers; Shall be equipped with compression springs, cam and roller operating
mechanism and a one piece spindle-cam for maximum operating performance and longevity.
Pivots; High strength forgings and castings with precision bearings for smooth operation.
Positive locking vertical adjustment mechanism to allow installer to precisely position the door
and balance the load.
Continuous Hinges: As manufactured by Ives, an Allegion Company. UL rated as required.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100-5
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgino Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set-April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
E. Heavy Duty Cylindrical Locks and Latches; Schlage "ND" Series as scheduled with "Sparta"
design, fastened with through-bolts and threaded chassis hubs.
1. Locksets to comply with ANSI Al 56.2, Series 4000, Grade 1; tested to exceed 3,000,000
cycles. Locksets shall meet ANSI Al 17.1, Accessible Code.
2. Chassis: One piece modular assembly and multi-functional allowing function interchange
without disassembly of lockset.
3. Spindle shall be deep-draw manufactured not stamped. Spindle and spring cage to be
one-piece integrated assembly.
4. Anti-rotation plate to be interlocking to the lock chassis. Lock design utilizing bit-tabs are
not acceptable.
5. Lever Trim: Accessible design, bi-directional, independent assemblies.
6. Locks shall be of such construction that when locked, the door may be opened from
within by using lever and without the use of a key or special knowledge.
7. Thru-bolts to secure anti-rotation plate without sheer line. Fully threaded thru-bolts are
not acceptable.
8. Spring cage to have double compression springs. Manufacturers utilizing torsion springs
are not acceptable.
9. Latchbolt to be steel with minimum V2" throw deadlatch on keyed and exterior functions;
%" throw anti-friction latchbolt on pairs of doors.
10. Strikes: ANSI curved lip,1-1/4" x 4-7/8", with 1" deep dust box (K510-066). Lips shall be
of sufficient length to clear trim and protect clothing.
F. Deadlocks: Rotating cylinder trim rings of attack-resistant design. Mounting plates and
actuator shields of plated cold-rolled steel. Mounting screws of %" diameter steel and protected
by drill-resistant ball bearings. Steel alloy deadbolt with hardened steel roller. Strike alloy
deadbolt with reinforcer and two 3" long screws. ANSI A156.5, 2001 Grade 1 certified.
G. Exit devices: Von Duprin as scheduled.
1. Provide certificate by independent testing laboratory that device has completed over
1,000,000 cycles and can still meet ANSI/BHMA A156.3 - 2001 standards.
2. All internal parts shall be of cold-rolled steel with zinc dichromate coating.
3. Mechanism case shall have an average thickness of .140".
4. Compression spring engineering.
5. Non-handed basic device design with center case interchangeable with all functions.
6. All devices shall have quiet return fluid dampeners.
7. All latchbolts shall be deadlocking with %" throw and have a self-lubricating coating to
reduce friction and wear.
8. Device shall bear UL label for fire and or panic as may be required.
9. All surface strikes shall be roller type and utilize a plate underneath to prevent movement.
10. Lever Trim: "Breakaway" design, forged brass or bronze escutcheon with a minimum of
.130" thickness, match lockset lever design.
11. Removable Mullions: Removable with single turn of building key. Securely reinstalled
without need for key.
12. Furnish glass bead kits for vision lites where required.
13. All Exit Devices to be sex-bolted to the doors.
14. Panic Hardware shall comply with CBC Section 11B.404.2.7 and shall be mounted
between 34" and 44" above the finished floor surface.
a.Provide exit devices UL certified to meet maximum 5 pound requirements
according to the California Building Code section 11B-309.4, and UL listed for
Panic Exterior Fire Exit Hardware.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100-6
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbad Project No. 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
H. Closers: LCN as scheduled. Place closers inside building, stairs, room, etc.
1. Door closer cylinders shall be of high strength cast iron construction with double heat
treated pinion shaft to provide low wear operating capabilities of internal parts throughout
the life of the installation. All door closers shall be tested to ANSI/BHMA A156.4 test
requirements by a BHMA certified testing laboratory. A written certification showing
successful completion of a minimum of 10,000,000 cycles must be provided.
2. All door closers shall be fully hydraulic and have full rack and pinion action with a shaft
diameter of a minimum of 11/16 inch and piston diameter of 1 inch to ensure longevity
and durability under all closer applications.
3. All parallel arm closers shall incorporate one piece solid forged steel arms with bronze
bushings. 1-9/16" steel stud shoulder bolts, shall be incorporated in regular arms, hold-
open arms, arms with hold open and stop built in. All other closers to have forged steel
main arms for strength, durability, and aesthetics for versatility of trim accommodation,
high strength and long life.
4. All parallel arm closers so detailed shall provide advanced backcheck for doors subject to
severe abuse or extreme wind conditions. This advanced backcheck shall be located to
begin cushioning the opening swing of the door at approximately 45 degrees. The
intensity of the backcheck shall be fully adjustable by tamper resistant non-critical screw
valve.
5. Closers shall be installed to permit doors to swing 180 degrees.
6. All closers shall utilize a stable fluid withstanding temperature range of 120 degrees F. to
-30 degrees F. without requiring seasonal adjustment of closer speed to properly close
the door.
7. Provide the manufactures drop plates, brackets and spacers as required at narrow head
rails and special frame conditions. NO wood plates or spacers will be allowed.
8. Maximum effort to operate closers shall not exceed 5 lbs., such pull or push effort being
applied at right angles to hinged doors. Compensating devices or automatic door
operators may be utilized to meet the above standards. When fire doors are required,
the maximum effort to operate the closer may be increased but shall not exceed 15 lbs.
when specifically approved by fire marshal. All closers shall be adjusted to operate with
the minimum amount of opening force and still close and latch the door. These forces do
not apply to the force required to retract latch bolts or disengage other devices that hold
the door in a closed position. Door shall take at least 5 seconds to move from an open
position of 90 degrees to a position of 12 degrees from the latch jamb.
9. Provide sex-bolted or through bolt mounting for all door closers.
I. Flush Bolts & Dust Proof Strikes; Automatic Flush Bolts shall be of the low operating force
design. Utilize the top bolt only model for interior doors where applicable and as permitted by
testing procedures.
1. Manual flush bolts only permitted on storage or mechanical openings as scheduled.
2. Provide dust proof strikes at openings using bottom bolts.
J. Door Stops:
1. Unless otherwise noted in Hardware Sets, provide floor type with appropriate fasteners.
Where wall type cannot be used, provide floor type. If neither can be used, provide
overhead type.
2. Do not install floor stops more than four (4) inches from the face of the wall or partition
(CBC Section 11B-307).
3. Overhead stops shall be made of stainless steel and non-plastic mechanisms and
finished metal end caps. Field-changeable hold-open, friction and stop-only functions.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100-7
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Library
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set-April 10,2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
K. Protection Plates: Fabricate either kick, armor, or mop plates with four beveled edges. Provide
kick plates 10" high and 2" LDW. Sizes of armor and mop plates shall be listed in the Hardware
Schedule. Furnish with machine or wood screws of bronze or stainless to match other
hardware.
L. Thresholds: As Scheduled and per details.
1. Thresholds shall not exceed 1/2" in height, with a beveled surface of 1:2 maximum slope.
2. Set thresholds in a full bed of butyl-rubber or polyisobutylene mastic sealant complying
with requirements in Division 7 "Thermal and Moisture Protection".
3. Use Vi' fasteners, red-head flat-head sleeve anchors (SS/FHSL).
4. Thresholds shall comply with CBC Section 11 B-204.1.
M. Seals: Provide silicone gasket at all rated and exterior doors.
1. Fire-rated Doors, Resilient Seals: UL1 OC Classified complies with NFPA 80 & NFPA 252.
Coordinate with selected door manufacturers' and selected frame manufacturers'
requirements.
2. Fire-rated Doors, Intumescent Seals: Furnished by selected door manufacturer. Furnish
fire-labeled opening assembly complete and in full compliance with UL10C Classified
complies with NFPA 80 & NFPA 252. Where required, intumescent seals vary in
requirement by door type and door manufacture - careful coordination required.
3. Smoke & Draft Control Doors, Provide UL10C Classified complies with NFPA 80 & NFPA
252 for use on "S" labeled Positive Pressure door assemblies.
N. Door Shoes & Door Top Caps: Provide door shoes at all exterior wood doors and top caps at
all exterior out-swing doors.
O. Silencers: Furnish silencers for interior hollow metal frames, 3 for single doors, 2 for pairs of
doors. Omit where sound or light seals occurs, or for fire-resistive-rated door assemblies.
2.3 KEYING
A. Furnish a Proprietary Schlage masterkey system as directed by the owner or architect. Key
system to be designated and comblnated by the Schlage Master Key Department even if
pinned by the Authorized Key Center, Authorized Security Center or a local authorized
commercial dealer.
B. A detailed keying schedule is to be prepared by the owner and/or architect in consultation with
a representative of Allegion or an Authorized Key Center or Authorized Security Center. Each
keyed cylinder on every keyed lock is to be listed separately showing the door #, key group (in
BHMA terminology), cylinder type, finish and location on the door.
C. Extend the original Schlage masterkey system established for the project.
D. Furnish all cylinders in the Schlage conventional style except the exit device and removable
mullion cylinders which will be supplied in Schlage Full Size Interchangable Core (FSIC). Pack
change keys independently (PKI).
E. Furnish construction keying for doors requiring locking during construction.
F. Furnish all keys with visual key control.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100-8
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research -I- Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbad Project No. 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set-April 10, 2015
1. Stamp key "Do Not Duplicate".
2. Stamp (BHMA) key symbol on key.
G. Furnish all cylinders with visual key control.
1. Stamp (BHMA) key symbol on face of cylinder plug (VKC).
H. Furnish mechanical keys as follows:
1. Furnish 2 cut change keys for each different change key code.
2. Furnish 1 uncut key blank for each change key code.
3. Furnish 6 cut masterkeys for each different masterkey set.
4. Furnish 3 uncut key blanks for each masterkey set.
5. Furnish 2 cut control keys cut to the top masterkey for permanent l/C cylinders.
6. Furnish 1 cut control key cut to each SKD combination.
I. Furnish Schlage Padlocks and the cylinders to tie them into the masterkey system for gates,
storage boxes, utility valve security, roof hatches and roll-up doors keyed as directed in the
keying schedule.
1. Furnish KS43D2200 padlock for use with non-l/C Schlage cylinders. Furnish 47-413
(conventional) or 47-743-XP (PrimusXP) with above.
2. Furnish KS43G3200 padlock for use with FSIC Schlage cylinders. Furnish 23-030
(Classic / Everest) or 20-740 (PrimusXP) with above.
3. Furnish KS41D1200 padlock for use with SFIC Schlage cylinders. Furnish 80-037
(Everest-B) with above.
J. Furnish one Schlage cabinet lock for each cabinet door or drawer so designated on the
drawings or keying schedule to match the masterkey system.
1. Furnish CL100PB for use with non-l/C Schlage cylinders.
2. Fusnish CL77R for use with FSIC Schlage cylinders.
3. Furnish CL721G for use with SFIC Schlage cylinders.
2.4 FINISHES
A. Generally to be satin chrome US26D (626 on bronze and 652 on steel) unless othenwise noted.
B. Furnish push plates, pull plates and kick or armor plates in satin stainless steel US32D (630)
unless otherwise noted.
C. Door closers shall be powder-coated to match other hardware, unless otherwise noted.
D. Aluminum items to be finished anodized aluminum except thresholds which can be furnished as
standard mill finish.
2.5 FASTENERS
A. Screws for strikes, face plates and similar items shall be flat head, countersunk type, provide
machine screws for metal and standard wood screws for wood.
B. Screws for butt hinges shall be flathead, countersunk, full-thread type.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100-9
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Carlsbod Controct 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research -I- Planning, Inc.
Bid Set-April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
C. Fastening of closer bases or closer shoes to doors shall be by means of sex bolts and spray
painted to match closer finish.
D. Provide expansion anchors for attaching hardware items to concrete or masonry.
E. All exposed fasteners shall have a phillips head.
F. Finish of exposed screws to match surface finish of hardware or other adjacent work.
G. All Exit Devices and Lock Protectors shall be fastened to the door by the means of sex bolts or
through bolts.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Verify that doors and frames are square and plumb and ready to receive work and dimensions
are as instructed by the manufacturer.
B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.
C. Fire-Rated Door Assembly Inspection: Upon completion of the installation, all fire door
assemblies shall be inspected to confirm proper operation of the closing device and latching
device and that only the manufacturer's furnished fasteners are used for installation and that it
meets all criteria of a fire door assembly per NFPA 80 (Standard for Fire Doors and Other
Opening Protectives) 2013 Edition. A written record shall be maintained and transmitted to the
Owner to be made available to the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). The inspection of the
swinging fire doors shall be performed by a certified FDAI (Fire Door Assembly Inspector) with
knowledge and understanding of the operating components of the type of door being subjected
to the inspection. The record shall list each fire door assembly throughout the project and
include each door number, an itemized list of hardware set components at each door opening,
and each door location in the facility.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and requirements of DHI.
D. Use the templates provided by hardware item manufacturer.
E. Mounting heights for hardware shall be as recommended by the Door and Hardware Institute.
Operating hardware will to be located between 30" and 44" AFF.
F. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment
substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation.
G. Drill and countersink units that are not factory-prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space
fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards.
H. Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl-rubber sealant.
I. If hand of door is changed during construction, make necessary changes in hardware at no
additional cost.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100-10
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbod Project No. 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
J. Hardware Installer shall coordinate with security contractor to route cable to connect electrified
locks, panic hardware and fire exit hardware to power transfers or electric hinges at the time
these items are installed so as to avoid disassembly and reinstallation of hardware.
K. Hardware Installer shall also be present with the security contractor when the power is turned
on for the testing of the electronic hardware applications. Installer shall make adjustments to
solenoids, latches, vertical rods and closers to insure proper and secure operation.
L. All wiring for electro-mechanical hardware mounted on the door shall be connected through the
power transfer and terminated in the interface junction box specified for in the Electrical
Section.
M. Conductors shall be minimum 18 gage stranded, multicolored. A minimum 12 in. loop of
conductors shall be coiled in the interface junction box. Each conductor shall be permanently
marked with its function.
N. If a power supply is specified in the hardware sets, all conductors shall be terminated in the
power supply. Make all connections required for proper operation between the power supply
and the electro-mechanical hardware. Provide the proper size conductors as specified in the
manufacturer's technical documentation.
3.3 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door, to ensure proper operation
or function of every unit. Replace units which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and
smoothly as intended for the application made.
B. Clean adjacent surface soiled by hardware installation.
C. Final Adjustment; Wherever hardware installation is made more than one month prior to
acceptance or occupancy, return to that work area and make final check and adjustment of all
hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper
function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final
operation of heating and ventilating equipment.
D. Instruct Owner's Personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware finishes, during
the final adjustment of hardware.
E. Continued Maintenance Service: Approximately six months after the completion of the project,
the Contractor accompanied by the Architectural Hardware Consultant, shall return to the
project and re-adjust every item of hardware to restore proper functions of doors and hardware.
Consult with and instruct Owner's personnel in recommended additions to the maintenance
procedures. Replace hardware items which have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design,
materials or installation of hardware units. Prepare a written report of current and predictable
problems (of substantial nature) in the performance of the hardware.
3.4 HARDWARE LOCATIONS
A. Conform to CCR, Title 24, Part 2; and ADAAG; and the drawings for access-compliant
positioning requirements for the disabled.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
DOOR HARDWARE
087100-11
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Reseorch + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
B. Hardware supplier is responsible for providing the services of an Architectural Hardware
Consultant (AHC) or a proprietary product technician to inspect installation and certify that
hardware and its installation have been furnished and installed in accordance with
manufacturers' instructions and as specified herein.
3.5 SCHEDULE
A. The items listed in the following schedule shall conform to the requirements of the foregoing
specifications.
B. The Door Schedule on the Drawings indicates which hardware set is used with each door.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100-12
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research -I- Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
City of Carlsbod Project No. 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
Manufacturers Abbreviations (Mfr.)
ADA
GLY
IVE
LCN
NGP
PEM
SCH
TRI
VON
Adams Rite Mfg.
Glynn-Johnson Corporation
Ives
LCN
National Guard Products
Pemko
Schlage Lock Company
Trimco
Von Duprin
Aluminum Door Hardware
Overhead Door Stops
Hinges, Pivots, Bolts, Coordinators, Dust Proof
Strikes, Push Pull & Kick Plates, Door Stops &
Silencers
Door Closers
Thresholds, Gasketing & Weather-stripping
Thresholds, Gasketing & Weather-stripping
Locks, Latches & Cylinders
Sign
Exit Devices
SPEXTRA: 166053
GROUP NO. 01
3 EA HW HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5X4.5 NRP 630 IVE
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK ND80PD SPA 626 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 SCUSH 689 LCN
1 SET SEALS 5050B BRN NGP
1 EA DOOR SWEEP 200NA CL NGP
1 EA THRESHOLD PER DETAIL
GROUP NO. 02
1 EA CONT. HINGE 224HD 628 IVE
1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 98-NL-990 626 VON
1 EA RIM CYLINDER 20-057 626 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 EDA 689 LCN
1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW 630 IVE
1 EA FLOOR STOP FS441 626 IVE
1 SET SEALS 5050B BRN NGP
1 EA DOOR SWEEP 200NA CL NGP
1 EA THRESHOLD PER DETAIL
GROUP NO. 03
3 EA HW HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5X4.5 NRP 652 IVE
1 EA POWER TRANSFER EPT10 689 VON
1 EA ELEC PANIC QEL+-98-L-NL-17 626 VON
HARDWARE
1 EA RIM CYLINDER 20-057 626 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 EDA 689 LCN
1 EA SURF. AUTO 9542 MS ANCLR LCN
OPERATOR
2 EA ACTUATOR, WALL 8310-836T 630 LCN
MOUNT
1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW 630 IVE
3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE
1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS902 LGR VON
DOOR HARDWARE
087100-13
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrory
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
CARD READER AND WIRING BY ACCESS CONTROL VENDOR
GROUP NO. 04
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5X4.5 652 IVE
1 EA ENTRANCE/OFFICE ND50PD SPA 626 SCH
LOCK
1 EA FLOOR STOP FS439 682 IVE
1 SET SEALS 5050B BRN NGP
ROUP NO. 05
3 EA HW HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5X4.5 652 IVE
1 EA ELECTRIC HW HINGE 5BB1HW4.5X4.5TW8 652 IVE
1 EA ELEC LOCK 2190-3-1-1-201-32D US32D ADA
1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 20-013 114 626 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 EDA 689 LCN
1 EA MOUNTING PLATE 4110-18 689 LCN
1 EA FLOOR STOP FS439 682 IVE
ROUP NO. 06
4 EA HW HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5X4.5 652 IVE
1 EA DEADLOCK MS1850SX4000 628 ADA
1 EA EXIT INDICATOR 4089 130 ADA
1 EA CYLINDER GUARD MS4043 130 ADA
2 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 20-013 114 626 SCH
1 SET PUSH/PULL BAR 9190HD-12"-NO 630 IVE
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 EDA 689 LCN
1 EA MOUNTING PLATE 4110-18 689 LCN
1 EA FIRE/LIFE WALL MAG SEM7850 689 LCN
1 EA SIGN 771 TRI
GROUP NO.
3 EA
1 EA
1 EA
3 EA
07
HINGE
CLASSROOM LOCK
FLOOR STOP
SILENCER
5BB1 4.5X4.5 NRP
ND70PD SPA
FS439
SR64
652
626
682
GRY
IVE
SCH
IVE
IVE
GROUP NO. 08
2 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5X4.5 NRP 652 IVE
1 EA ELECTRIC HINGE 5BB1 4.5X4.5TW8 652 IVE
(FOR FUTURE CARD READER)
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK ND80PD SPA 626 SCH
1 EA FLOOR STOP FS439 682 IVE
3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE
PREP RACEWAY FROM CENTER HINGE TO LOCK FOR FUTURE CARD READER.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100-14
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research -I- Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
City of Corlsbod Project No. 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
GROUP NO.
3 EA
1 EA
1 EA
3 EA
09 •
HINGE
STOREROOM LOCK
FLOOR STOP
SILENCER
5BB1 4.5X4.5 NRP
ND80PD SPA
FS439
SR64
652
626
682
GRY
IVE
SCH
IVE
IVE
GROUP NO.
3 EA
1 EA
1 EA
1 SET
10
HINGE
PASSAGE SET
FLOOR STOP
SEALS
5BB1 4.5X4.5
ND10S SPA
FS439
5050B
652
626
682
BRN
IVE
SCH
IVE
NGP
GROUP NO. 11
HARDWARE BY DOOR / FRAME
MANUFACTURER
END OF SECTION
DOOR HARDWARE
087100-15
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
Blank Paqe
DOOR HARDWARE
087100-16
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research -I- Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
SECTION 088100 - GLASS GLAZEMG
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Glass in the following locations:
1. Exterior and interior storefront systems.
2. Exterior storefront doors.
3. Interior sidelights.
4. Interior wood doors and sliding glass doors.
B. Glass of the following types:
1. Monolithic.
2. Insulated.
3. Mirror glass.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 081113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; Glazing stops.
B. Section 081116 - Aluminum Door and Window Frames.
C. Section 083213 - Sliding Aluminum-Framed Glass Doors.
D. Section 081416 - Flush Wood Doors; Glazing stops.
E. Section 084113 - Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts: Glazing stops.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of the hermetic seal under normal use that is
attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and
practices for maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written
instmctions. Evidence of failure is the obstmction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on
interior surfaces of glass.
B. Deterioration of Laminated Glass: Development of manufacturing defects including edge
separation or delamination which materially obstmcts vision through glass.
C. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit that contains dehydrated air or a
specified gas.
GLASS GLAZING
088100-1
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research -I- Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 1 0, 201 5 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
D. Manufacturer; A firm that produces primary glass or fabricated glass as defined in
referenced glazing publications.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show location of exterior glass units required to be heat strengthened
based on glass stress analysis calculations.
C. Samples for Verification:
1. Glass: 12-inch-square samples of each type of glass indicated except for clear
monolithic glass products,
2. Sealant; 12-inch-long samples of each color required (except black) for each type of
sealant or gasket exposed to view. Install sealant or gasket sample between two
strips of material representative in color ofthe adjoining framing system.
D. Sustainabiiity Submittals:
1. Product Data for glazing sealants used inside of the weatherproofing system,
including printed statement of VOC content.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Calculations: Fumish calculations showing glass stresses based on glass lites and shading
pattems. Calculations shall be prepared by the glass manufacturer and shall be signed by a
registered professional engineer licensed in the State of Califomia.
B. Product Certificates: Signed by glazing materials manufacturers certifying that their
products comply with specified requirements.
1. Separate certifications are not required for glazing materials bearing manufacturer's
permanent labels designating type and thickness of glass, provided labels represent a
quality control program of a recognized certification agency or independent testing
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Glazing Schedule: Indicate glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location.
Use same designation indicated on the Drawings.
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For glass and other glazing materials to include in Operating and
Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1.
B. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Glazier Qualifications: Engage an experienced glazier who has completed glazing similar
in material, design, and extent to that required for this Project, with a record of successful
in-service performance.
GLASS GLAZING
088100-2
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
B. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product
manufacturers and organizations below, except where more stringent requirements are
indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this
Section or in referenced standards.
1. FGMA Publications: "FGMA Glazing Manual."
2. LSGA Publications: "LSGA Design Guide."
3. Safety Glass: Products complying with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16
CFR Part 1201 for Category II materials.
C. Single-Source Responsibility for Glass: Obtain glass from one source for each product
indicated below:
1. Primary glass of each (ASTM C1036) type and class indicated.
2. Heat-treated glass of each (ASTM C1048) condition indicated.
3. Laminated glass of each (ASTM C1172) kind indicated.
D. Glass Quality: No visible strain pattem to the naked eye under various lighting conditions
as judged solely by the Architect.
E. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled, manufacturer-certified workers who
custom fabricate glass similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a
record of successful in-service performance.
F. Safety Glass: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201
and ANSI Z97.1. Subject to compliance with requirements, permanently mark safety glass
with certification label of Safety Glazing Certification Council or another certification
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction
1. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing
standard with which glass complies.
G. Insulating Glass Certification Program: Provide insulating glass units permanently marked
with appropriate Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC) certification label.
H. Mockups: Before installing glazing, build mockups for each type of glass and finish
required to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic
effects, quench pattem visibility both under natural viewing and polarized viewing
conditions, and qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the
following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:
1. Build mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as
directed by Architect.
a. Use full size glass units to demonstrate fabrication techniques and quality.
2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be
constmcted.
3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effect, fabrication, and installation.
4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting glass fabrication.
5. Maintain mockups during constmction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed Work.
6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed.
7. Rejection; If strain pattem or any other pattem that is not intended or approved is
visible to the naked eye, as judged solely by the Architect, the glass will be rejected.
GLASS GLAZING
088100-3
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Reseorch -I- Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect glazing materials to comply with manufacturer's directions and as needed to prevent
damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct
exposure to sun, or other causes.
1.10 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions; Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate
temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by glazing materials manufacturer
or when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
B. Install liquid sealants only when ambient and substrate temperatures are above 40 deg F
(4.4 deg C).
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Laminated Glass: Fumish written warranty signed by glass manufacturer, agreeing to
fumish replacements for those laminated glass units which develop manufacturing defects
as defined.
1. Warranty Period: 5-years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Insulating Glass: Fumish written warranty signed by glass manufacturer, agreeing to
fumish replacements for those insulating glass units developing manufacturing defects as
defined.
1. Warranty Period; 10-years from date of Substantial Completion.
C. Mirror Glass; Fumish written warranty agreeing to fumish replacement mirrors for those
units developing silver spoilage.
1. Warranty Period; 15-years from date of Substantial Completion.
D. These warranties shall be in addition to and not a limitation of other rights the Owner may
have against the Contractor under the Contract Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUSTAINABILITY MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS, GENERAL
A. VOC Content: Sealants applied on-site on the interior of the building and products used on
the interior of the building shall comply with VOC limits.
1. Use materials that have the lowest possible VOC content in units of g/L when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and
wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage
attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of
GLASS GLAZING
088100-4
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or
other defects in constmction.
1. Normal thermal movement is defined as that resulting from an ambient temperature
range of 120-deg. F. and from a consequent temperature range within glass and glass
framing members of 180-deg. F.
B. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties
specified based on manufacturer's published test data, as determined according to
procedures indicated below;
1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6.0 mm thick.
2. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for
overall unit and for each lite.
3. For laminated-glass lites, properties are based on products of constmction indicated.
4. Tempered Glass Coatings; Apply Low-E, frit, and other specified coatings to glass
only after tempering to minimize quench pattem visibility.
C. Provide mirrored glass that will not fail under normal usage. Failure includes glass
breakage and deterioration attributable to defective manufacture, fabrication, and
installation.
2.3 PRIMARY FLOAT GLASS PRODUCTS
A. Uncoated Clear Float Glass: ASTM C1036, Condition A (uncoated surfaces). Type I
(transparent glass, flat). Quality q3 (glazing select), class and kind as indicated in schedule
at the end of Part 3.
B. Mirror Glass: ASTM C1503, Type I (transparent glass, flat). Class 1 (clear), and Quality
q2 (mirror), with silvering, electro-plated copper coating, and protective organic coating,
beveled edges.
C. Laminated Glass: ASTM Cl 172; laminated with polyvinyl butyral interlayer with a proven
record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after
laminating glass lites and installation.
2.4 HEAT-TREATED FLOAT GLASS
A. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C1048, Type I (transparent glass, flat). Quality q3
(glazing select), class and kind as indicated in schedule at the end of Part 3.
B. Safety Glass; ASTM C1048, fully tempered with horizontal tempering, Condition A
uncoated, Type 1 transparent flat. Class 1 clear, Quality q3 glazing select; conforming to
ANSI Z97.1; thickness as indicated.
2.5 INSULATING GLASS
A. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass
separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E2190, and complying
with other requirements specified.
GLASS GLAZING
088100-5
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set-April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
1. Acceptable Manufacturers; Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited
to, the following:
a. Guardian Industries.
b. Oldcastle Architectural Glass.
c. PPG Industries, Inc.
2. Sealing System: Dual seal, with manufacturer's standard primary and secondary.
3. Spacer: Thermally broken aluminum with black, color anodic finish or black
powdered metal paint finish.
4. Desiccant; Molecular sieve or silica gel, or blend of both.
2.6 ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANTS
A. Compatibility; Select glazing compounds and tapes of proven compatibility with other
materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating glass units, and
glazing channel substrates, under conditions of installation and service, as demonstrated by
testing and field experience.
B. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturer's recommendations for selecting
glazing sealants and tapes that are suitable for applications indicated and conditions
existing at time of installation.
C. Elastomeric Glazing Sealants; Comply with ASTM C920, Class A, and other requirements
indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those
referencing ASTM C920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure
and joint substrates capable of water immersion without loss of properties; cured Shore A
hardness of 15-25; color as selected.
1. VOC Content; For sealants used inside of the weatherproofing system, not more
than 250 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2. Single-Component Neutral- and Basic-Curing Silicone Glazing Sealants:
a. Dow Coming Corporation; 999.
b. GE Silicones; SCSI200.
c. Tremco; Proglaze.
2.7 GLAZING TAPES
A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tape; Preformed, butyl-based elastomeric tape with a solids
content of 100 percent, non-staining and non-migrating in contact with nonporous surfaces,
with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for
application indicated, packaged on rolls with a release paper backing, and complying with
ASTM C1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:
1. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous
pressure.
2. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to
continuous pressure.
GLASS GLAZING
088100-6
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
2.8 GLAZING GASKETS
A. Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets: Molded or extmded neoprene, EPDM, or
silicone gaskets of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal; complying
with ASTM C864, D.S. Brown Co., Maloney, Tremco or approved equal.
B. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extmded or molded closed cell, integral-skinned neoprene,
EPDM, or silicone of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal; complying
with ASTM C509, Type II, black; D.S. Brown Co., Maloney, Tremco or approved equal.
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing
standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials involved for
glazing application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces
contacted in installation.
B. Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
C. Glazing Stops: Screw applied or snap on type (beads) coordinated with glass section
indicated, finished to complement exterior window finish.
D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extmsions with a Shore A durometer hardness
required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.
E. Mirror Mastic: Adhesive setting compound manufactured specifically for setting mirrors
on wall with support channel at bottom edge.
1. VOC Content: Not more than 70 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59,
Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
F. Extmded-Aluminum Mirror Top and Bottom Trim; J-channels formed with a retum deep
enough to produce a glazing channel to accommodate mirrored glass units of thickness
indicated and in lengths required to cover top and bottom edge of each mirrored glass unit
in a single piece.
2.10 FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS
A. Pre-Glazed Units: Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to preglaze
units at the factory, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite
complying with recommendations of product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard
as required to comply with system performance requirements.
B. Field-Glazed Units; Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze
openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions,
and bite complying with recommendations of product manufacturer and referenced glazing
standard as required to comply with system performance requirements.
GLASS GLAZING
088100-7
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
2.11 MIRROR FABRICATION
A. Mirror Sizes: To suit Project conditions, and before tempering, cut mirrors to final sizes
and shapes.
1. Fabricate mirrors in single piece wherever possible.
2. Where mirror length exceeds practical shipping and installation limits, follow seam
pattem indicated on Drawings.
3. Fabricate adjoining mirror units to be installed with hairline seams.
B. Cutouts; Fabricate cutouts before tempering for notches and holes in mirrors without
marring visible surfaces. Locate and size cutouts so they fit closely around penetrations in
mirrors.
C. Mirror Edge Treatment; Flat polished.
1. Seal edges of mirrors with edge sealer after edge treatment to prevent chemical or
atmospheric penetration of glass coating.
2. Require mirror manufacturer to perform edge treatment and sealing in factory
immediately after cutting to final sizes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAME^JATION
A. Examine glass framing, with glazier present, for compliance with the following;
1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness,
offsets at comers.
2. Presence and functioning of weep system.
3. Minimum required face or edge clearances.
4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.
B. Do not proceed with glazing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before
glazing. Remove coatings that are not firmly bonded to substrates.
3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL
A. General; Watertight and airtight installation of each piece of glass exposed to the weather
is required. Each installation must withstand normal temperature changes, wind loading,
and impact loading with no failure of any kind, including loss or breakage of glass, failure
of sealants or gasketing to remain air and water tight, deterioration of glazing materials or
other defects in the materials or their application.
B. Comply with combined written instmctions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets,
and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including
those in referenced glazing publications.
GLASS GLAZING
088100-8
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbad Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
C. Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to
provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant
thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.
D. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass
from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge
damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair
performance and appearance.
E. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by
preconstmction testing.
F. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing
publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of
compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
G. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
H. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm).
1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass.
Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets
and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face
clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.
2. Provide 1/8-inch (3-mm) minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal
to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed
thickness of tape.
I. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving
sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and
according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.
J. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattem, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.
K. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified.
L. Comply with manufacturer's specifications and recommendations for installation of glazing
in window units.
M. Do not allow sealants to come in contact with edges of laminated glass units.
3.4 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)
A. Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit
openings exactly, with stretch allowance during installation.
B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in
place with joints miter cut and bonded together at comers.
C. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression
gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against
GLASS GLAZING
088100-9
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at comers and work toward centers of
openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending
stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
D. Install gaskets so they protmde past face of glazing stops.
3.5 MIRROR INSTALLATION
A. Securely fasten chrome j-mold directly above backsplash of countertops. Clean j-mold and
remove any constmction debris before installing mirror glass.
B. Affix mirror glass to interior walls where indicated on Drawings using specified mastic.
C. Apply a bead of clear silicone sealant to space between mirror glass and j-mold to create a
seal against water penetration from adjacent plumbing fixtures.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in any
way, during constmction period, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism.
3.7 CLEANING
A. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete at frequent intervals during
constmction, but not less than once a month, for build-up of dirt, scum, alkali deposits, or
stains, and remove as recommended by glass manufacturer.
B. Wash glass on both faces in each area of Project not more than 4 days prior to date
scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass using
non-abrasive soft cloths as recommended by glass manufacturer.
C. Constmction Waste Management: Manage constmction waste in accordance with
provisions of Section 01524 Constmction Waste Management.
3.8 PROTECTION
A. Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately after installation by attaching crossed
streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface.
Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.
B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from constmction
operations including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do
come into contact with glass, remove them immediately as recommended by glass
manufacturer.
GLASS GLAZING
088100-10
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research -I- Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
3.9 GLAZING SCHEDULE
A. Insulating Glass;
1. Basis-of-Design; PPG, Solarban 70XL.
2. Indoor Lite; Type 1 (transparent glass, flat) float glass. Class 1 (clear), 1/4 inch
thick. Kind HS (heat strengthened). Condition A (uncoated surfaces) or Kind FT
(fiilly tempered), Condition A (uncoated surfaces) as required.
3. Interspace Content and Thickness; Air, 1/2 inch thick space.
4. Outside Lite: Type I (transparent glass, flat) float glass. Class 1 (clear), 1/4 inch
thick. Kind HS (heat strengthened). Condition C (other coated glass) or Kind FT
(fully tempered). Condition C (other coated glass) as required.
Color: Clear, low-E coating on number 2 surface.
Visible Light Transmittance; 64 percent.
Shading Coefficient: 0.32.
8. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.27.
9. Winter Nighttime U Value: 0.28.
10. Summer Daytime U-Value: 0.26.
11. LSG Ratio: 2.37.
B. Interior Heat-Treated Float Glass for Doors and Sidelights:
1. Thickness; 1/4 inch thick.
2. Class 1 (clear), uncoated.
3. Kind: FT (fully tempered).
C. Interior Heat-Treated Float Glass for Acoustic Applications;
1. Indoor Lite: Type 1 (transparent glass, flat) float glass. Class 1 (clear), 1/4 inch
thick, Kind HS (heat strengthened). Condition A (uncoated surfaces) or Kind FT
(fully tempered). Condition A (uncoated surfaces) as required.
2. Interspace Content and Thickness: Air, 1/2 inch thick space.
3. Outside Lite; Type I (transparent glass, flat) float glass. Class 1 (clear), 1/4 inch
thick, Kind HS (heat strengthened). Condition A (uncoated surfaces) or Kind FT
(fully tempered). Condition A (uncoated surfaces) as required.
D. Mirror:
1. Thickness: 1/4 inch thick, of dimensions indicated on Drawings.
2. Tempered or heat-strengthened as required.
END OF SECTION 088100
GLASS GLAZING
088100-11
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Library
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Plonning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
^^^^^^
GLASS GLAZING
088100-12
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrory
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
SECTION 089100 - WALL LOUVERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Fixed metal louvers and frames at exterior locations.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data; Provide data describing design characteristics, maximum recommended air
velocity, design free area, materials and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings; Indicate louver layout plan and elevations, opening and clearance
dimensions, tolerances; head, jamb and sill details; blade configuration, screens, blank off
areas required, and frames.
C. Sustainabiiity Submittals:
1. Product Data for products having recycled content, documentation indicating
percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content.
a. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.
2. Product Data for each material, including its source, cost, and the fraction by weight
that is considered regional and that has been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as
well as manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site.
3. Product Data for field-applied touch up primers, paints, clear coatings, and
galvanizing agents, include printed statement of VOC content and chemical
components.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain louvers and vents through one source from a single
manufacturer where indicated to be of same type, design, or factory-applied color finish.
B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following;
1. AWS Dl.l, "Stmcttiral Welding Code-Steel."
2. AWS Dl.2, "Stmcttiral Welding Code-Aluminum."
3. AWS Dl.3, "Stmcttiral Welding Code - Sheet Steel."
4. AWS Dl.6, "Stmcttiral Welding Code - Stainless Steel."
C. SMACNA Standard: Comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet
Metal Manual" for fabrication, constmction details, and installation procedures.
WALL LOUVERS
089100-1
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver metal louvers so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package louvers for protection
during transportation and handling.
B. Store louvers vertically, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store
louvers to ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of water. Do not store louvers in
contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.
C. Protect strippable protective covering on louvers from exposure to sunlight and high
humidity, except to extent necessary for period of louver installation.
1.6 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements; Verify louver openings by field measurements before fabrication and
indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUSTAINABILITY MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS, GENERAL
A. Recycled Content; Provide products made from the following metals with average recycled
content such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled
content is not less than that indicated below;
1. Steel; Average recycled content of steel to be a minimum 60 percent.
B. Local/Regional Materials: Give preference to manufacturer's whose facilities are within a
500 mile radius of the project site. Also give preference to materials that are harvested,
extracted, mined, quarried, etc. within a 500 mile radius of the project site.
C. VOC Content: Adhesives, sealants, paints, welding, and coatings applied on-site on the
interior of the building and products used on the interior of the building shall comply with
VOC limits .
1. Use materials that have the lowest possible VOC content in units of g/L when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. The Airolite Company.
2. Constmction Specialties, Inc.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, G90 (Z275) zinc coating, mill
phosphatized.
B. Fasteners: Of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal or 300 Series stainless steel,
unless otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are incompatible with joined materials.
WALL LOUVERS
089100-2
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Reseorch + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
1. Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions.
2. Use hex-head or Phillips pan-head screws for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise
indicated.
3. For fastening galvanized steel, use hot-dip-galvanized steel or 300 series stainless-
steel fasteners.
4. For color-finished louvers, use fasteners with heads that match color of louvers.
C. Postinstalled Fasteners for Concrete and Masonry: Torque-controlled expansion anchors,
made from stainless-steel components, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load
equal to 4 times the loads imposed, for concrete, or 6 times the load imposed, for masonry,
as determined by testing per ASTM E488/E488M, conducted by a qualified independent
testing agency.
D. Bituminous Paint; Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D1187/D1187M.
E. Flashings: Of same material as louver frame.
F. Sealants: As recommended by louver manufacturer.
2.4 FDCED, FORMED-METAL LOUVERS
A. Horizontal, Drainable-Blade Louver: Factory welded assembly complete with steel storm-
resistant blades, bird screen, steel sills, integral stmctural supports and blade braces.
1. Blade Profile: Single, drainable.
2. Frame and Blade Nominal Thickness: As required to comply with stmctural
performance requirements, but not less than 0.052 inch (1.32 mm) for frames and
0.040 inch (1.02 mm) for blades.
3. Material; Galvanized steel.
4. Finish; Baked-enamel or powder-coat as standard with manufacturer, color to be
selected.
5. Free Area Requirements: TBD.
6. Louver Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
7. Mullion Type: As indicated on Drawings.
8. Basis-of-Design Product: Model 658; as manufactured by Industrial Louvers, Inc.
9. AMCA Seal; Mark unhs with AMCA Certified Ratings Seal.
10. R-value of Blank-off Panels; Match R-value of adjacent wall constmction.
B. Gasketing: PVC compression gaskets, 1/2- by 1/2-inch, or 1/4-inch bead of silicone
sealant.
2.5 LOUVER SCREENS
A. General; Provide screen at each exterior louver.
1. Screen Location for Fixed Louvers: Interior face.
2. Screening Type: Bird screening.
B. Secure screens to louver frames with stainless-steel machine screws, spaced a maximum of
6-inches (150 mm) from each comer and at 12-inches (300 mm) oc.
WALL LOUVERS
089100-3
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbad Georgina Cole Library
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Reseorch + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 1 0, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
C. Louver Screen Frames: Fabricate with mitered comers to louver sizes indicated.
1. Metal: Same kind and form of metal as indicated for louver to which screens are
attached.
2. Finish; Mill finish, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Type: Non-rewirable, U-shaped frames for permanently securing screen mesh.
D. Louver Screening for Galvanized-Steel Louvers:
1. Bird Screening: Galvanized steel, 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) square mesh, 0.041-inch
(1.04-mm) wire.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Assemble louvers in factory to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units as
necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and
coordinated installation.
B. Maintain equal louver blade spacing, including separation between blades and frames at
head and sill, to produce uniform appearance.
C. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with
allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances,
and perimeter sealant joints.
1. Louver Frame: Channel shape, welded comer joints.
2. Louver Panel Thickness: 6-inches deep.
D. Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly.
E. Where indicated, provide subsills made of same material as louvers or extended sills for
recessed louvers.
F. Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds concealed
from view, unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections
between frame members necessary.
G. Head and Sill Flashings: Roll formed or extmded to required shape, single length in one
piece per location.
2.7 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
2.8 GALVANIZED-STEEL SHEET FINISHES
A. Finish louvers after assembly.
B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces with nonpetroleum solvent so surfaces are free of oil
and other contaminants. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating suited to the organic
coating to be applied over it. Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas and
repah according to ASTM A780/A780M.
WALL LOUVERS
089100-4
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgino Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
C. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish; Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply
manufacturer's standard 2-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting
topcoat, with a minimum dry film thickness of 1 mil (0.025 mm) for topcoat. Comply with
coating manufacturer's written instmctions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum
dry film thickness of 2 mils (0.05 mm).
1. Color and Gloss; As selected by Architect from manufacturer's fiill range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that prepared openings and flashings are ready to receive work and opening
dimensions are as indicated on Shop Drawings.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install louver assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instmctions.
B. Locate and place louvers and vents level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent
work.
C. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws
where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection.
D. Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured.
E. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as
indicated.
F. Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering, and grinding. Restore finishes so
no evidence remains of corrective work. Retum items that cannot be refinished in the field
to the factory, make required alterations, and refinish entire unit or provide new units.
G. Protect galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action by
applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint on surfaces that will be in contact with
concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals.
H. Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation as louver installation
progresses, where weathertight louver joints are required. Comply with Section 079200 for
sealants applied during louver installation.
I. Install flashings and align louver assembly to ensure moisture shed from flashings and
diversion of moisture to exterior.
J. Secure louvers in opening framing with concealed fasteners.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Strip protective finish coverings.
WALL LOUVERS
089100-5
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research -I- Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
B. Restore louvers and vents damaged during installation and constmction so no evidence
remains of corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by
Architect, remove damaged units and replace with new units.
1. Touch up minor abrasions in finishes with air-dried coating that matches color and
gloss of, and is compatible with, factory-applied finish coating.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces of louvers and vents that are not protected by temporary covering,
to remove fingerprints and soil during constmction period. Do not let soil accumulate until
final cleaning.
B. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or detergent not
harmfiil to finishes. Thoroughly rinse surfaces and dry.
C. Constmction Waste Management: Manage constmction waste in accordance with
provisions of Section 01524 Constmction Waste Management.
END OF SECTION 089100
^^^^
WALL LOUVERS
089100-6
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Non-load-bearing steel framing members for the following applications:
1. Interior framing systems (e.g., supports for partition walls, framed soffits, furring,
etc.).
2. Interior suspension systems (e.g., supports for ceilings, suspended soffits, etc.).
3. Resilient channel installation for acoustical constmction.
4. Flat strap and backing plate for support of wall mounted equipment and fixtures.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 092900 - Gypsum Board: Application of gypsum board over non-load bearing
steel framing.
B. Section 072116 - Blanket Insulation: Acoustic insulation.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following:
1. Brand.
2. Stud sizes.
3. Stud gauge.
B. Shop Drawings; Show provision for fixture and equipment anchorage to stud systems
different from typical systems or details indicated.
C. Sustainabiiity Submittals:
1. Product Data for products having recycled content, documentation indicating
percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content.
a. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.
b. Provide total weight of products provided.
2. Product Data for each material, including its source, cost, and the fraction by weight
that is considered regional and that has been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as
well as manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies; Provide materials and constmction identical to those
tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM El 19 by an independent testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
092216 - 1
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 201 5 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics; Provide components that comply with rating
requirements specified for fire-rated assemblies under UL 2079 for non-load bearing wall
systems.
1. Deflection Clips and Firestop Track; Connections and/or top mnner provided in fire-
resistance-rated assemblies shall be certified by UL 2079 for cyclic movement
requirements.
C. STC-Rated Assemblies; For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and constmction
identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E90 and classified
according to ASTM E413 by an independent testing agency.
D. Stmctural supports and blocking for light fixtures and miscellaneous wall- or ceiling-
mounted items shall be designed and engineered by Contractor.
E. Performance Requirements:
1. Loads: Comply with CBC requirements for design of metal framing systems for
gypsum board wall assemblies.
2. Deflection:
a. Partitions to Receive Gypsum Board: L/240.
b. Partitions to Receive Tile Backer Board; L/360.
c. Framed Ceilings: L/360. L/240 maximum, typical.
3. Seismic Requirements: Comply with code requirements for seismic bracing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUSTAINABILITY MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS, GENERAL
A. Recycled Content: Provide products made from steel sheet with average recycled content
such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is
not less than the following:
I. Light Gage Metal Framing: Minimum 28 percent total recycled content, and
minimum 16 percent post-consumer recycled content.
B. Local/Regional Materials: Give preference to manufacturer's whose facilities are within a
500 mile radius of the project site. Also give preference to materials that are harvested,
extracted, mined, quarried, etc. within a 500 mile radius of the project site.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Steel Framing and Furring Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
provide products by one of the following:
1. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co.
2. United States Gypsum Co.
B. Steel Slip-Type Head Joints: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
1. Brady Constmction Innovations, Inc., Sliptrack Systems.
2. ClarkDietrich Building Systems, SLP-TRK Slotted Track.
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
092216 - 2
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
C. Grid Suspension Assemblies: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
by one of the following;
1. Chicago Metallic Corp.
2. USG Interiors, Inc.
D. Steel Headers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. ClarkDiettich Building Systems, ProX Header.
2.3 STEEL FRAMING FOR FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A. Framing Members, General; Comply with ASTM C754 for conditions indicated.
1. Steel Studs and Runners; Comply with ASTM C645 requirements for metal and
profiles shown on Drawings, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm).
a. If stud thickness is not indicated, provide thickness as required for specified
deflection criteria, based on stud depth and spacing indicated and partition
height required.
b. If stud spacing is not indicated, space studs at 16-inches oc.
3. Flange Edges of Studs; Bent back 90 deg and doubled over to form 3/16-inch-wide
minimum lip (retum) and complying with the requirements indicated on Drawings
for depth indicated.
4. Protective Coating: ASTM A653/A653M, G60 (Z180) minimum, hot-dip galvanized
zinc coating, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Slip-Type Head Joints; Where indicated, provide the following:
1. Slotted Slip Track; ASTM C645 top mnner with 2-1/2-inch- (63.5-mm-) deep
flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs; with 1-1/2-inch x 1/4-inch
vertical slots.
C. Interior Headers: ASTM A653/A653M and ASTM C645, where indicated.
1. Product; ClarkDietrich, ProSTUD Drywall Framing System.
a. ProSTUD 25;
1) Strength: 25 Gauge: Grade 50 with a minimum yield point of 50,000
psi (345 MPa).
2) Minimum Thickness: 0.0150 inches (0.3810 mm).
3) Design Thickness; 0.0158 inches (0.4013 mm).
b. ProSTUD 20:
1) Strength: 20 Gauge: Grade 65 with a minimum yield point of 65,000
psi (448 MPa).
2) Minimum Thickness: 0.019 inches (0.4826 mm).
3) Design Thickness: 0.0200 inches (0.5080 mm).
2. Width; As required for opening width indicated on Drawings.
3. Finish: Galvanized, Class G90 in accordance with ASTM A1003/A1003M with
coating weight in accordance with ASTM C645.
4. Intemal Clip: ProX Clip Series:
a. Thickness; 16 gauge (54 mils).
b. Width: As indicated on Drawings.
5. Fasteners: Sheet metal screws in accordance with ASTM C954 or SAE J78:
a. Interior; No. 8 screws.
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
092216 - 3
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Library
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set-April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
b. Exterior: No. 10 screws.
D. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width
indicated and where required by Owner for Owner-installed items. Where backing is not
indicated on Drawings comply with the following;
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness; 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm).
2. Install continuous plate across minimum 3 studs, attaching to each stud.
3. Notch channel at studs.
4. For Loads Under 50 lbs/ft:
a. Plate Size: 6" x 1-1/4", 16 gage track channel.
b. Attachment: No. 8 flat head screws, three at each stud.
5. For Loads 51 lbs/ft to 100 lbs/ft:
a. Plate Size; 6" x 1-1/4", 16 gage track channel.
b. Attachment: Welding.
6. For Loads 101 lbs/ft to 250 lbs/ft:
a. Plate Size; 6-inch wide 14 gage plate with 4" x 1-1/4" 16 gage track channel
stiffeners welded to back.
E. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.0538-inch (1.37-inm) bare-steel thickness, with
minimum 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flanges.
1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38.1 mm) minimum, unless noted otherwise on Drawings.
2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches (38.1 by 38.1 mm), 0.068-inch-
(1.73-mm-) thick, galvanized steel.
F. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels; ASTMC645.
1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness; 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm).
2. Depth; 7/8 inch (22.2 mm).
2.4 SUSPENSION SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A. Tie Wire: ASTM A641/A641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch-(1.59-mm-)
diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch- (1.2I-mm-) diameter wire.
B. Wire Hangers; ASTM A641/A641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162-inch (4.12-
mm) diameter.
C. Carrying Channels; Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of
0. 0538 inch (1.37 mm) and minimum 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flanges.
1. Depth: 2 inches (51 mm).
D. Furring Channels (Furring Members): As specified herein.
E. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings; ASTM C645, direct-hung system
composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock.
1. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following;
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems.
b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; 640 Drywall Ceiling Suspension.
c. USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System.
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
092216 - 4
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Reseorch -I- Plonning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.
1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding
power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substtates.
B. Shot Pins: 0.140-inch diameter low velocity powder-actuated drive pins equivalent to
Ramset/Red Head No. 1508, or equal, with 7/8-inch minimum penetration into concrete.
C. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide the following:
1. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener
penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, in width to suit steel
stud size.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2
Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal
frames, cast-in anchors, and stmctural framing, for compliance with requirements,
installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Installation Standard: ASTM C754.
1. Portland Cement Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in
ASTM C1063 that apply to framing installation.
2. Gypsum Board Assemblies; Also comply with requirements in ASTM C840 that
apply to framing installation.
B. Cutting:
1. General; Cut framing components squarely or on angle as required to fit tightly with
proper bearing against abutting members.
2. Cutting Studs: If stud web is cut more than 50-percent, or stud flanges are cut,
restore stud to original strength by wire-tying, or welding on steel reinforcement.
C. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy
trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, fumishings, or similar constmction.
1. Comply with details indicated and with recommendations of gypsum board
manufacturer or, if none available, with "Gypsum Constmction Handbook" published
by United States Gypsum Co.
D. Backing Plates:
1. Install as indicated and specified for support of wall-hung cabinets, toilet partitions
and accessories, and other items to be mounted on vertical surfaces.
2. Welding shall comply with AWS D1.3.
3. Paint welds with a mst-inhibitive paint.
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
092216 - 5
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Reseorch + Plonning, Inc.
Bid Set-April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
E. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.
F. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing
members. Frame both sides of joints independently.
G. Isolate steel framing from building stmcture at locations indicated to prevent transfer of
loading imposed by stmctural movement. Comply with details shown on Drawings.
Provide slip- or cushioned-type joints as detailed to attain lateral support and avoid axial
loading.
H. Partitions must securely abut to building mullions and walls. Do not use mechanical
fasteners to connect framing to mullions; provide closed cell neoprene gasket between
mullion and end stud.
3.3 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Install suspension system components in sizes and spacings indicated on Drawings, but not
less than those required by referenced installation standards for assembly types and other
assembly components indicated.
B. Isolate suspension systems from building stmcture where they abut or are penetrated by
building stmcture to prevent transfer of loading imposed by stmctural movement.
C. Suspend hangers from building stmcture as follows:
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within
ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting stmctural or suspension system. '•^mmi^
a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstmctions and offset resulting
horizontal forces by bracing, counter-splaying, or other equally effective
means.
2. Where width of ducts and other constmction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard
suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers
in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices.
a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads
within performance limits established by referenced installation standards.
3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to stmctures or to
inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for
substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.
4. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.
D. Seismic Bracing; Sway-brace suspension systems with hangers used for support.
E. Headers: Install in accordance with ASTM C1007.
F. Grid Suspension Systems for Use with Gypsum Board; Attach perimeter wall track or
angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam
and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track.
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
092216 - 6
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrory
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set-April 10, 2015
G. Installation Tolerances; Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12
feet (3 mm in 3.6 m) measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and
transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes.
3.4 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A. Where studs are installed directiy against dissimilar materials at exterior walls, install
isolation sttip between studs and exterior wall.
B. Install steel studs and furring in sizes and at spacings indicated but not less than that
required by the referenced steel framing installation standard to comply with maximum
deflection and minimum loading requirements specified;
1. Space studs as indicated on Drawings.
2. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction and so that
leading edges or ends of each gypsum board can be attached to open (unsupported)
edges of stud flanges first.
C. Install tracks (mnners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing fiill height to
stmctural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are
indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating
partitions above ceiling.
1. Deflection Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead stmctural supports,
install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of
finished assemblies.
2. Door Openings: Frame door openings to comply with details indicated and with
applicable published recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer. Screw
vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install mnner track
section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.
a. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.
b. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of
overhead stmcture, where indicated on Drawings.
3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as
required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of
openings to match framing required above door heads.
D. Stud Wall Lateral Bracing: Comply with requirements of the CBC. Laterally brace walls
extending above ceiling height by means of braces installed at not more than 45 degrees
from horizontal as follows:
1. 3-5/8 in X 25 gauge studs at 8 feet oc on each side of wall (in tension only).
2. 12 gauge wire at 6 feet oc on each side of wall (in tension only).
3. 3-5/8 inch x 1-1/4 inch x 16 gauge studs at 8 feet oc acting in either tension or
compression. They may be on one side of wall only.
a. Maximum length is 7 feet when in compression.
b. For lengths from 7 to 10 feet (when in compression) form box studs built from
two studs welded toe to toe for lengths from 10' to 16' (when in compression).
c. Form "T" sections of 4" x 1-5/8" x 18 gauge studs welded together.
4. Attach stud braces at middle third of beams, purlins or joists.
E. Provide horizontal 3/4 inch channel track and web stiffeners continuous at all walls over
17 feet high.
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
092216 - 7
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Plonning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
F. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more
than 1/8 inch (3 mm) in 10 feet in any direction from the plane formed by faces of adjacent
framing.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Constmction Waste Management; Manage constmction waste in accordance with
provisions of Section 01524 Constmction Waste Management.
END OF SECTION 092216
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
092216 - 8
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set-April 10, 2015
SECTION 092400 - PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Metal fiirring and lathing.
B. Portland cement plaster systems of the following types:
1. 3-coat system over metal stud framing.
C. Integral color acrylic plaster finish system.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 092900 - Gypsum Board: Exterior sheathing substrate for cement plaster system.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data; For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples for Verification;
1. Integral Color Finish Coat: For each type of factory-prepared colored finish coat
indicated; 12 by 12 inches (305 by 305 mm), and prepared on rigid backing.
2. Accessories: For each type of accessory specified.
C. Sustainabiiity Submittals:
1. Product Data for products having recycled content, documentation indicating
percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include
statement indicating cost for each product having recycled content.
2. Product Data for each material, including its source, cost, and the fraction by weight
that is considered regional and that has been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as
well as manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site.
3. Product Data for paints and coatings, including printed statement of VOC content and
chemical components.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's code compliance report.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Wartanty: Sample of special warranty.
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING
092400-1
City of Corlsbod Controct 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
1.7
A.
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrory
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Perform Work in accordance with Northwest Wall and Ceiling Bureau's Stucco Resource
Guide.
B.
C.
1.8
Mockups; Before plastering, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m) in surface area
to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. Build
mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the
completed Work;
1. Install mockups for each type of color and finish indicated.
2. Architect will select representative surfaces and conditions for application of plaster.
3. Build mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as
directed by Architect.
4. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be
constmcted.
5. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects, fabrication, and installation.
6. In presence of Architect, damage part of the exposed-face surface for each finish,
color, and texture, and demonstrate materials and techniques proposed for repair of
surface blemishes to match adjacent undamaged surfaces.
Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting application of plaster system.
Maintain mockups during constmction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed Work.
Demolish and remove mockups when directed.
Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time
of Substantial Completion.
7.
9.
10
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements
in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from
weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, constmction ttaffic, and other
causes.
1.9 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Exterior Plasterwork;
1. Apply and cure plaster to prevent plaster drying out during curing period. Use
procedures required by climatic conditions, including moist curing, providing
coverings, and providing barriers to deflect sunlight and wind.
2. Apply plaster when ambient temperature is greater than 40 deg F (4.4 deg C).
3. Protect plaster coats from freezing for not less than 48 hours after set of plaster coat
has occurred.
4. Ventilate building spaces as required to remove water in excess of that required for
hydrating plaster in a maimer that prevents drafts of air from contacting surfaces
during plaster application and until plaster is dry.
B. Factory-Prepared Finishes: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for
environmental conditions for applying finishes.
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING
092400-2
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUSTAINABILITY MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS, GENERAL
A. Recycled Content: Provide products made from steel with average recycled content such
that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not
less than 25 percent.
B. Local/Regional Materials: Give preference to manufacturer's whose facihties are whhin a
500 mile radius of the project site. Also give preference to materials that are harvested,
extracted, mined, quarried, etc. within a 500 mile radius ofthe project site.
C. VOC Content: Adhesives, sealants, paints, welding, and coatings applied on-site on the
interior of the building and products used on the interior of the building shall comply with
VOC limhs as specified in Section 018113 - Sustainable Design Requirements.
1. Use materials that have the lowest possible VOC content in units of g/L when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
D. Primer; 100% BMI acrylic primer and textured finish.
E. Water: Clean, fresh, potable and free of mineral or organic matter which can affect plaster.
2.2 FIELD MDCED PLASTER MATERIA.LS
A. Base-Coat Cements: Type as indicated below;
1. Portland cement, ASTM C150/C150M, Type I or II.
2. Masonry cement, ASTM C91/C91M, Type N.
B. Lime: ASTM C206, Type S or special hydrated lime for masonry purposes, ASTM C207,
Type S.
C. Sand Aggregate for Base Coats: Natural or manufactured sand, in accordance with
ASTM C897.
D. Alkali-Resistant Fiber Reinforcement; ASTM Cll 16/Cl 116M Type III 4.1.3, 100% virgin
homopolymer micro-fibers; 1/2- to 3/4-inch long, free of contaminants, containing no
reprocessed olefin materials, engineered and designed to be added to stucco scratch coat.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Fibercast 500 (formerly Harbourite), manufactured by SI Concrete Systems,
(423) 892-8080 www.fibermesh.com.
b. Grace Micro Fiber manufactured by Grace Constmction Products (877) 423-
6491 www.graceconstmction.com.
c. Stticco-Bond manufacttired by Porta Corp. (800) 245-0306
www.fortacorp.com.
E. Bonding Agent:
1. Exterior Plaster: ASTMC932, resinous emulsion which will provide bond for
gypsum or Portland cement, plaster, concrete, masonry, old or new surfaces
2. Interior Plaster; ASTM C631, non-oxidizing, non-crystallizing, and unaffected by
reapplication of water.
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING
092400-3
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set-April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
F. Dash-Coat Material; BMI Natural/White Stucco Finish.
G. Water: Clean, fresh, potable and free of mineral or organic matter that can affect plaster.
H. Field Mixed Plaster Finish Materials;
1. Cement: As specified for plaster base coat, white color.
2. Lime: As specified for plaster base coat.
I. Ready-Mixed Acrylic-Based Finish Coatings: Factory-mixed acrylic-emulsion coating
systems, formulated with colorfast mineral pigments and fine aggregates; anti-bacterial,
anti-fungal, and with ulttaviolet screening agents, for use over Portland cement plaster base
coats. Include manufacturer's recommended primers and sealing topcoats for acrylic-based
finishes.
1. Products:
a. La Habra Stucco.
b. Califomia Stucco Products Corp.
c. ChemRex.
d. United States Gypsum Co.
2. Color Pigment: Mineral oxide type, color as selected; factory mixed.
3. Color; Match Architect's sample.
2.3 WEATHER BARRIERS
A. Weather-Resistive Barrier: See Section 072729.
2.4 LATHING AND CONTROL JOINT MATERIALS
A. Lath: ASTM C847, minimum 3.4 Ib./yd^ self-furred galvanized steel diamond mesh metal
lath.
1. Galvanize metal lath in compliance with ASTM A653/A653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip
galvanized zinc coating.
2. Partition Framing and Vertical Furring: Install flat diamond-mesh lath.
3. Flat-Ceiling and Horizontal Framing: Install 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) rib lath.
4. Curved-Ceiling Framing: Install welded-wire lath.
5. On Solid Surfaces, Not Otherwise Furred: Install self-furring, diamond-mesh lath.
B. Casing Bead; Formed sheet steel; minimum 25 gage thick; depth govemed by plaster
thickness; maximum possible lengths; expanded metal flanges, with square edges.
C. Control Joint Accessories:
1. Double-J Control Joint: Keene XJ15-3, CEMCO, or accepted equivalent; one-piece,
25 gage galvanized steel, expanded 2-inch solid sheet metal flanges each side.
2. Solid-Leg Control Joint: Keene #40, CEMCO, or accepted equivalent, two-piece, 25
gage galvanized steel, 2-inch solid sheet metal flanges each side.
3. Reveal: Fry, PCS-75-100, one-piece extmded aluminum, clear anodized finish.
Provide manufacturer's prefabricated watertight comers and transitions, and splice
plates.
D. Expanded Metal Strip Lath: ASTM C847 with ASTM A653/A653M, 60 (Z180), hot-dip
galvanized zinc coating.
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING
092400-4
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research -I- Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
E. Comer Mesh Reinforcement: Fabricated from metal lath with ASTM A653/A653M, G60
(Z180), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating.
F. Anchorage Methods; Screws or other approved metal supports, of type and size to suh
application, galvanized to rigidly secure lath and associated metal accessories in place.
G. Install woven wire metal lath on sheathed stud walls using self furring fasteners.
2.5 CEMENT PLASTER MDCES - FIELD MIX
A. General: Comply with ASTM C926 for applications indicated.
1. Fiber Content: Add fiber to base-coat mixes after ingredients have mixed at least two
minutes. Comply with fiber manufacturer's written instmctions for fiber quantities in
mixes, but do not exceed 1 lb of fiber/cu. ft. (16 kg of fiber/cu. m) of cementitious
materials. Reduce aggregate quantities accordingly to maintain workability.
B. Base Coat and Brown Coat: One part plastic cement, 3-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate, 0.5% by
weight plastic cement synthetic fibers, and 1/2 part (maximum) potable water.
C. Factory-Prepared Finish-Coat Mixes: For ready-mixed finish-coat plasters acrylic-based
finish coatings, comply with manufacturer's written instmctions.
D. Mix only as much plaster as can be used prior to initial set.
E. Add color pigments to finish coat in accordance with manufacturer's instmctions. Ensure
uniformity of mix and coloration.
F. Mix materials dry, to uniform color and consistency, before adding water.
G. Protect mixtures from freezing, frost, contamination, and evaporation.
H. Do not retemper mixes after initial set has occurred.
I. Do not use all plastic cement mixes.
2.6 FINISH
A. General: Provide finishes described in Technical Services Information Bureau's - Plaster
Textures & Acrylic Finishes.
1. Exterior Finish: Number 30 mesh, fine sand float surface finish.
2.7 ACCESSORIES
A. General: Comply with ASTM C1063 and coordinate depth of trim and accessories with
thicknesses and number of plaster coats required.
1. Foundation Weep Screed: Fabricated from hot-dip galvanized steel sheet,
ASTM A653/A653M, G60 (Z180) zinc coating.
2. ComerAid: Stockton Wire Products, Wire-CA; galvanized, welded wire exterior
comer reinforcement.
3. Extemal-Comer Reinforcement; Fabricated from metal lath with
ASTM A653/A653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating.
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING
092400-5
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set-April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
B. Exterior Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, also ASTM C1193 and tested under ASTM C719;
Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT, M, G, A, and O; single component, low-
modulus, non-sag sealant,
1. Acceptable Sealants:
a. Tremco; Spectrem 3 or Spectrem 4.
2. Sealants shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal
frames, cast-in anchors, and stmctural framing, for compliance with requirements and other
conditions affecting performance.
B. Ensure that the installation of the windows and sheet metal flashings, including the
associated self-adhesive flashings is completed prior to cement plaster installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protect adjacent work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration, and other harmful
effects caused by plastering.
B. Clean and remove surface projections, and apply bonding agent.
C. Verify support framing is tied together at specified spacing with 16 gage wire.
3.3 MEMBRANE INSTALLATION
A. Building Paper Installation: Apply minimum two layers of building paper over exterior
sheathing. Use small staples so that paper is taut and flat. Patch any holes in paper before
proceeding with installation of metal lath.
B. Self-Adhered Sheet Membrane:
1. Provide one layer self-adhered sheet membrane under all sheet metal flashings, at
interior and exterior comers of exterior walls and around window and door openings
under cement plaster.
2. Provide one layer of building paper over self-adhered sheet membrane under cement
plaster as a slip sheet.
3. Provide two layers self-adhered sheet membrane under copings and transition
flashings and at surfaces less than vertical. Where two layers of self-adhered sheet
membrane are required, lap sheet metal transition flashings between the two layers of
self-adhered sheet metal, one under one over the sheet metal flashing flange.
4. Properly weather-lap self-adhered sheet membrane installations to avoid reverse lap
conditions.
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING
092400-6
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research -I- Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
5. Do not penetrate non-vertical installations of self-adhered sheet membrane with
fasteners.
6. Where penetrations of vertical installation of self-adhered sheet membrane occur,
seal penetrations weathertight.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF METAL LATH
A. Install metal lath in accordance with ASTM C1063.
1. Partition Framing and Vertical Furring: Install flat diamond-mesh lath.
2. Flat-Ceiling and Horizontal Framing; Install 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) rib lath.
3. Curved-Ceiling Framing: Install welded-wire lath.
4. On Solid Surfaces, Not Otherwise Furred: Install self-fiirring, diamond-mesh lath.
B. Apply metal lath taut, with long dimension perpendicular to supports. Secure side laps with
tie wire where they occur between supports. Lap ends and sides.
1. Lap ends of lath minimum 1-inch in accordance with ASTM C933. Where end laps
occur between supports provide additional framing support in order to anchor lath to
stmcture, and secure with tie wire.
2. Lap sides of lath 1/2-inch minimum.
3. Run lath continuously at intemal comers or terminate with casing bead.
4. Secure self-fiirred type lath to framing at furring points as much as possible.
5. Fasteners: Spaced maximum 6-inches oc. All ceiling lath to be wire-tied to 3/4-inch
cold rolled channels. Screw attachment of overhead lath will not be permitted.
C. Discontinue lath at all control joint and expansion joint locations. Fully back the
discontinued sheets of lath at these locations with blocking for edge fasteners; ensure
control joints are located over studs or sheet metal backer plates.
1. Embed end of control joints in sealant during installation.
D . Attach metal lath to metal supports using 18-gage tie wire at maximum 6 inches oc.
3.5 INSTALLING ACCESSORIES
A. Install according to ASTM C1063 and at locations indicated on Drawings.
B. General: Anchor cement plaster accessories through the sheathing to the stud supports
using appropriate fasteners.
C. Reinforcement for Extemal Comers:
1. Install lath-type, extemal-coraer reinforcement at exterior locations.
2. Install comerbead at interior locations.
D. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings. Where not
indicated comply with the following;
1. As required to delineate plasterwork into areas (panels) of the following maximum
sizes:
a. Vertical Surfaces: 144 sq. ft. (13.4 sq. m).
b. Horizontal and other Nonvertical Surfaces; 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m).
2. At distances between control joints of not greater than 18 feet (5.5 m) oc.
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING
092400-7
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Library
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Reseorch -I- Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
3. As required to delineate plasterwork into areas (panels) with length-to-width ratios of
not greater than 2-1/2:1.
4. Where control joints occur in surface of constmction directly behind plaster.
5. Where plasterwork areas change dimensions, to delineate rectangular-shaped areas
(panels) and to relieve the stress that occurs at the comer formed by the dimension
change.
E. Place 6" x 18" sttip lath diagonally at comers of lathed openings and 12" around
penettations such as lighting fixtures. Secure rigidly in place.
F. Continuously reinforce intemal angles with comer mesh, except where the metal lath
retums 3 inches from comer to the angle reinforcement; fasten at perimeter edges only.
G. Place Comeraid at comers; fasten at outer edges only.
H. Place casing beads at terminations of plaster finish. Stop ends 1/4 inch away from top of
wall. Caulk with silicone sealant.
I. Reinforce interior angles and flat joints with joint tape and embedding material
recommended by manufacturer.
J. Position the layering of sheet membrane products and self-adhesive flashings so that plaster
does not come in direct contact with self-adhesive flashing at horizontal locations including
floor lines, reveals and sills.
3.6 PLASTER APPLICATION
A. Inspect building paper, after lath and accessory installation and before plastering, to identify
and repair open holes, tears or other water intmsion pathways.
B. General: Comply with ASTM C926 and manufacturer's instmctions.
1. Do not deviate more than plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6.4 mm in 3 m) from a
tme plane in finished plaster surfaces, as measured by a 10-foot (3-m) straightedge
placed on surface.
2. Finish plaster flush with metal frames and other built-in metal items or accessories
that act as a plaster ground unless otherwise indicated. Where casing bead does not
terminate plaster at metal frame, cut base coat free from metal frame before plaster
sets and groove fmish coat at junctures with metal.
C. Bonding Compound: Apply on solid flanges of metal accessories and plaster bases.
D. Do not install stucco during extremely hot, dry, or windy conditions. Do not install stucco
during freezing conditions or on frozen substrates.
E. Mechanically mix cementitious and aggregate materials for plasters to comply with
recommendations of plaster manufacturer.
F. Vertical Framed and Sheathed Surfaces; Apply scratch coat to a nominal thickness of 3/8
inch over metal lath, brown coat to a nominal thickness of 3/8 inch, and a finish coat to a
nominal thickness of 1/8 inch.
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING
092400-8
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Reseorch + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
1. When scratch coat is firm, score in one direction.
2. Apply scoring in brown coat to adequately key finish coat into base and as required
to achieve required finished texture in approved mockup.
3. Premixed Plaster Material: BMI 690 Plaster carries an ICC-ES Report #2535 which
allows for application of the scratch and brown coat for Type I-V constmction by any
of the following:
a. Traditional scratch and brown application.
b. Double-back method.
c. Single pass of the scratch and brown coat 3/4" - 7/8" in thickness.
G. Horizontal Surfaces: Apply scratch coat to a nominal thickness of 1/4-inch over metal lath,
brown coat to a nominal thickness of 1/4-inch, and a finish coat to a nominal thickness of
1/8-inch.
H. Walls; Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: Scratch and brown coats for three-coat
plasterwork; 3/4-inch (19-mm) thickness.
I. Ceilings; Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: Scratch and brown coats for three-coat
plasterwork; 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick.
J. Apply the stucco in discrete panels without intermption to avoid cold joints and differences
in appearance.
K. Abut wet stucco to set stucco at natural or architectural breaks in the wall such as expansion
joints, pilasters, terminations, or changes in plane.
L. Do not install stucco onto grounds of accessories.
M. Completely embed lath and flanges of accessories and completely cover attachments with
stucco.
N. Curing; Use fine fog spraying for curing operations.
1. Scratch Coat: Minimum 48 hours moist cure before application of brown coat.
2. Brown Coat: Minimum 48 hours moist cure; 7 days before application of finish coat.
3. After 48 hours, review with plastering superintendent to determine need for any
further moist curing.
3.7 FINISH COAT APPLICATION
A. General: Apply 1/8-inch (3 mm) thick finish coat and steel trowel to a smooth and
consistent finish to match approved mockup and Architect's sample.
B. Acrylic-Based Finish Coatings: Apply coating system, including primers, finish coats, and
sealing topcoats, according to manufacturer's written instmctions.
1. Trowel-apply acrylic finish, maintaining a wet edge at all times.
2. Do not moist cure acrylic finish.
3. Protect finished surface from climatic conditions until dry.
C. Avoid excessive working of surface. Delay troweling as long as possible to avoid drawing
excess fines to surface.
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING
092400-9
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 201 5 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
D. Ensure finished installation is tme, plumb and square. Remove excess stucco from within
control and expansion joints before the stucco sets.
3.8 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cut, patch, replace, and repair plaster as necessary to accommodate other work and to
restore cracks, dents, and imperfections.
B. Repair or replace work to eliminate blisters, buckles, crazing and check cracking, dry outs,
efflorescence, sweat outs, and similar defects and where bond to substrate has failed. Match
adjacent finish texture so no evidence of patching is visible.
C. Upon completion of application, point up plaster around trim and other locations where
plaster meets dissimilar materials.
3.9 PLASTER REPAIR
A. Where plaster is to be applied over existing plaster surface, remove any loose plaster
material and clean area to be repaired.
B. Repair and replace all sheathing found to have water or mold damage. Align new sheathing
flush with existing.
C. Install building paper, overlapping existing and covering new sheathing for a complete
underlayment system.
D. Install lath from new openings to existing lath, overlapping a minimum of 2 inches and
fasten in place.
E. Apply bonding agent to remaining plaster surfaces.
F. Apply finish coat and steel trowel to a smooth and consistent finish matching existing
adjacent finish as demonstrated in approved mock up.
G. Where all plaster is removed, cut edges of removed section straight and square. Remove all
plaster, lath, and building paper in preparation for installation of new material as specified
herein.
3.10 ADJUSTING
A. Remove temporary protection and enclosure of other work. Promptly remove plaster from
doorframes, windows, and other surfaces not indicated to be plastered. Repair floors, walls,
and other surfaces stained, martcd, or otherwise damaged during plastering.
3.11 CLEANING
A. Constmction Waste Management: Manage constmction waste in accordance with
provisions of Section 01524 Constmction Waste Management.
END OF SECTION 092400
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING
092400-10
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research -I- Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING
092400-11
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Gj^sum wallboard, rated and non-rated.
B. Ceramic tile backing wallboard.
C. Exterior sheathing.
D. Gypsum board trims and accessories.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 078400 - Firestopping.
B. Section 079200 - Joint Sealants: Acoustical sealant.
C. Section 092216 - Non-Stmctural Metal Framing.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Gypsum Board Constmction Terminology: Refer to ASTM Cll and GA-505 for
definitions of terms related to gypsum board assemblies not defined in this Section or in
other referenced standards.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product specified.
B. Sustainabiiity Submittals;
1. Product Data for products having recycled content, documentation indicating
percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content.
a. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.
b. Provide total weight of products provided.
2. Product Data for each material, including its source, cost, and the fraction by weight
that is considered regional and that has been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as
well as manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site.
3. Product Data for installation adhesives and sealants, including printed statement of
VOC content and chemical composition of each product used.
GYPSUM BOARD
092900-1
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of gypsum board certifying that their
products comply with specified requirements.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics; For gypsum board with fire-resistance ratings, provide
materials and constmction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to
ASTM El 19 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and
identification of manufacturer or supplier.
B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from
weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, constmction traffic, and other
causes. Neatly stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging.
C. Handle gypsum board to prevent damage to edges, ends, and surfaces. Do not bend or
otherwise damage metal comer beads and trim.
1.9 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions, General: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for
applying and finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C840 and with gypsum board
manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Room Temperatures: For nonadhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing, maintain
not less than 40 deg F (4 deg C). For adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum board,
maintain not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 48 hours prior to application and
continuously after until dry. Do not exceed 95 deg F (35 deg C) when using temporary heat
sources.
C. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces, as required, for drying joint treatment materials.
Avoid drafts during hot dry weather to prevent finishing materials from drying too rapidly.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUSTAINABILITY MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS, GENERAL
A. Recycled Content: Provide gypsum board products with average recycled content such that
postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less
than 50 percent.
GYPSUM BOARD
092900-2
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgino Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbod Controct 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
B. Local/Regional Materials: Give preference to manufacturer's whose facilities are within a
500 mile radius of the project site. Also give preference to materials that are harvested,
extracted, mined, quartied, etc. within a 500 mile radius of the project site.
C. VOC Content: Adhesives and sealants applied on-she on the interior of the building and
products used on the interior of the building shall comply with VOC limits as specified.
1. Use materials that have the lowest possible VOC content in units of g/L when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Gypsum Board and Related Products:
1. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co.
2. Pabco.
3. United States Gypsum Co.
2.3 GYPSUM BOARD PRODUCTS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Provide gypsum board materials manufactured by one of the
following:
1. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co.
2. United States Gypsum Co.
B. General; Provide gypsum board of types indicated in maximum lengths available to
minimize end-to-end butt joints.
C. Thickness: Provide gypsum board in thicknesses indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, in
5/8 inch thickness to comply with ASTM C840 for application system and support spacing
indicated.
D. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C1396/C1396M except where noted otherwise:
1. Fire-Rated Gypsum Board; ASTM C1396/C 1396M; Type X where required for fire-
resistive-rated assemblies.
2. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM CI396/C1396M; High-strength, sag-resistant type
for ceiling surfaces.
3. Long Edges: Tapered.
4. Thickness; 5/8-inch throughout unless indicated otherwise on Drawings.
E. Exterior Gypsum Sheathing; ASTM C1I77/C1177M, Georgia-Pacific, Dens-Glass Gold
Exterior Sheathing, 5/8-inch- (15.8-mm-) thick water-resistant treated gypsum core board
with inorganic glass mats both sides and long edges, gold color alkali resistant surface
coating, for exterior applications.
2.4 CERAMIC TILE BACKE^JG PANELS
A. Panel Size; Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in
each area and correspond with support system indicated.
GYPSUM BOARD
092900-3
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
B. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C1178/C1178M.
1. Manufacturer: Georgia Pacific; DensShield Tile Backer.
2. Core; 5/8 inch (15.9 mm). Type X.
3. Mold Resistance; ASTM D3273, score of 10.
4. Locations: Where ceramic tile is to be installed; maximum framing at 16-inches oc.
2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Accessories for Interior Installation: Comer beads, edge trim, and control joints complying
with ASTM C1047.
1. Material: Formed metal or metal combined with paper, with metal sheet steel zinc-
coated by hot-dip or electrolytic processes, or with aluminum or rolled zinc.
B. Square Comer Bead Reinforcement: One of the following or accepted equivalent:
1. Dur-A-Bead as manufactured by USG or accepted equivalent.
2. Wallboard comer bead with 1 1/4-inch flanges as manufactured Gold Bond Building
Products Div., National Gypsum Co. or accepted equivalent.
C. Metal Casing Bead: One ofthe following or accepted equivalent:
1. No. 200A Metal Trim manufactured by USG or accepted equivalent.
2. No. 100 wall board casing manufactured by Gold Bond National Gypsum Company.
D. Control Joints: One of the following or accepted equivalent;
1. No. 093; as manufactured by USG or accepted equivalent.
2. E-Z expansion joint 0.093 zinc control joint, manufactured by Gold Bond National
Gypsum Company.
2.6 JOINT TREATMENT MATEIOALS
A. General: Provide joint treatment materials complying with ASTM C475 and the
recommendations of both the manufacturers of sheet products and of joint treatment
materials for each application indicated.
B. Joint Tape for Gypsum Board: ASTM C475 and as follows;
1. Interior Gypsum Board; Paper reinforcing tape, one grade for bedding tapes and
filling depressions, and one for topping and sanding, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh.
C. Setting-Type Joint Compounds for Gypsum Board:
1. Factory-packaged, job-mixed, chemical-hardening powder products formulated for
uses indicated.
2. Where setting-type joint compounds are indicated as a taping compound only or for
taping and filling only, use formulation that is compatible with other joint
compounds applied over it.
D. For filling joints and treating fasteners of water-resistant gypsum backing board behind
base for ceramic tile, use formulation recommended by the gypsum board manufacturer for
this purpose.
GYPSUM BOARD
092900-4
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
E. For topping compound, use sandable formulation.
F. Drying-Type Joint Compounds for Interior Gypsum Board; Factory-packaged vinyl-based
products complying with the following requirements for formulation and intended use.
1. Ready-Mixed Formulation: Factory-mixed product.
2. All-purpose compound formulated for both taping and topping compounds.
G. Joint Compound for Exterior Applications:
1. Basis-of-Design Product; G-P Gypsum; "ToughRock Setting Compound."
2. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board; As recommended by sheathing board
manufacturer.
2.7 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. Spot Grout: ASTM C475, setting-type joint compound recommended for spot grouting
hollow metal door frames.
B. Fastening Adhesive for Metal: Special adhesive recommended for laminating gypsum
panels to steel framing.
1. VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives and Glues; Use installation adhesives that
comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24);
a. Multipurpose Constmction Adhesives: 70 g/L.
C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C1002, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Use screws complying with ASTM C954 for fastening panels to steel members from
0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick.
a. Gold Bond, Type-S, 1-inch drjrwall screws.
b. U.S. Gypsum Type-S, panhead, 1-inch.
D. Drywall Adhesive: APA AFG-01; Liquid Nails or PL400.
1. VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives and Glues; Use installation adhesives that
comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
a. Gypsum Board and Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L.
E. Other Fasteners: As required and recommended by gypsum wallboard manufacturer and in
accordance with the specified Standards. Space fasteners in accordance with CBC Table
47 G and 47 H.
F. Acoustical Accessories:
1. Acoustic Insulation; See Section 072116.
2. Acoustical Sealant: See Section 079200.
3. Rated Acoustical Sealant; See Section 079200.
GYPSUM BOARD
092900-5
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
PART 3 - EXECUTION
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
3.1 EXAMEMATION
A. Examine substrates to which gypsum board assemblies attach or abut, installed hollow
metal frames, cast-in-anchors, and stmctural framing with Installer present for compliance
with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
assemblies specified in this Section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL
A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: Install and finish gypsum panels to
comply with ASTM C840 and GA-216.
B. When cutting gypsum drywall is required, work from the face side. When cutting by
scoring, cut through the face paper and then snap the panel back away from the cut face.
Then break the back paper by snapping the gypsum board in the reverse direction or by
cutting the back paper.
1. Smooth all cut ends and edges of panels where necessary to obtain a smooth joint.
C. Install wall/partition board panels to minimize the number of abutting end joints or avoid
them entirely. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in altemate
courses of board. At high walls, install panels horizontally with end abutting joints over
studs and staggered.
D. Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings, or if not indicated, install
according to ASTM C840 in specific locations as directed by Architect.
E. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged, or damp
panels. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16
inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.
F. Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating intemal comer
constmction. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber,
including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members, or provide
control joints to counteract wood shrinkage.
G. Locate both edge or end joints over supports. Position adjoining panels so that tapered
edges abut tapered edges, and field-cut edges abut field-cut edges and ends. Do not place
tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints over different studs on
opposite sides of partitions. Avoid joints at comers of framed openings where possible.
H. Attach gypsum panels to studs so that the leading edge or end of each panel is attached to
nailing members except where joints are at right angles to framing members.
I. For cut-outs in panels for pipes, fixtures, or other small openings, make holes and cut-outs
by sawing or by such other method that will not fracture the core or tear the covering and
with such accuracy that plates, escutcheons, trim, etc., will cover all edges.
GYPSUM BOARD
092900-6
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbod Controct 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
1. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts. ,,
2. Use of "score and knock out" method will not be permitted.
J. Where partitions intersect open roof tmsses and other stmctural members projecting below
underside of roof stmcture, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by coffers, joists, and
other stmctural members; allow 1/4-to-1/2-inch-wide joints to install sealant.
K. Apply wall board first to ceilings and then to walls, using maximum practical lengths to
minimize end joints.
L. Isolate perimeter of non-load-bearing gypsum board partitions at stmctural abutments,
except floors, as detailed. Provide l/4-inch-to-l/2-inch-wide spaces at these locations and
trim edges with U-bead edge trim where edges of gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints
between edges and abutting stmctural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
M. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and
finishing standard and manufacturer's recommendations.
N. Where gypsum wallboard is applied to metal ceiling framing or furring, attach with 1 inch
Type S screws at 16 inches oc in field and with 1-1/4 inch Type S screw at 12 inches oc at
edges.
O. Treat cut edges and holes in moisture resistant gypsum board with sealant.
P. Place control joints to be consistent with lines of building spaces.
1. Provide where system abuts stmctural elements.
2. Provide at dissimilar materials.
3. Provide where lengths in partitions exceed 30'-0".
Q. At recesses for equipment and accessories in fire rated walls, line recess with fire rated
gypsum board to maintain specified fire rating of wall.
R. For partitions, apply full height sheets with long dimension parallel to framing members
with abutting edges over supports. Where ceiling heights exceed lO'-O" and where required
by fire resistive ratings, apply sheets with long dimension perpendicular to framing
members. For ceilings, apply sheets with long dimension either perpendicular or parallel to
framing members to result in fewest joints. For fire-rated assemblies, apply gypsum board
in accordance with CBC Tables 720.1(2) and 720.1(3) as applicable.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF FASTENERS
A. Start screws at the center of the gypsum board sheet.
B. Do not locate fasteners less than 3/8-inch from edges or ends of sheets. Do not locate
fasteners less than one-inch from edges or ends in horizontal applications.
C. Fire-Rated Partitions: Install fasteners in accordance with the more restrictive of either
CBC Table 720.1(2) or the Underwriters' Laboratories assemblies as denoted on partition
schedule.
GYPSUM BOARD
092900-7
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
D. Non-Fire-Rated Partitions: Install fasteners in accordance with GA-216 and ASTM C840.
E. Fire-Rated Ceilings: Install fasteners in accordance with CBC Table 720.1(3).
F. Non-Fire-Rated Ceilings: Install fasteners spaced not more than 12-inches on center.
G. Install screws using powered screw guns with adjustable screw-depth control head. Drive
shank perpendicular to gypsum board surface. Do not hammer screws.
H. Set fastener heads slightly below surface of gypsum board, but do not break or strip paper
face around fastener.
I. Stagger fasteners opposite each other on adjacent ends and edges.
J. Omit fasteners at edges where metal edge trim will be installed.
3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. General; For trim accessories with back flanges, fasten to framing with the same fasteners
used to fasten gypsum board. Otherwise, fasten trim accessories according to accessory
manufacturer's directions for type, length, and spacing of fasteners.
B. Install comer beads at extemal comers.
C. Install edge trim where edge of gypsum panels would otherwise be exposed or semi-
exposed. Provide edge trim type with face flange formed to receive joint compound except
where other types are indicated.
D. Control Joints:
1. Ceilings: Maximum area for ceilings with perimeter relief shall be 2,500-sq. ft.;
maximum area for ceilings without perimeter relief shall be 900-sq. ft. Do not exceed
50-feet between control joints in ceilings with perimeter relief; 30-feet between
control joints in ceilings without perimeter relief
2. Walls and Partitions; Maximum spacing between control joints shall not exceed 30-
feet.
3. Control joint locations shall occur only where indicated on reviewed layout
drawings.
E. Install L-bead where edge trims can only be installed after gypsum panels are installed.
3.5 FEsflSHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
A. General; Apply joint treatment at gypsum board joints (both directions); flanges of comer
bead, edge trim, and control joints; penetrations; fastener heads, surface defects, and
elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration and levels of
gypsum board finish indicated.
GYPSUM BOARD
092900-8
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
B. Carefully inspect the Drawings and verify the desired location of metal trim. Install all
metal trim in strict accordance with the approved submittal of the manufacturer's
recoinmendations, paying particular attention to make all trim installations plumb, level and
tme to line with firm attachment to supporting members.
C. PrefiU open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged areas using setting-type joint
compound.
D. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints and to trim accessories with concealed face
flanges as recommended by trim accessory manufacturer and as required to prevent cracks
from developing in joint compound at flange edges.
1. Taping is not required under wainscot surfaces, except at moisture-resistant type and
fire-rated type walls.
E. Fold reinforcing tape along its centeriine and apply to all interior angles, following the
same procedure for all joints.
F. Lightly sand and dry compound with fine sandpaper between coats to remove all
irregularities.
G. Apply a second coat of compound to all joints, feathering approximately 3 inches beyond
edges of the tape. Also apply a second coat to all nail recesses, leaving flush with the
adjacent surface. When compound is dry, sand again.
H. Apply final skim coat, feathering out approximately 2 inches beyond the second coat.
Third coat nail recesses and metal trims. Skim coat interior angles. After drying, lightly
sandpaper surfaces, using caution not to excessively damage the face paper of the gypsum
drywall.
I. Examine surfaces to ensure against defects. Touch up as required for uniformity. Provide
smooth, un-textured sanded finish suitable to receive specified paint system.
J. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below, according to ASTM
C840:
1. Level 0: In areas of temporary constmction, no taping or accessories are required.
2. Level 1; Ceiling plenum areas and concealed areas. Provide higher level of finish as
required to comply with fire-resistance ratings and acoustical ratings.
3. Level 2: Gj^sum board substrate at tiling, except remove tool marks and ridges.
4. Level 3: Not used.
5. Level 4:
a. Location(s): Staff offices.
b. Finish Texture: Smooth.
6. Level 5:
a. Location(s): Reading rooms, conference rooms, group study rooms, and large
open areas that are not clearly labeled as staff office spaces; bulkheads, soffits,
and gypsum board finish surfaces in areas of the building accessible to the
public with wall areas greater than lOOSF.
b. Finish Texture; Smooth.
GYPSUM BOARD
092900-9
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
K. Interior Gypsum Board Finishing:
1. Comers: Square.
2. Taping (Level 1):
a. Use taping or all-purpose compound.
b. Butter taping compound into inside comers and joints.
c. Center tape over joints and press down into fresh compound.
d. Remove excess compound. Tape joints of gypsum board above suspended
ceilings.
3. First Coat (Level 2):
a. Use taping or all-purpose drying-type compound or setting-type joint
compound.
b. Immediately after bedding tape, apply skim coat of compound over body of
tape and allow to dry completely in accordance with manufacturer's
instmctions.
c. Apply first coat of compound over flanges of trim and accessories, and over
exposed fastener heads and finish level with board surface.
4. Second Coat (Level 3):
a. Use all purpose or topping drying type joint compound.
b. After first coat treatments is dried, apply second coat of compound over tape
and trim, feathering compound 2-inches beyond edge of first coat.
5. Third Coat (Level 4):
a. Use all purpose or topping drying type joint compound.
b. After second coat has dried, sand surface lightly and apply thin finish coat to
joints, fasteners and trim, feathering compound 2-inches beyond edge of
second coat.
c. Allow third coat to dry. Apply additional compound, and touch-up and sand,
to provide surface free of visual defects, tool marks, and ridges, ready for
application of finish.
6. Skim Coat (Level 5);
a. Apply skim coat of all-purpose drying-type compound over exposed surfaces
of gypsum board.
b. After skim coat has dried, touch-up and sand to provide surface free of visual
defects, tool marks, and ridges, and ready for application of finish.
3.6 INSTALLATION OF EXTERIOR GYPSUM SHEATHING
A. Comply with GA-253 and manufacturer's written instmctions.
B. Cut boards at penetrations, edges, and other obstmctions of work; fit tightly against
abutting constmction, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Install boards with a 3/8-inch (9-mm) setback where non-load-bearing constmction
abuts stmctural elements.
2. Install boards with a 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) setback where they abut masonry or similar
materials that might retain moisture, to prevent wicking.
C. Coordinate sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these
materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing
through completed exterior wall assembly.
GYPSUM BOARD
092900-10
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Plonning, Inc. City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 201 5
D. Apply fasteners so screw heads bear tightly against face of sheathing boards but do not cut
into facing.
E. Do not bridge building expansion joints with sheathing; cut and space edges to match
spacing of stmctural support elements.
F. Horizontal Installation: Install sheathing with V-grooved edge down and tongue edge up.
Interlock tongue with groove to bring long edges in contact with edges of adjacent boards
without forcing. Abut ends of boards over centers of stud flanges, and stagger end joints of
adjacent boards not less than one stud spacing. Screw-attach boards at perimeter and
within field of board to each steel stud.
1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches (200 mm) oc. and set back a minimum of 3/8
inch (9 mm) from edges and ends of boards.
G. Vertical Installation; Install board vertical edges centered over flanges of steel studs. Abut
ends and edges of each board with those of adjacent boards. Screw-attach boards at
perimeter and within field of board to each steel stud.
1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches (200 mm) oc and set back a minimum of 3/8
inch (9 mm) from edges and ends of boards.
3.7 EXTERIOR SHEATHING JOINT-AND-PENETRATION TREATMENT
A. Seal sheathing joints according to sheathing manufacturer's written recommendations.
1. Apply elastomeric sealant on joints and fasteners and trowel flat. Apply sufficient
quantity of sealant to completely cover joints and fasteners after troweling. Seal
other penetrations and openings.
2. Apply glass-fiber sheathing tape to glass-mat gypsum sheathing board joints, and
apply and trowel silicone emulsion sealant to embed sealant in entire face of tape.
Apply sealant to exposed fasteners with a trowel so fasteners are completely
covered. Seal other penetrations and openings.
3.8 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. General; Execute cutting, fitting, and patching to repair damage.
1. Fit products together, to integrate with existing work.
2. Remove and replace defective gj^sum board.
B. Cutting:
1. Perform cutting, associated stmctural reinforcing, and patching in a manner to
prevent damage to the existing building and to provide proper surfaces for the
installation of new materials. Adjust and fit products to provide a neat installation.
2. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools are not allowed
without prior written approval.
C. Gypsum Board and Gypsum Plaster: At the Contractor's option, on existing walls and
ceilings designated for cutting and patching work, the Contractor may use any of the
following methods, or combination thereof, to match adjacent wall plane and finish, and as
required to meet the required fire ratings: ^""tk
GYPSUM BOARD
092900-11
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgino Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
1. Patch gypsum board walls or ceilings with new gypsum board the same thickness as
existing surface.
2. Patch gypsum plaster walls or ceilings using gypsum plaster to match and align with
the adjacent surface thickness.
3. Remove entire gypsum board or gypsum plaster surface plane and replace with new
gypsum board to the comer of the wall or ceiling plane.
D. At partitions and ceilings, provide modification of finishes See Drawings for extent of
work.
1. At Contractor's option, where modifications are required, finishes may be cut and
patched, or removed and replaced on one or both sides.
E. Patching:
1. Patch surfaces to match adjacent surfaces. Finish to nearest intersection. For an
assembly, refinish entire unit.
2. Patch to preserve continuity of existing fire ratings.
3. Patch surfaces to successfiilly duplicate undisturbed adjacent profiles, materials,
textures, and finishes. Use materials which match existing constmction.
4. Where there is dispute as to whether duplication is successful or has been achieved
to a reasonable degree, the Architect's decision will be final.
5. Fit work to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces.
6. At penetrations of fire-rated walls, partitions, ceilings, and floor constmction
completely seal voids with fire-rated material in accordance with U.L. specifications
to full thickness of the penetrated element.
3.9 CLEANING
A. Constmction Waste Management; Manage constmction waste in accordance with
provisions of Section 01524 Constmction Waste Management.
3.10 PROTECTION
A. Take all means necessary to prevent spilling and splashing compound. Promptly remove
any residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B. Do not allow the accumulation of scrap and debris resulting from the gypsum drywall
installation and finishing operations.
C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner suitable to Installer that
ensures gypsum board assemblies remain without damage or deterioration at time of
Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 092900
GYPSUM BOARD
092900-12
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrory
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
SECTION 093000 - TILING
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Unglazed ceramic mosaic tile.
B. Glazed wah tile.
C. Repair of existing tile installations.
D. Underlayment for tile floors over wood substtate.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 079200 - Joint Sealers; Sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation
joints in tile surfaces.
B. Section 092900 - Gypsum Board: Gypsum backing board and cementitious backing board
installed as part of gypsum wallboard systems for use under tile installations.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product specified.
B. Samples for Verification:
1. Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish
required.
2. Grout of each type and for each color required.
C. Sustainabiiity Submittals:
1. Product Data for products having recycled content, documentation indicating
percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content.
a. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.
2. Product Data for each material, including its source, cost, and the fraction by weight
that is considered regional and that has been exttacted, harvested, or recovered, as
well as manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site.
3. Product Data for installation adhesives, including printed statement of VOC content
and chemical composition of each product used.
TIUNG
093000-1
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Fumish extra materials that match products installed as
described below, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels
clearly describing contents.
1. Tile and Trim Units: Fumish quantity of fiiU-size unhs equal to 3 percent of amount
installed for each type, composition, color, pattem, and size indicated.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer's Qualifications: A minimum of 3-years' experience installing ceramic tile of the
types specified, and a minimum of 5 installations of a magnitude similar to or larger than
the work of this Section.
B. Single-Source Responsibility for Tile; Obtain each color, grade, finish, type, and variety of
tile from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in
appearance without delaying progress ofthe work.
C. Single-Source Responsibility for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a
uniform quality from one manufacturer for each cementitious and admixture component and
from one source or producer for each aggregate.
D. Field-Constmcted Mock-Up: Before installing tile, erect mock-ups for each form of
constmction and finish required to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and installation. Build mock-ups
using materials to be used in the final work.
1. Locate on site in a location and size as directed by the Architect.
2. Obtain Architect's acceptance before start of final work.
3. Retain and maintain mockup during constmction in undisturbed condition as a
standard forjudging completed work.
E. Floor tile shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.5 determined in accordance with
ASTM C1028
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels
intact until time of use. Comply with requirement of ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile
packages.
B. Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water, freezing, foreign matter, and other
causes.
1.8 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Maintain environmental conditions and protect work during and after installation to comply
with referenced standards and manufacturer's printed recommendations.
B. Vent temporary heaters to exterior to prevent damage to tile work from carbon dioxide
buildup.
TIUNG
093000-2
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research -I- Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbod Controct 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 201 5
C. Maintain temperatures at 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more in tiled areas during installation and
for 7 days after completion, unless higher temperatures are required by referenced
installation standard or manufacturer's instmctions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUSTAINABILITY MATERLA.L REQUIREMENTS, GENERAL
A. Recycled Content; Provide ceramic tile products with average recycled content such that
postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less
than 60 percent.
B. Local/Regional Materials: Give preference to manufacturer's whose facihties are within a
500 mile radius of the project site. Also give preference to materials that are harvested,
exttacted, mined, quarried, etc. within a 500 mile radius of the project site.
C. VOC Content; Adhesives, sealants, and coatings applied on-site on the interior of the
building and products used on the interior of the building shall comply with VOC limits as
specified.
1. Use materials that have the lowest possible VOC content in unhs of g/L when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2.2 TILE PRODUCTS
A. ANSI Standard for Ceramic Tile: Comply with ANSI A137.1 "American National
Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile" for types, compositions, and grades of tile
indicated.
B. Unglazed Ceramic Floor Tile: ASTM C1028, with a wet coefficient of friction of 0.5 or
greater.
1. Nominal Facial Dimensions: To be selected from manufactures full range of
available sizes.
2. Thickness: I/4-inch.
3. Face; Plain with cushion edge.
4. Finish: To be selected from manufactures full range of available colors.
C. Glazed Wall Tile: Provide flat tile complying with the following requirements; TBD
1. Tile Dimensions: To be selected from manufactures full range of available sizes.
2. Nominal Thickness: 5/16-inch.
3. Face: Plain with cushion edge.
4. Finish: To be selected from manufactures full range of available colors including
bright and matte series.
D. Shapes and Trim; Selected from manufacturer's standard shapes and trim units:
1. Trim Units: Provide tile trim units to match characteristics of adjoining flat tile and
to comply with following requirements;
a. Size: As indicated, coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile
where applicable.
b. Base: Coved.
TIUNG
093000-3
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Plonning, Inc.
Bid Set-April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
c. Wainscot Cap; Bullnose cap.
d. Intemal Comers: Field-butted square comers, except use coved base and cap
angle pieces designed to member with stretcher shapes.
2.3 SETTING MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement Mortar Installation Materials: ANSIA108.I.
B. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI 118.4, and ANSI 118.11, non-sag type, composition
as follows:
1. Prepackaged dry mortar mix composed of premium white cement, graded white
aggregate, and manufacturer's standard dry polymer additive in the form of a re-
emulsifiable powder to which only water is added at the job site.
2. Latex Type; Manufacturer's standard.
C. Water: Clean, potable.
2.4 GROUTING MATERIALS
A. Latex-Portland Cement Grout; ANSI A118.6, Portland cement, latex additive, and water;
latex- Portland cement type; un-sanded.
1. Latex additive (water emulsion) serving as replacement for part or all of gaging
water, added at job site with dry grout mixture, with type of latex and dry grout mix
as follows:
2. Latex Type: Manufacturer's standard.
B. Color Admixture: Cementitious type, color as specified; Standard and Designer Series as
manufactured by Custom Building Products, Bostick, or approved equal.
C. Application; Use commercial Portland cement grout combined with latex additive for
grouting joints in floor tile unless otherwise indicated.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERL\LS
A. Solid Surfacing Thresholds; Honed finish; color as selected by Architect from
manufacturer's full range to coordinate with floor tile.
1. Size: 1/2 inch high by width of jamb by full width of wall or frame opening.
2. Profile: As indicated on Drawings.
3. Edges; Beveled one side as indicated on Drawings, radiused edges from bevel to
vertical face.
B. Ceramic Tile Backing Panels: See Section 092900.
C. Metal Edge Strips; Schluter Systems:
1. Tile-to-Wood: Deco or Reno-T.
2. Tile-to-Carpet: Schiene.
3. Tile-to-Resilient Flooring; Reno-V.
TIUNG
093000-4
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgino Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Reseorch + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
2.6 MIKING MORTARS AND GROUT
Mix mortars and grouts to comply with requirements of referenced standards and
manufacturers including those for accurate proportioning of materials, water, or additive
content; type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing
time, and other procedures needed to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with
optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and areas where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of installed tile.
B. Level and smooth subfloor, incorporating slopes as required on Drawings. Sand or grind
protmsions, bumps, and ridges. Patch and repair cracks and rough areas. Fill depressions.
C. Verify that substtates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, and free from oil or waxy films
and curing compounds.
D. Do not start work until grounds, anchors, recessed frames, plugs, hangers, bucks, electtical
and mechanical work in or behind tile have been installed. Do not proceed until adjoining
work is protected.
E. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during sample
submittals, verify that tile has been blended in factory and packaged accordingly so that tile
units taken from one package show the same range in colors as those taken from other
packages and match approved samples. If not factory blended, either retum to manufacturer
or blend tiles at Project site before installing.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. TCNA Installation Guidelines: TCNA "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation"; comply
with TCNA installation methods indicated.
B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form a
complete covering without intermptions except as otherwise shown. Terminate work neatly
at obstmctions, edges, and comers without dismpting pattem or joint alignments.
C. Accurately form intersections and retums. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without
marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in
items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electtical outlets, piping, fixtures, and
other penetrations so that plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.
TIUNG
093000-5
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Plonning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
D. Jointing Pattem; Unless otherwise shown, lay tile in grid pattem. Align joints when
adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out tile work and center
tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile
cutting. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise shown.
E. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within tile
sheets so that extent of each sheet is not apparent in finished work.
F. Lay out tile wainscots to next fiill tile beyond dimensions indicated.
G. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control,
contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated during installation of setting materials,
mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw cut joints after installation of tiles.
H. Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Cleaning: Upon completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so
they are free of foreign matter.
B. Remove latex-Portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible.
C. Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken,
unbonded, and otherwise defective tile work.
D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile
surfaces.
E. Constmction Waste Management: Manage constmction waste in accordance with
provisions of Section 01524 Constmction Waste Management.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Unglazed tile may be cleaned with acid solutions only when permitted by tile and grout
manufacturer's printed instmctions, but no sooner than 14 days after installation. Protect
metal surfaces, cast iron, and vitreous plumbing fixtures from effects of acid cleaning.
Flush surface with clean water before and after cleaning.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer
and installer that ensure that tile is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial
Completion.
C. When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply a protective coat of neutral protective
cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or
other heavy covering during constmction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear.
D. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least 7 days after grouting is
completed.
TIUNG
093000-6
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbad Controct 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
3.6 INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
A. General: Install tile according to most current edition of the TCNA Handbook using
method numbers as indicated below.
B. Bonded Mortar Bed Floor Tile over Concrete Floor: TCNA Handbook, No. Fl 12.
C. Wall Tile over Wood or Metal Studs and Gj^sum Wallboard; TCNA Handbook, No.
W243.
D. Thresholds: TCNA Handbook, No. TR611.
E. Expansion Joints: TCNA Handbook, No. EJ 171.
1. Exterior; Provide expansion joints at 12- to 16-feet on center in both directions, over
cold joints and saw-cut control joints, and where tile abuts restraining surfaces. Joint
width shall be minimum 3/8-inch wide for joints spaced 12-feet on center and 1/2-
inch wide for joints spaced 16-feet on center.
2. Interior; Provide expansion joints at 24- to 36-feet on center in both directions, over
cold joints and saw-cut control joints, and where tile abuts restraining surfaces. Joint
spacing for tile exposed to direct sunlight or moisture shall be I2-to 16-feet on center.
Joint width for paver tile shall be minimum 1/4-inch wide; ceramic mosaic tile and
glazed wall tile shall be minimum 1/8-inch.
3. Sealant Materials: As specified in Section 079200.
END OF SECTION 093000
TIUNG
093000-7
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
TIUNG
093000-8
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
SECTION 095123 - ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Acoustical tile ceilings:
1. Installed in suspended metal grid system.
2. Adhered to ceiling substrate.
B. Suspended metal grid ceiling system and perimeter trim.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 092900 - Gypsum Board; Suspended gypsum board ceilings.
B. Division 21: Sprinkler heads in acoustical ceilings.
C. Division 23; Grilles, registers, and diffusers in acoustical ceilings.
D. Division 26; Lighting fixtures in acoustical ceilings.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including the following:
1. Preparation instmctions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Installation methods.
4. Ceiling suspension members.
B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following
items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the hems
involved;
1. Ceiling suspension system members.
2. Method of attaching hangers to building stmcture.
3. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers,
sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings.
C. Shop Drawings; Submit reflected ceiling plans on which the following items are shown and
coordinated with each other for the fabrication and installation of the Work, based on input
from installers of the items involved for Architect's action.
1. Layout of suspension systems, location of hangers, seismic braces and ttapezes.
2. Hanger spacing and fastening details.
3. Trapeze details. N,,,^
ACOUSTICAL TILE CEIUNGS
095123-1
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgino Cole Librory
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
4. Splicing method for main and cross mnners.
5. Method of attaching hangers to building stmcture.
6. Support at ceiling fixtures and air diffusers.
7. Change in level details.
8. Locations and dimensions of access panels, light fixtures, supply and exhaust grilles
and diffiisers, sprinkler heads, speakers, and detection devices.
9. Seismic control details.
10. Develop and coordinate location of all Work which is to be located in ceiling with the
Sections involved per Section 013300 prior to making shop drawing submittal.
D. Samples for Verification; Submit samples of each type of exposed finish required, prepared
on samples of size indicated below and of same thickness and material indicated for final
unit of Work.
1. Fumish sufficient samples to establish full range of colors and textures for materials
exposed in the finished Work. Label samples to indicate product and location in the
Work. Samples will be reviewed for appearance only. Compliance with other
requirements is the responsibility of the Contractor.
2. Ceiling Tiles; Samples of each acoustical tile type, pattem, and color; 12" x 24"
minimum.
3. Set of 12-inch-long samples of suspension system members.
E. Sustainabiiity Submittals:
1. Product Data that show values which demonstrate a percentage improvement in the
proposed building performance rating compared to the baseline building performance
rating per ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1-2004.
2. Product Data for products having recycled content, documentation indicating
percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content.
a. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.
3. Product Data for each material, including its source, cost, and the fraction by weight
that is considered regional and that has been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as
well as manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site.
4. Product Data that indicate methods to be used for ensuring a reduction of indoor air
quality problems in order to help sustain the comfort and well-being of constmction
workers and building occupants.
5. Product Data for sealants, including printed statement of VOC content.
6. Product Data for installation adhesives and sealants, including printed statement of
VOC content and chemical composition of each product used.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, for each acoustical tile ceiling.
B. Calculations: Submit for Architect's information. Submit calculations prepared by a
qualified Stmctural Engineer, registered in State of Califomia, for details other than as
shown or specified.
C. Research/Evaluation Reports; For each acoustical tile ceiling and components and anchor
and fastener type.
ACOUSTICAL TILE CEIUNGS
095123-2
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrory
Group 4 Architecture Research -I- Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 201 5
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.
1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Deliver extta materials to Owner. Fumish extra materials described below that match
products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with
appropriate labels.
1. Ceiling Units: Fumish quantity of full-size units equal to 2.0 percent of amount
installed.
2. Suspension System Components; Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2.0
percent of quantity installed.
3. Hold-Down Clips: Equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling tile and supporting suspension
system through one source from a single manufacturer.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical tile ceilings that comply with the
following requirements;
1. Surface-Burning Characteristics; Provide acoustical tiles with the following surface-
buming characteristics complying with ASTM El264 for Class A materials as
determined by testing identical products per ASTM E84;
a. Smoke-Developed Index; 450 or less.
C. Seismic Standard; Provide acoustical tile ceilings designed and installed to withstand the
effects of earthquake motions according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver acoustical ceiling units to project site in original, unopened packages and store them
in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct
sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.
B. Before installing acoustical ceiling units, permit them to reach room temperature and
stabilized moisture content.
C. Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any
way.
1.10 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Install acoustical unhs after interior wet work is dry.
ACOUSTICAL TILE CEIUNGS
095123-3
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research -I- Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
2.1 SUSTAINABILITY MATERLVL REQUIREMENTS, GENERAL
A. Recycled Content; Provide products made from steel sheet with average recycled content
such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is
not less than 25 percent.
B. Local/Regional Materials; Give preference to manufacturer's whose facilities are within a
500 mile radius of the project she. Also give preference to materials that are harvested,
extracted, mined, quarried, etc. within a 500 mile radius of the project site.
C. VOC Content; Sealants applied on-site on the interior of the building and products used on
the interior of the building shall comply with VOC limits as specified.
1. Use materials that have the minimum VOC content in units of g/L when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Ceiling Tile: Armstrong World Industries, Inc., Optima Tegular.
1. Item Number; 3250.
2. Classification; Type XII, Form 2, Pattem E
3. Size; 24 by 24-inches.
4. Thickness: 1-inch.
5. Composition: Wet-formed mineral fiber.
6. Acoustics NRC: 0.95.
7. CAC; NA.
8. Edge: Square tegular.
9. Surface Color: White.
10. Surface Finish: Factory-applied latex paint.
11. Grid Width: 15/16-inch.
B. Ceiling Tile: Armstrong World Industries, Inc., Optima Plank.
1. Item Number; 3262.
2. Classification: Type XII, Form 2, Pattem E.
3. Size; 24 by 96-inches.
4. Thickness; 1-inch.
5. Composition: Wet-formed mineral fiber.
6. NRC Range: 0.95.
7. CAC: N/A.
8. Edge: Square tegular lay-in.
9. Surface Color: White.
10. Surface Finish: Soh-resistant polyester film.
11. Suspension System: 9/16-inch.
C. Glue-on Ceiling Tile: Armstrong World Industries, Inc., Fine Fissured.
1. Item Number: 741.
2. Classification; Type III, Form 2, Pattem CE.
3. Size; 12 by 12-inches.
4. Thickness: 1/2-inches.
ACOUSTICAL TILE CEIUNGS
095123-4
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgino Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
5. Composition; Wet-formed mineral fiber.
6. Acoustics NRC: 0.55.
7. CAC: 35.
8. Edge: Beveled K4C4 concealed lay-in, Splined.
9. Surface Color: White.
10. Surface Finish; Factory-applied latex paint.
2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A. Suspension System: ASTM C635/C635M, Armstrong World Industries, Inc.,
1. Silhouette XL 9/16" Boh Slot with 1/8" reveal grid.
a. System Type: Dimensional Tee.
b. Exposed Grid Surface Width; 9/16-inch.
c. Main Runners; 9/16-inch flange, 1-3/4-inch high, double web constmction.
d. Cross Runners: 9/16-inch flange, double web constmction.
e. Cross Tee/Main Beam Interface: Mitered.
2. Seismic Category: C.
3. Finish: White, low gloss baked enamel finish, color to match ceiling tiles exactly.
4. Wall Angle, Reveals, and Miscellaneous Trim; Roll-formed from electto-galvanized
steel strip to match main runners and cross tees.
B. Attachment Devices: Size for 5 times design load indicated in ASTM C635/C635M, Table
1, Direct Hung, double web, Intermediate-Duty System, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Wire for Hangers and Ties: ASTM A641/A64IM, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.
1. Gage: Provide wire sized so that stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM
C635/C635M, Table 1, Direct-Hung) will be less than yield stress of wire, but
provide not less than 0.106-inch diameter (12-gage).
D. Support Hangers and Channels; Mild steel, zinc coated, or protected with mst-inhibitive
paint, size and shape to suh application and seismic requirements.
1. Hanger Wires; Connection device capable of carrying not less than 100-pounds.
2. Bracing Wires: Connection device capable of carrying not less than 200-pounds or
the actual design load, whichever is greater, with a safety factor of 2 without
yielding.
E. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim; Type and profile indicated or, if not
indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with
seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as
that used for exposed flanges of suspension system mnners.
1. Provide manufacturer's standard edge moldings that fit acoustical panel edge details
and suspension systems indicated and that match width and configuration of exposed
mnners, imless otherwise indicated.
F. Seismic Stmts: Manufacturer's standard compression stmts designed to accommodate
seismic forces.
G. Seismic Clips: Manufacturer's standard seismic clips designed and spaced to secure
acoustical tiles in-place.
ACOUSTICAL TILE CEIUNGS
095123-5
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set-April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
H. Adhesive for Glue-on Application: WW Henry Company, Henry 237 Acousti-Gum
Acoustical Ceiling Tile adhesive, or approved equal.
1. VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives and Glues: Use installation adhesives that
comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24);
a. Ceiling Tile Adhesives: 5 g/L.
I. Perimeter Trim for Glue-on Applications; Armstrong Slip-on Wall Moldings; #7842, 5/8"
thick.
2.4 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT
A. Acceptable Products; Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints;
a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant.
b. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.
2. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints;
a. OSI Sealants, Inc.; Pro-Series SC-175 Rubber Base Sound Sealant.
b. Pecora Corporation; BA-98.
c. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Acoustical Sealant.
B. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag,
paintable, nonstaining latex sealant, with a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), complying with ASTM C834 and
effective in reducing airbome sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in
building constmction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to
ASTM E90.
C. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints; Manufacturer's standard nondrying, nonhardening,
nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-mbber sealant, with a VOC content of 250
g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24),
recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce airbome sound transmission.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and stmctural framing to which ceiling system attaches or abuts, with
Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other sections that
affect installation and anchorage of ceiling system.
B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical units to balance border widths
at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid use of less-than-half-width units at borders, and
comply with reflected ceiling plans.
ACOUSTICAL TILE CEIUNGS
095123-6
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with seismic design requirements
indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instmctions and CISCA's "Ceiling
Systems Handbook."
B. Standard for Installation of Ceiling Suspension Systems: Comply with
ASTM C636/C636M.
C. Arrange acoustical units and orient directionally pattemed units (if any) in manner shown
by reflected ceiling plans.
3.4 INSTALLATION, SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum that are not part of supporting stmctural or ceiling suspension system.
B. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstmctions; offset resulting horizontal forces
by bracing, counter-splaying, or other equally effective means.
C. Where width of ducts and other constmction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
spacings that interfere with the location of hangers at spacings required to support standard
suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form
of ttapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to
support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards.
D. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum
of four tight tums. Connect hangers directly either to stmctures or to inserts, eye screws, or
other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or
otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
E. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers
to cast-in-place hanger inserts, post-installed mechanical or adhesive anchors, or power-
actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete.
F. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.
G. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to stmctural members.
H. Space hangers not more than 48-inches oc along each member supported directly from
hangers, unless otherwise shown, and provide hangers not more than 8-inches from ends of
each member.
I. Ceiling grid members shall be attached to not more than 2 adjacent walls in accordance with
ASCE 7, Section 13.5.6.2(b). Ceiling grid members shall be at least 3/8-inch and not more
than 3/4-inch free of other walls. If walls run diagonally to ceiling grid system runners, one
end of main and cross mnners shall be free, and a minimum of 3/4-inch clear of wall.
J. The width of the perimeter supporting closure angle shall be not less than 7/8-inch.
ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS
095123-7
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Pianning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
K. Install suspension system mnners so they are square and securely interlocked with one
another. Remove and replace dented, bent, kinked or otherwise damaged mnners.
L. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of
four tight tums. Suspend bracing from building's stmctural members as required for
hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten
bracing wires into concrete with cast-in-place or post-installed anchors.
M. Provide expansion joints in the ceiling at intersections of corridors and at junctions of
corridors with lobbies or other areas.
N. Provide lateral-force bracing assemblies consisting of a compression stmt and four 12-
gauge splayed bracing wires oriented 90-degrees from each other at the following spaces:
1. Place sets of bracing wires spaced not more than 12-feet by 12-feet on center.
2. Provide bracing wires at locations not more than 1/2 the specified spacing from each
perimeter wall and at the edge of vertical ceiling offsets.
3. The slope of these wires shall not exceed 45-degrees from the plane of the ceiling and
shall be taut without causing the ceiling to lift. Splices in bracing wires are not
permitted.
4. Compression stmts shall not be more than 1 (horizontal) in 6 (vertical) out of plumb.
O. Provide seismic separation joints for ceiling areas greater than 2,500-square feet.
P. Testing of Concrete Anchors;
1. When drilled-in concrete anchors or shot-in anchors are used in reinforced concrete
for hanger wires, 1 out of 10 shall be field tested for 200-pounds of tension.
2. When drilled-in concrete anchors are used for bracing wires, 1 out of 2 shall be field
tested for 440-pounds in tension. Shot-in anchors in concrete are not permitted for
bracing wires.
Q. Support of Light Fixttires and Air Terminals: Comply with ASTM C635/C635M.
1. Ceiling suspension systems that support light fixtures, air-ventilation grilles or
partitions shall have a classification of heavy-duty.
2. Recessed or drop-in light fixtures and grilles shall be supported directly from the
fixture housing to the stmcture above with a minimum of two 12-gauge wires located
at diagonally opposite comers. Fixture support wires may be slightly loose to allow
the fixture to seat in the grid system.
3. Fixture shall not be supported from main mnners or cross mnners if the weight of the
fixtures causes the total dead load to exceed the deflection capability of the ceiling
suspension system.
R. Perimeter Trim:
1. Provide in longest lengths available and combinations of lengths to minimize number
of joints required.
2. Do not use pieces shorter than 48-inches.
3. Miter j oints at comers.
4. Install to neatiy close with adjoining vertical surfaces.
ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS
095123-8
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbad Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 201 5
3.5 INSTALLATION OF ACOUSTICAL SEALANT
A. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and
where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.
B. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of
moldings before they are installed.
C. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16-inches (400 mm) oc and
not more than 3-inches (75 mm) from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a
tolerance of 1/8-inch in 12-feet (3.2 mm in 3.66 m). Miter comers accurately and connect
securely.
D. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.
3.6 INSTALLATION, CEILING TILES
A. Install units after above-ceiling work is complete.
B. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system
mnners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a
neat, precise fit.
C. Install acoustical tile in coordination with suspension system and exposed moldings and
trim. Place splines or suspension system flanges into kerfed edges so that every tile-to-tile
joint is closed by double lap of material.
D. Install acoustical units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp and dents.
E. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical tiles as follows;
1. As indicated on reflected ceiling plans.
F. Fit adjoining tile to form flush, tight joints and to fit irregular grid and perimeter edge trim.
Scribe and cut for accurate fit at borders and around penetrating work.
G. Trim cut tiles at wall junctures so that tegular edges fit properly into grid and edge
moldings. Trim edges of tegular tiles to match edges on untrimmed sides as indicated on
Drawings. Paint cut edges to match ceiling tile face.
H. Conform to State safety orders and applicable codes, including the seismic bracing
requirements of CBC.
3.7 GLUE-APPLIED CEILING TILES
A. Install ceiling tiles with adhesive where indicated, following adhesive manufacturer's
written instmctions.
B. Do not 'butter' too many tiles in advance, as a skin will form on the adhesive dabs and
weaken the bond.
ACOUSTICAL TILE CEIUNGS
095123-9
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
C. Level tiles by inserting a 1/16-inch thick fiber spline approximately 3-inches long at each
comer.
D. Use a minimum 48-inch long straight edge and press to the face of the installed tile to help
level the ceiling.
E. Install trim at perimeter as recommended by ceiling tile manufacturer.
3.8 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust hangers as required. Addition of kinks or bends in hanger are not acceptable; take up
in ties only.
B. When complete, grid members of each assembly shall be mutually parallel/square,
accurately aligned, with joints neatly formed and closely fitted and aligned flush; each
assembly shall be securely anchored and braced to stmcture to prevent movement.
3.9 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and
suspension members. Comply with manufacturer's instmctions for cleaning and touch-up
of minor finish damage.
B. Exposed surfaces of grids shall be clean and free from scratches, dents, tool marks, stains,
discoloration, fingerprints, and other defects and damage.
C. Remove and replace work that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently
eliminate evidence of damage.
D. Constmction Waste Management; Manage constmction waste in accordance with
provisions of Section 01524 Constmction Waste Management.
END OF SECTION 095123
ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS
095123-10
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrory
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Controct 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
SECTION 096123 - CONCRETE VAPOR EMISSION TREATMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Liquid applied treatment system to restrict in-concrete relative humidity transfer for below
grade, on-grade and above-grade horizontal surfaces. System prevents the transfer of
relative humidity levels, which causes floor bubbling, peeling, adhesive failure and floor
dampness after installations.
I. Location(s); Freshly placed concrete slabs.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 096813 - Tile Carpeting; Hydraulic-cement-based trowelable patching and
leveling compound applied to existing concrete slabs for vapor emission treatment.
B. Section 099729 - Concrete Floor Sealing; Concrete floor sealer/hardener at back-of-house
areas.
1.4 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Time considerations for process are contingent upon conditions encountered and
constmction schedule. A minimum of 3 weeks should be considered for extensive work.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data;
1. Treatment system data, including independent laboratory testing results.
2. Warranty certificate sample.
3. Crack and joint sealing detail or method.
4. Primers used to coat treatment
5. Cement topcoat product data and thickness requirements.
B. Quality Control Submittals.
C. Certificates: Submit applicator's certificate from manufacturer.
D. Sustainabiiity Submittals:
1. Product Data for products having recycled content, documentation indicating
percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content,
a. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.
CONCRETE VAPOR EMISSION TREATMENT
096123-1
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
2. Product Data for each material, including its source, cost, and the fraction by weight
that is considered regional and that has been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as
well as manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site.
3. Product Data for installation coatings, including printed statement of VOC content
and chemical composition of each product used.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Warranty; Sample of special warranty.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator: Certified by the manufacturer of special coating system and shall provide
proof of certification and shall have valid Califomia C-15, C-61 or C-33 contractor's
license.
B. Manufacturer; Minimum of five (5) years producing specified make, model number,
product name and no formulation change.
1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Products shall meet current local. State and Federal environmental laws.
B. Provide adequate ventilation during application within an enclosed space.
C. Disposal of containers and materials and associated labor costs shall be the responsibility
ofthe applicator.
D. Installed in building climates that are representative of the finished building atmosphere.
Minimum of 65 degrees Fahrenheit or above 50%RH prior to, during and 48 hours after
installation process.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to cover all
costs of treatment system products, process controls, replacement of finished flooring and
adhesive and associated labor to reinstall finished flooring materials. Warranty does not
include normal weathering.
1. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner
may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and
mn concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the
Contract Documents.
CONCRETE VAPOR EMISSION TREATMENT
096123-2
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
2.1 SUSTAINABILITY MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS, GENERAL
A. Recycled Content; Use materials and products that contain the maximum amount of
recycled content allowed that retains material integrity.
B. Local/Regional Materials; Give preference to manufacturer's whose facilities are within a
500 mile radius of the project site. Also give preference to materials that are harvested,
extracted, mined, quarried, etc. within a 500 mile radius of the project site.
C. VOC Content: Paints and coatings applied on-site on the interior of the building and
products used on the interior of the building shall comply with VOC limits.
1. Use materials that have the minimum VOC content in units of g/L when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2. Coatings: Meet the following:
a. EPA Method 24 testing of less than 100 g/liter, by independent laboratory
testing.
Contains no formaldehyde, formaldehyde precursors and zero-carcinogens
Contains zero hazardous air pollutants (HAP's)
b.
c.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for the vapor emission treatment is based on the
manufacturer identified below. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the
named product or a comparable product by one ofthe following:
1. Basis-of-Design: FloorSeal Technology
2. Diamond Stone Products.
3. Synthetics Intemational.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. General; Two-component epoxy based treatment for penetrating dry, damp and wet
concrete floor surfaces. Product shall maintain adhesion to concrete containing silicates
and resin treatments.
B. MES 100 - A two-component modified epoxy sealant used to control excessive moisture
vapor emission, alkalinity, and Relative Humidity levels.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Cementitious Topcoat: 100 percent Portland cement based self-leveling compound to be
applied to areas receiving resilient flooring. Cement must bond with subsequent floor
coverings and adhesives. Approved products;
1. Mapei Ultraplan 1 Plus by Mapei Intemational
2. Ardex K-15 by Ardex Engineered Cements, Inc.
CONCRETE VAPOR EMISSION TREATMENT
096123-3
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMESfATION
A. Verify substrates meet manufactures requirements prior to installations.
B. Verify concrete moisture results are acceptable for a warranted treatment installation.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Mask and protect adjacent wall and floor surfaces from effects of scarification and
application.
B. Shot blast concrete surfaces using a #390- #460 shot to prepare concrete. Remove all
foreign materials detrimental to treatment, such as curing compounds, silicate sealers, loose
patching materials and surface oil and ensure a clean surface profile. Re-shot blast areas
where surface debris remains and silicate sealers where previously applied.
C. Vacuum all surfaces to remove dust, debris and shot. Do not acid etch or use clean
sweeping agents.
D. Rout out all stmctural cracks, control joins and cold joints to a 1/4-inch depth minimum.
Vacuum out debris. Thoroughly dig out any features with large, thorough passage into soil
substrate, vacuum, and fill with appropriate crack filling material.
E. Acceptable Surface Profile;
1. Absorbent and allows water to penetrate freely without resistance. Slick surfaces
from curing compounds and/or release agents must be shot blasted completely off
2. Perform all required adhesion, core testing, laboratory evaluation and chemical
testing of substrate to meet treatment manufactures warranty requirements
3.3 SUBSTRATE COMPLLVNCE
A. Apply liquid applied treatment system rated to restrict 100%RH and 14pH at all floor
surfaces before flooring products are installed.
3.4 TREATMENT APPLICTION
A. Verify that surfaces are solid, free of loose particles, cracks, pits, rough projections or
foreign matter detrimental to maximum adhesion of the treatment.
B. Apply one-coat of treatment over slab surface, cracks, joints and around penetrations at
manufacture recommended coverage rates using a lint free roller, notched squeegee or
medium bristle floor broom.
C. After coating has sufficiently cured, re-apply second-coat of treatment over all substrate
areas to create a uniform surface.
D. Apply crack and joint treatments to maintain treatment warranty.
CONCRETE VAPOR EMISSION TREATMENT
096123-4
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Plonning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 201 5
3.5 CEMENT TOPCOAT APPLICATION (WHERE INDICATED)
A. Allow vapor emission treatment system to cure a minimum of 12 hours at 80°F; 24 hours at
55°F unless permitted otherwise by manufacturer.
B. Apply approved non-porous primer before installing cement products to smooth uneven
floor transitions. A non-porous primer must be used to secure cement products. Do not use
cement products with special additives as a replacement for a non-porous primer.
C. Use a high quality patch or Portland cement-based product only. Follow the flooring
manufactures recommendations for cement thickness requirements.
D. Mix and pour cement topcoat at a nominal 1/8" thickness directly over primer surface.
E. Final surfaces shall be smooth and absorbent to allow proper adhesion of primers,
adhesives and flooring products.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Constmction Waste Management: Manage constmction waste in accordance with
provisions of Section 01524 Constmction Waste Management.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Maintain trade traffic to protection treatment system and process immediately after
completion and until finished flooring system is installed.
END OF SECTION 096123
CONCRETE VAPOR EMISSION TREATMENT
096123-5
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
CONCRETE VAPOR EMISSION TREATMENT
096123-6
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
SECTION 096500 - RESILIENT FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Linoleum sheet flooring.
B. Resilient wall base, reducer strips, and other accessories.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 096813 - Tile Carpeting: Hydraulic-cement-based trowelable patching and
leveling compound applied to existing concrete slabs for vapor emission treatment.
1.4 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Install flooring and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have
been completed.
B. Install flooring adequately in advance of scheduled occupancy of each Phase of the project
to assure proper curing of adhesives prior to allowing foot ttaffic on flooring.
C. Do not install resilient floor coverings over concrete slabs until the slabs have cured and are
sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive as determined by floor covering manufacturer's
recommended bond and moisture test.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product specified.
1. Provide manufacturers' product data for adhesives, including printed statement of
VOC content.
B. Shop Drawings; Show locations of all seams, whether deviating from seam locations
indicated on Drawings or not.
C. Samples for Verification: In manufacturer's standard size, but not less than 6-by-9-inch
(150-by-230-mm) sections of each different color and pattem of floor covering required.
1. For heat-welding bead, manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 9-
inches (230 mm) long, of each color required.
D. Heat-Welded Seam Samples: For each flooring product and welding bead color and pattern
combination required; with seam mnning lengthwise and in center of 6-by-9-inch (150-by-
230-mm) Sample applied to a rigid backing and prepared by Installer for this Project. C3
RESIUENT FLOORING
096500-1
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgino Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbod Controct 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
E. Sustainabiiity Submittals:
1. Product Data for installation adhesives, including printed statement of VOC content
and chemical composition of each product used.
2. Product Data for low emitting flooring materials, including printed statement of VOC
content and chemical components.
1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Fumish extra materials matching products installed as
described below, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels
clearly describing contents.
1. Sheet Flooring; Fumish not less than 10 linear feet for each 500 linear feet or
fraction thereof, in roll form of each different composition, wearing surface, color,
and pattem of sheet flooring material.
2. Floor Tile; Fumish 1 box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color,
and pattem of floor tile installed.
3. Resilient Base Material: 50 lineal feet of each color and size.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are
approved and certified by flooring manufacturer, as well as competent in techniques
required by manufacturer for floor covering installation and seaming method indicated.
B. Single-Source Responsibility for Flooring: Obtain each type, color, and pattem of resilient
flooring from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in
appearance and physical properties without delaying progress ofthe Work.
C. Fire Performance Characteristics; Provide resilient flooring with the following fire
performance characteristics as determined by testing products per ASTM test method
indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
1. Critical Radiant Flux; 0.45 watts per sq.cm or more per ASTM E648.
2. Smoke Density; Less than 450 per ASTM E662.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver resilient flooring and installation accessories to Project site in original
manufacturer's unopened cartons and containers each bearing names of product and
manufacturer. Project identification, and shipping and handling instmctions.
B. Store flooring materials in dry spaces protected from the weather with ambient temperatures
maintained between 50 deg F (10 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C).
C. Move flooring and installation accessories into spaces where they will be installed at least
48 hours in advance of installation.
RESIUENT FLOORING
096500-2
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set-April 10, 2015
1.9 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Maintain a minimum temperature of 70 deg F (21 deg C) in spaces to receive flooring for at
least 48 hours prior to installation, during installation, and for not less than 48 hours after
installation. After this period, maintain a temperature of not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C).
B. Do not install flooring until it is at the same temperature as the space where it is to be
installed.
C. Close spaces to traffic during installation.
D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor covering installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUSTAINABILITY MATERL\L REQUIREMENTS, GENERAL
A. VOC Content; Adhesives applied on-site on the interior of the building and products used
on the interior of the building shall comply with VOC limits as specified.
1. Use materials that have the lowest possible VOC content in units of g/L when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2. Leveling compound adhesives and sealers must meet or be lower than the current
VOC content limits ofthe South Coast Air Quality Management Disttict (SCAQMD)
Rule #1168.
B. Low Emitting Materials; Provide linoleum flooring installed on the interior of the building
that meets the testing and product requirements for certification by SCS FloorScore.
2.2 LINOLEUM SHEET
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. Basis of Design: Forbo Industries.
2. Armstrong World Industries.
3. Azrock Commercial Flooring.
B. Sheet Linoleum; ASTM F2034; homogeneous sheet linoleum of primarily natural materials
consisting of linseed oil, wood flour, and rosin binders, mixed and calendered onto natural
jute backing, with pattem and color extending throughout total thickness of material.
1. Width: 79-inches.
2. Thickness; 1/10-inch.
3. Slip Resistance: In accordance with ADA recommendation of .6 for flat surfaces.
4. Static Load Limh; ASTM F970, 450 Ib/sq in.
5. Fire Resistance
a. Smoke Density; ASTM E622, 450 or less.
b. Critical Radiant Flux; ASTM E648, Class 1.
6. Style and Color: As indicated on drawings.
RESIUENT FLOORING
096500-3
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
2.3 RUBBER BASE
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrory
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
A. Resilient Wall Base; ASTM F1861, Type TS (mbber, vulcanized thermoset).
1. Manufacturer: Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
2. Group (Manufacturing Method): I (solid, homogeneous).
3. Style: Cove (with top-set toe.
4. Minimum Thickness: 0.125-inch (3.2 mm).
5. Height; 4-inches (102 mm).
6. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length, but not less than 100 feet.
7. Outside Comers: Premolded.
8. Inside Comers: Premolded.
9. Surface; Smooth.
10. Color; As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.4 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A. Concrete Slab Primer: Nonstaining type as recommended by flooring manufacturer.
B. Adhesives (Cements): Water-resistant type recommended by tile manufacturer to suit
resilient floor tile products and substtate conditions indicated.
1. Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24 and South Coast Ah
Quality Management District Rule #1168).
a. Flooring Adhesives: 50 g/L.
b. Rubber Base Adhesives: 50 g/L.
C. Heat-Welding Bead: Solid-strand product of floor covering manufacturer.
1. Color: Match floor covering.
D. Floor Polish: Provide protective metal, cross-linked acrylic floor polish products as
recommended by manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. General: Examine areas where installation of flooring will occur, with Installer present, to
verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for resilient flooring installation and
comply with manufacturer's requirements and those specified in this Section.
B. Concrete Subfloors; Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F710 and the following;
1. Slab substtates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other
materials whose presence would interfere with bonding of adhesive. Determine
adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests
recommended by tile manufacturer.
2. Finishes of subfloors comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in
Section 033000 for slabs receiving resilient flooring.
3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits of any
kind.
RESIUENT FLOORING
096500-4
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 201 5
C. Verify adhesives are compatible with concrete curing compounds on slabs. Where adhesive
is found not to be compatible, remove curing compound prior to installation of material.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's installation specifications to prepare substrates
indicated to receive flooring.
B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F710.
1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
2. Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with
installation only after substtates pass testing.
3. Moisture and Alkalinity Testing:
a. Perform at a rate of three tests for the first 1,000 square feet and one additional
test for each 1,000 square feet thereafter.
b. Anhydrous Calcium Chloride Test: ASTM F1869; proceed with installation
only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of
water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m) in 24 hours.
c. Intemal Relative Humidity Test: ASTM F2170; proceed with installation only
after substrates have a maximum relative humidity level of 75%RH or less.
d. Digital Alkalinity-pH Test; ASTM F710; proceed with installation only after
substrates have a result of 9.0pH or less.
e. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only
after substrates pass testing.
C. Use ttowelable leveling and patching compounds per manufacturer's directions to fill
cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. See Section 096813 for material.
D. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible
with flooring adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, by using a terrazzo or
concrete grinder, a dmm sander, or a polishing machine equipped with a heavy-duty wire
bmsh.
E. Broom or vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient flooring immediately before
tile installation. Following cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts,
carbonation, or dust.
F. Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by flooring manufacturer, prior to applying
adhesive. Apply according to manufacturer's directions.
3.3 LINOLEUM INSTALLATION
A. General; Comply with floor covering manufacturer's installation instmctions and other
requirements indicated that are applicable to each type of floor covering installation
included in Project.
B. Linoleum must be "wet-sef in adhesive within 10-15 minutes after application of the
adhesive. Do not apply adhesive before linoleum pieces have been properly measured, cut,
and prepared for application. Do not apply more adhesive than required for prepared
linoleum.
RESIUENT FLOORING
096500-5
3
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
C. Maintain uniformity of linoleum direction. Install one sheet at a time.
D. Arrange for a minimum number of seams and place them in inconspicuous and low traffic
areas, but in no case less than 6-inches away from parallel joints in flooring substrates.
E. Heat-Welded Seams; Comply with ASTM F1516. Rout joints and use welding bead to
permanently fiise sections into a fully sealed, seamless fioor covering. Prepare, weld, and
finish seams to produce surfaces flush with adjoining floor covering surfaces.
1. Match edges of resilient floor coverings for color shading and pattems at seams.
2. Avoid cross seams.
F. Scribe, cut, and fit linoleum to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and
built-in fumiture, including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings.
G. Extended linoleum into spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.
H. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or plainly marked for future
cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other
nonpermanent marking device.
I. Adhesive Material Installation: Use trowel as recommended by flooring manufacturer for
specified adhesive. Spread at rate of approximately 150 sq ft/gallon as recommended by
flooring manufacturer.
J. Produce completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints,
telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, or other surface imperfections.
K. Comply with floor covering manufacturer's directions including those for ttowel notching,
adhesive mixing, and adhesive open and working times.
L. Hand-roll linoleum in both directions from center out to embed floor coverings in adhesive
and eliminated trapped air. At walls, door casings, and other locations where access by
roller is impractical, press floor coverings firmly in place with flat-bladed instmment.
3.4 RUBBER BASE INSTALLATION
A. Apply wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other
permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.
B. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of
adjacent pieces aligned.
C. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in
continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
D. Do not stretch wall base during installation.
E. Fit joints tight and vertical. Maintain minimum measurement of 24-inches between joints.
F. Miter intemal comers. At external comers, 'V cut back of base strip to 2/3 of its thickness
and fold. At exposed ends use premolded units.
RESIUENT FLOORING
096500-6
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set-April 10, 2015
G. Install base on solid backing. Bond tight to wall and floor surfaces.
H. Scribe and fit to door frames and other intermptions.
I. Job-Formed Comers:
1. Inside Comers: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form by cutting
an inverted V-shaped notch in toe of wall base at the point where comer is formed.
Shave back of base where necessary to produce a snug fit to substrate.
2. Outside Comers: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form without
producing discoloration (whitening) at bends. Shave back of base at points where
bends occur and remove strips perpendicular to length of base that are only deep
enough to produce a snug fit without removing more than half the wall base
thickness.
J. Where base wraps around columns, ensure that seams are terminated with a mitered joint at
the comers of the column. Offset, asymmetrical seams on the face of the column are not
permissible.
3.5 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. Apply contact bond adhesive to the back of the moulding and the wall/floor surface area.
B. When adjoining carpet, trim the carpet so that it fills the undercut area of the moulding
completely.
C. Do not perform any maintenance on the product for 24 hours after installation is completed.
3.6 CLEANE^G
A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing flooring installation:
1. Remove visible adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by
flooring manufacturers.
2. Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly.
3. Do not wash floor until after time period recommended by resilient flooring
manufacturer.
4. Damp-mop floor to remove black marks and soil.
B. ResUient Accessory Cleaning:
1. Thoroughly sweep or vacuum the entire surface area to remove all loose dirt and grit
2. Scmb the resilient accessory surfaces with a neutral cleaning solution mixture
recommended by manufacturer, using a clean cloth or sponge.
3. Rinse with clean cold water and allow the product to thoroughly dry.
C. Constmction Waste Management: Manage constmction waste in accordance with
provisions of Section 01524 Constmction Waste Management.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Floor Polish; Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from floor tile surfaces
before applying liquid floor polish.
RESIUENT FLOORING
096500-7
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
1. Use floor polish product acceptable to flooring manufacturer.
2. Sealer: Apply manufacturer's recommended sealer, 1-2 coats.
3. Polish: Apply 2-3 coat(s).
4. Reapply floor polish after cleaning.
B. Protect flooring against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from constmction
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of constmction
period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended by flooring manufacturer.
C. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over flooring. Place plywood or hardboard
panels over flooring and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll objects
over protective panels without moving panels.
D. Cover products installed on horizontal surfaces with undyed, untreated building paper until
Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 096500
RESIUENT FLOORING
096500-8
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgino Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Reseorch + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
SECTION 096813 - TILE CARPETING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Modular, fusion-bonded, tufted carpet tile.
B. Hydraulic-cement-based trowelable patching and leveling compound.
I. Location(s); Existing concrete slabs scheduled to receive carpet tiles and resilient
flooring.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 096123 - Concrete Vapor Emission Treatment; Liquid applied tteatment system
applied to freshly placed concrete slabs.
B. Section 096500 - Resilient Flooring: Resilient wall base and accessories installed with
carpet tile.
C. Section 099729 - Concrete Floor Sealing: Concrete floor sealer/hardener at back-of-house
areas.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on
physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. Include installation
recommendations for each type of substrate.
B. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label
each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattem, and designation
indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
1. Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample.
2. Exposed Edge, Transition, and other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch- (300-mm-) long
Samples.
C. Sustainabiiity Submittals;
1. Product Data for products having recycled content, documentation indicating
percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content.
a. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.
2. Product Data for each material, including hs source, cost, and the fraction by weight
that is considered regional and that has been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as
well as manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site. 3
TILE CARPETING
096813-1
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
3. Product Data for installation adhesives, including printed statement of VOC content
and chemical composition of each product used.
4. Product Data for low emitting flooring materials, including printed statement of VOC
content and chemical components.
D. Product Schedule: For carpet tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer.
B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data; For carpet tiles to include in maintenance manuals. Include the
following;
1. Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain-removal products
and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule.
2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet
tile.
B. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Fumish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products
installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with
labels describing contents.
1. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type
indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd. (8.3 sq. m).
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is approved by carpet tile manufacturer
and certified by the Floor Covering Installation Board or who can demonstrate compliance
with its certification program requirements with a minimum of 5 years continuous
experience in the installation of the types of carpet tile specified.
B. Carpet Surface Buming Characteristics; Provide carpet identical to that tested for the
following fire performance characteristics, per test method indicated below. Identify carpet
with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization.
1. Test Method: ASTM E84.
2. Flame Spread: 75 or less.
3. Fire Hazard Classification: Class I floor finish.
4. Minimum critical flux limit of 0.45-watts/square centimeter when tested in
accordance with NFPA 253.
TILE CARPETING
096813-2
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research -I- Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbad Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
C. Static electricity generation of installed carpet shall not exceed 3.5 KV at 70-deg. F and 20-
percent R.H. for life of carpet tile.
D. Carpet Tile Low-VOC Emissions: Provide carpet and cushion materials that have been
tested and certified to indicate carpet, carpet backings, cushions, and adhesives emit no or
low VOCs (volatile organic compounds). Provide products carrying the following
certifications:
1. CRI Green Label.
E. Mockups; Before installing carpet tile, build mockups to verify selections made under
sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for
materials and execution.
1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undamaged at time of
Substantial Completion.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling."
B. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers labels intact until time for use,
with seals unbroken and store rolls in a flat poshion. Protect from damage, dirt, stains and
moisture.
C. Do not store carpet tile near products that can off gas harmful substances.
1.10 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.2, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity" and
Section 7.12, "Ventilation."
B. Environmental Limitations:
1. Do not install carpet tiles until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient
temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project
when occupied for its intended use.
2. Use adhesives in strict compliance with manufacturer's recommendations, and
ventilate area with maximum outside air for a minimum of 48-hours after installation.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Special Wartanty for Carpet Tiles; Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer
agrees to repair or replace components of carpet tile installation that fail in materials,
fabrication, or installation within specified wartanty period.
1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual ttaffic,
failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse.
2. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge
raveling, snags, mns, loss of tuft bind strength, dimensional stability, excess static
discharge, and delamination.
3. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
TILE CARPETING
096813-3
City of Corlsbod Controct 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
2.1 SUSTAINABILITY MATERL\L REQUIREMENTS, GENERAL
A. Recycled Content: Provide carpet tile products with average recycled content such that
postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less
than 45 percent.
B. Local/Regional Materials: Give preference to manufacturer's whose facihties are within a
500 mile radius of the project site. Also give preference to materials that are harvested,
extracted, mined, quarried, etc. within a 500 mile radius of the project site.
C. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by material manufacturer for products and
substrate conditions indicated.
1. Use materials that have the lowest possible VOC content in units of g/L when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2. Use materials that are free of added urea formaldehyde resin binders.
2.2 CARPET TILE
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Basis of Design: Interface Flooring Systems.
2. Bentley Prince Street.
3. Lees Carpets.
4. Shaw Conttact. Group
a. Color: As indicated on Drawings.
b. Pattem: As indicated on Drawings.
c. Size; Plank; as indicated on Drawings.
d. Installation Pattern: As indicated on Drawings.
2.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based
formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for the leveling and patching compound is
based on the manufacturer identified below. Subject to compliance with
requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the
following:
a. Basis-of-Design; Ardex Feather Finish.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to suit
products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements
for installed carpet tile and is recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable
installation.
1. VOC Limits; Provide adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC
content when tested according to ASTM D5116;
a. Total VOCs; 10.00 mg/sq. m x h
b. Formaldehyde: 0.05 mg/sq. m x h.
c. 2-Ethyl-l-Hexanol; 3.00 mg/sq. m x h.
TILE CARPETING
096813-4
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
PART 3 - EXECUTION
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
3.1 EXAMESfATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and
other conditions affecting carpet tile performance. Examine carpet tile for type, color,
pattern, and potential defects.
B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F710 and the following:
1. Slab substtates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other
materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness
characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet tile
manufacturer.
2. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-
Place Concrete" for slabs receiving carpet tile.
3. Subfioors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.
4. Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with
installation only after substrates pass testing.
5. Moisture and Alkalinity Testing:
a. Perform at a rate of three tests for the first 1,000 square feet and one additional
test for each 1,000 square feet thereafter.
Anhydrous Calcium Chloride Test: ASTM F1869; proceed with installation
only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of
water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m) in 24 hours.
Intemal Relative Humidity Test: ASTM F2170; proceed with installation only
after substrates have a maximum relative humidity level of 75%)RH or less.
Digital Alkalinity-pH Test: ASTM F710; proceed with installation only after
substrates have a result of 9.0pH or less.
Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only
after substrates pass testing.
b.
c.
d.
e.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General; Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "She Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with
carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instmctions for preparing substrates indicated
to receive carpet tile installation.
B. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible
with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use
mechanical methods recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.
C. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile.
TILE CARPETING
096813-5
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
3.3 TROWELABLE LEVELING AND PATCHING COMPOUND APPLICATION
A. Use ttowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written
instmctions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protmsions in substrates. Fill or level
cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch (3 mm) wide or wider and protmsions more than
1/32 inch (0.8 mm), unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's
written instmctions.
1. Acid etching, adhesive removers, solvents and sweeping compounds are not
acceptable means for cleaning the substrate.
B. Apply the ttowelable leveling and patching compound to the substrate with the flat side of a
steel trowel to obtain a solid mechanical bond before applying the desired thickness. Apply
sufficient pressure to fill all defects and to feather the product onto the subfloor surface.
1. Thickness: Least amount possible to attain the desired smoothness and level floor
surface for finished flooring installation.
3.4 e«^STALLATION
A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 14, "Carpet Modules," and with carpet tile
manufacturer's written installation instmctions.
B. Installation Method: As recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.
C. Maintain dye lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area.
D. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in
fumiture including cabinets, pipes, outiets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal
cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
E. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstmctions,
removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.
F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future
cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent,
nonstaining marking device.
G. Install pattem parallel to walls and borders.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile:
1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner
recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
2. Remove yams that protmde from carpet tile surface.
3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Constmction Waste Management; Manage constmction waste in accordance with
provisions of Section 01524 Constmction Waste Management.
TILE CARPETING
096813-6
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Reseorch -I- Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protection of Indoor
Installations."
B. Protect carpet tile against damage from constmction operations and placement of equipment
and fixtures during the remainder of constmction period. Use protection methods indicated
or recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 096813
TILE CARPETING
096813-7
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research -I- Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
TILE CARPETING
096813-8
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
SECTION 099100 - PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Surface preparation, painting, and finishing of exposed interior and exterior items and
surfaces.
B. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to
shop-priming and surface treatment specified under other Sections.
C. Painting exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designated in schedules, except where
a surface or material is specifically indicated not to be painted or is to remain natural.
Where an item or surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the same as similar adjacent
materials or surfaces. If color or finish is not designated, the Architect will select from
standard colors or finishes available.
D. Painting includes field-painting exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color
coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of mechanical
and electrical equipment.
E. Painting is not required on prefinished items, finished metal surfaces, concealed surfaces,
operating parts, and labels.
F. Labels; Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories, Factory Mutual or other code-
required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature
plates.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 055000 - Metal Fabrications: Shop-priming fertous metal.
B. Section 081113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Shop-priming steel doors and frames.
C. Section 099300 - Staining and Transparent Finishing; Stained and clear finished wood
trims.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. VOC Ranges: Ranges listed are as prescribed by Master Painters Institute (MPI),
Architectural Painting Specification Manual as follows:
1. VOC Range E3; Lowest; <51 g/1.
PAINTING
099100-1
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Carlsbod Controct 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
2. VOC Range E2
3. VOC Range El
4. VOC Range EO
Next lowest; 51-200 g/1.
Highest allowable; 201-350 g/1.
Outside range.
B. General; Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D16 apply to this section.
1. Low Gloss (Gl); Refers to a 'velvet-like' finish with a gloss maximum of 10 when
measured with a 60-degree meter per ASTM D523.
2. Low Sheen (G2); Refers to an eggshell finish with a gloss range between 5 and 20
when measured with a 60-degree meter per ASTM D523.
3. Satin(G3-G4): Refers to a low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 15 and 35
when measured with a 60-degree meter per ASTM D523.
4. Semi-gloss (G5): Refers to a satin-like finish with a gloss range between 20 and 35
when measured with a 60-degree meter per ASTM D523.
5. Gloss (G6): Refers to a high-sheen finish with a gloss range higher than 65 when
measured with a 60-degree meter per ASTM D523.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each paint system specified.
1. Material List; Provide an inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each
material and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify
each material by manufacturer's catalog number and coating material proposed for
use.
2. Manufacturer's Information: Provide manufacturer's technical information,
including label analysis and instmctions for handling, storing and applying each
coating material proposed for use.
3. Cross-reference to finish system and locations of application areas. Use same
designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
4. Certification by the manufacturer that products supplied comply with local
regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs).
5. Printout of MPI's current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category
specified in Part 2, with the product proposed for use highlighted.
B. Samples for Verification Purposes; Provide samples of each color and material to be
applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative samples of the actual
substrate.
1. Submit Sample Bmsh Outs on rigid backing, 8-1/2" x 11" minimum.
2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system.
3. Label each coat of each Sample.
4. Label each Sample for location and application area.
5. Opaque Colors and Finishes- Submit samples, on hardboard, using materials
accepted for Project, of each color and paint finish selected with texture to simulate
actual conditions. Prepare three samples, 8-112 Inches by 11 Inches, with required
number of palnl coats clearly visible.
6. Transparent and Stained Finishes; Prepare samples on species and quality of wood to
be used in the Work. Re-submit as requested until acceptable sheen, color, and
texture are achieved. Label and identify each sample as to location and application.
PAINTING
099100-2
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Pianning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
C. Sustainabiiity Submittals:
1. Product Data for products having recycled content, documentation indicating
percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content,
a. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.
2. Product Data for each material, including its source, cost, and the fraction by weight
that is considered regional and that has been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as
well as manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site.
3. Product Data that indicates methods to be used for ensuring a reduction of indoor air
quality problems in order to help sustain the comfort and well-being of constmction
workers and building occupants.
4. Product Data for paints, including printed statement of VOC content and chemical
components.
5. Product Data Sheets for each product to be used as required by the U.S.G.B.C. as
proof that each product meets the requirements of either Green Seal's GS-11 or GC-
03 documents.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Provide paint cards fully labeled with manufacturer of each paint system applied on the
project. Provide the following with each system:
1. Manufacturer name.
2. Manufacturer's paint product.
3. Primer name and number.
4. Color name and number.
5. Gloss level.
6. Location(s) where used.
1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production mn (batch mix) as
materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1. Quantity: Fumish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each
material and color applied.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide primers and undercoat paint produced by the same
manufacturer as the finish coats.
B. Field Samples: Apply field sample of each paint system indicated and each color and
finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution prior to
commencing work.
I. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application
of each paint system specified in Part 3.
a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. (9
sq- m).
b. Other Items; Architect will designate items or areas required. '^^^
PAINTING
099100-3
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
2. Components: One full component as directed.
3. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review.
4. Install field sample using means and methods identical to those that are going to be
employed during full production.
5. Allow coating to cure in accordance with manufacturer's written instmctions.
6. Perform adhesion test on existing paint to remain using X-cut method per
ASTM D3359. Ratings 4A and 5A acceptable.
7. Final approval of color selections will be based on field sample.
a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of
additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.
8. Approval of field sample does not constitute approval of deviations from the
Contract Documents contained in field sample unless Architect specifically approves
such deviations in writing.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer's original, unopened packages and
containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information;
1. Product name or title of material.
2. Product description (generic classification or binder type).
3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.
4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.
5. Thinning instmctions.
6. Application instmctions.
7. Color name and number.
B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a
minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain containers used in storage
in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
C. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste
daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from
fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application.
1.10 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and
surrounding air temperatures are between 50 deg F (10 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C).
B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and
surrounding air temperatures are between 45 deg F (7 deg C) and 95 deg F (35 deg C).
C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85
percent; or at temperattires less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or
wet surfaces.
D. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are
enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by the manufacturer during
application and drying periods.
PAINTING
099100-4
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgino Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Plonning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
2.1 SUSTAD^JABILITY MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS, GENERAL
A. Recycled Content: Use materials and products that contain the maximum amount of
recycled content allowed that retains material integrity.
B. Local/Regional Materials; Give preference to manufacturer's whose facilities are within a
500 mile radius of the project site. Also give preference to materials that are harvested,
extracted, mined, quarried, etc. within a 500 mile radius of the project site.
C. VOC Content: Paints and coatings applied on-site on the interior of the building and
products used on the interior of the building shall comply with VOC limits.
1. Use materials that have the minimum VOC content in units of g/L when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
D. Paint Materials; Provide only paint materials that meet the requirements of Green Seal
documents.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers, Interior Paints: SulDject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering interior 0-low VOC paint piroducts that may be incorporated into the
Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Benjamin Moore; EcoSpec WB.
2. Glidden Professional; Lifemaster No VOC.
3. Kelly-Moore; Enviro-Cote.
4. Sherwin-Williams; Harmony Coating System.
B. Acceptable Manufacturers, Exterior Paints; Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering exterior paint products tltiat may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following;
1. Benj amin Moore.
2. Glidden Professional
3. Kelly-Moore.
4. Sherwin-Williams.
2.3 PAEsfT MATERIALS
A. Material Compatibility; Provide block fillers, primers, finish coat materials, and related
materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under
conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by the manufacturer based on testing
and field experience.
B. Material Quality; Provide the manufacturer's best-quality trade sale paint material of the
various coating types specified. Paint material containers not displaying manufacturer's
product identification will not be acceptable.
PAINTING
099100-5
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrory
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
C. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or
materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the
exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Fumish the manufacturer's
material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions.
D. Colors: Match colors indicated by reference to the manufacturer's standard color
designations.
E. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having
jurisdiction and, for interior paints and coatings applied at Project site, the following VOC
limits, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59,
Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
1. Flat Paints and Coatings; 50 g/L.
2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L.
3. Dry-Fog Coatings: 150 g/L.
4. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters; IOO g/L.
5. Anticorrosive and Antimst Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L.
6. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 340 g/L.
7. Pretreatment Wash Primers; 420 g/L.
8. Floor Coatings: 100 g/L.
9. Shellacs, Clear: 730 g/L.
10. Shellacs, Pigmented; 550 g/L.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions under which painting will be performed for compliance
with paint application requirements. Surfaces receiving paint must be thoroughly dry
before paint is applied.
B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure
compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, fumish information on
characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.
C. Notify the Architect about anticipated problems using the materials specified over
substrates primed by others.
D. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates; When measured with an electronic moisture
meter as follows:
1. Concrete; 12 percent
2. Wood; 15 percent.
3. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
4. Plaster: 12 percent.
E. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and
surfaces are dry.
1. Beginning coating application constitutes acceptance of substrates and conditions.
PAINTING
099100-6
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
3.2 PREPARATION, GENERAL
D.
E.
A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting
fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted, or provide surface-
applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting. Remove these items, if
necessary, to completely paint the items and adjacent surfaces.
B. Cleaning; Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of
substances that could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease prior
to cleaning. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the
cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.
C. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. Notify Architect
in writing about anticipated problems using the specified finish-coat material with
substrates primed by others.
Follow proper procedures, methods, guidelines, and regulations for paint preparation
related to lead paint sanding. Wear goggles, NIOSH-approved respirators, mbber gloves,
and appropriate clothing.
Clean building exterior using pressurized hot water.
1. Clean heavily soiled areas with fiber bmsh and water.
2. Equip pressure washer with fan tip nozzle of 250 degree minimum.
3. Do not permit water temperature to exceed 180 degrees F.
4. Do not permit water pressure to exceed 1,200 psi.
F. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If
surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and bum, cortect this
condition before application. Do not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that
permitted in manufacturer's printed directions.
G. Exposed Equipment; Verify installations are complete before initiating preparation of
surfaces of exposed mechanical and electrical piping, conduit, ductwork, and equipment for
field-painting.
H. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire-bmsh,
clean with solvents recommended by the paint manufacturer, and touch up with the same
primer as the shop coat.
I. Factory-Primed and Enamel Substrates: Wipe clean and dry.
J. Following completion of painting operations in each space or area, have items reinstalled
by workers skilled in the trades involved.
3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION
Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instmctions
for each particular substrate condition and as specified.
PAINTING
099100-7
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research -I- Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
B. Plaster:
1. Clean plaster adjacent to new repairs so that the paint bonds and blends into new and
old, minimum 6 inches beyond repairs.
2. Allow new plaster to cure thoroughly (30 days minimum) prior to applying paint.
Moisture content shall be 8 percent or less, as measured with a moisture meter, at
time of paint application.
3. Scmb surfaces of existing plaster with a solution of 10 percent tri-sodium-phosphate
to remove any glaze, and to etch the surface. Wash the solution from the surface
using clean water.
4. Patch cracks, holes and defects with patching plaster. Remove all powder and dust
by washing with clear water.
5. Spot prime patches and stains.
C. Steel Substrates: Clean ungalvanized ferrous metal surfaces that have not been shop-
coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent
or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with recommendations of the Steel Stmctures
Painting Council (SSPC) specification SSPC-SP 10 and written instmctions of paint
manufacturer.
1. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat
before priming.
2. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damages. Wire-
bmsh, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with
the same primer as the shop coat.
D. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents
so that the surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove grease and oil residue
from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce
clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.
1. Treat exterior galvanized surfaces according to SSPC SP-7 and interior galvanized
surfaces to SSPS SP-1.
E. Apply primers to metal surfaces in the field under any of the following circumstances;
1. Where it can be established that shop primer was applied more than 30 days (7 days
for some primers, verify with metal shop) before delivery to the site.
2. If shop-applied primer is contaminated during transport or storage.
3. If salts are deposited from marine fog, road salts, constmction dusts, etc. during
storage.
F. Cementitious Materials; Prepare concrete surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence,
chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen, as required, to remove glaze. If
hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface
preparation.
1. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer.
2. Treat concrete surfaces which are highly glazed or where traces of form release
agents are present with a preparation of one-part concentrated muriatic acid, 4-parts
water and one-part detergent or as recommended by parting compound manufacturer.
Remove acid with water. Allow to dry.
PAINTING
099100-8
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Plonning, Inc. City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
3. Remove stains on concrete resulting from weathering or corroded metals, with a
solution of 2-oz. sodium methasilicate in one-gallon water. Wet stained areas with
water before application of solution. Allow to dry.
4. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate
tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and bum,
correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces where moisture
content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instmctions.
3.4 MATERIALS PREPARATION
A. Carefully mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's directions.
B. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign
materials and residue.
C. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density; stir as required
during application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film and, if necessary,
strain material before using.
D. Use only thinners approved by the paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits.
3.5 APPLICATION
A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and
techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.
B. Do not paint over dirt, mst, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions
detrimental to formation of a durable paint film.
C. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the schedules.
D. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used.
E. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of the
application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as
recommended by the manufacturer. Sand between applications where sanding is required
to produce a smooth even surface according to the manufacturer's directions.
1. Slightly vary the color of succeeding coats.
a. Do not apply additional coats until the completed coat has been inspected and
approved.
b. Only the inspected and approved coats of paint will be considered in
determining the number of coats applied.
2. Sand and dust between coats to remove defects visible to the unaided eye from a
distance of 5 feet.
3. On removable panels and hinged panels, paint the back sides to match the exposed
sides.
PAINTING
099100-9
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrory
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
F. Apply additional coats if undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of
paint until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to
ensure that surfaces, including edges, comers, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners,
receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.
G. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and fumiture the same as similar exposed
surfaces. Before the final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently
fixed equipment or fumiture with prime coat only.
H. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed
surfaces.
I. Paint visible surfaces of ducts where visible through registers or grilles with a flat, non-
specular black paint.
J. Do not paint fire-treated plywood backboards to be used for telephone or electrical
equipment unless permitted by authorities having jurisdiction.
K. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges same as exterior faces.
L. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop-primed and touch-up painted.
3.6 SCHEDULING PAINTING
A. Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for
painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface
deterioration.
B. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat
until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate
thumb pressure, and where application of another coat of paint does not cause the
undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.
3.7 APPLICATION PROCEDURES
A. Apply paints and coatings by bmsh, roller, spray, or other applicators according to the
manufacturer's directions.
B. Bmshes: Use bmshes best suited for the material applied.
C. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by
the manufacturer for the material and texture required.
D. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by the
manufacturer for the material and texture required.
E. Minimum Coating Thickness; Apply materials no thinner than the manufacturer's
recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as
recommended by the manufacturer.
PAINTING
099100-10
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
F. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete at a rate to ensure complete coverage with
pores filled.
G. Prime Coats; Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended
by the manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not
been prime-coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction
spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no bum-through or
other defects due to insufficient sealing.
H. Painted surface shall be considered unacceptable if any of the following are evident under
final lighting source (including daylight) for interior surfaces;
1. Visible defects are evident on vertical surfaces when viewed at normal viewing
angles from a distance of not less than 39-inches (1000 mm).
2. Visible defects are evident on horizontal surfaces when viewed at normal viewing
angles from a distance of not less than 39-inches (1000 mm).
3. Visible defects are evident on ceiling, soffit and other overhead surfaces when
viewed at normal viewing angles.
4. When the final coat on any surface exhibits a lack of uniformity of color, sheen,
texture, and hiding across full surface area.
5. Coating exhibits lack of full adhesion to surfaces, including but not limited to
bubbling, peeling, chipping, and other adhesion defects.
I. Miscellaneous Surfaces and Procedures
1. Exposed mechanical items
a. Finish electric panels, access doors, conduits, pipes, ducts, grilles, registers,
vents, and items of similar nature to match the adjacent wall and ceiling
surfaces, or as directed.
b. Paint visible duct surfaces behind vents, registers, and grilles flat black.
c. Wash metal with solvent, prime, and apply 2 coats of alkyd enamel.
2. Exposed pipe and duct insulation
a. Apply 1 coat of latex paint on insulation which has been sized or primed under
other Sections; apply 2 coats on such surfaces when unprepared.
b. Match color of adjacent surfaces.
c. Remove band before painting, and replace after painting.
3. Hardware
a. Paint prime coated hardware to match adjacent surfaces.
b. Paint metal portions of head seals, jamb seals, and astragal seals to match the
color of the door frame unless otherwise directed by the Architect.
4. Wet areas
a. For oil base paints, use 1 percent phencimercuric or 4 percent
tetrachlorophenol.
b. For water emulsion and glue size surfaces, use 4 percent sodium
tetrachlorophenate.
5. Exposed Vents: Apply 2 coats of heat resistant paint approved by the Architect
J. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove,
refinish, or repaint work not complying with specified requirements.
PAINTING
099100-11
3
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Reseorch + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
3.8
B.
CLEANING
Cleanup; At the end of each work day, remove empty cans, rags, mbbish, and other
discarded paint materials from the site.
After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered
paint by washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished
surfaces.
C. Constmction Waste Management: Manage constmction waste in accordance with
provisions of Section 01524 Constmction Waste Management.
3.9 PROTECTION
A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting.
Cortect damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to
Architect.
B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective
wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations.
C. At completion of constmction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or
defaced painted surfaces.
3.10 PAINT SYSTEMS SCHEDULES
A. Schedule; Only major areas are scheduled. Treat miscellaneous and similar items and
areas within room or space with similar system.
B. Number of Coats: Where number of coats are specified, it is only as a minimum
requirement. Apply additional coats, at no additional cost to Owner, if necessary to
completely hide base material, produce uniform color, and provide satisfactory finish
result.
C. Systems Specifications: These specifications are a guide and are meant to establish
procedure and quality. Confer with Architect to determine exact finish desired.
D. Acceptance of Final Colors: Do not apply final coats of paint for either exterior and
interior systems until colors have been accepted by Architect.
E. Painted surfaces shall be considered unacceptable, as judged solely by the Architect, if any
of the following are evident under natural lighting source for exterior surfaces and final
lighting source (including daylight) for interior surfaces:
1. Visible defects are evident on vertical surfaces when viewed at normal viewing
angles from a distance of not less than 39-inches (1000 mm).
2. Visible defects are evident on horizontal surfaces when viewed at normal viewing
angles from a distance of not less than 39-inches (1000 mm).
3. Visible defects are evident on ceiling, soffit and other overhead surfaces when
viewed at normal viewing angles.
PAINTING
099100-12
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
4. When the final coat on any surface exhibits a lack of uniformity of color, sheen,
texture, and hiding across full surface area.
5. Coating exhibits lack of full adhesion to surfaces, including but not limited to
bubbling, peeling, chipping, and other adhesion defects.
3.11 EXTERIOR FINISH SCHEDULE
A. References used in this schedule are based on systems described in the Painting and
Decorating Contractors of America, Master Painters Institute, Architectural Painting
Specification Manual (MPI).
B. Steel Pipe Railings:
I. Polyurethane, Pigmented (over epoxy primer); MPI EXT 5.3L
a. Prime Coat; Epoxy primer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Polyurethane matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Polyurethane (gloss).
C. Galvanized Steel Flashings (Not Chromate Passivated);
1. Latex: MPI EXT 5.3A
a. Prime Coat; Cementitious primer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Exterior latex (semi-gloss).
D. Plaster;
1. Latex Paint over Alkali-Resistant Primer System; MPI EXT 9.IC.
a. Prime Coat; As recommended by manufacturer of topcoat.
b. Intermediate Coat: As recommended by manufacturer, matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Elastomeric.
E. Concrete, Vertical Surfaces:
1. Latex Paint System MPI EXT 3.1 A.
a. Prime Coat: Exterior latex primer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat; Exterior latex (flat).
3.12 n«JTERIOR FINISH SCHEDULE
A. References used in this schedule are based on systems described in the Painting and
Decorating Contractors of America, Master Painters Institute, Architectural Painting
Specification Manual (MPI).
B. Steel - Primed:
1. Latex (over alkyd primer): MPins[T5.1Q
a. Prime Coat; Alkyd metal primer.
b. Intermediate Coat; Interior latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Interior latex (semi-gloss).
PAINTING
099100-13
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
C. Gypsum Board Walls:
1. Latex System; MPI INT 9.2A.
a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer.
b. Intermediate Coat; Interior latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Interior latex (low sheen).
D. Gypsum Board Ceilings:
1. Latex (over latex sealer); MPI INT 9.2A.
a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Interior latex (flat).
E. Gypsum Board at Toilet Rooms;
1. Latex System: MPIINT9.2A.
a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer.
b. Intermediate Coat; Interior latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Interior latex (semi-gloss).
F. Painted Wood Trims:
1. Latex (over latex sealer): MPIINT6.4R
a. Primer: Latex primer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Interior latex (satin).
END OF SECTION 099100
PAINTING
099100-14
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Plonning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Controct 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
SECTION 099300 - STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Surface preparation and application of wood stains and clear wood finishes to new interior
wood carpentry work, restaining of existing wood ttim and panel finishes.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 099100 - Painting; Painted exterior and interior surfaces.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of stain indicated.
1. Material List; An inclusive list of required stain materials. Indicate each material
and cross-reference the specific stain system and application. Identify each wood
stain material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.
2. Cross-reference to finish system and locations of application areas. Use same
designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
3. Manufacturer's Information: Manufacturer's technical information, including label
analysis and instmctions for handling, storing, and applying each wood stain.
4. Printout of MPI's current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category
specified in Part 2, with the product proposed for use highlighted.
B. Samples for Verification: For each color and stain material to be applied, with texture to
simulate actual conditions, on representative Samples of actual substrates.
1. Use representative colors when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit until
required color and texture are achieved.
2. Provide list of materials and applications for each coat of each Sample. Label each
Sample for location and application.
3. Submit Samples on the following substrates for Architect's review of color and
texture only:
a. Stained Wood: Provide 8- by 10-inch (200- by 250-mm) samples of each
stained wood finish to be used on representative surfaces.
4. Transparent and Stained Finishes: Prepare samples on species and quality of wood to
be used in the Work. Re-submit as requested until acceptable sheen, color, and
texture are achieved. Label and identify each sample as to location and application.
STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING
099300-1
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrory
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
C. Sustainabiiity Submittals;
1. Product Data for products having recycled content, documentation indicating
percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content.
a. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.
2. Product Data for each material, including its source, cost, and the fraction by weight
that is considered regional and that has been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as
well as manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site.
3. Product Data that indicates methods to be used for ensuring a reduction of indoor air
quality problems in order to help sustain the comfort and well-being of constmction
workers and building occupants.
4. Product Data for stains and clear coatings, including printed statement of VOC
content and chemical components.
5. Product Data Sheets for each product to be used as required by the U.S.G.B.C. as
proof that each product meets the requirements of either Green Seal's GS-11 or GC-
03 documents.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Applicator.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Provide stain and clear finish cards fully labeled with manufacturer of each staining system
applied on the project. Provide the following with each system:
1. Manufacturer name.
2. Manufacturer's stain or clear finish product.
3. Primer name and number.
4. Color name and number.
5. Gloss level.
6. Location(s) where used.
1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Fumish extra stain materials from the same production mn as the materials applied and in
quantities described below. Package with protective covering for storage and identify with
labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner.
1. Quantity; Fumish Owner with extra stain materials in quantities indicated below;
a. Semitransparent Stain; 5 gal. (18.75 L) of each color applied.
b. Clear Wood Finish; 5 gal (18.75L).
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. MPI Standards:
1. Products; Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in hs "MPI Approved
Products List."
B. Applicator Qualifications; A firm or individual experienced in applying wood stains similar
in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in
applications with a record of successful in-service performance.
STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING
099300-2
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
C. Source Limitations: Obtain primers, stains, and other finishes through one source from a
single manufacturer.
D. Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each finish system indicated and each color
selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate
aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and condhions for application
of each type of finish system and substrate.
a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. (9
sq. m).
b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.
2. Final approval of stain color selections will be based on benchmark samples.
a. If preliminary stain color selections are not approved, apply additional
benchmark samples of additional stain colors selected by Architect at no added
cost to Owner.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to Project she in manufacturer's original, unopened containers bearing
manufacturer's name and label and the following information;
1. Product name or title of material.
2. Product description (generic classification).
3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.
4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.
5. Thinning instmctions.
6. Application instmctions.
7. Color name and number.
8. Handling instmctions and precautions.
9. VOC content.
B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a
minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain storage containers in a
clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and
waste daily.
1.10 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Temperature Limitations; Apply stains only when temperatures of surfaces to be stained
and the surrounding air are between 45 deg F (7 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C) for oil-
based stain, or between 50 deg F (10 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C) for latex-based stain.
B. Weather Limitations; Do not apply stain in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity
exceeds 85 percent; when temperatures are less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point;
or to damp or wet surfaces.
1. Allow wet surfaces to dry thoroughly and attain temperature and conditions specified
before starting or continuing with coating operation.
STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING
099300-3
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgino Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. Benjamin Moore & Co.
2. Cabot Incorporated, Samuel.
3. Coronado Paint Company.
4. Sherwin-Williams Co.
2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility:
1. Provide materials for use within each fmish system that are compatible with one
another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as
demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
2. For each coat in a finish system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in finish system and on substrate indicated.
B. Stain Colors; Match Architect's samples.
C. VOC Content; Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having
jurisdiction and, for interior stains and finishes applied at project site, the following VOC
limits, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59,
Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
1. Clear Wood Finishes, Vamishes: VOC not more than 350 g/L.
2. Shellacs, Clear; VOC not more than 730 g/L.
3. Stains; VOC not more than 250 g/L.
2.3 WOOD STAIN MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Stain-Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality stain material of the various
stain types specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for
application indicated. Stain-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product
identification will not be acceptable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of
work.
1. Maximum Moisture Content of Wood Substrates: 15 percent when measured with an
electronic moisture meter.
2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with
existing finishes.
STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING
099300-4
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbad Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
3. Begin finish application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been cortected and
surfaces are dry.
4. Beginning application of finish system constitutes Contractor's acceptance of
substrate and conditions.
B. Coordination of Work; Review other Sections in which coatings are provided to ensure
compatibility of the total system for various substrates.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instmctions and recommendations in "MPI
Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.
B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be
finished. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide
surface-applied protection before surface preparation and finishing.
1. After completing finishing operations, reinstall items that were removed; use workers
skilled in the trades involved. Remove surface-applied protection if any.
C. Clean and prepare surfaces to be finished according to manufacturer's written instmctions
for each particular substrate condition and as specified.
1. Remove surface dirt, oil, or grease by washing with a detergent solution; rinse
thoroughly with clean water and allow to dry. Remove grade stamps and pencil
marks by sanding lightly. Remove loose wood fibers by bmshing.
2. Remove mildew by scmbbing with a commercial wash formulated for mildew
removal and as recommended by stain manufacturer.
3. Countersink steel nails, if used, and fill with putty tinted to final color to eliminate
mst leach stains.
D. Apply wood filler paste to open-grain woods, as defined in "MPI Architectural Painting
Specification Manual," to produce smooth, glasslike finish.
E. Mixing: Mix and prepare stains according to manufacturer's written instmctions. Stir stain
thoroughly before applying and frequentiy during application to maintain color consistency.
1. Maintain containers used in mixing and application in a clean condition, free of
foreign materials and residue.
2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as
required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary,
remove surface film and then strain material before using.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply finishes according to manufacturer's written instmctions.
1. Use applicators and techniques suited for finish and substrate indicated.
2. Finish surfaces behind movable equipment and fiimiture same as similar exposed
surfaces.
STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING
099300-5
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgino Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
B. Apply finishes to produce surface films without cloudiness, holidays, lap marks, bmsh
marks, mns, ropiness, or other surface imperfections.
C. Minimum Spreading Rate; Apply stain at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate to
ensure proper penetration. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type
of stain material being applied.
1. Do not apply stain on surfaces that are not sufficiently dry when recommended by
stain manufacturer. Ensure that each coat is dry and hard before applying succeeding
coat.
D. Apply stain evenly with bmsh. Thoroughly stain edges and ends of boards. Bmsh out
excess stain that collects in butts of boards. Avoid staining in direct sunlight.
1. Bmshes: Use bmshes best suited for type of material applied. Use bmshes of
appropriate size for surface being stained.
2. Drying Time: Allow a minimum of 24 hours between coats unless directed otherwise
by manufacturer.
3.4 CLEANESfG
A. Cleanup; At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, mbbish, and other
discarded materials from Project site.
1. After completing staining, clean window glass and other surfaces. Remove spattered
stain by proper methods without scratching or damaging adjacent finished surfaces.
B. Constmction Waste Management: Manage constmction waste in accordance with
provisions of Section 01524 Constmction Waste Management.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect work of other trades, whether being stained or not, against damage from staining.
Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and restaining as approved by
Architect.
B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly stained finishes. After completing staining
operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their
work.
1. After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced
stained surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA Pl.
3.6 INTERIOR WOOD-FINISH-SYSTEM SCHEDULE
A. Stained Wood Trims;
1. Lacquer (over stain); MPI INT 6.3F
a. Wood Stain; Interior wood stain.
b. Sealer Coat; Clear lacquer sanding sealer.
c. Two Finish Coats: Clear lacquer (satin).
STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING
099300-6
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrory
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
B. Interior Wood Wall Caps:
1. Polyurethane Vamish (over stain): MPI INT 6.3E
a. First Coat: Semi-transparent stain.
b. Intermediate Coats: Two coats polyurethane vamish.
c. Top Coat: Polyurethane vamish (semi-gloss).
END OF SECTION 099300
STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING
099300-7
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set-April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING
099300-8
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Reseorch + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
SECTION 099600 - HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Surface preparation and shop-application of high-performance coating systems.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 055000 - Metal Fabrications; Priming ferrous metal items.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
B. Samples; Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available for each
type of finish-coat material indicated.
C. Sustainabiiity Submittals:
1. Product Data for each material, including its source, cost, and the fraction by weight
that is considered regional and that has been exttacted, harvested, or recovered, as
well as manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site.
2. Manufacturers' product data for coatings, including printed statement of VOC content
and chemical components and material safety data sheets.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Benchmark Samples (Mockups): Provide a full-coat benchmark finish sample of each color
and type of coating required. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P5.
1. Miscellaneous Areas and Items: In area or on item selected.
2. Final approval of finishes will be made from benchmark samples.
3. Approved benchmark samples may become part of the completed Work if
undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.6 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Apply coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and surtounding air
temperatures are between 45 and 95 deg F (7 and 35 deg C).
B. Do not apply coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85
percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet
surfaces.
HIGH-PERFORAAANCE COATINGS
099600 - 1
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
1. Allow wet surfaces to dry thoroughly before proceeding with or continuing coating
operation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUSTAINABILITY MATERL\L REQUIREMENTS, GENERAL
A. Local/Regional Materials; Give preference to manufacturer's whose facilities are within a
500 mile radius of the project site. Also give preference to materials that are harvested,
extracted, mined, quarried, etc. within a 500 mile radius of the project site.
B. VOC Content; Paints and coatings applied on-site on the interior of the building and
products used on the interior of the building shall comply with VOC limits.
1. Use materials that have the minimum VOC content in units of g/L when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph tities below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products
specified.
B. Products of the following manufacturers are listed in other Part 2 articles and use the
abbreviated names shown in parentheses:
1. Carboline Company (Carboline).
2. DuPont Company; High Performance Coatings (DuPont).
3. Tnemec Company, Inc. (Tnemec).
2.3 MATEIUALS
A. Material Compatibility: For each finish indicated, provide separate component coat
materials of one manufacturer that are compatible with one another and the substrates
indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer
based on testing and field experience.
B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality material for each coating material
specified.
C. Primer: See Section 055000.
D. Intermediate Coat: Epoxy intermediate coat of topcoat manufacturer recommended in
writing for use with primer, and topcoat, and substrate indicated under environmental
conditions indicated.
2.4 EXTERIOR HIGH-PERFORMANCE TOPCOATS
A. Semigloss Polyurethane; Semigloss, aliphatic polyurethane enamel.
1. Products:
a. Carboline; 133-HB 2-Component Aliphatic Polyurethane.
HIGH-PERFORAAANCE COATINGS
099600 - 2
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbad Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
b. DuPont; Imron 326 (13P) Semi-Gloss Polyurethane Enamel.
c. Tnemec; Series 75 Endurashield Aliphatic Acrylic Polyurethane.
B. Colors: As indicated on Drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SHOP APPLICATION
A. General: Application of coatings indicates Applicator's acceptance of surfaces.
B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers or other coatings are
provided to ensure compatibility of total systems for various substtates. On request, fumish
information on characteristics of specified finish materials to ensure compatible primers.
1. If a potential incompatibility of primers applied by others exists, obtain the following
from primer Applicator before proceeding:
a. Confirmation of primer's suitability for expected service conditions.
b. Confirmation of primer's ability to be topcoated with materials specified.
2. Notify Architect about anticipated problems before using coatings specified over
substrates primed by others.
C. Ferrous-Metal Substrate Surface Preparation: As specified in Section 051213.
D. Preparation of Galvanized AESS Steel to receive High-Performance Coating: ''*'*^
1. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to '
be coated. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item,
provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and coating.
a. After completing coating operations, reinstah items that were removed; use
workers skilled in the trades involved.
2. Cleaning; Before applying high-performance coatings, clean substrates of substances
that could impair bond of coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning.
3. AESS Primed Surfaces: Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have
been damaged. Wire bmsh, solvent clean, and touch up with same primer as the shop
coat.
4. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove primers and reprime
substrate.
E. Coating Material Preparation:
1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying coatings in a clean condition, free
of foreign materials and residue.
2. Stir materials before applying to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as
required during application. Do not stir surface film into the material. Remove film
and, if necessary, strain coating material before using.
F. Coating Application:
1. Do not apply high-performance coatings over dirt, mst, scale, grease, moisture,
scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to forming a durable coating film.
Sflfg/fr
HIGH-PERFORAAANCE COATINGS
099600 - 3
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research -I- Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
2. Apply coatings to exposed surfaces, including areas visible when permanent screen
components are in place, and maintain system integrity and provide desired
protection.
G. Scheduling Coating: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or
otherwise prepared for coating as soon as practicable after preparation and before
subsequent surface deterioration.
1. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted.
2. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured as recommended by
manufacturer.
3. Where manufacturer's written instmctions require sanding, sand between applications
to produce a smooth, even surface.
4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not
recoat surfaces until coating has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel
sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and application of another coat does not cause
undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.
5. If undercoats or other conditions show through final coat, apply additional coats until
cured film has a uniform coating finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention
to edges, comers, crevices, welds, exposed fasteners, and similar surfaces to ensure
that they receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.
H. Application Procedures: Apply coatings by bmsh, roller, spray, or other applicators
according to manufacturer's written instmctions.
1. Bmsh Application; Use bmshes best suited for material applied and of appropriate
size for the surface or item being coated.
a. Apply primers and first coats by bmsh unless manufacturer's written
instmctions permit using roller or mechanical applicators.
b. Bmsh out and work bmsh coats into surfaces in an even film.
c. Eliminate cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, bmsh marks, mns, sags,
ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Neatly draw glass lines and color
breaks.
2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as
recommended by manufacturer for the material and texture required.
3. Spray Equipment; Use mechanical methods to apply coating if permitted by
manufacturer's written instmctions and goveming regulations.
a. Use spray equipment with orifice size recommended by manufacturer for
material and texture required.
b. Apply each coat to provide the equivalent hiding of bmsh-applied coats.
c. Do not double back with spray equipment building-up film thickness of two
coats in one pass, unless recommended by manufacturer.
I. Minimum Coating Thickness; Apply each material no thinner than manufacturer's
recommended spreading rate. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as
recommended by manufacturer.
J. Prime Coats; Before applying topcoats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by
manufacturer, to material required to be coated or finished that has not been prime coated
by others.
HIGH-PERFORAAANCE COATINGS
099600 - 4
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgino Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
1. Recoat primed and sealed substrates if there is evidence of suction spots or unsealed
areas in first coat, to ensure a topcoat with no bum-through or other defects caused
by insufficient sealing.
K. Completed Work; Match approved Samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove,
refinish, or recoat work that does not comply with specified requirements.
L. Cleanup; After completing coating application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered
coatings by washing, scraping, or other methods.
3.2 FIELD TOUCH-UP
A. Protect work of other trades, whether being coated or not, against damage from coating
operation. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as approved by
Architect, and leave in an imdamaged condition.
1. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly coated finishes. After completing coating
operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect
their work.
2. At completion of constmction activities of other trades, touch up and restore
damaged or defaced coated surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in
PDCAPl.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Constmction Waste Management: Manage constmction waste in accordance with
provisions of Section 01524 Constmction Waste Management.
3.4 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATING SCHEDULE
A. Exterior Surfaces:
1. Ferrous Metal:
a. First Coat: Primer formulated for moderate environment.
b. Second Coat; Intermediate coat.
c. Topcoat; Semigloss polyurethane.
END OF SECTION 099600
HIGH-PERFORAAANCE COATINGS
099600 - 5
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
HIGH-PERFORAAANCE COATINGS
099600 - 6
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
SECTION 099729 - CONCRETE FLOOR SEALING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Concrete floor sealer/hardener at back-of-house areas.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 096123 - Concrete Vapor Emission Treatment: Liquid applied treatment system
applied to freshly placed concrete slabs.
B. Section 096813 - Tile Carpeting: Hydraulic-cement-based trowelable patching and
leveling compound applied to existing concrete slabs for vapor emission treatment.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit literature and manufacturer's installation instmctions.
B. Samples: Submit all materials to be used to the engineer for approval prior to start of work.
C. Sustainabiiity Submittals;
1. Product Data for installation coatings, including printed statement of VOC content
and chemical composition of each product used.
1.5 E^FORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Certificates: Submit certification that the sealer/hardener compound complies with these
specifications.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Experience in the production and use of the product
specified. Supply a list of projects where specified products have been used on similar
projects with similar jobsite and exposure conditions.
B. Contractor Qualifications: Minimum five years prior experience with the use and
application of the specified materials or similar products.
C. Pre-Installation Conference; Conference shall be attended by Contractor, Owner,
Architect, sealer subcontractor and his foreman. Review procedures, materials, techniques,
and coordinate related work and shutdowns.
CONCRETE FLOOR SEAUNG
099729-1
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbod Controct 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
D. Mock-up: Before applying curing and sealing compound to entire surface, test a small area
to verify that product is providing the desired moisture retention, penetration ability and
finish appearance (sheen).
1. Test a minimum 4 ft. by 4 ft. area on selected area of concrete. Use the
manufacturer's application instmctions. Let test area protective treatment cure before
inspection. Keep test area available for comparison throughout the protective
treatment project.
E. Substitutions: Provide request for substitution in writing to Architect for review including
the following;
1. A certificate of compliance from an independent testing laboratory that the proposed
substitute product meets or exceeds the specified performance criteria, when tested
in accordance with the specified test standards.
2. Documented proof showing that the proposed substitute has a five year proven
record of performance on similar stmctures under similar exposures.
3. At least five successfiil installations which allow the Architect to investigate the
condition of the system.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver sealer in original; unopened containers with the manufacturers name, labels,
product identification and batch numbers. They shall be ordered in sufficient quantities
and shall be delivered in ample time to facilitate the work.
B. Store and condition the specified product as recommended by the manufacturer. The
material shall be stored on the premises where directed.
1.8 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Refer to the applicable manufacturer's written literature for the recommended temperature
of surfaces to be sealed and ambient conditions during application and drying.
B. Do not apply material if the substrate is frozen or if freezing conditions are imminent.
C. When using as a curing compound, apply when surface water has completely disappeared
and the concrete will not be marred by workmen.
D. Do not apply if rain is expected within 12 hours.
E. Provide suitable coverings to protect adjacent surfaces and objects. Mask finished surfaces
for protection. Provide drop cloths, where necessary to adequately protect all surfaces not
to be sealed. Mask off adjoining surfaces and close off drains.
F. Do not allow surfaces to become contaminated between coats.
G. Protect sealed surfaces during drying from traffic, damage and contamination.
CONCRETE FLOOR SEAUNG
099729-2
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
1.9
A.
B.
C.
D.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Verify that manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) are accessible on site
before applying sealer.
Provide adequate forced air ventilation during application of sealer.
Avoid contact with eyes and skin; do not ingest or inhale. Prolonged or repeated exposure
may cause skin irritation or allergic reactions.
Wear goggles, NIOSH and MSHA approved respirators, mbber gloves, and appropriate
clothing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUSTAINABILITY MATERL\L REQUIREMENTS, GENERAL
A. VOC Content; Coatings applied on-site on the interior of the building and products used
on the interior of the building shall comply with VOC limits .
1. Use materials that have the lowest possible VOC content in units of g/L when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2. Coatings: Meet the following:
a. EPA Method 24 testing of less than 40 g/liter
b. Contains no formaldehyde, formaldehyde precursors and zero-carcinogens
c. Contains zero hazardous air pollutants (HAP's)
2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering acrylic sealers that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited
to, the following:
1. BASF; MasterKure CC 1315.
2. NoxCrete; Cure & Seal 100-250 E.
B. Product; High solids, solvent based, non-yellowing, acrylic copolymer concrete curing,
sealing and dustproofing compound.
1. Meeting the applicable requirements of ASTM C1315 Type 1, Class A; ASTM
C309; AASHTO M-148.
2. VOC Content: < 350 g/1.
3. Gloss; Glossy.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's printed instmctions.
CONCRETE FLOOR SEALING
099729-3
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Reseorch + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
B. Remove all dirt, oil, grease, paint or foreign cure residue with manufacturer's
recommended stripping and cleaning agent and clean with a 10% caustic solution,
exercising normal precautions for handling such materials.
C. Rinse thoroughly with clean water and allow to dry.
D. Verify that voids and cracks are filled with grout and that ridges and fins are removed
leaving a smooth broom trowel finish.
E. Sweep and air blow surfaces to receive floor sealer to remove dust and foreign matter.
F. Check that pipes, vents, drains, and other penetrations ofthe floor sealer are completed.
G. Ensure surface is clean and dry prior to coating.
H. Do not allow traffic on cleaned surfaces prepared for finish.
3.2 EXISTING, OLDER CONCRETE PREPARATION FOR CLEAR SEALING
A. Determine condition of the concrete in accordance with manufacturer's written instmctions.
B. Preparation; Sweep the area to be cleaned free of trash and debris. Protect all areas not to
be cleaned or stripped. Mask off all adjacent surfaces with painter's tape or plastic duct
tape. Use a spray shield to be prevent overspray onto adjacent constmction. Be sure all
pilot lights, arcing or sparking devices are off
C. Sealing Existing Concrete: All surfaces must be stmcturally sound, clean, and free of dust,
dirt, laitance, efflorescence, curing compounds, paint, oil, grease and other contaminants.
Prior to application, properly treat and repair surface defects, voids, cracks and joints.
Concrete may be damp, but must be free of standing water.
3.3 CLEAR SEALER APPLICATION
A. Apply sealing compound in a uniform, continuous film by sprayer, short nap roller, bmsh,
or push broom.
B. Apply sealer to entire interior floor area indicated unless noted otherwise.
C. Sealing Existing Concrete: Apply a full, even coat of curing and sealing compound at the
rates described on the manufacturer's printed literature. Use an applicator or roller to pick
up puddles or excess material from the surface. If a higher sheen is desired a second coat
may be applied as soon as the first coat has dried (2-4 hours at 75°F). Obtain
recommendation from manufacturer for proper product to use for second coat.
D. Airless Sprayer or Airless Air Assist; Apply at rate recommended by manufacturer. Let dry
for at least 30 minutes. Treated products may be "force-dried" using heat when permitted
by manufacturer in writing.
CONCRETE FLOOR SEALING
099729-4
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Reseorch + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
E. Sponge or Synthetic Lint-Free Mop: Wet applicator with clean water, then apply a thin
coat of sealer. Apply a second coat once the first application is tack-free (about an hour).
Do not permit traffic on treated surfaces for minimum 12 hours after application. Protect
from water for 24 hours.
3.4 DRYING
A. Allow coated concrete to dry for a minimum of 8-12 hours. Do not open surfaces to foot
traffic before dryness is obtained. Maximum surface hardness should develop within 7-10
days.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean curing and sealing compound from tools with soap and water following
manufacturer's written instmctions.
B. Leave finished work and work area in a neat, broom-clean condition without evidence of
spillovers onto adjacent areas.
C. Constmction Waste Management; Manage constmction waste in accordance with
provisions of Section 01524 Constmction Waste Management.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect sealed area from traffic for length of time required by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 099729
CONCRETE FLOOR SEAUNG
099729-5
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgino Cole Library
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
CONCRETE FLOOR SEALING
099729-6
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgino Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
SECTION 101100 ~ VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Glass whiteboards.
B. Bulletin boards.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data; For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. Show location of tack assembly seams and joints.
2. Include sections of typical trim members.
C. Samples for Initial Selection; For each type of product indicated as follows;
1. Cork Swatches: Manufacturer's full range of cork colors for initial color selection.
2. Tack Assembly: Not less than 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm), mounted on
substrate indicated for final Work. Include one panel for each type, color, and texture
required.
3. Trim: 6-inch- (152-mm-) long sections of each trim profile including comer section.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of visual display surface indicated and as follows;
1. Visual Display Surface: Not less than 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm), mounted
on substrate indicated for final Work. Include one panel for each type, color, and
texture required.
E. Sustainabiiity Submittals:
1. Product Data for composite wood products, documentation indicating that the
product contains no urea formaldehyde.
2. Product Data for adhesives, including printed statement of VOC content and
chemical components.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For visual display units to include in maintenance manuals.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of visual display surface through one source from a
single manufacturer.
VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS
101100-1
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set-April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
B. Product Options; Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of visual
display units and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section
"Product Requirements."
C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics; Provide fabrics with the surface-burning characteristics
indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E84 by UL or another
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify
materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver factory-built visual display boards completely assembled in one piece without
joints, where possible. If dimensions exceed maximum manufactured panel size, provide
two or more pieces of equal length as acceptable to Archhect. When overall dimensions
require delivery in separate units, prefit components at the factory, disassemble for delivery,
and make final joints at the site.
B. Store visual display units vertically with packing materials between each unit.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUSTAINABILITY MATERL\L REQUIREMENTS, GENERAL
A. Composite Wood and Agrifiber: Use only composite wood and agrifiber products free of
added urea formaldehyde resin binders.
B. VOC Content: Adhesives, sealants, paints, welding, and coatings applied on-site on the
interior of the building and products used on the interior of the building shall comply with
VOC limits .
1. Use materials that have the lowest possible VOC content in units of g/L when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic Performance: Provide anchorage of display cases capable of withstanding the
effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads
for Buildings and Other Stmctures": Section 9, "Earthquake Loads."
2.3 MATERIA.LS, GENERAL
A. Porcelain-Enamel Face Sheet: Porcelain-enamel-clad, ASTMA463/A463M, Typel,
stretcher-leveled aluminized steel, with 0.0236-inch (0.60-mm) uncoated thickness; with
porcelain-enamel coating fused to steel at approximately 1000 deg F (538 deg C).
1. Gloss Finish: Low gloss; dry-erase markers wipe clean with dry cloth or standard
eraser. Suitable for use as projection screen.
B. Hardboard; AHA A 135.4, tempered.
C. Particleboard: ANSIA208.1, Grade 1-M-1, made with binder containing no urea
formaldehyde.
VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS
101100-2
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbad Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
D. Extmded-Aluminum Bars and Shapes: ASTM B221, Alloy 6063.
E. Aluminum Tubing; ASTM B429/B429M, Alloy 6063.
F. Fasteners: Provide screws, bolts, and other fastening devices made from same material as
items being fastened, except provide hot-dip galvanized, stainless-steel, or aluminum
fasteners for exterior applications. Provide types, sizes, and lengths to suit installation
conditions. Use security fasteners where exposed to view.
2.4 GLASS WHITEBOARD ASSEMBLIES
A. Glass Whiteboard Assembly:
1. Glass: PPG Starphire Tempered Safety Writing Glass, 1/4-inch thick,
a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited
to, the following:
a. Clams Glassboards.
b. Connect by Claridge Products & Equipment, Inc.
3. Dimensions; As indicated on Drawings.
4. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard concealed type.
5. Edges; Pohshed, eased.
B. Marker Tray: Manufacturer's standard, continuous.
1. Solid Type; Extmded aluminum with ribbed section and smoothly curved exposed
ends.
C. Marking Implements: Provide two new boxes of approved markers and one new eraser for
each markerboard.
2.5 TACK ASSEMBLIES
A. Aluminum Frames and Trim; Fabricated from not less than 0.062-inch- (1.57-mm-) thick,
extmded aluminum; of size and shape indicated.
1. Factory-Applied Trim; Manufacturer's standard.
B. Tack Surface: Linoleum-based surfacing material.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Forbo Bulletin Board.
2. Color; To be selected from manufactures full range of available colors.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Porcelain-Enamel Visual Display Assemblies: Laminate porcelain-enamel face sheet and
backing sheet to core material under heat and pressure with manufacturer's standard
flexible, waterproof adhesive.
B. Fabricate bulletin boards to requirements indicated for dimensions, design, and thickness
and finish of materials.
VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS
101100-3
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research -I- Planning, Inc.
Bid Set-April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
C. Use metals and shapes of thickness and reinforcing to produce flat surfaces, free of oil
canning, and to impart strength for size, design, and application indicated.
D. Aluminum Frames and Trim; Fabricate units straight and of single lengths, keeping joints
to a minimum. Miter comers to neat, hairline closure.
2.7 ALUMEWM FINISHES
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are
acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable
variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other
components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are
assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
D. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum
Association for designating aluminum finishes.
E. Class II, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A31 (Mechanical Finish; nonspecular as
fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural
Class II, clear coating 0.010 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMESTATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements
for installation tolerances, surface conditions of wall, and other conditions affecting
performance.
B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of connections
before installation of motor-operated, sliding visual display units.
C. Examine walls and partitions for proper backing for visual display units.
D. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth where sliding visual display and
recessed units will be installed.
E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove dirt, scaling paint, projections, and depressions that will affect smooth, finished
surfaces of visual display boards.
VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS
101100-4
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgino Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research -I- Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbad Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General; Install visual display units in locations and at mounting heights indicated on
Drawings, or if not indicated, at heights indicated below. Keep perimeter lines straight,
level, and plumb. Provide grounds, clips, backing materials, adhesives, brackets, anchors,
trim, and accessories necessary for complete installation.
1. Mounting Height: 36 inches (914 mm) above finished floor to top of chalktray.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF FACTORY-FABRICATED VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS
A. Glass Whhe Boards; Install wall brackets where indicated. Level brackets horizontally.
Ensure screws are flush with bracket to eliminate potential scratching and damage to glass
white board during installation.
B. Hang glass white boards on brackets following manufacturer's written instmctions.
C. Install marker tray below white board as indicated on Drawings.
D. Bulletin Boards; Attach units to wall surface with concealed wood cleats screwed to wall.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust doors to operate smoothly without warp or bind and contact points meet accurately.
Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer.
B. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.
3.6 CLEANESfG
A. Clean visual display units according to manufacturer's written instmctions. Attach one
cleaning label to visual display surface in each room.
B. Constmction Waste Management; Manage constmction waste in accordance with
provisions of Section 01524 Constmction Waste Management.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Cover and protect visual display units after installation and cleaning.
END OF SECTION 101100
VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS
101100-5
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrory
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research -I- Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS
101100-6
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrory
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
SECTION 101400 - SIGNAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
1.4
A.
B.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SECTION INCLUDES
Room identification signage for ADA requirements only rooms that are being changed as
part ofthe remodel work
B. Interior signage for the following;
1. Directional signage.
2. Room identification.
3. Occupancy signs.
4. Toilet room signs.
5. Elevator lobby maps.
6. Assistive listening signs.
7. Stairway floor number signs.
8. Tactile exit signs.
PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
Sign locations shown on the location plans are for general information only. Prior to
installation and as required, arrange meetings with the Architect at the site for final location
for all sign items.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: Include constmction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes for each type of sign.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, and large-scale sections of typical members and
other components. Show mounting methods, grounds, mounting heights, layout, spacing,
reinforcement, accessories, and installation details.
1. Provide message list for each sign, including large-scale details of wording, lettering,
artwork, and Braille layout.
2. Fumish message list for each sign required, including large scale details of wording
and layout of lettering.
3. For signs supported by or anchored to permanent constmction, fumish setting
drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other anchors.
4. Fumish full-size spacing templates for individually mounted dimensional letters and
numbers.
SIGNAGE
101400-1
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbod Contract XXXX Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of sign, include the following Samples to verify
color selected. Resubmit samples until color, texture, sheen, and other specified criteria
have been approved.
1. Panel Signs: Full-size samples of each type of sign required.
2. Dimensional Characters; Full-size Samples of each type of dimensional character
(letter and number) required. Show character style, material, finish, and method of
attachment.
3. Acrylic: Show representative color, thickness and surface finish.
4. Casting: Show representative texture, character style, spacing, finish, and method of
attachment.
5. Approved samples will be retumed for installation into Project.
D. Elevator Lobby Map; Prior to fabrication submit to the Architect for approval a schematic
map for all floors of the building for use as a fire evacuation map.
E. Graphic Images:
1. Submit full size pattems or prints of typical copy layouts and/or graphic elements to
be applied on signs. Using layouts on the Drawings as a guide, optically enlarge and
hand correct images before submitting to the Architect for approval before
fabrication.
2. Finished art of Project symbols and arrows will be provided by the Architect for
photo enlargement to fiill-size dimensions shown on the Drawings. After photo
enlargement, submit to the Architect for approval before fabrication.
3. Elevator Lobby fire evacuation map art shall be schematically presented. Submit
camera ready artwork for all fioors to the Architect for approval prior to fabrication.
F. Sign Location: Provide Graphic Schedule and location plans to identify and locate all
signs. Item numbers listed in the Graphic Schedule shall be found on location plans and
shall identify locations of specific sign items.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: Provide the Owner with proper cleaning instmctions
required for continued maintenance of signs.
1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Off-Street Parking Space Identification:
1. Entry Drive Accessibility Notification; Provide one 17" x 22" sign at each entry
drive where indicated on Drawings, with text as indicated on Drawings.
2. Disabled Parking Spaces: Identify each parking space with a permanently affixed
reflectorized sign on a post immediately adjacent to and visible from each space,
graphics as indicated on Drawings.
3. Signage Size: 70 square inches minimum, posted at 60 inches minimum from the
bottom of the sign to the parking space finished grade.
4. Van-Accessible Signage: Mount on post below the disabled parking sign where
indicated on Drawings.
SIGNAGE
101400-2
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrory
Group 4 Architecture Research + Plonning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
B. CBC and ADA Requirements; Compliance applies to interior signage, including Braille
lettering.
C. Provide signage at public toilet rooms.
D. Comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and with code provisions as
adopted by authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Interior Code Signage: Provide signage as required by accessibility regulations and
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. These include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Fire doors.
b. Room capacity.
c. Elevator signs.
d. Stairway identification.
e. Live load capacity.
f Signs for accessible spaces,
g. Area of refuge signs.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERL\LS
A. Interior Signage: Cast acrylic sheet, ttansparent, clear, semi-matte or non-glare, 0.125-inch
thick, frameless signs, color TBD.
B. Engraved Copy: Machine engrave letters, numbers, symbols, and other graphic devices
into panel sign on face indicated to produce precisely formed copy, incised to uniform
depth.
1. Engraved Plastic Laminate: Engrave through exposed face ply of plastic-laminate
sheet to expose contrasting core ply.
2. Engraved Metal: Fill engraved copy with enamel.
3. Engraved Opaque Acrylic Sheet: Fill engraved copy with enamel.
4. Face-Engraved Clear Acrylic Sheet: Fill engraved copy with enamel. Apply opaque
background color coating to back face of acrylic sheet.
5. Copy Height: 5/8-inch minimum, 2-inch maximum as recommended by sign
manufacturer for required copy.
C. Tactile and Braille Copy; Manufacturer's standard process for producing copy complying
with CBC requirements per 1117B.5.3. Text shall be accompanied by Grade 2 Raster
Braille. Produce precisely formed characters with square cut edges free from burrs and cut
marks.
1. Panel Material: Opaque acrylic sheet.
2. Raised-Copy Thickness; Minimum of 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).
3. Characters; Width-to-height ratio of between 60% and 110% measured by the width
of the uppercase letter "O" and height of the uppercase letter "I"; and a stroke width-
to-height ratio maximum 15% measured by the width and height of the uppercase
letter "I".
4. Braille Layout;
SIGNAGE
101400-3
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbod Contract XXXX Group 4 Architecture Research -I- Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
a. Dots; 1/10-inch oc in each cell.
b. Dot Spacing; 1/5-inch between cells as measured from the second column of
dots in the first cell.
c. Dot Height: Minimum 1/40-inch above the background.
D. Colored Coatings for Acrylic Sheet: For copy and background colors, provide Pantone
Matching System (PMS) colored coatings, including inks and paints, that are recommended
by acrylic manufacturers for optimum adherence to acrylic surface and are non-fading for
application intended.
E. Symbols of Accessibility: Provide 6-inch- (150-mm-) high symbol fabricated from opaque
non-reflective vinyl film, 0.0035-inch (0.089-mm) nominal thickness, with pressure-
sensitive adhesive backing suitable for both exterior and interior applications.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Mounting Methods; Use concealed fasteners or silicone adhesive fabricated from materials
that are not corrosive to sign material and mounting surface.
B. Anchors and Inserts; Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts
for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed
steel or lead expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Fumish inserts, as
required, to be set into concrete or masonry work.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, EXTERIOR SIGNAGE
A. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free from distortion
and other defects in appearance.
B. Interior Wall Signs: Install signs on walls adjacent to latch side of door where applicable.
Where not indicated or possible, such as double doors, install signs on nearest adjacent
walls. Locate to allow approach within 3 inches (75 mm) of sign without encountering
protmding objects or standing within swing of door.
C. Install sign items, including all components, in accordance with reviewed Graphic Schedule
at locations shown.
D. Install with reviewed manufacturer's adhesive or mechanical fasteners after application of
finish painting at heights noted.
E. Where signs are adhered to glass, provide opaque vinyl on the opposite side of the glass,
aligned with and sized to match sign, to conceal double stick tape or adhesive.
3.2 CLEANING
A. Constmction Waste Management: Manage constmction waste in accordance with
provisions of Section 01524 Constmction Waste Management.
SIGNAGE
101400-4
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
3.3 INTERIOR SIGN SCHEDULE
A. Directional Signs:
1. Sign Size: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Material; Cast-acrylic sheet.
3. Background Finish/Color; TBD.
4. Character Finish/Color: TBD.
5. Character Size; As indicated on Drawings.
6. Provide signs with raised upper case letters with Grade 2 Braille. Comply with ADA
Article 4.30.
7. Text/Message;
a. At Stairs: "STAIRS"
b. At Elevator: "IN CASE OF FIRE, USE STAIRS"
B. Room Signs;
1. Material; Cast-acrylic sheet.
2. Perimeter; Unframed.
3. Copy; Tactile and Braille on surface.
4. Character Style: TBD.
5. Text; As indicated in the Sign Schedule.
6. Message; Fixed.
a. Room; Match room names and numbers indicated on Drawings.
7. Sizes:
a. Sign; As indicated on Drawings.
b. Character Height: As indicated on Drawings.
8. Colors;
a. Frame; TBD.
b. Character; TBD.
c. Background; TBD.
9. Provide signs with raised upper case letters with Grade 2 Braille. Comply with ADA
Article 4.30.
10. Schedule: Refer to approved Graphic Schedule for location(s).
C. Occupancy Signs:
1. Material; Cast-acrylic sheet.
2. Perimeter; Unframed.
3. Copy; Subsurface.
4. Character Style; TBD.
5. Text; Maximum occupancy load: [Insert load as indicated on Drawings].
6. Message: Fixed.
7. Sizes;
a. Sign; As indicated on Drawings.
b. Character Height: As indicated on Drawings.
8. Colors:
a. Frame; None.
b. Character: Black.
c. Background: TBD.
9. Schedule: Refer to approved Graphic Schedule for location(s).
SIGNAGE
101400-5
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbod Contract XXXX Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
D. Toilet Room Signs:
1. Material; Cast-acrylic sheet.
2. Color; TBD.
3. Perimeter; Unframed.
4. Wall Signs:
a. Copy; Tactile and Braille on surface.
b. Character Style: TBD.
c. Text; According to requirements in the ADA or of authorities having
jurisdiction, whichever are more stringent.
1) "MEN"
2) "WOMEN"
d. Message; Fixed.
e. Sizes: See Drawings for code requirements goveming size and geometry.
5. Door-Mounted Symbol of Accessibility: Clear acrylic, back-painted contrasting
color selected by Architect; as required by City Building Department and Title 24.
a. MEN; Equilateral triangle, 12 inches per side.
b. WOMEN; Circle, 12 inch diameter.
E. Toilet Room Signs: Gender Neutral:
1. Material: Cast-acrylic sheet.
2. Color: To be selected.
3. Perimeter: Unframed.
4. Wall Signs:
a. Copy; Tactile and Braille on surface.
b. Character Style; TBD.
c. Character Color: White.
d. Message; Fixed.
e. Sizes: See Drawings for code requirements goveming size and geometry.
5. Door Sign; Equilateral triangle, 12 inches per side over 12 inch diameter circle,
a. Pictogram; None.
6. Wall Signs: Rectangular sign
a. Wall Sign Text; "Gender Neutral Restroom"; same text in Braille undemeath.
b. Placement: On waU strike side of the door.
F. Elevator Lobby Map:
1. Material: Cast-acrylic sheet.
2. Color; To be determined.
3. Perimeter; Unframed.
4. Wall Signs:
a. Copy: Raised.
b. Size: See Drawings for code requirements goveming size and geometry.
5. Message; Fixed.
a. Text: According to requirements in the ABAAS or of authorities having
jurisdiction, whichever are more stringent.
6. Diagram: Coordinate with Architect.
G. Assistive Listening Signs:
1. Material: Cast-acrylic sheet.
2. Color: To be determined.
SIGNAGE
101400-6
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
3. Perimeter: Unframed.
4. Wall Signs:
a. Copy: Raised.
b. Character Style; To be determined.
c. Size; As required by IBC.
d. Text: "Assistive Listening Systems Available".
1) According to requirements in the ABAAS or of authorities having
jurisdiction, whichever are more stringent.
5. Diagram: Intemational symbol of access for hearing loss.
H. Tactile Exit Sign;
1. Material: Cast-acrylic sheet.
2. Color: To be determined.
3. Perimeter: Unframed.
4. Wall Signs;
a. Copy; Raised.
b. Character Style: To be determined.
c. Size: As required by IBC.
d. Text: According to requirements in the ABAAS or of authorities having
jurisdiction, whichever are more stringent.
e. Symbols; Raised, design and shape as required by IBC.
END OF SECTION 101400
SIGNAGE
101400-7
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbod Contract XXXX Group 4 Architecture Reseorch -I- Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
SIGNAGE
101400-8
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Reseorch -I- Pianning, Inc. City of Corlsbod Project No. 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
SECTION 102113 - SOLID COLOR REINFORCED COMPOSITE TOILET COMPARTMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Overhead braced toilet partitions and urinal screens fabricated from reinforced composite
material, hardware, and accessories.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Graffiti Resistance: Provide partition material having the following graffiti removal
characteristics when tested in accordance with ASTM D6578 in accordance with Section 9,
"Graffiti Removal Procedure Using Manual Solvent Rubs":
1. Cleanability: Five required staining agents shall be cleaned off material.
B. Scratch Resistance: Partition material shall have the following characteristics when tested
in accordance with ASTM D2197, using Gardner Stock #PA-2197/ST pointed stylus
attachment on scrape tester:
1. Scratch Resistance: Maximum Load Value: Exceed 10 kilograms.
C. Impact Resistance: Partition material shall have the following characteristics when tested in
accordance with ASTM D2794, using .625" hemispherical indenter with 2-lb impact weight:
1. Impact Resistance: Maximum Impact Force Value: Exceed 30 inch-lbs.
D. Fire Resistance: Comply with the following requirements, when tested in accordance with
ASTM E84:
1. Smoke Developed Index; Not to exceed 450.
2. Flame Spread Index; Not to exceed 75.
3. Material Fire Ratings;
a. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): Class B.
b. International Code Council (ICC): Class B.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit for components, hardware, and accessories and include the
following:
1. Product data sheets.
2. Installation instructions.
3. Cleaning and maintenance instructions.
4. Replacement parts information.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate partition layout and dimensions, panel and door sizes, door
swings, elevations, anchorage and mounting details, and finishes.
1. Show fabrication and erection of compartment assemblies, to extent not fully
described by manufacturer's data sheets.
2. Show anchorage, accessory items and finishes.
SOLID COLOR REINFORCED COMPOSITE TOILET COMPARTMENTS
102113-1
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbad Georgina Cole Library
City of Carlsbad Project No. 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
3. Provide location drawings for bolt hole locations in supporting members for
attachment of compartments.
C. Samples: Submit the following:
1. Scale model of compartments, including stile, shoe, door, door hardware, divider
panel, and mounting brackets.
2. Sections showing stile anchoring and leveling devices, concealed threaded inserts,
panel, stile, and edge construction.
3. Show locations of reinforcements for compartment-mounted grab bars.
4. Show locations of centerlines of toilet fixtures.
5. Two samples 2 by 3 inches in size illustrating panel colors
D. Warranty; Sample of special warranty.
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to CCR, Title 24, Part 2, and ADAAG for accessibility requirements.
B. Conform to flame spread and smoke developed ratings of 20/95 for panel materials when
tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver items in manufacturer's original unopened protective packaging.
B. Store materials in original protective packaging to prevent physical damage or wetting.
C. Handle so as to prevent damage to finished surfaces.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work with support framing and anchors.
B. Coordinate work with placement of plumbing fixtures and floor drains.
C. Coordinate work with placement of electrical fixtures and equipment.
D. Coordinate work with toilet accessories.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of solid color reinforced composite toilet compartments that do not
comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period.
1. Warranty Period, Panel System: Furnish ten-year limited warranty for panels, doors,
and stiles against breakage, corrosion, delamination, and defects in factory
workmanship.
2. Warranty Period, Hardware: Furnish one-year guarantee against defects in material
and workmanship for stainless steel door hardware and mounting brackets.
SOLID COLOR REINFORCED COMPOSITE TOILET COMPARTMENTS
102113-2
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research -I- Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbod Project No. 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for the toilet partitions is based on the manufacturer
identified below. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a
comparable product by one of the following or accepted equivalent:
1. Basis-of-Design: Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc., 1092G Sierra Series.
a. Design: Gap-free, no-sightline, interlocking design.
b. Hardware: Standard hardware.
2. Toilet partitions constructed of High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) or High Density
Polypropylene will not be acceptable.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Solid Color Reinforced Composite: Composed of dyes, organic fibrous material, and
polycarbonate/phenolic resins, with a non-ghosting, graffiti-resistant surface integrally
bonded to core.
1. Edges of Material: Same color as the surface.
B. Headrail: 1 by 1-1/2 inch clear anodized extruded aluminum; antigrip profile, with cast
socket type wall brackets.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Plinth: ASTM A167, Type 304 22-gauge (0.8-mm) stainless steel with satin finish, one-
piece, 4-inch high, with adjustable screw jack; secured in place with concealed screws and
capable of being fastened (by clip) to stiles starting at wall line.
1. Top shall have 90° return to stile.
B. Mounting Brackets and Fasteners: Stainless steel.
1. Mounting Brackets: Mounted inside compartment.
2. Use through bolted, pin-in-head Torx sex bolt fasteners at locations connecting
panels-to-stiles. Provide bolted fasteners capable of withstanding direct pull force
exceeding 1,500 Ibs. per fastener.
3. Wall Mounted Urinal Screen Brackets: 11 gauge (3 mm) double thickness.
C. Leveling Device; 7-gauge, 3/16" (5-mm) hot rolled steel bar; chromate-treated and zinc-
plated; through-bolted to base of solid color reinforced composite stile.
D. Headrail; satin finish, extruded anodized aluminum (.125" / 3-mm thick) with anti-grip profile.
E. Attachments, Screws, and Bolts: Stainless steel, theft proof type, heavy duty extruded
aluminum brackets.
F. Through Bolts and Nuts; Stainless steel with tamperproof heads.
G. Steel Plate Reinforcement: Carbon steel, prepared for fasteners, 1/8 inch thick.
2.4 HARDWARE
A. Latch and Keeper:
1. Sliding Door Latch: 14 gauge (2 mm) designed to slide on nylon track and require
less than 5-lb force to operate. Twisting latch operation will not be acceptable
SOLID COLOR REINFORCED COMPOSITE TOILET COMPARTMENTS
102113-3
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbad Georgina Cole Library
City of Carlsbad Project No. 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
2. Latch Track: Attached to door by machine screws into factory-installed threaded
brass inserts.
3. Threaded Brass Inserts: Factory installed for door hinge and latch connections
capable of withstanding a direct pull exceeding 1,500 Ibs. per insert.
4. Use through bolted, stainless steel, pin-in-head Torx sex bolt fasteners at latch
keeper-to-stile connections capable of withstanding direct pull force exceeding 1,500
lbs. per fastener.
5. At compartments designated as accessible, provide pull handle on each side of door
centered below latch.
B. Hinges: All hardware to be 18-8, type-304 stainless steel with satin finish, gravity type
hinges, adjustable for door close positioning, nylon bearings.
1. 'Zamac', aluminum, or extruded plastic are not acceptable hardware materials.
2. Cam: Field-adjustable to permit door to be fully closed or partially open when
compartment is unoccupied.
3. Hinges: Attached to door and stile by theft-resistant, pin-in-head Torx stainless steel
machine screws into factory-installed, threaded brass inserts.
a. Fasteners secured directly into the core are not acceptable.
4. Furnish door with two 11-gauge (3-mm) stainless steel door stop plates with attached
rubber bumpers to resist door from being kicked in/out beyond stile.
5. Secure door stops and hinges with stainless steel, pin-in-head Torx machine screws
into threaded brass inserts.
6. Provide threaded brass inserts capable of withstanding a direct pull force exceeding
1,500 lbs per insert.
C. Coat Hook:
1. Coat Hook: Constructed of stainless steel and shall project no more than 1-1/8" (29
mm) from face of door.
2. Secure coat hook to door by through-bolted, theft-resistant, pin-in-head Torx
stainless steel screws. Provide through-bolted fasteners capable of withstanding a
direct pull force exceeding 1,500 Ibs. per fastener.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Overhead-Braced Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant supports,
leveling mechanism, fasteners, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Make
provisions for setting and securing continuous head rail at top of each pilaster. Provide
shoes at pilasters to conceal supports and leveling mechanism.
1. Furnish galvanized steel supports and leveling bolts at pilasters as recommended by
manufacturer to suit floor conditions.
B. Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch- (610-mm-) wide, in-
swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch- (914-mm-) wide, out-swinging
doors with a minimum 34-inch- (863-mm-) wide, clear opening for compartments
designated as accessible. Provide with no-sightline system.
C. Urinal screens:
1. Integral-Flange, Wall-Hung Urinal Screens: Manufacturer's standard thickness, but
not less than 0.0269 inch (0.7 mm).
D. Finish Thickness:
1. Partition Panels: 1/2-inch (13 mm).
2. Pilasters; 3/4-inch (19 mm).
3. Stiles and Doors: 3/4-inch (19 mm).
SOLID COLOR REINFORCED COMPOSITE TOILET COMPARTMENTS
102113-4
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Plonning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Project No. 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
2.6 FINISHES
A. Solid Color Reinforced Composite Panel Finish:
1. Facing Finish; One color and pattern in each room.
2. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range, with
manufacturer's standard solid color reinforced composite core.
B. Stainless Steel Surfaces: No. 4 satin finish.
C. Exposed Steel Surfaces: Polished chrome plated.
D. Aluminum: Clear anodized.
E. Non-ferrous Surfaces: Polished chrome plated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that openings are ready to receive Work.
B. Verify field measurements are as shown on Shop Drawings.
C. Verify correct location of built-in framing, anchorage, bracing, and plumbing fixtures.
D. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid,
straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended
anchoring devices.
1. Maximum Clearances:
a. Pilasters and Panels; 1/2 inch (13 mm).
b. Panels and Walls; 1 inch (25 mm).
2. Stirrup Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with no fewer than three
brackets using appropriate anchor devices attached at midpoint and near top and
bottom of panel.
a. Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints.
b. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls.
B. Overhead-Braced Units: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and tighten. Secure
continuous head rail to each pilaster with not less than two fasteners. Hang doors to align
tops of doors with tops of panels and adjust so tops of doors are parallel with overhead
brace when doors are in closed position.
1. Attach panels and pilasters to brackets with through bolts and nuts. Locate headrail
joints at pilaster center line.
2. Provide for adjustment of floor variations with screw jack through steel saddles
integral with pilaster. Conceal floor fastenings with plinths.
C. Urinal Screens: Attach with anchoring devices to suit supporting structure. Set units level
and plumb, rigid, and secured to resist lateral impact.
SOLID COLOR REINFORCED COMPOSITE TOILET COMPARTMENTS
102113-5
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbad Georgina Cole Library
City of Carisbad Project No. 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set-April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
D. Partition Hardware:
1. Equip each toilet stall door with top, middle, and bottom hinges, and door latch.
2. Install door strike keeper on each pilaster in alignment with door latch.
3. Equip each toilet stall door with one coat hook and bumper.
3.3 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from Plumb or Level; 1/8 inch.
B. Maximum Misplacement from Intended Position: 1/8 inch.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust and align door hardware to uniform clearance at vertical edges of doors. Clearance
space not to exceed 3/16 inch.
B. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware
manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation.
1. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open approximately 30 degrees from
closed position when unlatched.
2. Set hinges on out-swinging doors to return doors to fully closed position.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Remove protective coverings. Clean surfaces and hardware.
B. Construction Waste Management: Manage construction waste in accordance with
provisions of Section 017419 Construction Waste Management and Disposal.
C. Protection of Finished Work: Field touch-up of finished surfaces will not be permitted.
Replace damaged components.
END OF SECTION 102113
SOLID COLOR REINFORCED COMPOSITE TOILET COMPARTMENTS
102113-6
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Reseorch + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
SECTION 102226 - OPERABLE PARTITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Operable Partitions: Manually operated, side stacking, top supported operable wall with
panels hinged in groups of two for separation of Group Study Rooms.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 055000 - Metal Fabrications; Steel carrier beams for operable partition top track.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Material descriptions, constmction details, finishes, installation details, and
operating instmctions for each type of operable panel partition, component, and accessory
specified. Included data on acoustical performance, surface-buming characteristics, and
durability.
B. Shop Drawings: Show location and extent of operable panel partitions. Include plans,
elevations, sections, details, attachments to other constmction and accessories. Indicate
dimensions; weights; conditions at openings and for storage; and required installation,
storage, and operating clearances. Indicate location and installation requirements for
hardware and track, and direction of travel. Show blocking to be provided by others.
Include the following;
1. Calculations; Calculate requirements for supporting operable panel partitions and
verify capacity of carriers and track components to support loads; indicate deflection
limits for partition and adjacent constmction.
C. Setting Drawings: For embedded items and cutouts required in other work, including
support beam-punching template.
D. Coordination Drawings; Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following
items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items
involved:
1. Suspended ceiling components.
2. Stmctural members to which suspension systems will be attached.
3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.
4. Items penetrating finished ceiling, including the following:
a. Lighting fixtures.
b. HVAC ductwork, outlets, and inlets.
c. Speakers.
OPERABLE PARTITIONS
102226-1
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Ubrory
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
d. Sprinklers.
e. Smoke detectors,
f Access panels.
E. Samples for Verification; For each type of exposed material, finish, covering, or facing
indicated, prepared on Samples of size indicated below:
1. Textile: Full width by not less than 36-inch- (914-mm-) long section of fabric from
dye lot to be used for the Work, with specified treatments applied. Show complete
pattem repeat.
2. Panel Edge Material: Not less than 3 inches (75 mm) long.
F. Sustainabiiity Submittals;
1. Product Data for each material, including its source, cost, and the fraction by weight
that is considered regional and that has been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as
well as manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site.
2. Certificates for chain-of-custody certificates certifying that products specified to be
made from certified wood comply with forest certification requirements. Include
evidence that mill is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredhed certification
body.
a. Include statement indicating costs for each certified wood product.
3. Product Data for installation adhesives, including printed statement of VOC content
and chemical composition of each product used.
4. Product Data for the following:
a. For each composite-wood product used, documentation indicating that the
bonding agent contains no urea formaldehyde.
b. For each adhesive used, documentation indicating that the adhesive contains
no urea formaldehyde.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Submit acoustical test reports showing product conformance with ASTM E90 and
ASTM C423.
B. Seismic Qualification Certificates; For operable panel partitions, accessories, and
components, from manufacturer.
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual
test of assembled components or on calculation.
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and
locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
based and their installation requirements.
C. Product Certificates; Submit letter signed by manufacturer certifying that operable walls to
be fumished on this project comply with the requirements of the specification.
D. Product Test Reports: From an independent testing agency indicating that each operable
panel partition complies with requirements. Submit the following;
1. Report for STC.
2. Proof load testing of track/trolley/bracket/hanger rod assembly.
3. Other proof load tests as may be identified in the "PART 2" of this specification.
OPERABLE PARTITIONS
102226-2
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrory
Group 4 Architecture Research + Plonning, Inc. City of Corlsbad Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
E. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
1. The Owner reserves the right to field sound test the operable wall within 60 days of
the date of substantial completion. Cost for field sound testing shall the responsibility
ofthe Owner.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data; For operable panel partitions to include in maintenance
manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance
Data," include the following;
1. Panel finish facings and finishes for exposed trim and accessories. Include
precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to finishes
and performance.
2. Seals, hardware, track, carriers, and other operating components.
B. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Fumish extra materials from the same production mn that match products installed and that
are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1. Panel Finish-Facing Material; Fumish full width in quantity to cover both sides of
two panels when installed.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications; An experienced installer who is certified in writing by the operable
wall manufacturer as qualified to install the manufacturer's partition system for work similar
in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this project.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent NVLAP-accredited testing laboratory with
experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to
ASTM E548. NVLAP-accredited laboratories must document accreditation, based on a
"Certificate of Accreditation" and a "Scope of Accreditation" listing the test methods
specified.
C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide panels with finishes meeting one of the
following as determined by testing identical products by UL or another testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:
1. Surface-Buming Characteristics: As determined by testing per ASTM E84.
a. Flame-Spread Index; 25 or less.
b. Smoke-Developed Index; 450 or less.
2. Fire Growth Conttibution: Textile wall coverings comply with the acceptance
criteria of NFPA 265.
D. Forest Certification; Provide components made with not less than 50 percent of wood
products obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply
with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship."
OPERABLE PARTITIONS
102226-3
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set-April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protectively package and sequence panels in order for installation. Clearly mark packages
and panels with numbering system used on Shop Drawings. Do not use permanent
markings on panels.
B. Deliver materials in order as required by schedule for installation.
C. Handle materials in accordance with manufacturer's instmctions.
1.10 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of operable panel partition openings by
field measurements before fabrication.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of operable panel partitions that fail in materials, fabrication, or
installation within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Faulty operation of operable panel partitions.
b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
wear.
2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUSTAINABILITY MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS, GENERAL
A. Local/Regional Materials: Give preference to manufacturer's whose facilities are within a
500 mile radius of the project site. Also give preference to materials that are harvested,
extracted, mined, quartied, etc. within a 500 mile radius of the project site.
B. Certified Wood; Use wood based products made from wood obtained from forests certified
by an FSC accredited certification body to comply with the Forest Stewardship Councils
"Principles and Criteria."
C. VOC Content: Adhesives, paints, welding, and coatings applied on-site on the interior of
the building and products used on the interior of the building shall comply with VOC limits.
1. Use materials that have the lowest possible VOC content in units of g/L when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
D. Composite Wood and Agrifiber; Use only composite wood and agrifiber products free of
added urea formaldehyde resin binders.
OPERABLE PARTITIONS
102226-4
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research -I- Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. Hufcor.
2. Modemfold, Inc.; a DORMA Group Company.
2.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic Performance: Operable panel partitions shall withstand the effects of earthquake
motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7.
1. The term "withstand" means "the panels will remain in place without separation of
any parts from the system when subjected to the seismic forces specified."
B. Acoustical Performance: Provide operable panel partitions tested by a qualified testing
agency for the following acoustical properties according to test methods indicated;
1. Sound-Transmission Requirements: Operable panel partition assembly tested for
laboratory sound-transmission loss performance according to ASTM E90, determined
by ASTM E413, and rated for not less than the STC indicated.
2. Noise-Reduction Requirements: Operable panel partition assembly, identical to
partition tested for STC, tested for sound-absorption performance according to
ASTM C423.
3. Noise Isolation Class; 42.
4. STC; 50 minimum.
2.4 PANEL CONSTRUCTION
A. Operable Acoustical Panels; Operable acoustical panel partition system, including panels,
seals, finish facing, suspension system, operators, and accessories.
B. Panel Operation: Manually operated, paired.
C. Panel Constmction: Provide top reinforcement as required to support panel from
suspension components and provide reinforcement for hardware attachment. Fabricate
panels with tight hairline joints and concealed fasteners. Fabricate panels so finished in-
place partition is rigid; level; plumb; aligned, with tight joints and uniform appearance; and
free of bow, warp, twist, deformation, and surface and finish irregularities.
1. Steel Channel Frames; 16 gauge.
2. Panel Skins; 24 gauge.
D. Dimensions: Fabricate operable acoustical panel partitions to form an assembled system of
dimensions indicated and verified by field measurements.
1. Panel Width: As indicated.
2. Thickness: 4-inches.
E. Panel Closure: Manufacturer's standard.
F. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard as required to operate operable panel partition and
accessories; with decorative, protective finish.
OPERABLE PARTITIONS
102226-5
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
1. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard.
2. Exit Device; Manufacturer's standard.
G. Panel Edge Trim; Fumish with protective vertical edge trim that overlaps the panel face
and secures finish at the vertical edge.
H. Panel Trim Finish: Clear satin anodized panel trim.
I. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard as required to operate operable panel partition and
accessories; with decorative, protective finish to match panel ttim finish.
2.5 SEALS
A. General: Provide types of seals indicated that produce operable panel partitions complying
with acoustical performance requirements and the following:
1. Manufacturer's standard seals.
2. Seals made from materials and in profiles that minimize sound leakage.
3. Seals fitting tight at contact surfaces and sealing continuously between adjacent
panels and between operable panel partition perimeter and adjacent surfaces, when
operable panel partition is extended and closed.
B. Horizontal Top Seals;
1. Continuous-contact, extmded-PVC seal exerting uniform constant pressure on track.
C. Vertical Seals; Deep-nesting, interlocking astragals mounted on each edge of panel, with
continuous PVC acoustical seals.
D. Top Seals: Panel top seals shall be fixed, flexible multi-fin.
E. Horizontal Bottom Seals; PVC-faced, mechanical, retractable, constant-force-contact seal
exerting uniform constant pressure on floor when extended, ensuring horizontal and vertical
sealing and resisting panel movement.
1. Automatically Operated for Acoustical Panels: Extension and rettaction of bottom
seal automatically operated by movement of partition, with operating range not less
than 2 inches (50 mm) between retracted seal and floor finish.
2.6 SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A. Suspension Tracks; Steel or aluminum as noted below with adjustable steel hanger rods for
overhead support, designed for type of operation, size and weight of operable panel
partitions as indicated. Size track to support partition operation and storage without damage
to suspension system, operable panel partitions, or adjacent constmction. Limit track
defiection to no more than 0.10 inch between bracket supports. Provide a continuous system
of track sections and accessories to accommodate configuration and layout indicated for
partition operation and storage.
B. Carriers: Trolley system as required for configuration type, size, and weight of partition
and for easy operation; with ball-bearing wheels.
OPERABLE PARTITIONS
102226-6
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
C. Steel Finish: Manufacturer's standard, factory-applied, corrosion-resistant, protective
coating unless otherwise indicated.
D. Proof Load Testing: Submit test report from nationally recognized independent laboratory
showing that assembly of track/trolley/bracket/hanger rod sustains a load of 8,000 pounds at
mid-point of 48-inch simple span. Load applied to trolley via pendant bolt.
2.7 FINISH FACING
A. General; Provide finish facings that comply with indicated fire-test-response characteristics
and that are factory applied to operable partitions with appropriate backing, using mildew-
resistant non-staining adhesive.
1. Apply one-piece facings free from air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects,
with no gaps or overlaps. Tightly secure and conceal raw and selvage edges of facing
for finished appearance.
B. Finish Facing Material: Maharam, Parallel 901180, color to be selected from full range of
available colors.
2.8 ACCESSORIES
A. Pass Doors; Fabricated to comply with ADA requirements. Swinging door built into and
matching panel finish and thickness; complete with frames and operating hardware. Hinges
finished to match other hardware.
1. Swinging Door: Built into and matching panel materials, constmction, acoustical
qualities, finish, and thickness, complete with frames and operating hardware.
Hinges finished to match other exposed hardware.
2. Single Pass Door/s: 36 by 80 inches (914 by 2032 mm), provide with concealed door
closer equipped with hold open device.
3. Latchset: Passage set.
4. Exit Sign: Provide above pass doors, flush mounted, self-illuminated.
B. Storage Pocket Door: Full height at end of parthion mns to conceal stacked partition of
same basic design, materials, thickness, and acoustical qualities as panels. Hinges in finish
to match other exposed hardware, with acoustical seals at soffit, floor, and jambs.
C. Final Closure; Hinged closure panel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine flooring, stmctural support, and opening, with installer present, for compliance
with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
operable panel parthions.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
OPERABLE PARTITIONS
102226-7
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General; Comply with ASTM E557 except as otherwise required by operable panel
partition manufacturer's written installation instmctions.
B. Install operable panel partitions and accessories after other finishing operations, including
painting, have been completed.
C. Install panels from marked packages in numbered sequence indicated on Shop Drawings.
D. Broken, cracked, chipped, deformed, or unmatched panels are not acceptable.
E. Broken, cracked, deformed, or unmatched gasketing or gasketing with gaps at butted ends is
not acceptable.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Optional Testing; Owner reserves the right to field sound test parthion installation within 60
days of installation. Owner shall engage a qualified, professional, acoustical engineer to
perform field tests and to prepare test reports. Cost of the field sound tests shall be
responsibility of the Owner.
B. Testing Methodology: Perform testing of installed operable panel partition for noise
isolation according to ASTM E336, determined by ASTM E413, and rated for not less than
NIC indicated. Adjust and fit partitions to comply with NIC test method requirements.
C. Repair or replace operable panel partitions that do not comply with requirements.
1. Should operable panel partitions fail to achieve the specified NIC, partition supplier
shall make corrections/adjustments and pay for the cost of retesting.
2. In the event that the specified NIC is not achieved after corrections/adjustments and
retesting and the partition supplier has not been able to demonstrate that flanking
sound through the surrounding building constmction is the cause for failure then the
partition supplier, at its own cost, shall replace the operable partition with a new
partition that is capable of achieving the specified NIC and pay for the cost of field
sound testing this parthion installation.
D. Prepare written test and inspection reports and submit to the Owner.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operable panel partitions to operate smoothly, easily, and quietly, free from binding,
warp, excessive deflection, distortion, nonalignment, misplacement, dismption, or
malfunctioning, throughout entire operational range. Lubricate hardware and other moving
parts as indicated by wall manufacturer.
B. Adjust storage pocket doors to operate smoothly and easily, without binding or warping.
Check and readjust operating hardware. Confirm that latches and locks engage accurately
and securely without forcing or binding.
OPERABLE PARTITIONS
102226-8
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Controct 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean soiled surfaces on completing installation of operable panel partitions, to remove
dust, adhesives, and other foreign materials according to manufacturer's written instmctions.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer
and Installer that ensure operable panel partitions are without damage or deterioration at
time of Substantial Completion.
C. Replace panels that cannot be cleaned and/or repaired, in a manner approved by Architect,
before time of Substantial Completion.
D. Constmction Waste Management; Manage constmction waste in accordance with
provisions of Section 01524 Constmction Waste Management.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel
to adjust, operate, and maintain operable panel partitions.
1. Test and adjust seals, hardware, carriers, tracks, pass doors, pocket doors, controls,
safety devices and other operable wall components. Replace damaged or
malfunctioning operable components.
2. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and
stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment and schedules.
3. Review data in maintenance manuals.
END OF SECTION 102226
OPERABLE PARTITIONS
102226-9
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Ubrory
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
OPERABLE PARTITIONS
102226-10
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Plonning, Inc. City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 201 5
SECTION 102623 - IMPACT-RESISTANT WALL PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Bumper rails, kick plates and comer guards in staff workspaces and the sorting room.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include constmction details, material descriptions, impact strength, fire-test-
response characteristics, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for
each impact-resistant wall-protection unit.
B. Shop Drawings: For each impact-resistant wall-protection unit showing locations and
extent. Include sections, details, attachments to other work, backing required, and fasteners.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of
size indicated below.
1. Comer and WaU Guards: 12 inches (300 mm) long. Include examples of joinery,
comers, end caps, top caps, and field splices.
2. Protection Sheet; 12-inch (300 mm) square.
D. Sustainabiiity Submittals:
1. Product Data for each material, including its source, cost, and the fraction by weight
that is considered regional and that has been exttacted, harvested, or recovered, as
well as manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site.
2. Product Data for installation adhesives, including printed statement of VOC content
and chemical composition of each product used.
3. Product Data for each adhesive used, documentation indicating that the adhesive
contains no urea formaldehyde.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Material Test Reports: For each impact-resistant plastic material.
B. Material Certificates: For each impact-resistant plastic material, signed by manufacturer.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For each impact-resistant wall-protection unit to include in maintenance
manuals.
IMPACT-RESISTANT WALL PROTECTION
102623-1
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrory
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Fumish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
I. Comer-Guard Covers: Full-size plastic covers of maximum length equal to 2 percent
of each type, color, and texture of units installed, but no fewer than two, 4-foot- (1.2-
m-)] long units.
B. Include mounting and accessory components. Replacement materials shall be from same
production mn as installed units.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations; Obtain impact-resistant wall-protection units through one source from
a single manufacturer.
B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of impact-
resistant wall-protection units and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to
Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."
1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with
Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive
explanatory data to Architect for review.
C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics; Provide impact-resistant, plastic wall-protection units
with surface-buming characteristics as determined by testing identical products per
ASTM E84, NFPA 255, or UL 723 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store impact-resistant wall-protection units in original undamaged packages and containers
inside well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures,
and humidity.
1. Maintain room temperature within storage area at not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C)
during the period plastic materials are stored.
2. Store plastic wall-protection components for a minimum of 72 hours, or until plastic
material attains a minimum room temperature of 70 deg F (21 deg C).
a. Store comer-guard covers in a vertical position.
1.9 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install impact-resistant wall-protection unhs
until building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work is complete and chy, and HVAC
system is operating and maintaining temperature at 70 deg F (21 deg C) for not less than 72
hours before beginning installation and for the remainder of the constmction period.
B. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls, columns, and other constmction
contiguous with impact-resistant wall-protection units by field measurements before
fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
IMPACT-RESISTANT WALL PROTECTION
102623-2
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrory
Group 4 Architecture Research -1- Plonning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
2.1 SUSTAESTABILITY MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS, GENERAL
A. Local/Regional Materials: Give preference to manufacturer's whose facihties are within a
500 mile radius of the project site. Also give preference to materials that are harvested,
extracted, mined, quarried, etc. within a 500 mile radius ofthe project site.
B. VOC Content: Adhesives applied on-site on the interior of the building and products used
on the interior ofthe building shall comply with VOC limits .
1. Use materials that have the lowest possible VOC content in units of g/L when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2. Use adhesives free of added urea formaldehyde resin binders.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following;
1. Balco, Inc.
2. Bobrick.
3. Constmction Specialties, Inc.
4. IPC Door and Wall Protection Systems; Division of InPro Corporation.
2.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide components identical to those tested in accordance with ASTM E84 for fire
performance characteristics indicated. Identify components with appropriate markings from
the testing organization.
1. Flame Spread: 25 or less.
2. Smoke Developed: 450 or less.
3. Impact Strength: Provide components with minimum impact resistance of 25.4 ft. lbs
per sq. ft. when tested in accordance with ASTM D256 (Izod impact, ft. lbs per inch
notch).
2.4 MATERIALS
A. Extmded Rigid Plastic: ASTMD 1784, Class 1, textured, chemical- and stain-resistant,
high-impact-resistant PVC or acrylic-modified vinyl plastic with integral color throughout;
thickness as indicated.
1. Impact Resistance; Minimum 25.4 ft-lbf/in. (1356 J/m) of notch when tested
according to ASTM D256, Test Method A.
2. Chemical and Stain Resistance: Tested according to ASTM D543.
3. Self-extinguishing when tested according to ASTM D635.
4. Flame-Spread Index; 25 or less.
5. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
B. Colors and Textures of Plastic Material: Provide material that matches selections made
from the manufacturer's fiill range of standard colors and textures.
IMPACT-RESISTANT WALL PROTECTION
102623-3
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Plonning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
C. Aluminum Extmsions; Alloy and temper recommended for use and finish indicated, but
with not less than strength and durability properties in ASTM B221 for 6063-T5.
D. Stainless Steel; Type 304.
1. Thickness: Minimum 0.0625 inch (1.6 mm).
2. Finish; Directional satin. No. 4.
E. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or other noncortosive metal screws,
bolts, and other fasteners compatible with components, hardware, anchors, and other items
being fastened. Use theft-proof fasteners where exposed to view.
F. Adhesive: Constmction grade adhesive supplied by manufacturer.
1. VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D
(EPA Method 24).
2.5 CORNER GUARDS
A. Surface-Mounted, Metal Comer Guards: Fabricated from 1-piece, formed or extmded
metal with formed edges; with 90- or 135-degree tum to match wall condition.
1. Wing Size: 3-1/2 by 3-1/2 inches (90 by 90 mm).
2. Height: 48-inches.
2.6 KICK PLATES
A. Kick Plates; Countersunk installation.
1. Minimum Thickness; I/l 6-inch; bevel 4 sides.
2. Finish: Stainless steel as specified.
2.7 BUMPER RAILS
A. Rail; Nominal 8-inch-high by 1-inch-deep heavy duty assembly consisting of a snap-on
plastic cover installed over continuous aluminum retainer.
B. Cover: Extmded, impact-resistant plastic, minimum 0.08 inch thick, in profile indicated.
C. Retainer; Continuous one-piece extmded aluminum retainer, minimum 0.08 inch thick,
with continuous bumper cushion centered in the extmsion.
D. Mounting Type: Surface mounted flush on wall.
2.8 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate impact-resistant wall-protection units to comply with requirements indicated for
design, dimensions, and member sizes, including thicknesses of components.
B. Assemble components in factory to greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly.
Disassemble only as necessary for shipping and handling.
C. Fabricate with tight seams and joints, with exposed edges rolled. Provide surfaces free of
wrinkling, chipping, uneven coloration, dents, or other imperfections. Fabricate members
and fittings to produce flush, smooth, and rigid hairline joints.
IMPACT-RESISTANT WALL PROTECTION
102623-4
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrory
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMESfATION
A. Examine substrates and wall areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements
for installation tolerances, fire rating, and other conditions affecting performance of work.
1. Examine walls to which impact-resistant wall protection will be attached for
blocking, grounds, and other solid backing that have been installed in the locations
required for secure attachment of support fasteners.
2. For impact-resistant wall-protection units attached with adhesive or foam tape, verify
compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing
finishes or primers.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Complete finishing operations, including painting, before installing impact-resistant wall-
protection system components.
B. Prior to installation clean substrates to remove dust, debris, and loose particles.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and the required field-verified dimensions.
B. Install plumb, level, and tme to line without distortion. Do not use material with chips,
cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be visible in the finished work.
C. Install aluminum retainers, mounting brackets, and other accessories in accordance with the
manufacturer's instmctions.
D. Do not install rigid plastic wall protection unless temperature at the time of installation is
between 65-75''F (18-24''C) and be maintained for at least 48 hours after the installation to
allow for proper adhesive set up.
1. Relative Humidity: Do not exceed 80%.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Upon completion, clean plastic covers and accessories using standard ammonia-based
household cleaning agent. Clean metal components in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
B. Clean metal components in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
C. Remove surplus materials, mbbish, and debris resulting from installation upon completion
of work and leave installation in neat, clean condition.
IMPACT-RESISTANT WALL PROTECTION
102623-5
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
D. Constmction Waste Management: Manage constmction waste in accordance with
provisions of Section 01524 Constmction Waste Management.
END OF SECTION 102623
IMPACT-RESISTANT WALL PROTECTION
102623-6
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Reseorch + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbad Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
SECTION 102813 - COMMERCIAL TOILET ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Toilet room accessories of the following types:
1. Paper towel dispenser/trash receptacles.
2. Toilet seat cover dispensers.
3. Toilet paper dispensers.
4. Grab bars at accessible toilet stalls.
5. Sanitary napkin disposals.
6. Soap dispensers.
7. Framed mirror units.
8. Sanitary napkin vendors.
9. Lavatory plumbing insulation.
10. Mop and broom holders at Janitor closets.
11. Diaper changing stations.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide for each toilet accessory item specified, including constmction
details relative to materials, dimensions, gages, profiles, mounting method, specified
options, and finishes.
B. Drawings: Identify where cutouts are required in other work, including templates, substrate
preparation instmctions, and directions for preparing cutouts and installing anchorage
devices.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: Instmctions, including replaceable parts and service recommendations.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Inserts and Anchorages: Fumish accessory manufacturers' standard inserts and anchoring
devices that must be set in concrete or built into masonry. Coordinate delivery with other
work to avoid delay.
1.6 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Coordination: Coordinate accessory locations, installation, and sequencing with other work
to avoid interference with and ensure proper installation, operation, adjustment, cleaning,
and servicing of toilet accessory items.
COMMERCIAL TOILET ACCESSORIES
102813-1
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Plonning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Stainless Steel; AISI Type 302/304, with polished No. 4 finish, 0.034-inch (22-gage)
minimum thickness.
B. Mirror Glass; Nominal 6.0-mm (0.23-inch) thick, conforming to ASTM C1036, Type I,
Class 1, Quality q2, and with silvering, electro-plated copper coating, and protective
organic coating.
C. Chrome Plating: ASTM B456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service).
D. ABS Plastic; Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene resin formulation.
E. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A153/A153M, hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication.
F. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit, or of
galvanized steel where concealed.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. General: Only a maximum 1-1/2-inch-diameter, unobtmsive stamped manufacturer logo, as
approved by Architect, is permitted on exposed face of toilet or bath accessory units. On
either interior surface not exposed to view or back surface, provide addhional identification
by either a printed, waterproof label or a stamped nameplate, indicating manufacturer's
name and product model number.
B. Surface-Mounted Toilet Accessories, General: Except where otherwise indicated, fabricate
units with tight seams and joints, exposed edges rolled. Hang doors or access panels with
continuous stainless steel piano hinge. Provide concealed anchorage wherever possible.
C. Recessed and Semi-Recessed Tohet Accessories, General: Except where otherwise
indicated, fabricate units of all-welded constmction, without mitered comers. Hang doors
or access panels with full-length, stainless steel piano hinge. Provide anchorage that is fiilly
concealed when unit is closed.
D. Framed Mirror Units, General; Fabricate frames for glass mirror units to accommodate
wood, felt, plastic, or other glass edge protection material. Provide mirror backing and
support system that will permit rigid, tamperproof glass installation and prevent moisture
accumulation.
1. Provide galvanized-steel backing sheet, not less than 0.034 inch (22 gage) and full
mirror size, with nonabsorptive filler material. Cormgated cardboard is not an
acceptable filler material.
E. Mirror Unit Hangers: Heavy-duty wall brackets of galvanized steel, equipped with
concealed locking devices requiring a special tool to remove that will permit rigid,
tamperproof, and theftproof installation.
COMMERCIAL TOILET ACCESSORIES
102813-2
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research -1- Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 201 5
F. Keys; Provide universal keys for access to toilet accessory units requiring intemal access
for servicing, resupply, etc. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install toilet accessory units according to manufacturers' instmctions, using fasteners
appropriate to substrate as recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units plumb and
level, firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.
B. Apply sealant to perimeter between accessories and wall surface where accessory edge is
permanent.
C. Secure mirtors to walls in concealed, tamperproof manner with special hangers, toggle
bolts, or screws. Set units plumb, level, and square at locations indicated, according to
manufacturer's instmctions for type of substrate involved.
D. Install grab bars to withstand a downward load of at least 250 Ibf, complying with ASTM
F446.
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust toilet accessories for proper operation and verify that mechanisms fimction
smoothly. Replace damaged or defective items.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Clean and polish all exposed surfaces strictly according to manufacturer's recommendations
after removing temporary labels and protective coatings.
B. Constmction Waste Management: Manage constmction waste in accordance with
provisions of Section 01524 Constmction Waste Management.
3.4 SCHEDULE-TBD
END OF SECTION 102813
COAAMERCIAL TOILET ACCESSORIES
102813-3
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrory
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research -I- Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
COAAMERCIAL TOILET ACCESSORIES
102813-4
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research -I- Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
SECTION 104400 - FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Fire extinguishers and cabinets.
B. Brackets for fire extinguishers.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 092900 - Gypsum Board; Roughed-in wall openings.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size of fire-protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire
extinguishers indicated are accommodated.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include constmction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes for fire-protection cabinets.
1. Fire Extinguishers: Include rating and classification.
B. Samples for Verification; For verification purposes in of each type of cabinet finish
indicated, and each color, texture, and pattern specified prepared on Samples of size
indicated below.
1. Size; 6 by 6 inches (150 by 150 mm) square.
C. Sustainabiiity Submittals:
1. Product Data for each material, including its source, cost, and the fraction by weight
that is considered regional and that has been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as
well as manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site.
2. Product Data for clean-agent fire-extinguishing systems indicating absence of HCFC
and Halon.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's Installation Instmctions; Indicate special criteria and wall opening
coordination requirements.
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
104400-1
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain fire extinguishers and fire-protection cabinets through one
source from a single manufacturer.
B. NFPA Compliance; Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10,
"Portable Fire Extinguishers."
C. Fire Extinguishers: Provide extinguishers which are UL listed with UL listing mark for
type, rating, and classification of extinguisher.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUSTAINABILITY MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS, GENERAL
A. Local/Regional Materials; Give preference to manufacturer's whose facilities are within a
500 mile radius of the project site. Also give preference to materials that are harvested,
extracted, mined, quarried, etc. within a 500 mile radius of the project site.
B. Fire Extinguishing Agent; Provide clean agent which does not contain halons or HCFCs.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers; Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Larsen's Manufacturing Company; Architectural Series.
2. J.L. Industries, Inc., a division of Activar Constmction Products Group;
Cosmopolitan Series.
2.3 MATERL\LS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1008/A1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.
B. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and manufacturer for
type of use and finish indicated, and as follows:
1. Sheet; ASTM B209.
2. Extmded Shapes: ASTMB221.
C. Transparent Acrylic Sheet; ASTM D4802, Category A-l (cell-cast sheet), 3 mm thick, with
Finish 1 (smooth or polished).
2.4 EXTINGUISHERS
A. Dry Chemical Type; UL 299, cast steel tank, with pressure gage; UL Rating 2A-10B:C.
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
104400-2
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 201 5
2.5 CABINETS
A. Semi-Recessed Cabinet; Cabinet box recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of
trim indicated.
1. Configuration: Semi-recessed projection type, 4 inch rough opening depth, sized to
accommodate accessories.
2. Rolled-Edge Trim: 2-1/2-inch (64-mm) backbend depth.
B. Door Material; Formed, enameled 18 gage, hollow metal design, reinforced for flatness and
rigidity. Provide fire rated tubs where cabinets are to be installed in 1-hour rated areas.
C. Door Style: Vertical duo panel with frame.
1. Identification; Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter
style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect,
a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire-protection cabinet with the words "FIRE
EXTINGUISHER".
1) Location; Applied to cabinet door.
2) Application Process: Silk-screened.
3) Lettering Color: Red.
4) Orientation; Vertical.
D. Door Glazing; Acrylic sheet.
1. Acrylic Sheet Color; Clear transparent acrylic sheet.
E. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for
cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.
1. Handle; Manufacturer's standard.
2. Hinge Type: Continuous, of same material and finish as trim, permitting door to
open 180 degrees.
3. Lock; Steel cam type designed to permit opening of the cabinet door in and
emergency by pulling sharply on the handle.
a. Factory Applied Lettering: "IN CASE OF FIRE ONLY - PULL FIRMLY ON
HANDLE".
F. Cabinet Mounting Hardware: Manufacturer's standard for cabinet.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub), with trim, frame,
door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated.
1. Weld j oints and grind smooth.
2. Constmct fire-rated cabinets with double walls fabricated from 0.0428-inch- (1.1-
mm-) thick, cold-rolled steel sheet lined with minimum 5/8-inch- (16-mm-) thick,
fire-bartier material.
a. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.
B. Form cabinet enclosure with right angle inside comers and seams. Form perimeter trim
accurately.
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
104400-3
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
C. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials
indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected.
1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design,
minimum 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick.
2. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.
D. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece whh comers mitered, welded, and ground
smooth.
E. Hinge doors for 180 degree opening with continuous piano hinge. Provide cam latch.
F. Weld, fill, and grind components smooth.
2.7 FINISHES
A. Extinguisher; Steel, red enamel color.
B. Cabinet Exterior Trim and Door: White baked enamel finish; painted to match adjacent
wall surface.
C. Cabinet Interior: White, baked enamel finish; paint to match adjacent wall color.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located.
B. Identify locations intended for installation of cabinets.
C. Notify Fire Marshal to allow inspection and adjustment of final locations of extinguishers.
Obtain approval of locations from Fire Marshal prior to installation.
D. Examine walls and partitions for thickness and framing for cabinets to verify cabinet depth
and mounting prior to cabinet installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instmctions.
B. Install cabinets plumb and level in wall openings, 27 inches from finished fioor to inside
bottom of cabinet.
C. Install fire-rated cabinets in rated wall as required to maintain fire separation integrity of
partition.
D. Attach mounting brackets and fire extinguisher cabinets securely to studs or backing plates,
square, plumb and level, in compliance with their manufacturer's instmctions; do not attach
to gypsum board with Molly or toggle bolts.
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
104400-4
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research -I- Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 1 0, 201 5
E. Secure rigidly in place.
F. Touch-up damaged finish, when the results are acceptable to the Architect, otherwise
replace damaged components, at no cost to the Owner.
G. Place extinguishers in cabinets.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire-protection
specialties are installed, imless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation
instmctions.
B. Adjust fire-protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral
locking devices operate properly.
C. Touch up marted finishes, or replace fire-protection cabinets that cannot be restored to
factory-finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or fumished
by fire-protection cabinet manufacturer.
D. Replace fire-protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond
successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
3.4 CLEANING
A. On completion of fire-protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as
recommended by manufacturer.
B. Constmction Waste Management; Manage constmction waste in accordance with
provisions of Section 01524 Constmction Waste Management.
END OF SECTION 104400
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
104400-5
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set-April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
104400-6
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
SECTION 115116 - BOOK DEPOSITORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Manual, through-wall book depositories (chute, faceplate, book tmck). Automated book
depositories are part of the automated materials handling system.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings; Detail depository assemblies and indicate installation details, dimensions,
and required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of
each field connection.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's Installation Instmctions; Indicate special criteria and wall opening
coordination requirements.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. NFPA Compliance: Provide depositories complying with NFPA 82.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers; Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. American Book Retums.
2. Kingsley.
2.2 THRU-WALL BOOK DEPOSITORIES
A. Cabinet; Heavy gauge stainless steel cabinet is 24x32x38 inches high.
1. Locking; Manufacturer's standard locks installed on access door.
2. Keys: Provide two keys for each lock.
BOOK DEPOSITORIES
115116-1
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
B. Rainshield and Liftplate: Stainless steel head with protective.
1. Slot opening is 3.5 x 13.5 inches wide.
2. Signs: Black signs: "BOOK DROP" and "LIFT TO OPEN".
C. Delivery Chute; Powder coated steel, secured with lags driven thm pre-drilled holes on
each side of depository.
1. Provide hinged baffle installed at the end of the depository to prevent fishing.
D. Book Tmck: Heavy gauge galvanized steel, reinforced at each comer, edge and base.
1. Size; 20" x 30" x 32-inches high.
2. Floor: "No-tip" depressible floor covered by durable liner and a one inch pad.
3. Handle: Hoop-shaped handle.
4. Casters: 3-inch diameter hard mbber casters, with front two swivel-type.
E. Extra Book Tmck: Provide one additional book tmck for each book depository.
F. Provide support units, expansion joint materials, counterflashing and retainer band, special
intake depository throat sections to accommodate intake door units, discharge door units.
2.3 DOORS
A. Intake Door Assemblies: ASTM A240/A240M, Type 302/304 stainless-steel, self closing
units with positive latch and latch handle; and with frame suitable for enclosing chase
constmction. Provide as follows:
1. Door Type: Limited access, rectangular, hopper-type hinged, 75-degree swing.
2. Size; 15" x 18" (381mm x 457mm) door.
3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard satin or No. 4 directional polish finish.
4. Handles: Lever style.
5. Locks: Cylinder locks with keys that are removable only when cylinder is locked.
For each depository, key locks alike. For each door, fumish four keys.
B. Depository Discharge Door Units: Provide manufacturer's/fabricator's standard self-
closing inclined horizontally rolling shutter-type door with fusible-link. Match depository
size and constmction, and provide "B" label constmction.
1. Size: 24" x 30" (610mm x 762mm).
C. Discharge Door Assemblies;
1. Horizontal Discharge: Provide top-hinged, self-closing, hopper door with self-
latching hardware; floor leg-brace designed to absorb impact of material dropping
against depository.
D. Access Door Assemblies; Manufacttarer's standard ASTM A240/A240M, Type 302/304
stainless-steel doors; with frame suitable for enclosing chase constmction; and in satin or
No. 4 directional polish finish.
BOOK DEPOSITORIES
115116-2
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
2.4 FABRICATION
A. General; Factory-assemble depositories to greatest extent practical with continuously
welded or lock-seamed joints without bolts, rivets, or clips projecting on depository
interior. Include intake-door assemblies and depository-support frames at each floor, and
depository expansion joints between each support point.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install depositories, plumb, without offsets or obstmctions that might prevent materials
from free falling within depositories.
B. Intake and Discharge Doors: Interface door units with throat sections of depositories for
safe, snag-resistant, sanitary depositing of materials in depositories by users.
3.2 TESTING
A. Test depository components after installation. Operate doors, locks, and interlock systems
to demonstrate that hardware is adjusted and electrical wiring is connected cortectly.
Complete test operations before installing chase enclosures.
3.3 CLEANING
A. After completing chase enclosure, clean exposed surfaces of depository system's
components. Do not remove labels of independent testing and inspecting agencies.
B. Constmction Waste Management; Manage constmction waste in accordance with
provisions of Section 01524 Constmction Waste Management.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Demonstrate use of depository and equipment to Owner's personnel.
END OF SECTION 115116
BOOK DEPOSITORIES
115116-3
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
BOOK DEPOSITORIES
115116-4
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Bid Set-April 10, 2015
SECTION 122413 - ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Manual roller shades for Staff Offices and west-facing windows in the Children's Area.
B. Blackout shades and motorized operators (two shades per window type) in Community
Meeting Room.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Division 26 Sections for electrical service and connections for motor operators, controls,
limit switches, and other powered devices and for system disconnect switches for motorized
shade operation.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data; For each type of product indicated. Include styles, material descriptions,
constmction details, dimensions of individual components and profiles, features, finishes,
and operating instmctions.
1. Motorized Shade Operators: Include operating instmctions.
2. Motors: Show nameplate data, ratings, characteristics, and mounting arrangements.
B. Shop Drawings: Show location and extent of roller shades. Include elevations, sections,
details, and dimensions not shown in Product Data. Show installation details, mountings,
attachments to other work, operational clearances, and relationship to adjoining work.
1. Motorized Shade Operators: Show locations and details for installing operator
components, switches, and controls. Indicate motor size, electrical characteristics,
drive arrangement, mounting, and grounding provisions.
2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, system, and control wiring.
C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following
items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items
involved;
1. Ceiling suspension system members and attachment to building stmcture.
2. Ceiling-mounted or penetrating items including light fixtures, air outlets and inlets,
speakers, sprinklers, recessed shades, and special moldings at walls, column
penettations, and other junctures of acoustical ceilings with adjoining constmction.
3. Shade mounting assembly and attachment.
4. Size and location of access to shade operator, motors, and adjustable components.
5. Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch = 1 foot (1:48).
ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
122413-1
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
D. Samples for Verification;
1. Complete, full-size operating unit not less than 16 inches (400 mm) wide for each
type of roller shade indicated.
2. For the following products;
a. Shade Material: Not less than 12-inch- (300-mm-) square section of fabric,
from dye lot used for the Work, with specified treatments applied. Show
complete pattem repeat. Mark top and face of material.
E. Sustainabiiity Submittals:
1. Product Data for each material, including its source, cost, and the fraction by weight
that is considered regional and that has been exttacted, harvested, or recovered, as
well as manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site.
2. Product Data for each product to be used as proof that each product meets the
requirements of the GREENGUARD Environmental Instittite's GREENGUARD
certification.
a. Include printed statement of VOC content and chemical components.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Certificates; For each type of roller shade, signed by product manufacturer.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Service; Provide as a separate bid amount the cost for annual maintenance
contract providing service 'on demand' for repair and maintenance as may be generally
anticipated for the conditions of this project.
B. Maintenance Data; For roller shades to include in maintenance manuals. Include the
following:
1. Methods for maintaining roller shades and finishes.
2. Precautions about cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to
fabrics, finishes, and performance.
3. Operating hardware.
4. Motorized shade operators.
C. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Fumish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Provide addhional 5 percent of the total length of qualified stainless steel chain
required on the project, not to exceed the quantity of one 500'-0" spool.
2. Provide additional 5 percent of each type of shade mounting hardware or brackets,
but not less than one pair of each type.
3. Provide a quantity of replacement shade bands completely fabricated and ready to
attach to roller tubes equal to 5 percent of the total number of shade bands of each
fabric and each color in the largest size required for each of those fabrics.
ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
122413-2
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbad Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set-April 10, 2015
B. Clearly label all spare components and supply to Owner upon completion in original
packaging for storage on site by Owner.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.
B. Source Limitations; Obtain roller shades through one source from a single manufacturer.
C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide roller shade band materials with the fire-test-
response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test
method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction:
1. Flame-Resistance Ratings; Passes NFPA 701.
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and
marked for intended use.
E. Product Standard; Provide roller shades complying with WCMA A 100.1.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver shades in factory packages, marked with manufacturer and product name, fire-test-
response characteristics, and location of installation using same designations indicated on
Drawings and in a window treatment schedule.
1.10 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install roller shades until constmction and wet and dirty
finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and ambient temperature and
humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its
intended use.
B. Field Measurements: Where roller shades are indicated to fit to other constmction, verify
dimensions of other constmction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operable glazed units' operation
hardware throughout the entire operating range. Notify Architect of discrepancies.
Coordinate fabrication schedule with constmction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Special Wartanty; Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of roller shade system that do not comply with requirements or that fail
in materials, fabrication, or installation within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. All operating parts except for the bead chain.
b. Shade cloth.
2. Warranty Period: 25 years from date of Substantial Completion.
ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
122413-3
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Librory
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
B. In the event of a warranted product failure, the Shade Contractor shall, at no additional cost
to the Owner, facilitate acquisition and delivery of all necessary replacement components to
the Owner
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUSTAINABILITY MATERL\L REQUIREMENTS, GENERAL
A. Local/Regional Materials: Give preference to manufacturer's whose facilities are within a
500 mile radius of the project site. Also give preference to materials that are harvested,
extracted, mined, quarried, etc. within a 500 mile radius of the project site.
B. Shade Materials: Provide only roller window shade materials that are GREENGUARD
Certified.
2.2 STANDARD ROLLER SHADES
A. Basis-of-Design Product; Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
listed below or a comparable product by one of the following:
1. MechoShade Systems, Inc.
2. Lutron Shading Solutions by VIMCO.
B. Shade Band Material; PVC-free polyester shades, and as follows;
1. Thickness: Single, non-raveling 0.030-inch (0.762mm) vinyl fabric woven from
0.018-inch diameter extmded vinyl yam comprised of 21 percent polyester and 79
percent reinforced vinyl.
2. Color(s): To be selected from manufacturer's full range of colors.
3. Bottom Hem; Straight.
4. Provide shades meeting GREENGUARD certification requirements.
5. Openness:
a. At Manual Rollers and Shade Housing Pockets; 1% openness factor.
b. At motorized Blackout System:
1) Standard Shade: 1% openness factor.
2) Blackout Shade; Opaque, fully light blocking.
C. Rollers; Electrogalvanized or epoxy primed steel or extmded-aluminum tube of diameter
and wall thickness required to support and fit intemal components of operating system and
the weight and width of shade band material without sagging; designed to be easily
removable from support brackets; with manufacturer's standard method for attaching shade
material. Provide capacity for one roller shade band per roller, unless otherwise indicated
on Drawings.
D. Direction of Roll; Regular, from back of roller.
E. Mounting Brackets: Galvanized or zinc-plated steel Fascia end caps, fabricated from steel
finished to match fascia or headbox.
F. Pocket-Style Exposed Headbox; U-shaped, formed-steel sheet or extmded aluminum; long
edges retumed or rolled; with a bottom cover consisting of slot opening of minimum
ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
122413-4
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Library
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
dimension to allow lowering and raising of shade and a removable or an openable,
continuous metal access panel concealing shade roller, brackets, and operating hardware
and operators within.
1. Fascia: L-shaped, formed-steel sheet or extmded aluminum; long edges retumed or
rolled; continuous panel concealing front and bottom of shade roller, brackets, and
operating hardware and operators; length as indicated on Drawings; removable
design for access.
2. Top/Back Cover: L-shaped; material and finish to match fascia; combining with
fascia and end caps to form a six-sided headbox enclosure sized to fit shade roller and
operating hardware inside.
G. Bottom Bar: Steel or extmded aluminum, with plastic or metal capped ends. Provide
concealed, by pocket of shade material, intemal-type bottom bar with concealed weight bar
as required for smooth, properly balanced shade operation.
2.3 AUDIOVISUAL ROLLER SHADES
A. Audiovisual Light-Blocking Shades: Designed for eliminating all visible light gaps when
shades are fully closed; fabricated from blackout shade band material with pocket and
bottom bar extended and formed for light-tight joints among shade components and
between shade components and adjacent constmction.
1. Side Channels, Sill Channel or Angle, and Perimeter Seals: Manufacturer's standard
design for eliminating light gaps when shades are closed.
2. Shade Band Retention System: Manufacturer's standard design for guiding shade
band material through range of travel and holding shade band flat with edges of
material within side channels.
B. Hold-Down Brackets and Hooks or Pins: Manufacturer's standard for anchoring roller
shade bottom in place and keeping shade band material taut.
C. Hold-Down Brackets and Hooks or Pins and Side Channels: Manufacturer's standard for
fixing shade in place, keeping shade band material taut, and reducing light gaps when
shades are closed.
2.4 MANUALLY-OPERATED SHADES
A. Mounting; Recessed in ceiling pocket, mounting permitting easy removal and replacement
without damaging roller shade or adjacent surfaces and finishes.
B. Shade Operation: Manual; with continuous-loop bead-chain, clutch, and cord tensioner and
bracket lift operator.
1. Pull: Manufacturer's standard pole engaged pull.
2. Position of Clutch Operator: Left or Right side of roller, as determined by hand of
user facing shade from inside, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
3. Clutch; Capacity to lift size and weight of shade; sized to fit roller or provide
adaptor.
4. Lift-Assist Mechanism: Manufacturer's standard spring assist for balancing roller
shade weight and lifting heavy roller shades.
5. Loop Length: Full length of roller shade Length required to make operation
convenient from floor level.
ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
122413-5
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Corlsbod Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
6. Bead Chain: #10 qualified stainless steel chain rated to 90 lb. (41 kg) minimum
breaking strength.
7. Operating Function; Stop and hold shade at any poshion in ascending or descending
travel.
2.5 SHADE MOTOR DRIVE SYSTEM
A. Shade Motors:
1. Tubular, asynchronous (non-synchronous) motors, with built-in reversible capacitor
operating at 1 lOv AC (60hz), single phase, temperature Class A, thermally protected,
totally enclosed, maintenance free with line voltage power supply equipped with
locking disconnect plug assembly fiimished with each motor.
2. Conceal motors inside shade roller tube.
3. Maximum current draw for each shade motor of 2.3 amps.
4. Use motors rated at the same nominal speed for all shades in the same room.
B. Total hanging weight of shade band shall not exceed 80 percent of the rated lifting capacity
of the shade motor and tube assembly.
2.6 MOTOR CONTROL SYSTEMS
A. IQ/MLC: Specifications and design of shade motors and motor control system are based on
the IQ/MLC motor logic control system manufactured by MechoShade Systems, Inc. Other
systems may be acceptable provide that all of the following performance capabilities are
provided. Motor logic control systems not in complete compliance with these performance
criteria shall not be accepted as equal systems.
2.7 MOTOR CONTROL SYSTEM;
A. Provide power to each shade motor via individual 3 conductor line voltage circuits
connecting each motor to the relay based motor logic controllers (IQ/MLC).
B. Control system components shall provide appropriate (spike and brown out) over-current
protection (+/- 10 percent of line voltage) for each ofthe four individual motor circuits and
shall be rated by UL or ETL as a recognized component of this system and tested as an
integrated system.
C. Motor control system shall allow each group of four shade motors in any combination to be
controlled by each of four local switch ports, with up to fourteen possible "sub-group"
combinations via local 3 button wall switches and all at once via a master 3 button switch.
System shall allow for overlapping switch combinations from two or more local switches.
D. Multiple "sub-groups" from different IQ/MLC control components shall be capable of being
combined to form "groups" operated by a single 3 button wall switch, from either the master
port or in series from a local switch port.
E. Each shade motor shall be accessible (for control purposes) from up to four local switches
and one master switch.
ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
122413-6
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbad Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
F. Control system shall allow for automatic alignment of shade hem bars in stopped position at
25 percent, 50 percent, and 75 percent of opening heights, and up to three user-defined
intermediate stopping positions in addhion to all up / all down, regardless of shade height,
for a total of five positions. Control system shall allow shades to be stopped at any point in
the opening height noting that shades may not be in alignment at these non-defined
poshions).
G. Control system shall have two standard operating modes; Normal mode allowing the shades
to be stopped anywhere in the window's opening height and uniform mode, allowing the
shades to only be stopped at the predefined intermediate stop positions. Both modes shall
allow for all up / all down positioning.
H. Control system components shall allow for interface with both audiovisual system
components and building fire and life safety system via a dry contact terminal block.
I. Control system components shall allow for interface with extemal analog input control
devices such as solar activated controllers, 24 hour timers, and similar items; via a dry
contact terminal block.
J. Reconfiguration of switch groups shall not require rewiring of the hardwired line voltage
motor power supply wiring, or the low voltage conttol wiring. Reconfiguration of switch
groups shall be accomplished within the motor control device (IQ/MLC).
2.8 WALL SWITCHES:
A. Three-button architectural flush mounted switches with metal cover plate and no exposed
fasteners.
B. Connect local wall switches to control system components via low voltage (12V DC) 4-
conductor modular cable equipped with RJ-11 type connectors supplied, installed and
certified under Division 26 - Electtical.
C. Connect master wall switches to control system components via low voltage (12V DC) 6-
conductor modular cable equipped with RJ-I2 type connectors supplied, installed and
certified under Division 26 - Electrical.
2.9 ROLLER SHADE FABRICATION
A. Product Description: Roller shade consisting of a roller, a means of supporting the roller, a
flexible sheet or band of material carried by the roller, a means of attaching the material to
the roller, a bottom bar, and an operating mechanism that lifts and lowers the shade.
B. Concealed Components: Noncorrodible or corrosion-resistant-coated materials.
1. Lifting Mechanism; With permanently lubricated moving parts.
C. Unit Sizes: Obtain units fabricated in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows,
measured at 74 deg F (23 deg C);
ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
122413-7
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Carlsbod Controct 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Plonning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
D. Installation Brackets: Designed for easy removal and reinstallation of shade, for supporting
roller, and operating hardware and for hardware position and shade mounting method
indicated.
E. Installation Fasteners; No fewer than two fasteners per bracket, fabricated from metal
noncorrosive to shade hardware and adjoining constmction; type designed for securing to
supporting substtate; and supporting shades and accessories under conditions of normal use.
F. Color-Coated Finish: For metal components exposed to view, apply manufacturer's
standard baked finish complying with manufacturer's written instmctions for surface
preparation including pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.
1. Color: TBD.
G. Colors of Metal and Plastic Components Exposed to View; As selected by Architect from
manufacturer's full range, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Color; TBD.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMESfATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, accurate locations of
connections to building electrical system, and other conditions affecting performance.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 ROLLER SHADE INSTALLATION
A. Install roller shades level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units according to
manufacturer's written instmctions, and located so shade band is not closer than 2 inches
(50 mm) to interior face of glass. Allow clearances for window operation hardware.
B. Connections: Connect motorized operators to building electrical system.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding
or malfunction throughout entire operational range.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Constmction Waste Management; Manage constmction waste in accordance with
provisions of Section 01524 Constmction Waste Management.
B. Clean roller shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written
instmctions.
ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
122413-8
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbod Controct 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set-April 10, 2015
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel
to adjust, operate, and maintain roller shades. Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration
and Training."
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer
and Installer that ensure that roller shades are without damage or deterioration at time of
Substantial Completion.
B. Replace damaged roller shades that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by Architect,
before time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 122413
ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
122413-9
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbod Georgina Cole Library
City of Corlsbad Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
122413-10
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
SECTION 139300 - FIRE DETECTION/FM-200 FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. This specification outlines the requirements for a "Total Flood" Clean Agent Fire
Suppression System whh automatic detection and control. The work described in this
specification includes all engineering, labor, materials, equipment and service
necessary, and required, to complete and test the suppression system.
1.2 II.APPLICABLE STANDARDS AND PUBLICATIONS
A. The design, equipment, installation, testing and maintenance of the Clean Agent
Suppression System shall be in accordance with the applicable requirements setforth
in the latest edition ofthe following codes and standards:
1. National Fire Protection Association (NFP Standards:
a. NFPA 2001 Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems
b. NFPA 70 National Electric Code
c. NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code
d. Factory Mutual Systems (FM) Publications
e. Factory Mutual Approval Guide
f. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Publication
g. Fire Protection Equipment Directory whh quarterly supplements
1.3 REQUIREMENTS
A. The Suppression System installation shall be made in accordance wrth the drawings,
specifications, and applicable standards. Should a conflict occur between the
drawings and specifications, the specifications shall prevail.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. A.MANUFACTURER
FIRE DETECTION/FM-200 FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
139300 - 1
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbad Georgina Cole Library
City of Carlsbad Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
1. The manufacturer of the suppression system hardware and detection
components shall be ISO 9001 registered.
2. The name of the manufacturer shall appear on all major components.
3. All devices, components, and equipment shall be the products of the same
manufacturer, or supplied by the same manufacturer.
4. All devices, components, and equipment shall be new, standard products of
the manufacturer's latest design and suitable to perform the functions
intended.
5. All devices and equipment shall be UL listed and/or FM approved.
B. INSTALLER
C. The installing contractor shall be trained by the supplier to design, install, test, and
maintain fire suppression systems.
D. When possible, the installing contractor shall employ a NICET certified special hazard
designer, Level 11 or above, who will be responsible for this project.
E. The installing contractor shall be an experienced firm regularly engaged in the
installation of automatic clean agent, or similar, fire suppression systems, in strict
accordance wrth all applicable codes and standards.
F. The installing contractor must have a minimum of five (5) years experience in the
design, installation, and testing, of clean agent, or similar fire suppression systems.
G. The installing contractor shall maintain, or have access to, a clean agent recharging
station. The installing contractor shall provide proof of his ability to recharge the
largest clean agent system wrthin 24 hours after a discharge. Include the amount of
bulk agent storage available.
H. The installing contractor shall be an authorized stocking distributor of the clean agent
system equipment so that immediate replacement parts are available from
inventory.
I. The installing contractor shall show proof of emergency service available on a
twenty-four-hour-seven-day-a-week basis.
J. CSUBMITTALS
FIRE DETECTION/FM-200 FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
139300 - 2
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research -I- Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
1. The installing contractor shall submrt the following design information and
drawings for approval prior to starting work on this project:
a. Field installation layout drawings having a scale of not less than 1/8 in. =
1 ft.- 0 in. or 1:100 detailing the location of all agent storage tanks,
nozzles, pipe runs, including pipe sizes and lengths, control panel(s),
detectors, manual pull stations, abort stations, audible and visual
alarms, etc.
b. Auxiliary details and information such as maintenance panels, door
holders, special sealing requirements, and equipment shutdown.
c. Separate layouts, or drawings, shall be provided for each level, (i.e.;
room, sub floor, and above ceilin and for mechanical and electrical work.
d. Electrical layout drawings shall show the location of all devices and
include point-to-point condurt runs and a description of the method(s)
used for detector mounting.
e. Provide an internal control panel wiring diagram which shall include
power supply requirements and field wiring termination points.
f. Separate drawing providing symbol legend and identifying all symbols
used.
g. Annunciator wiring schematics and dimensioned display panel
illustration shall be provided. (Optional device.)
h. Complete hydraulic flow calculations, from a UL listed computer
program, shall be provided for all engineered clean agent systems.
Calculation sheet(s) must include the manufacturer's name and UL
listing number for verification. The individual sections of pipe and each
fitting to be used, as shown on the isometrics, must be identified and
included in the calculation. Total agent discharge time must be shown
and detailed by zone.
i. Provide calculations for the battery stand-by power supply, taking into
consideration the power requirements of all alarms, inrtiating devices,
and auxiliary components under full load condrtions.
j. A complete sequence of operation shall be submitted detailing all alarm
devices, shutdown functions, remote signaling, damper operation, time
delay, and agent discharge for each zone or system.
FIRE DETECTION/FM-200 FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
139300 - 3
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbad Georgina Cole Library
City of Carlsbad Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
2. Submit drawings, calculations and system component sheets for approval to
the local fire prevention agency, owner's insurance underwriter, and all other
authorrties having jurisdicfion before starting installation. Submit approved
plans to the architect/engineer for record.
PART 2 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
A. The system shall be a Total Flood FM-200 Fire Suppression System supplied by PYRO-
CHEM.
B. The system shall provide a FM-200 minimum design concentration of 7% by volume
for Class A hazards and a minimum of 2% by volume for Class C hazards <480 volts, in
all areas and/or protected spaces, at the minimum anticipated temperature wrthin
the protected area. System design shall not exceed 10% for normally occupied
spaces, adjusted for maximum space temperature anticipated, wrth provisions for
room evacuation before agent release.
C. The system shall be complete in all ways. It shall include a mechanical and electrical
installation, all detection and control equipment, agent storage containers, FM-200
agent, discharge nozzles, pipe and fittings, manual release and abort stafions, audible
and visual alarm devices, auxiliary devices and controls, shutdowns, alarm interface,
advisory signs, functional checkout and testing, training and any other operations
necessary for a functional UL listed FM-200 Clean Agent suppression system.
D. Provide two (2) inspections during the first year of service: Inspections shall be made
at 6-month intervals commencing when the system is first placed into normal service.
E. The general contractor shall be responsible for sealing and securing the protected
spaces against agent loss and/or leakage during the 10-minute "hold" period.
F. The system(s) shall be actuated by photoelectric detectors installed for maximum
area coverage of 250 sq. ft. (22 m) per detector, in all protected spaces. If the airflow
is one air change per minute, photoelectric detectors only shall be installed for
maximum area coverage of 125 sq. ft. (16 m) per detector. (Ref NFPA No. 7)
G. Detectors shall be Cross-Zoned detection requiring two detectors to be in alarm
before release.
FIRE DETECTION/FM-200 FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
139300-4
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgino Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
H. Automatic operation of each protected area shall be as follows:
1. Actuation of one (1) detector, within the system, shall:
a. Illuminate the "ALARM" lamp on the control panel face.
b. Energize an alarm bell.
c. Transfer auxiliary contacts, which can perform auxiliary system functions
such as: Operate door holder/closures on access doors; Transmit a signal
to a fire alarm system; Shutdown HVAC equipment.
d. Light an individual lamp on an optional annunciator.
2. Actuation of a 2nd detector, wrthin the system, shall:
a. Illuminate the "PRE-DISCHARGE" lamp on the control panel face.
b. Energize a pre-discharge horn/strobe device.
c. Shut down the HVAC system and/or close dampers.
d. Start time-delay sequence (not to exceed 60 seconds).
e. System abort sequence is enabled at this fime.
f. Light an individual lamp on an optional annunciator.
3. After completion of the time-delay sequence, the FM-200 Clean Agent system
shall discharge and the following shall occur:
a. Illuminate a "SYSTEM FIRED" lamp on the control panel face.
b. Shutdown of all power to high-voltage equipment.
c. Energize a visual indicator(s) outside the hazard in which the discharge
occurred.
d. Energize a "System Fired" audible device. (Optional)
4. The system shall be capable of being actuated by manual discharge devices
located at each hazard exrt. Operafion of a manual device shall duplicate the
sequence description above except that the time delay and abort functions
shall be bypassed. The manual discharge station shall be of the electrical
actuation type and shall be supervised at the main control panel.
FIRE DETECTION/FM-200 FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
139300 - 5
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbad Georgina Cole Library
City of Carlsbad Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
2.2 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1. The FM-200 Clean Agent system materials and equipment shall be standard
products of the supplier's latest design and suitable to perform all functions
intended. When one or more pieces of equipment must perform the same
function(s), they shall be duplicates produced by one manufacturer.
2. All devices and equipment shall be U.L Listed and/or FM approved.
B. FM-200 AGENT STORAGE AND DISTRIBUTION
1. Systems shall be designed in accordance wrth the manufacturer's guidelines.
2. Each supply shall be located wrthin the hazard area, or as near as possible, to
reduce the amount of pipe and fittings required to install the system.
3. The clean agent shall be stored in PYRO-CHEM FM-200 Clean Agent storage
tanks. Tanks shall be super-pressurized wrth dry nitrogen to an operating
pressure of 360 psi @ 70 °F (28 bar at 21 °. Tanks shall be of high-strength low
alloy steel construction and conforming to NFPA 200
4. Tank (master) shall be actuated by either a resettable electric actuator or by
pneumatic means from a nrtrogen cartridge located in the releasing device.
Explosive devices shall not be permitted.
5. Tank shall have a pressure gauge and low pressure switch to provide visual and
electrical supervision of the container pressure. The low-pressure switch shall
be wired to the control panel to provide audible and visual "Trouble" alarms in
the event the container pressure drops below 290 psi (20 bar). The pressure
gauge shall be color coded to provide an easy, visual indication of container
pressure.
6. Tank shall have a pressure relief provision that automatically operates before
the internal nominal pressure exceeds 730 psi (50 bar).
7. Engineered discharge nozzles shall be provided wrthin the manufacturer's
guidelines to distribute the FM-200 agent throughout the protected spaces.
The nozzles shall be designed to provide proper agent quantity and
distribution. Nozzles shall be available in 1/2 in. through 2 in. pipe sizes. Each
size shall be available in 180° and 360° distribution patterns.
FIRE DETECTION/FM-200 FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
139300 - 6
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
8. Distribution piping and fittings shall be installed in accordance wrth the
manufacturer's requirements, NFPA 2001, and approved piping standards and
guidelines. All distribution piping shall be installed by qualified individuals
using accepted practices and quality procedures. All piping shall be adequately
supported and anchored at all directional changes and nozzle locations.
a. All piping shall be reamed, blown clear and swabbed with suitable
solvents to remove burrs, mill varnish and cutting oils before assembly.
b. All pipe threads shall be sealed wrth Teflon tape pipe sealant applied to
the male thread only.
C. CONTROL PANEL
1. The control panel shall be an AUTOPULSE releasing panel supplied by PYRO-
CHEM.
2. The detection control system and rts components shall be UL listed and FM
approved for use as a local flre alarm system with releasing device service.
3. The control system shall perform all functions necessary to operate the system
detection, actuation, and auxiliary functions.
4. The control system shall include battery standby power to support 24 hours in
standby and 5 minutes in alarm.
5. The control system shall be microprocessor based, utilizing a distributed
processing concept. A single microprocessor failure shall not impact operation
of additional modules in the system.
6. The control system shall supply integrated 0 amp (minimum) power supply
circurtry.
7. Each control system shall contain four (4) inrtiating circuits:
a. Each circurt shall be capable of Class A (Style A or Class B (Style A
operation.
b. Circurt shall be capable of monitoring contact devices configured for
manual release, manual alarm, system abort, trouble input or auxiliary
(non-fir input.
8. Control system shall contain release circuits for activation of a fire suppression
system:
FIRE DETECTION/FM-200 FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
139300 - 7
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbad Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Carlsbad Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
a. Circurt shall be capable of Class B (Style Y) operation.
b. Circurt shall be rated for a minimum of 5 amp @ 24 VDC.
9. Control system shall contain two (2) indicating appliance circuits for
annunciation:
a. Circurt shall be capable of Class A (Style A or Class B (Style Y) operation.
b. Circurt shall be rated for a minimum of 5 amp @ 24 VDC.
10. Control system shall provide an auxiliary power supply rated for 2 amps @ 24
VDC.
11. IControl system shall provide two (2) SPST relays: one for common alarm and
one for common trouble. Four (4) addrtional programmable relays can be
added to each control system by adding a relay module.
D. DETECTORS
1. The detectors shall be spaced and installed in accordance wrth the
manufacturer's specifications and the guidelines of NFPA 7
2. The photoelectric detector shall be a PYRO-CHEM model.
E. MANUAL RELEASE (Electric)
1. The electric manual release shall be a dual action device which provides a
means of manually discharging the suppression system when used in
conjuncfion wrth the detection system.
2. The manual release shall be a PYRO-CHEM model.
3. The manual release or manual pull station shall be a dual action device
requiring two distinct operations to inrtiate a system actuation.
4. Manual actuation shall bypass the time delay and abort functions and shall
cause all release and shutdown devices to operate in the same manner as if
the system had operated automatically.
5. Manual release shall be located at each exrt from the protected hazard.
F. AUDIBLE and VISUAL ALARMS
FIRE DETECTION/FM-200 FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
139300 - 8
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Carlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
1. Alarm audible and visual signal devices shall operate from the control panel.
2. The alarm bell, alarm horn, and horn strobe devices shall be a PYRO-CHEM
model.
3. The visual alarm unit shall be a PYRO-CHEM strobe device.
4. A strobe device shall be placed outside, and above, each exrt door from the
protected space. Provide an advisory sign at each light location.
G. CAUTION and ADVISORY SIGNS
1. Signs shall be provided to comply wrth NFPA 2001 and the recommendations
ofthe FM-200 equipment provider.
a. Entrance sign: (1) required at each entrance to a protected space.
b. Manual discharge sign: (1) required at each manual release station.
c. Flashing light sign: (1) required at each flashing light over each exrt from
a protected space.
H. SYSTEM and CONTROL WIRING
1. All system wiring shall be furnished and installed by the contractor.
2. All wiring shall be installed in electrical metallic tubing (EMT), or condurt, and
must be installed and kept separate from all other building wiring.
3. All system components shall be securely supported independent of the wiring.
Runs of condurt and wiring shall be straight, neatly arranged, properly
supported, and installed parallel and perpendicular to walls and partrtions.
4. The sizes of the conductors shall be those specified by the manufacturer.
Color-coded wire shall be used. All wires shall be tagged at all junction points
and shall be free from shorts, earth connections (unless so noted on the
system drawings), and crosses between conductors. Final terminations
between the control panel and the system field wiring shall be made under the
direct supervision of a factory-trained representative.
5. All wiring shall be installed by qualified individuals, in a neat and workmanlike
manner, to conform to the National Electrical Code, Article 725 and Article
760, except as otherwise permitted for limited energy circuits, as described in
NFPA 7 Wiring installation shall meet all local, state, province, and/or country
codes.
FIRE DETECTION/FM-200 FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
139300 - 9
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbad Georgina Cole Library
City of Carlsbad Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
6. The complete system electrical installation and all auxiliary components shall
be connected to earth ground in accordance wrth the National Electrical Code.
PART 3 TESTING AND DOCUMENTATION
3.1 SYSTEM INSPECTION AND CHECKOUT
A. After the system installation has been completed, the entire system shall be checked
out, inspected, and functionally tested by qualified, trained personnel, in accordance
wrth the manufacturer's recommended procedures and NFPA standards.
1. Containers and distribution piping shall be checked for proper mounting and
installation.
2. All electrical wiring shall be tested for proper connection, continuity and
resistance to earth.
3. The complete system shall be functionally tested, in the presence of the owner
or his representative, and all functions, including system and equipment
interlocks, must be operational at least five (5) days prior to the final
acceptance tests.
4. Each detector shall be tested in accordance wrth the manufacturer's
recommended procedures and test values recorded.
5. All system and equipment interlocks, such as door release devices, audible and
visual devices, equipment shutdowns, local and remote alarms, etc. shall
function as required and designed.
6. Control panel circurt shall be tested for trouble by inducing a trouble condrtion
into the system.
3.2 TRAINING REQUIREMENTS
A. Prior to final acceptance, the installing contractor shall provide operational training
to each shift of the owner's personnel. Each training session shall include control
panel operation, manual and (optional) abort functions, trouble procedures,
supervisory procedures, auxiliary functions and emergency procedures.
FIRE DETECTION/FM-200 FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
139300 - 10
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrary
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbod Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
3.3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
A. Prior to final acceptance, the installing contractor shall provide four (4) complete
operation and maintenance instruction manuals to the owner. All aspects of system
operation and maintenance shall be detailed, including piping isometrics, wiring
diagrams of all circuits, a written description of the system design, sequence of
operafion and drawing(s) illustrating control logic and equipment used in the system.
Checklists and procedures for emergency situations, troubleshooting techniques,
maintenance operations and procedures shall be included in the manual.
3.4 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
A. Upon completion of each system, the installing contractor shall provide four (4)
copies of system "AS-Built" drawings to the owner. The drawings shall show actual
installation details including all equipment locations (ie., control panel(s), agent
container(s), detectors, alarms, manual pull station(s) and abort switch(s), etc.), as
well as piping and condurt routing details. Show all room or facilities modifications,
including door and/or damper installations completed. One (1) copy of reproducible
engineering drawings shall be provided reflecting all actual installation details.
3.5 ACCEPTANCE TEST
A. At the fime "AS-Buirt" drawings and maintenance/operations manuals are submitted,
the installing contractor shall submrt a "Test Plan" describing procedures to be used
to test the control system(s). The Test Plan shall include a step-by-step description of
all tests to be performed and shall indicate the type and location of test apparatus to
be employed. The tests shall demonstrate that the operational and installation
requirements of this specification have been met. All tests shall be conducted in the
presence of the owner and shall not be conducted unfil the Test Plan has been
approved.
B. The tests shall demonstrate that the entire control system functions as designed and
intended. All circuits shall be tested: automatic actuation and manual actuation,
HVAC and power shutdowns, audible and visual alarm devices, and manual override
of abort functions. Supervision of all panel circuits, including AC power and battery
power supplies, shall be tested and qualified.
C. A room pressurization test shall be conducted in each protected space to determine
the presence of openings, which would affect the agent concentration levels. The
test(s) shall be conducted using the Retro-Tec Corp. Door Fan system, or equivalent,
with integrated computer program. All testing shall be in accordance with NFPA 200
FIRE DETECTION/FM-200 FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
139300 - 11
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Carlsbad Georgina Cole Ubrary
City of Carlsbad Contract 40201 Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc.
Bid Set - April 10, 2015 Group 4 Project No. 14449-01
D. If room pressurization testing indicates that openings exist which would result in
leaks and/or loss of the extinguishing agent, the installing contractor shall be
responsible for coordinating the proper sealing of the protected space(s) by the
general contractor or his sub-contractor or agent. The general contractor shall be
responsible for adequately sealing all protected space(s) against agent loss or
leakage. The installing contractor shall inspect all work to ascertain that the
protected space(s) have been adequately and properly sealed. If the first room
pressurization test is not successful, in accordance wrth these specifications, the
installing contractor shall direct the general contractor to determine, and correct, the
cause of the test failure. The installing contractor shall conduct additional room
pressurization tests, at no addrtional cost to the owner, until a successful test is
obtained. Copies of successful test results shall be submitted to the owner for his
record. Upon acceptance by the owner, the completed system(s) shall be placed into
service.
3.6 SYSTEM INSPECTIONS
A. During the one-year warranty period, the installing contractor shall provide two (2)
inspections of each system installed under this contract. The first inspection shall be
at the six-month interval, and the second inspection at the 12-month interval.
Inspections shall be conducted in accordance with the manufacturer's guidelines and
the recommendations of NFPA 200
B. Documents certifying satisfactory system(s) inspection shall be submitted to the
owner upon completion of each inspection.
END OF SECTION 139300
FIRE DETECTION/FM-200 FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
139300 - 12
CITY OF CARLSBAD - Corlsbod Georgina Cole Ubrory
Group 4 Architecture Research + Planning, Inc. City of Corlsbad Contract 40201
Group 4 Project No. 14449-01 Bid Set - April 10, 2015
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
FIRE DETECTION/FM-200 FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
139300 - 13